Israel in God’s Economy (1) – An Introduction

 

As the day of the Lord’s second coming approaches, it is important to have a basic understanding of the place of Israel in God’s economy. Since the re-establishment of the nation of Israel in 1948, the Middle East generally and Israel particularly have become increasingly central to world events. This development is in accord with biblical prophecies. In recent times, rampant anti-Semitism has re-emerged and is even promoted on some college campuses. Looking at the outward situation in the world is troubling. Events seem chaotic and evoke our sympathy for those who are undergoing suffering. What should be our attitude and response? The answer to those questions lies in the Bible. This series of articles examines the Scriptures regarding Israel along several lines. It is important to make several observations from the outset. These articles:

  1. Help readers understand events related to Israel from the perspective of God’s ways in His move to carry out His economy;
  2. Do not assess matters in terms of right and wrong, as doing so inevitably leads to dissension, strife, and ultimately division;
  3. Do not delve into any issues of social justice;
  4. Do not assess the policies of any government or any political viewpoints, though we acknowledge God’s sovereignty in those that He establishes as rulers (Rom. 13:1; Titus 3:1; 1 Pet. 2:14); and
  5. Present the particular and special role of Israel in God’s economy.

To adopt a humanistic view of world events is a mistake. Our own sentiments and sensibilities may lead us astray, even as far as opposing what God is doing in our age and time (Acts 5:39). Examining human history, as Brother Lee did in The World Situation and God’s Move, affirms the proposition that God moves in human history in hidden and mysterious ways, as a brief survey of key developments in His move shows.  In that book Brother Lee points out that although the Old Testament prophesied that the Lord Jesus would be crucified (Deut. 21:22-23; cf. Gal. 3:13), crucifixion was not yet a form of execution of criminals until the ascendancy of the Roman Empire (10). In this way, the Roman Empire, an ungodly human enterprise, was used by God to bring about the fulfillment of the Old Testament prophecy regarding the means of the Lord’s redemptive death. Moreover, the Roman Empire brought to its subject nations a common language, one ruling power, an unprecedented road system, and a relatively stable social order, all of which happened under God’s sovereignty to facilitate the early spread of the gospel (11; see Acts 17:26; Psalm 74:17).

Consider also the beginning of the Lord’s recovery with the Reformation. It coincided with the invention of the printing press, which the Reformers used to print Bibles and tracts in the common languages. This enabled them to both spread the gospel and to defend and confirm the truth of justification by faith. Moreover, the political situation among the German lands, which lacked a strong national government, afforded the Reformers greater freedom to teach and practice what they saw in the Bible and shielded them from the consuming persecutions that had largely wiped out their predecessors. The defeat of the Spanish Armada by a much smaller British fleet ushered in the global ascendancy of the British Empire, which was much used for the spread of the gospel through missionary work to various parts of the world (14, 17).

Recognizing God’s move in human history does not mean endorsing as righteous all of the actions that nations have taken. Both the Roman and British Empires were imperialist powers and did many unrighteous things. Nevertheless, their utility in God’s hand is undeniable. For example, Brother Lee commented:

Imperialism is the policy and practice of maintaining an empire through the conquest and domination of weaker countries. Politically speaking, imperialism is evil and should be condemned, but God is sovereign. Imperialism was used by the divine hand to spread the gospel. (The Satanic Chaos in the Old Creation and the Divine Economy for the New Creation, 84) I hate imperialism, but I thank the Lord that He used imperialism to save me. Without imperialism, the gospel could never have gone to China and to my hometown there. (The Ten Great Critical “Ones for the Building Up of the Body of Christ, 23)

More immediately to our own time, the twentieth century witnessed a cataclysmic event with untold human suffering—the Second World War. Yet out of this war, three things happened that have greatly furthered the accomplishment of God’s goal in His economy—the nation of Israel was established after being nonexistent for almost 1900 years, the ministry and work in the Lord’s present recovery was thrust out of China, and the United States became the preeminent world power. The last two of these have enabled the spread of the Lord’s recovery to every inhabited continent.[1] The point here is that amidst the chaos and resultant sufferings that we see in human affairs God is still able to advance His purpose. He is not the cause of the chaos and the sufferings, but in a mysterious way He still operates everything according to the counsel of His will for the benefit of those who love Him and whom He has called according to His purpose (Eph. 1:11; Rom. 8:28).

The Bible shows us that, according to His plan, God has chosen two peoples. Ephesians 1:4 tells us that He chose the New Testament believers “before the foundation of the world.” However, the Bible is equally clear that God chose Abraham and his descendants to be His people among all the nations of the earth. We should not think that God’s purpose regarding Israel is over. In the New Testament the Apostle Paul, writing concerning Israel, reminds us that “the gracious gifts and the calling of God are irrevocable” (Rom. 11:29). It is important, therefore, for us to understand God’s economy with respect to both the church and the nation of Israel and how it applies to the present day.

The articles in this series will look at the special place that Israel occupies in God’s economy from a variety of angles, including:

May the Lord enlighten the saints in His recovery that we may give Him our full cooperation without distraction that He may consummate His move in this age for the building up of the Body of Christ and the preparation of His bride that He may come back to establish His kingdom on the earth.


[1]   This is not to minimize the contribution of the churches in the Far East from the beginning of the Lord’s move in His recovery in 1922 until today. Their labors have contributed greatly to the Lord’s interest and the spread of His testimony. However, Brother Lee spoke of the necessity of the release of the ministry in English for its global spread:

This is the age when the Lord will use the United States. If all these messages were given in the Chinese language, they would lie buried in that hard-to-understand language. As it is, they can be sent out all over the world as Life-studies, audiotapes and videotapes, and books. With the word sent out in spoken and written form, I believe it will not be in vain. The Lord will follow His word to accomplish His purpose. (The World Situation and God’s Move, 34)
Share:

Israel in God’s Economy (2) – God’s Calling, His Promises, and His Faithfulness

 

Understanding the role of the nation of Israel in God’s economy begins from knowing its origin. By the time of Genesis 11 the human race was in open rebellion against God. Then at the beginning of chapter 12, God called one man, Abraham, to have a new beginning. Genesis 12:1-3 records God’s calling of Abraham, in which God made certain promises to him. In verse 2 He told Abraham, “I will make of you a great nation,” and in verse 3 He said, “In you all the families of the earth will be blessed.” That nation is Israel. Then when Abraham arrived at the oak of Moreh, God appeared to him and said, “To your seed I will give this land” (v. 7m), that is, the land of Canaan that stretched before him.

Throughout the course of Abraham’s sojourning God repeated and expanded upon His promises to Abraham:

For all the land that you see I will give to you and to your seed forever. And I will make your seed as the dust of the earth, so that if a man can number the dust of the earth, then your seed can also be numbered. (13:15-16)
And He brought him outside and said, Look now toward the heavens, and count the stars, if you are able to count them. And He said to him, So shall your seed be. (15:5-7)
And I will establish My covenant between Me and you and your seed after you throughout their generations for an everlasting covenant, to be God to you and to your seed after you. And I will give to you and to your seed after you the land of your sojournings, all the land of Canaan, for an everlasting possession; and I will be their God. (17:7-8)
I will surely bless you and will greatly multiply your seed like the stars of the heavens and like the sand which is on the seashore; and your seed shall possess the gate of his enemies. (22:17)

God’s promises to Abraham have had and will have both a physical and spiritual fulfillment. The physical fulfillment is with the nation of Israel; the spiritual fulfillment is with the church. This is typified in the promise to Abraham in Genesis 22:17. There the stars of the heavens refer to the church, God’s heavenly people (Eph. 2:6; Phil. 3:20), while the sand on the seashore refers to Israel, God’s earthly people. In a physical sense the nation of Israel, brought forth through Abraham’s descendants, including Isaac, Jacob, and Jacob’s sons, are Abraham’s seed, and the land was and is to this day the land of Canaan. Moreover, it was through Israel that Christ was brought forth. Thus, ultimately the seed of Abraham refers to Christ (Matt. 1:1; Gal. 3:16), in whom all the nations of the earth have been blessed, and the good land refers to the Spirit received by the believers as the blessing of the gospel (v. 14). Furthermore, by being joined to Christ, the believers also become the seed of Abraham, the sons of God through faith (Gal. 3:7, 26, 29).

God confirmed the promises He made to Abraham to both Isaac and Jacob. To Isaac He said:

Sojourn in this land, and I will be with you and will bless you; for to you and to your seed I will give all these lands, and I will establish the oath which I swore to Abraham your father. And I will multiply your seed as the stars of heaven and will give to your seed all these lands; and in your seed all the nations of the earth will be blessed. (Gen. 26:3-4)

When Isaac blessed Jacob, he said, “And may He give you the blessing of Abraham, to you and to your seed with you, that you may possess this land of your sojournings, which God gave to Abraham” (Gen. 28:4). God Himself reiterated this promise to Jacob. In Genesis 28:13b Jehovah said, “I am Jehovah, the God of Abraham your father and the God of Isaac. The land on which you lie, I will give to you and to your seed.”

When Jehovah told Moses to bring the nation of Israel out of Egypt to the good land, He said: “And I will bring you to the land which I swore to give to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob; and I will give it to you as a possession. I am Jehovah” (Exo. 6:3-4, 8). When Moses was on Mount Sinai, the Lord told him that His intention was to make Israel “My personal treasure from among all peoples” (Exo. 19:5; cf. Deut. 7:6; 14:2; 26:18). After Israel’s great sin of making the golden calf idol, Jehovah charged Moses, saying: “Depart; go up from here, you and the people whom you have brought up out of the land of Egypt, to the land of which I swore to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob, saying, To your seed I will give it” (Exo. 33:1). In Leviticus, Jehovah told Moses that if the people humbled themselves after coming under His discipline for walking contrary to Him, He would “remember My covenant with Jacob, and I will remember also My covenant with Isaac and also My covenant with Abraham, and I will remember the land” (26:42). In Deuteronomy, as the people of Israel prepared to enter the good land, Jehovah referred to it as the land “which Jehovah swore to give to your fathers, to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob” (1:8; cf., 9:5; 29:13; 34:4).

We should not think that God has forsaken His promises to Israel. In a chapter in which he speaks of the coming of the Lord’s salvation to the Gentiles because the gospel was rejected by the Jews, Paul says strongly that God’s intention is to turn Israel to Himself again “for the gracious gifts and the calling of God are irrevocable” (Rom. 11:29). Thus, in his Life-study of Romans Brother Lee told us, “God’s gifts and God’s calling are eternal, without repentance, without change. Once God’s gift is given, it is given forever” (Life-study of Romans, 287).

Throughout the Old Testament the covenants that God made with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob are given as the reason for God’s continued care for the nation of Israel, even when Israel became degraded and turned away from Him. For example, in the reigns of Joash and Jehoash, kings of Israel who did evil in the sight of Jehovah, Israel was oppressed by the kings of Syria. Yet 2 Kings 13:23 says concerning Israel, “But Jehovah was gracious to them and had compassion on them and turned to them because of His covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, and He would not destroy them; and He has not cast them from His presence until now.” When David brought the ark up to the tent of Obed-edom, he “ordained the giving of thanks to Jehovah by the hand of Asaph and his brothers” (1 Chron. 16:7), saying:

Remember His covenant forever, the word that He commanded to a thousand generations, the covenant that He made with Abraham, and His oath unto Isaac. And He confirmed it unto Jacob as a statute, unto Israel as an eternal covenant, saying, to you I will give the land of Canaan, the portion of your inheritance. (vv. 15-18; cf. Psa. 105:8-11)

Our God is faithful (Isa. 49:7; 1 Thes. 5:24; Deut. 7:9), and His word abides forever (Isa. 40:8; 1 Pet. 1:25). Moreover, His word will accomplish what He delights in (Isa. 55:11). We should not presume to think that He would abandon His covenant with Israel. It is an eternal covenant.

In Romans 11 Paul also warns the New Testament Gentile believers not to exalt themselves, thinking that they are better than the Israelites. It is by the Israelites’ stumbling that the door of salvation has been opened to the Gentiles (v. 11). God extending His salvation to us is not a matter of merit but of God’s selection (Eph. 1:4). His salvation of us is His mercy toward us (Eph. 2:4-9). As Paul says, “It is not of him who wills, nor of him who runs, but of God who shows mercy” (Rom. 9:16). Today we are still under God’s mercy, the recipients of His grace, and the benefactors of the new covenant established through the shedding of the precious blood of the Lord Jesus (Luke 22:20; Matt. 26:28). We have nothing to boast of in ourselves (1 Cor. 1:29; 4:7; 10:17; Rom. 5:11); our only boast is in the Lord (1 Cor. 1:31).

We are accustomed to seeing the history of Israel through the lens of their failures, but we need to consider it also through the lens of God’s covenant, purpose, and faithfulness. Just as in His dealings with the church, God has never wavered in His purpose or His covenant, so it is in His dealings with Israel. To abandon His covenant and forsake His people Israel would be contrary to His nature (Mal. 3:6; James 1:17; 2 Tim. 2:13). In the midst of a great apostasy, the prophet Jeremiah could say, “It is Jehovah’s lovingkindness that we are not consumed, for His compassions do not fail; they are new every morning; great is Your faithfulness” (Lam. 3:22-23; cf. Psa. 78:37-38).

History shows us that just as Israel failed God, so has the church failed Him in countless ways throughout the centuries. Likewise, if we are enlightened by the Lord, we will realize that we personally have failed the Lord again and again. Without the same promise—”the gracious gifts and the calling of God are irrevocable” (Rom. 11:29)—we also would be disqualified for our failure to match the Lord in His righteousness, holiness, and glory (3:23 and footnote 1; Gen. 3:24 and footnote 1). As those who have received mercy and who by God’s mercy and grace stand with Him for the accomplishment of His heart’s desire, we should be those who pray for the consummation of His work upon and through Israel.

Share:

Israel in God’s Economy (3) – God’s Way of Dealing with Israel and the Nations and Its Issue

 

The book of Isaiah contains a “divine philosophy”—God chastises in love His beloved Israel who turned away from Him, He exercises His righteous judgment upon the nations who desolated Israel, and Christ is ushered in as the Savior of His people and the ruler of the earth (Life-study of Isaiah, 111). Isaiah is prophetic in two senses. First, it was fulfilled historically in the ancient nation of Israel. Second, it is being fulfilled in these last days as the Lord’s return approaches.

God’s Chastisement of Israel

In Isaiah 54:5 Jehovah reminds His people, Israel, that He is their Husband. The giving of the law upon Mount Sinai was a betrothing covenant (Jer. 2:2; 31:32; Ezek. 16:8, cf. 2 Cor. 11:2; Exo. 20:6, footnote 2). Israel, however, did not live according to Gods’ law and broke the eternal covenant. She became an unfaithful wife running after other gods and turning to the customs of the nations (Isa. 24:5, 16b; Jer. 11:10; Hos. 3:1; Isa. 2:6). Because of her apostasy, Jehovah chastised Israel, not to punish her but to restore her in love to her rightful position and loving relationship with Him (Isa. 54:6-7). As part of Jehovah’s chastisement of Israel, Isaiah said that Jehovah was “taking away from Jerusalem and from Judah every kind of support – all the support of bread and all the support of water” (3:1). Isaiah then enumerated various categories of rulers among the people (vv. 2-3). Concerning this Witness Lee commented:

It is significant that Isaiah links the ruler with the food supply. To be a ruler, you must feed the people. If you do not feed them, they will rebel. In the church, if there is no feeding, there is no ruling; and no ruling results in no food. Ruling and feeding go together as a pair. Ruling produces feeding, and feeding issues in ruling. If a church is well nourished, there surely must be proper ruling in that church. But when there is fighting in the church, this indicates that there is a shortage of food and of ruling. (Life-study of Isaiah, 16)

Jehovah’s chastisement extended to the exile of Israel from the promised land, fulfilled through the various captivities as well as the dispersion of the Jews in A.D. 70 (Isa. 5:13-17; Luke 12:24). Yet, even while Israel was held in captivity and in dispersion and the promised land was occupied by the nations, God still preserved the land as a habitation for His people. We see this principle in Jeremiah 32. When Jeremiah questioned why Jehovah had commanded him to purchase a particular field in the land given to Israel (vv. 6-8), Jehovah gave him three reasons. First, Jerusalem had been delivered to the Chaldeans because of Israel’s evils (vv. 28-36). Second, while Jehovah had driven Israel from the Holy Land, He promised that He would not abandon Israel but gather her again to dwell in safety there (v. 37). Third, Jehovah declared that He would make an eternal covenant to never again turn away from Israel once she had been restored from her apostasy (vv. 40-44). Ultimately, Jeremiah 32 reveals that Israel’s exile from the land and dispersion among the nations were temporary measures of God’s chastisement that will cease when the nations occupying the Holy Land are defeated by Jehovah Himself (Isa. 30:32; 31:8) and Israel is gathered back from the uttermost parts of the earth (Jer. 30:3; 31:8, 10).

God’s Judgment upon the Nations and Restoration of Israel

In God’s chastisement of Israel due to Israel’s rebelliousness against Him, He allowed Satan to stir up the nations to disturb Israel (Isa. 14:12-15; Eph. 6:12b; cf. Dan. 10:13, 20). However, they were excessive in their actions. The nations assumed to be other lords besides Jehovah and acted as Israel’s master (Isa. 26:13a), practicing cruelty and idolatry (Isa. 14:5-6, 16-17; 21:9b), placing a yoke upon Israel (14:24-27), causing damage to Zion (14:29-32), and invading Israel (17:1-4, 12-14), among other evils. The nations’ overstepping and unrighteous acts against Israel compel God to judge the nations (Isa. 34:2; 33:1). God’s judgment of the nations should cause us to realize the need of salvation, as Witness Lee explained:

The more we consider the judgments exercised by God over the rebellious ones, the more we see that man needs God’s salvation, and this salvation is Christ Himself. The more I study the world situation, the more I realize that the only way to solve the problems in today’s world is for Christ to come. And we must believe that He is coming. As He is waiting, He is preparing everything, including all of us, for His coming. All things are working together to bring our thought, our concept, and our understanding concerning human life and the human race to a deep aspiration: “Lord Jesus, You must come back. If You are not here, there is no way. Everything must be judged by You. Lord, You must come.” (Life-study of Isaiah, 77)

To place our trust in man, in the nations with their political systems and social values, all of which have come under God’s judgment, is foolhardy. Brother Lee applied this in the following way:

The lesson of Jehovah’s humiliating judgment is that we should stop regarding man “whose life breath is in his nostrils” (v. 22a). We should not put our trust in man. Concerning man, Isaiah asks, “For of what value is he considered to be?” (v. 22b). The answer is that man is nothing. (Life-study of Isaiah, 25)

Failing to see God’s ways in carrying out His economy may result in our falling under God’s chastisement as well. If we become distracted by the outward course of human affairs rather than the central work of God to cause the believers to grow and mature in the divine life for the building up of the Body of Christ we also may experience this chastisement. God’s judgment is not limited only to the nations but extends to His people who place their trust and hope in the nations, as represented by Egypt in Isaiah 30:1-3 and 31:1-7. Concerning this danger Brother Lee observed:

In typology Egypt signifies the world. Whenever God’s people are in a fallen condition or low estate, they go to Egypt (Gen. 42:10). Abraham did this (Gen. 12:10). Today, when Christians become low, they often go to the world. To go to Egypt, to rely upon Egypt, or to make an association with Egypt is sin. To go to the world or to rely upon the world can never be a profit, glory, or help to us. It always issues in humiliation, shame, and reproach (Isa. 30:5). (Life-study of Isaiah, 113)

In the last days of the present age Satan will motivate the nations to war against Israel seeking its destruction (Isa. 29:2-8). Isaiah 30:27-28 says:

Behold, the name of Jehovah comes from a distance, burning with His anger and heavy with smoke; His lips are full of indignation, and His tongue is like a devouring fire; His breath, like an overflowing stream, reaches up to the neck, to sift the nations with the sieve of nothingness; and a bridle that leads them to err is in the jaws of the peoples.

Thus, Jehovah will carry out His judgment upon the nations, fighting against them Himself (30:32). The nations will fall by the sword of Jehovah, not of men (31:8).

From Israel’s perspective, the rising up of the nations will be “a time of distress,” but a remnant of Israel will be saved by Jehovah from imminent destruction, who will descend upon Mount Zion to wage war against the nations (Jer. 30:7; Isa. 31:4-5). The completion of God’s chastisement of Israel (Jer. 30:11-20) and the execution of His judgment upon the nations will result in the restoration of Israel to Jehovah, her Maker and her Husband (Isa. 54:5). Jehovah will appear to Israel from afar, loving her with a bridal love, drawing her with lovingkindness, and restoring her out of her desolation (Jer. 2:2, 4-5; 31:3).

The Second Coming of Christ Issuing in the Restoration of Israel

Due to the diminished territorial boundaries held by the nation of Israel in the present day, we may overlook how vast is the extent of the land covenanted by God to Israel. We should not be distracted by the present boundaries of nations or modern thoughts of social justice concerning who are the rightful inhabitants of which lands today, nor should we conflate the present political state of Israel with the nation of Israel, God’s people, of the biblical record. In the restoration Israel will be restored to its originally covenanted territorial boundaries, a land stretching from the river to the sea, that is, from the Euphrates River in the east to the Mediterranean Sea in the west (Deut. 11:24; Isa. 26:15; 27:12). Jerusalem will be rebuilt after its destruction and all the Jews will be gathered from among the nations to return to the Holy Land (Isa. 24:10, 12; Jer. 30:3; 31:8-40). Jerusalem with Mount Zion will become a place of feasting (25:6), a center to which all the peoples of the earth will come to find enjoyment and satisfaction (Isa. 2:2-3), and Israel will become foremost among the nations (Isa. 2:2).

Although the nations have sought the destruction of the Jews throughout history, in the coming millennium Jehovah will cause Israel to be multiplied in number and honored among the nations (Jer. 30:19). Her reproach will be removed from the earth (Jer. 25:8), her seed will never be cut off (Jer. 31:35; 33:25-26), and she will dwell in the land securely (Jer. 33:16). The nations will regard Israel as “a name of gladness and a praise and a glory” to Jehovah (Jer. 33:9). The fulfillment of God’s judgment of the nations will usher in Christ as the King reigning over the earth from Zion, judging between the nations and deciding matters among the peoples, with instruction going forth from Zion and the Word of Jehovah from Jerusalem (Isa. 2:3-4). Under Christ’s just rule, the nations will beat their swords into plowshares and their spears into pruning hooks (v. 4; cf. Hos. 2:18), and Israel will walk in the light of Jehovah (Isa. 2:5). Lebanon will flourish as a fruitful field (29:17), the deaf will hear and the blind will see (v. 18), the afflicted will rejoice and exult in Jehovah (v. 19), those who terrorize Israel will cease to be (v. 20), those who erred will gain understanding and wisdom (v. 24), and Israel will not be ashamed but will sanctify the name of Jehovah (v. 23).

Conclusion

We should not misinterpret God’s temporary chastisement of Israel as a forsaking. Nor should we become distracted from God’s economy by the political and social conflicts of the present day. God’s chastisement of Israel and His judgment upon the nations for their excessive treatment of Israel will issue in the return of Israel to Jehovah, the restoration of creation, and the ushering in of Christ. If we have the proper view of God’s way in carrying out His economy we will be preserved from falling under God’s judgment and strengthened in our preparation for Christ’s return.

Share:

Israel In God’s Economy (4) – Israel and God’s Economy in the Present Age

 

As believers in Christ who care for the working out of God’s plan, we should understand the role of Israel relative to God’s economy in the present age, the age of grace.

The age of grace began with the incarnation of Christ. Old Testament prophecies show that God would send His Son to enter into humanity through the Jewish race. This is clearly seen in two examples. First, according to 2 Samuel 7:12-14, the Son of God was to be brought forth through incarnation into humanity as the seed of David, meaning that he would be David’s descendant. Romans 1:3 confirms this, saying that the gospel of God (v. 1) is “concerning His Son who came out of the seed of David according to the flesh.” Romans 9:5 tells us, “Out of whom [the Israelites, v. 4], as regards what is according to flesh, is the Christ.” Second, the book of Micah contains a prophecy that Christ would be born in Bethlehem (5:2; Matt. 2:4-6; John 7:42; Luke 2:4-6). A little over a century after Micah’s prophecy, the children of Israel were carried away into captivity in Babylon. Seventy years after being taken captive some of the Jews began to return. It was through the descendants of the returned captives that Joseph and Mary were born. As Brother Lee has noted:

If the forefathers of Joseph and Mary had remained in Babylon and if Mary and Joseph themselves had been born there, how could Christ have been born of Mary in Bethlehem? If none of God’s people had returned to the Holy Land, Christ would have had no way to come to the earth through incarnation. The remnant of returned captives was the instrument used by God to usher in the first coming of Christ. (CWWL, 1971, vol. 4, 476-477)

The Lord’s earthly ministry was carried out entirely in the context of the land of Canaan and centered on the nation of Israel, the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. The Lord Jesus declared, “I was not sent except to the lost sheep of the house of Israel” (Matt. 15:24). When the Lord sent the disciples out to proclaim the kingdom of the heavens he charged them, saying, “Do not go into the way of the Gentiles, and do not enter into any city of the Samaritans. But go rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel” (Matt. 10:5-6).

However, even in the gospels there are intimations that the Lord, who was rejected and ultimately crucified by His countrymen, would turn to the Gentiles (see footnote 1 in each of the following verses: Matt. 8:5; 9:18; 15:24; John 10:16). Even so, after His resurrection the gospel was first preached by those of the Jewish race. All of the twelve apostles as well as the Apostle Paul were Jews. Brother Lee said:

Please remember that the gospel was firstly preached and propagated by Jews. For example, both Peter and Paul were Jews. For this reason, the Lord told the Samaritan woman that salvation is of the Jews (John 4:22). In other words, the gospel, the glad tidings, came out of the Jewish people. (Life-study of Revelation, 697)

Moreover, the gospel was first preached to the Jews. In Acts 2, Peter preached the gospel to Jews gathered for Pentecost (v. 5). Those who believed from the apostles’ preaching in Jerusalem were Jews (v. 41; 4:4). Romans 1:16 says, “For I am not ashamed of the gospel, for it is the power of God unto salvation to everyone who believes, both to Jew first and to Greek.” Commenting on this verse Brother Lee said:

For the gospel to be preached that man might be saved, there is a sequence. It is first to the Jews and then the Gentiles. (Greeks here refers to the Gentiles.) Although Paul was an apostle to the Gentiles, he did not deny that the gospel was first given to the Jews for their salvation and then given to the Gentiles to save them afterward. This is because the Jews were originally God’s elect, and God’s “salvation is of the Jews” (John 4:22). (CWWL, 1952, vol. 2, 186)

However, the nation of Israel as a whole and particularly the Jewish religious leaders rejected the Lord (Matt. 21:42-46). Thus, John 1:11 says, “He came to His own, yet those who were His own did not receive Him.” Instead, they accused Him of blaspheming against God and having a demon (Matt. 9:3, 34; 12:14; Mark 14:63-65; John 8:48). Consumed by religious blindness and jealousy, they sought and plotted to kill Him (Matt. 26:3-4; Luke 5:16, 18; John 10:31, 33; 11:53), which they ultimately did (Acts 2:23, 36; 4:10-11; 5:30).

The Jews’ rejection of Christ did not end there. After many believed through the apostles’ preaching of the good news of the Lord’s resurrection, the Jews initiated a persecution against the church in Jerusalem (8:1). Before his conversion the Apostle Paul zealously persecuted the church (v. 3; 22:19; 26:11; Gal. 1:13). Nevertheless, after his conversion, when Paul and those with him went out from Antioch to preach the gospel, they went first to the Jews (Acts 13:5, 14-15; 14:1-2; 17:1, 10, 17; 18:19; 19:8). While some Jews believed, many persecuted them, some going from city to city to foment opposition (13:45, 50; 14:19; 17:5, 13; 21:27; 23:27; 24:9; 25:7, 15), even repeatedly seeking to kill Paul (9:23; 20:3; 23:12). The Jews’ rejection of the gospel caused the apostles to turn to the Gentiles (13:46; 18:6; 28:28). As Brother Lee explained:

In the beginning, even though the apostles preached the gospel to the Gentiles [for ex., in Acts 10:34-43], they were still among the Jews; therefore, at the end of Acts 13 it says that they turned to the Gentiles (v. 46). This shows that even though they were in Gentile lands in Asia Minor, they were still preaching to the Jews. Beginning in chapter 13, the apostles shook off the dust of their feet (v. 51) as a formal sign that they were turning to the Gentiles in the Gentile land. (CWWL, 1956, vol. 2, 262)

However, in Romans 11:15-32 Paul used the illustrations of a lump of dough and an olive tree to show that God’s turning away from the nation of Israel is only temporary. In verse 15 he says that Israel was “cast aside” (not “cast away,” see v. 2) but will be “received back.” Then in verse 16 he says, “Now if the dough offered as the firstfruits is holy, the lump is also; and if the root is holy, the branches are also.” The firstfruits of the dough and the root of the olive tree (v. 17) both refer to the forefathers of the nation of Israel—Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob (v. 28; see Life-study of Romans, 283). To be holy here means that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were separated to God from the nations. Paul’s point is that since the forefathers as the firstfruits and the root were holy, so also Israel as the whole lump and the whole olive tree is holy. Paul explains that some of the branches of the olive tree—the unbelieving Israelites—were broken off so that the Gentiles—branches from the “wild olive tree” (vv. 17 and 24)—might be grafted in. However, in verse 25 through 27 he said:

For I do not want you, brothers, to be ignorant of this mystery (lest you be wise in yourselves), that hardness has come upon Israel in part, until the fullness of the Gentiles comes in; and thus all Israel will be saved, as it is written, “The Deliverer will come out of Zion; He will turn away ungodliness from Jacob. And this is the covenant from Me with them, when I take away their sins.”

Here Paul quotes Isaiah 59:20, which is a prophecy concerning the Lord’s return. This gist of this prophecy is that when Christ returns at the end of this age, He will save the remnant of Israel. Given that Christ is the seed of Abraham and that He was sent to the nation of Israel and brought forth into humanity through the Jewish race, it is altogether fitting and in accord with His promises to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob that at the end of this age He would turn the hearts of the remnant of Israel and save them at His return.

This does not mean that the door to salvation is closed to the Jews in this age or that they must wait for the Lord’s return for salvation. Today there is no difference between Jews and Gentiles regarding the need for and availability of salvation in Christ. In Romans 10:12-13 Paul tells us, “For there is no distinction between Jew and Greek, for the same Lord is Lord of all and rich to all who call upon Him; for ‘whoever calls upon the name of the Lord shall be saved'” (cf. Acts 2:21). Moreover, all those who believe in the Lord in this age will have the opportunity to participate in growth and maturing in the life of God’s Son and in the building up of the Body of Christ and preparation of the Bride for His return (Rom. 5:10; Eph. 4:15-16; Rev. 19:7). Therefore, we should announce the glad tidings of God’s complete salvation—both judicial redemption and organic salvation—to Jews and Gentiles alike as ambassadors of “our Savior God, who desires all men to be saved and to come to the full knowledge of the truth” (1 Tim. 2:3b-4).

Share:

Israel in God’s Economy (5) – The Main Prophecies concerning Israel before the Lord’s Coming

 

As those who eagerly await the coming of the Lord, we should know the three main prophecies concerning Israel that must be fulfilled before His return. The first two have already been fulfilled and were prophesied both by the Old Testament prophets and Jesus in the Gospels: (1) the rebirth of Israel and (2) the return of Jerusalem to the Jews. We still await the fulfillment of the third prophecy, the rebuilding of the temple in Jerusalem. According to Witness Lee:

Other than these three items—the restoration of the nation of Israel, the return of Jerusalem to the Jewish people, and the rebuilding of the temple—it is difficult to locate any other definite signs of the Lord’s return pertaining to Israel. We need to see that the Lord’s return is near, and we need to prepare ourselves for His return. (CWWL, 1973-1974, vol. 2, 390)

When we see the temple rebuilt in Jerusalem, along with the changing geopolitical situation that allows this to take place, we will know that the Lord’s return is imminent.

The Restoration of the Nation of Israel

In the Old Testament, Israel is typified as a fig tree (Hos. 9:10) and Jehovah discusses her spiritual condition in relation to the fruit of the tree—that is, in comparison to good or rotten figs (Jer. 24:2, 5, 8). This backdrop provides an appropriate lens through which to interpret three passages found in the Gospels. In Matthew 21:19, Jesus finds a fig tree with neither good nor rotten fruit—it was fruitless, with “nothing on it except leaves only.” This typifies the condition of Israel at the time of Christ’s earthly ministry. Israel was “full of outward show but had nothing that could satisfy God” (21:19, note 1). Jesus’ parable in Luke 13:6-9 similarly identifies Israel’s fruitless condition. Here, the Lord intimates that Israel was fruitless for three and a half years—that is, the entirety of His earthly ministry (v. 7)—and that God the Father disapproved of her condition, even determining it to be a waste of His provision for them in the promised land (v. 8). In Matthew 21, Jesus’ response to the fig tree’s fruitlessness was to cause it to instantly dry up—in typology, this was to curse Israel. In Luke 13:8-9, the Lord emphasized that if the tree remained fruitless after His redemptive death (typified by digging around the tree and adding fertilizer) it would be cut down. Both the cursing of the fig tree in Matthew and its being cut down in Luke refer to the same historical event: the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus in A.D. 70 and the scattering of the Jews among the nations for the ensuing centuries.

Jesus speaks of the fig tree once more in Matthew 24:32: “But learn the parable from the fig tree: As soon as its branch has become tender and puts forth its leaves, you know that the summer is near.” In human life, we know that summer is preceded by both winter and spring. The Jews experienced a lengthy winter—nearly 1,900 years as a people without a nation. This situation radically changed after the Second World War. The newly formed United Nations passed Resolution 181, which, had it been implemented, would have partitioned the British Mandate of Palestine into Jewish and Arab states. However, the surrounding Arab countries rejected the U.N. resolution and, along with those Arabs who lived in Palestine, attacked the Jews in Palestine. The Jews successfully repulsed this attack and in 1948, the branch of the fig tree became tender—life returned to the tree and the nation of Israel was reborn. This historic event, the ingathering of the Jews, fulfilled long-anticipated Old Testament prophecies such as Ezekiel 11:17: “Thus says the Lord Jehovah, I will gather you from the peoples and assemble you from the countries among which you have been scattered, and I will give you the land of Israel” (cf. Isa. 11:12; Ezek. 20:34; 37:22).

The Return of Jerusalem to the Jews

Nineteen years later, in 1967, Israel emerged victorious from the Six-Day War, Jerusalem was returned to the Jews, and the Lord’s word in Luke 21:24 was fulfilled (see CWWL, 1971, vol. 1, 327; CWWL, 1971, vol. 3, 164; CWWL, 1990, vol. 1, 146). Brother Lee stated that this was “a miracle. No one imagined that Jerusalem could be returned to the Jewish people as quickly as it was.” He further commented that “the return of Jerusalem to the Jews was a miraculous fulfillment of the prophecy in the Word and is a great sign that the Lord’s return is near” (CWWL, 1968, vol. 1, 242). Indeed, the return of Jerusalem was a further fulfillment of Jesus’ parable—the fig tree now put “forth its leaves.” While we cannot know how close we are to the summer—that is, the full restoration of the kingdom of Israel—we are most certainly living during Israel’s springtime. Concerning this, Brother Lee stated:

We must all be awakened. According to the world situation, the time is ripe for the Lord to return. The Bible has been in our hands for many years, and we have learned the prophecies concerning the Lord’s coming. The re-formation of the nation of Israel was accomplished in 1948, and Jerusalem was returned to the Jews in 1967. All that remains outwardly is for the temple to be rebuilt in Jerusalem. (CWWL, 1970, vol. 1, 226)

The Rebuilding of the Temple

The last prophecy concerning Israel before the Lord’s return, the rebuilding of the temple, is implied in several verses:

  • In the Gospel of Matthew, Jesus responds to a question from his disciples concerning His return and the consummation of this age: “Therefore when you see the abomination of desolation, which was spoken of through Daniel the prophet, standing in the holy place (let him who reads understand)” (Matt. 24:15).
  • Daniel describes this “abomination of desolation.” It is an idol installed in the temple by an evil individual who forces the Jews to cease their sacrifices and worship of God (Dan. 9:27; 12:11).
  • This evil person is described in more detail by the apostle Paul in 2 Thessalonians 2:3-4: he is “the man of lawlessness…who opposes and exalts himself above all that is called God or an object of worship, so that he sits in the temple of God, setting himself forth, saying that he is God.”
  • The man of lawlessness is referred to by the apostle John in the book of Revelation as “the beast coming up out of the sea” (Rev. 13:1). He is the Antichrist, a powerful human figure raised up near the end of the age to wage war against God’s people. An idolatrous image of him will be set up in the temple and will be given the supernatural power to speak (vv. 1-5, 14-15).

Taken together, these verses paint a clear picture of what will transpire at the end of this age: both the Antichrist and the idol made in his image will be seated in the temple of Jerusalem. Since the temple has been in ruins for nearly 2,000 years, we know that it must be rebuilt prior to the events the Lord said would be the sign of His coming and the consummation of this age. His coming is the hope of the Jews spanning from the prophets to the present day, a further working out of the prophesied salvation of the remnant of Israel (Rom. 11:26; Rev. 7:4-8) and is of particular importance to all those who love the appearing of the God-man Jesus Christ (2 Tim. 4:8).

Conclusion

As previous articles in this series have stated, God’s covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob continues to have ramifications both for Jews and Christians today. The prophetic restoration of Israel and return of Jerusalem to the Jews plainly demonstrate that “the gracious gifts and calling of God are irrevocable” (Rom. 11:29). Though Israel remains unrepentant in the present day, these historic events provide evidence of God’s sovereignty over human history. As believers awaiting the Lord’s return, our concern is not with international politics or issues of social justice. We should, however, be aware of the prophecies related to Israel, both those that have already transpired and those still awaiting their fulfillment. By doing so, we will be those who, despite not knowing the hour or the day of the Lord’s return, are able to discern the signs of the time and make ourselves ready for the return of our Bridegroom (Matt. 16:13; 25:1-13; Luke 12:36-37).

Share:

Israel in God’s Economy (6) – Israel in the End Times, the Millennium, and Eternity Future

 

Because of the unique role that Israel occupies in God’s economy it will be the focus of events that take place on the earth at the end of this age[1], a period of time that the New Testament calls a “great tribulation” (Rev. 7:14; Matt. 24:21). This period will mark the last three and a half years of the present age, the age of the church, and its conclusion will issue in the next age, the age of the millennial kingdom, which in turn will usher in eternity future wherein Israel will continue to fulfill a specific role as prophesied in the Bible. As we consider prophecies that touch on these three periods, at least two things become evident: 1) Understanding how the events at the end of this age will unfold necessitates an understanding of the events and persons that the Bible forecasts concerning Israel; and 2) despite all the calamities that will take place, God’s mercy and faithfulness toward Israel will ultimately be confirmed and its particular and blessed role in His eternal economy assured.

Israel in the Great Tribulation

In the events that will take place on the earth in the last three and a half years of this age, Israel will be the focal point, both geographically and politically. At the end of this age, a man of unprecedented charisma and power, the Antichrist, will take the lead in fighting directly against God in the ultimate manifestation of man’s participation in Satan’s universal rebellion in this age. He will be joined by the armies of the nations to physically fight against the establishing of Christ’s kingdom on the Satan-usurped earth. This conflict is described in Joel 3:2: “I will gather all the nations and will bring them down to the valley of Jehoshaphat; and I will enter into judgment with them there because of My people and My inheritance Israel, whom they have scattered among the nations. And they have divided My land” (cf. Rev. 19:19; Joel 3:12-14; Rev. 17:13-14).

Connecting Joel 3:2 and 13 with Revelation 14:19-20 and 16:16 indicates that this event will be the battle at Armageddon (the New Testament name for the valley of Jehoshaphat) in the land of Israel and that the events preceding it are those prophesied in Revelation. From the standpoint of outward human history, this battle is precipitated by a conflict between the Antichrist and the nation of Israel. The Antichrist, the beast which comes up out of the sea (13:1 and footnote 1), will be a political leader who will exert unprecedented power and influence over the nations. He will oppose and exalt himself “above all that is called God or an object of worship, so that he sits in the temple of God, setting himself forth, saying that he is God” (2 Thes. 2:4). He will be intensely antagonistic toward the Jews, who by this time will have restored the temple and resumed the ritual sacrifices as prescribed in Judaic law. Brother Lee summarized these events in Daniel 9:27, footnote 1, of the Recovery Version, saying:

At the beginning of the last week of the seventy weeks, the last seven years of the present age, Antichrist will make a firm covenant of peace with Israel. In the middle of that week he will break the covenant and will cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease (12:11a). This will be the beginning of the great tribulation (Matt. 24:21), which will last for three and a half years (7:25; 12:7; Rev. 11:2-3; 12:6, 14; 13:5).

Thus, after breaking his covenant with Israel, the Antichrist will initiate a furious persecution against the Jews that will last for forty-two months, involving the desecration of the temple and the occupation of the Holy Land (indicated by the word “trample” in Rev. 11:2). Then, as Brother Lee explained:

At the end of the great tribulation all the worldly forces who follow Antichrist will be gathered together to fight against Jerusalem. They will surround Jerusalem with the intention of destroying it, but they will not realize that they are being gathered as grapes for the winepress. (CWWL, 1964, vol. 2, 510)

As the remnant of Israel is fleeing and on the verge of annihilation, Christ will descend upon the Mount of Olives with His overcomers (Zech. 14:4-5; cf. Acts 1:11). The appearing of the Lord Jesus will cause the remnant of Israel to repent. As Zechariah 12:10 says, “They will look upon Me, whom they have pierced; and they will wail over Him…” Of His coming to deal with the armies besieging Jerusalem, Revelation 19:15 says, “And out of His mouth proceeds a sharp sword, that with it He might smite the nations … and He treads the winepress of the fury of the wrath of God the Almighty.” Speaking of the Antichrist, 2 Thessalonians 2:8 says, “And then the lawless one will be revealed (whom the Lord Jesus will slay by the breath of His mouth and bring to nothing by the manifestation of His coming).” The destruction of the Antichrist will usher in the wedding feast of the Lamb for the overcoming believers and the establishment of His millennial kingdom on earth in which the remnant of Israel will participate (Rev. 19:19 and footnote 1; Zech. 12:8-10).

In the Millennium

The thousand years of the millennial kingdom, during which Satan will be temporarily bound and prevented from deceiving mankind, will be a glorious time of restoration and healing for the whole earth (Acts 3:21; Isa. 11:1-10; 65:18-25). Whereas the kingdom today, as the reality of the church life, is a hidden mystery to the world (Rom. 14:17; Mark 4:11), at that time the kingdom will be outwardly manifested, having a heavenly part composed of the overcomers (Rev. 20:6) and an earthly component composed of the saved and regenerated Jews physically located in the land of Israel (Isa. 61:6; Zech. 8:20-23; see CWWL, 1963, vol. 3, 463, 465). It will be the unique privilege of these Jewish believers to serve as priests, instructing the nations in the worship of God: “Thus says Jehovah of hosts, In those days, from all the languages of the nations, ten men will take hold, indeed, they will take hold of the skirt of a Jewish man, saying, Let us go with you, for we have heard that God is with you” (v. 23). After Israel’s long history in turning away from God to seek after the idolatrous nations, it is exceedingly precious that God’s faithfulness to His covenant would be manifested in making the nations seek after the restored nation of Israel to know and worship the one true God.

At the end of the millennium, Satan will be loosed and allowed to deceive the nations and gather them together for one final rebellion. Again, the land of Israel will be the focus (Rev. 20:7). The armies of the nations of “Gog and Magog” will surround “the beloved city” (Jerusalem) to destroy it only to be devoured by fire from heaven (Rev. 20:8-9). After this Satan will be cast into the lake of fire, fully and completely clearing up the negative situation in the universe (20:10).

In Eternity Future

In the new heaven and new earth, both Israel’s role in serving as priests so that the nations of the earth might know and worship God and their dwelling securely in the land first covenanted to them by God in Genesis 12:1-3 will continue for eternity. This will be the final and full confirmation and fulfillment of God’s great promise to the nation of Israel: “And they will dwell in the land that I have given to Jacob My servant, in which your fathers dwelt; and they will dwell in it, they, their children, and their children’s children, forever. And David My Servant will be their Prince forever” (Ezek. 37:25; cf. Gen. 28:13b; 17:7-8).

Conclusion

As we consider the present world situation soberly in light of the Bible with the help of the ministry, we will see that everything that happens in today’s social, political, and military arenas is advancing towards the events outlined in this article. Regardless of how others may interpret developments in these areas, we will understand that they will most assuredly lead to the manifestation of the Antichrist and the nations under his leadership united in opposition against Israel and, by extension, God Himself. We will also understand that the ultimate outcome of this conflict, the fate of Israel, and the future of the good land are altogether settled matters in the eyes of God. Through His deliverance of the remnant of Israel at the return of Christ, God will display not only His authority and power but also His faithfulness to His covenanted people. According to God’s arrangement in His economy, Israel has a role today, in the great tribulation, in the kingdom age, and in eternity future. Hence, we should neither be shaken in our faith by present or future events, nor should we question God’s way in which He chooses to carry out His economy. Rather, as we see these events unfold, we should take up our own responsibility as believers and as the church, the Body of Christ, to prepare for the Lord’s coming both individually and corporately.

Further reading concerning the Lord’s second coming:

  • CWWL, 1990, vol. 1, “The Apostles’ Teaching,” 441-494
  • CWWL, 1990, vol. 3, “The Prophecy of the Four ‘Sevens’ in the Bible,” 3-65
  • Truth Lessons, Level Four, Volume 2, 113-277
  • The Coming of the Lord,” Affirmation & Critique XXVIII:1 (Spring 2023)

[1] For a clear presentation and explanation of Great Tribulation and subsequent periods of time as shown in the Bible, see the graph entitled “The Chart of the Seventy Weeks and the Coming of Christ, with the Rapture of the Saints” at the back of the Recovery Version.

Share:

Israel in God’s Economy (7) – Our Attitude

 

Two of the three main prophecies concerning Israel leading up to the Lord’s return have been fulfilled. The nation of Israel was re-established in 1948 after nearly 1,900 years, something unprecedented in world history. Then, in 1967 Jerusalem was returned to the Jews, when the times of the Gentiles were fulfilled (Luke 21:24). Only the rebuilding of the temple remains as a major prophecy concerning Israel that has yet to be accomplished before the Lord’s return. But what about the greatest subject of prophecy in the New Testament—the church? Are we, the believers, ready for the Lord’s return? Is the church in a condition to be presented to the Lord as His glorious counterpart (Eph. 5:27)? What should our attitude be concerning Israel, our living on the earth today, and the condition of the church?

Concerning Israel

We recognize that Israel has a unique place in God’s economy, both in history and in the future. The nations dealing with Israel should exercise care in how they treat this tiny nation because Jehovah is involved with Israel in an unseen way as He was in the book of Esther. God is not named or mentioned in that book, but He was sovereignly active in all persons and events recorded in it. The same is true regarding Israel in modern times. Since its re-establishment in 1948, Israel has conducted itself as a secular nation. At times, the actions and policies of the political state of Israel may offend the sensibilities of some. However, our concern is not whether certain political policies are right or wrong but with God’s move in His economy and Israel’s place in it. According to God’s economy, there must be an Israel, and Israel must include Jerusalem. Otherwise, the temple cannot be rebuilt and the Lord cannot return. Thus, we gladly acknowledge Israel’s place in God’s economy and pray for the peace of Jerusalem and the Lord’s purpose for Israel (Psa. 122:6).

Concerning Our Living

In light of God’s dealings with the nations and with Israel, we must ask, what is our responsibility? What type of person should we be? We should not be those characterized by political positions or preoccupied with prophecy. Rather, we should be persons with an intimate life with the Lord who soberly consider our Lord’s return and love His appearing (2 Tim. 4:8).  Witness Lee said:

In 2 Timothy 4:1 Paul said to Timothy, “I solemnly charge you before God and Christ Jesus, who is to judge the living and the dead, and by His appearing and His kingdom.” This is an exhortation from Paul immediately before his martyrdom. He said that he had fought the good fight, he had finished the course, and he had kept the faith, and that at the judgment seat he would be awarded the crown of righteousness, which would be awarded to all those who have loved His appearing (vv. 6-8). He reminded Timothy, and also us, by the Lord’s judgment and kingdom, that we should have a living that loves the Lord’s appearing. This will cause us not to be discouraged, not to backslide, not to become weak, but to remain faithful to the end. (CWWL, 1990, vol. 3, 587-588)

The Bible charges us to watch and be ready for the Lord to come as a thief in the night to gather His treasure (Matt. 24:42-44; 25:13; 1 Thes. 5:2), to be the prudent virgins and our Lord’s faithful slaves (Matt. 25:2, 4, 10, 21, 23; 24:45), and to not be like Lot’s wife, attached to the things of this world (Luke 17:32; Gen 19:26). Witness Lee said, “Regarding the coming of our Lord, we should have a godly living in which we await His glorious appearing [Phil. 3:20; 1 Thes. 1:10; Rev. 16:15]. This appearing should be the blessing we hope for” (CWWL, 1990, vol. 3, 588). In calling us to be lovers of the Lord’s appearing, Brother Lee warned us, “Do not think that since we are clear concerning the signs of the Lord’s coming, we can be slothful and can first love the world and then pursue the Lord when the last week comes. There is no such convenience” (587).

Although we know the major prophecies concerning Israel and the end times and acknowledge Israel’s place in God’s economy, we cannot afford to be preoccupied with outward world events or ensnared by politics or social issues. Rather, our need is to have a personal and intimate life with the Lord, seeking to hasten the Lord’s return by rendering Him our full cooperation (2 Pet. 3:12). We should be fully captured by the Lord Jesus, in love with Him and His appearing, living with Him and to Him, and watchful for His return.

Concerning the Church

We rejoice at the fulfillment of the prophecies concerning Israel and the end times in light of the Lord’s return. Yet, we must admit that many Christians have wasted much time speculating about the things surrounding the fulfillment of these prophecies. These things should not be our focus. As Brother Lee told us:

The prophecies are not the most crucial revelation in the Bible. The most crucial revelation concerns the mystery of human life. The Bible reveals God’s creation. Why did God create the heavens and the earth and then man? The Bible says that in eternity past God had a plan according to His heart’s desire. This plan is to gain a group of people who would receive His life in order to become the Body of His Son, Christ, to be a corporate expression of Christ and God. This is the central revelation of the Bible. (CWWL, 1989, vol. 2, 503)

As those who love the Lord we should care not only for our personal relationship with Him but also for His goal—the building up of the Body of Christ and the preparation of the church as His bride. Brother Lee explained, “[W]e need to realize that holiness, overcoming, and spirituality are all for the building up of the corporate Body of Christ and the preparation of His corporate bride” (CWWL, 1971, vol. 1, 287-288). The church is the subject of the greatest prophecy in the Bible, spoken by the Lord Himself—”I will build my church” (Matt. 16:18). This must take place to the Lord’s satisfaction before His return.  The preparation of the bride precedes the Lord’s return (Rev. 19:7). Thus, Witness Lee commented, “Unless His bride is prepared, Christ as the Bridegroom will not come back. Where is the bride of Christ today? In order for Christ to return quickly, He needs to hasten the preparation of His bride” (CWWL, 1971, vol. 1, 287). Later he added, “The prophecies of the Bible are being fulfilled now. However, the Lord is not waiting for Israel. He is waiting today for the recovered church. Israel is now a nation, but where is the church? For the accomplishment of His economy God needs both Israel and the church” (CWWL, 1975-1976, vol. 1, 18).

Many books have been written speculating about the end times and the identity of the Antichrist. Such speculations misaim. Over 85 years ago Brother Lee discounted speculation that the Italian dictator Mussolini was the Antichrist, saying that the time was not ripe for the Antichrist’s manifestation, because the condition of the church fell far short of the bride being ready for the Lord’s coming (CWWL, 1971, vol. 1, 325). Sadly, this is still true today. Much has already transpired—Israel has been restored as a nation and Jerusalem has been returned to the Jews, but there is no Bridegroom yet in sight because the bride has not yet made herself ready (Rev 19:7-8; 21:2). While many Christians have been distracted by the past and pending fulfillment of the outward prophecies that precede the Lord’s return, we should come back to God’s goal, which is the preparation of the bride.

Concerning the condition of the church we must consider Ephesians 4:13. It says we must all arrive at three things—”at the oneness of the faith and of the full knowledge of the Son of God, at a full-grown man, at the measure of the stature of the fullness of Christ.” Brother Nee called Ephesians 4:16—the growth and building up of the Body of Christ through the mutual supply of all the members—”the most difficult thing” for the Lord to gain. Yet he declared, “there will be a day when God’s recovery will reach the fulfillment of Ephesians 4” (CWWN, Vol. 57, 221). We may consider Ephesians 4:13-16 as a prophecy. Even though today these things remain unfulfilled, the Lord must gain them through our cooperation so that His Body may be built up. Commenting on these verses, Brother Lee explained:

There are thousands of Christians, Christian groups, and so-called Christian churches, but can we see what is prophesied in Ephesians 4:13-16? We have to say no. This was not only a prophecy in the past but also a prophecy that remains unfulfilled today. Even among us, we cannot say that we have had such an arrival. What we can say is that we are pressing on. We are going on toward that goal at which we have not yet arrived. (CWWL, 1972, vol. 3, 425-426)

Conclusion

As we have seen in this series, Israel has a particular place in God’s economy. Its origin was God’s calling of Abraham, and God made many promises to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob that became the basis of God’s dealing with Israel and with the nations throughout history. Under God’s sovereignty His salvation came to the world and was initially spread through the Jewish race. In recent years we have seen the fulfillment of crucial prophecies related to Israel and the Lord’s return, and Israel will play a major role in the end times, in the kingdom, and in eternity future. While it is important for us to know these things, it is even more crucial for us to see that the Lord’s commission to us is the building up of the church as the Body of Christ and the preparation of the church as His bride. It is this commission that should govern our hearts and minds and be the focus of our living. In light of the Lord’s coming, let us press on.

Share:

Realizing the Importance of Israel in God’s Economy

As the end of the age approaches, the nation of Israel is increasingly at the center of the global situation and the subject of human opinions. As believers in Christ, our understanding of the present situation must be governed by the revelation in the Bible, a revelation which shows that Israel occupies a particular and special place in God’s economy. The articles in this series explore what the Bible says concerning Israel’s past, present, and future:


[BEGIN LINE]
[[green-grad, israel-in-gods-economy-1-an-introduction, israel-in-gods-economy-2-gods-calling-his-promises-and-his-faithfulness, israel-in-gods-economy-3-gods-way-of-dealing-with-israel-and-the-nations-and-its-issue, israel-in-gods-economy-4-israel-and-gods-economy-in-the-present-age, israel-in-gods-economy-5-the-main-prophecies-concerning-israel-before-the-lords-coming, israel-in-gods-economy-6-israel-in-the-end-times-the-millennium-and-eternity-future, israel-in-gods-economy-7-our-attitude]]

Share:

Correcting Factual Errors Regarding Our History

Over the years a number of rumors and misrepresentations have been propagated concerning the local churches. Some of these are still in circulation today, even though they have no substantive factual basis. The following articles examine some of these rumors and provide fact-based rebuttals to the accusations that they contain.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, serious-errors-concerning-the-fellowship-of-the-co-workers,stealing-meeting-halls,a-response-from-the-church-in-houston,concerning-the-church-of-almighty-god-eastern-lightning,hiding-history,are-the-local-churches-litigious,facts-concerning-three-libel-lawsuits,lawsuits-and-the-scriptures,facts-concerning-statements-attributed-to-max-rapoport,were-max-rapoport-and-john-ingalls-forced-out,facts-concerning-daystar-motor-homes,facts-concerning-lily-hsu]]

Share:

Concerning Various Twistings of Our Teachings

For someone serving the Lord in His ministry, having one’s words twisted is nothing new. Paul experienced this (2 Pet. 3:16; Rom. 3:8). So did David (Psa. 56:5). The following articles are offered for those who may be stumbled by various twistings of the words of those who minister among us.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, concerning-the-ministrys-attitude-toward-sisters,twisting-ron-kangass-words,a-specious-claim-of-racism]]

Share:

Concerning Key Principles in God’s Government

In the gospel of Matthew the changing of the age was announced with the words “the kingdom of the heavens has drawn near,” spoken first by John the Baptist, the Lord Jesus, and His disciples (3:2; 4:17; 10:7). The goal of the gospel from God’s side is to bring the earth under the direct rule of Christ. If we are going to play a part in accomplishing this, we need to understand the principles of God’s government, some of which are discussed in the following articles:


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, gods-government-and-gods-grace,dispensational-discipline,should-we-not-warn-one-another]]

Share:

Concerning the Bible and Its Interpretation

God has spoken (Heb. 1:1), and His speaking is recorded in a wonderful book, the Bible (2 Tim. 3:16). From one perspective the Bible speaks of many things, but from another it has one central theme, the eternal economy of God to accomplish His eternal purpose (1 Tim. 1:3-4; Eph. 3:11). To understand the Bible needs a proper interpretation (Acts 8:30-31; Neh. 8:8) that takes the economy of God as its principle and the eternal purpose of God as its goal. The articles in this series present and apply this principle.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, gods-economy-different-teaching-and-the-central-line-of-the-bible,three-foundational-truths-and-why-they-matter,psalms-james-and-the-divine-inspiration-of-the-bible,reading-only-the-pure-word-a-dangerous-and-unbiblical-notion,concerning-allegorizing-the-bible]]

Share:

Healthy and Unhealthy Speaking

In Matthew 12:34 the Lord Jesus told the Pharisees that “out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks.” In other words, as Brother Nee explained, “A person’s words express his heart; they reveal the things in his heart” (CWWN, vol. 50, 587). Our words can either build up or tear down others’ faith. Moreover, the words we receive can have the same effect on us. These articles pay particular attention to how we can be preserved from receiving or uttering words that mar God’s building.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[red-grad, our-basic-choice,let-your-speech-be-always-with-grace-seasoned-with-salt,questions-versus-questionings,quenching-the-flaming-darts-of-the-enemy,words-that-spread-death-and-how-to-stop-them]]

Share:

Our Attitude toward Social and Psychological Issues

As believers our hope is in the coming of the Lord Jesus. We are called to live in the world but not of the world (John 15:19; 17:14-16). In today’s world we face serious challenges, some drawing us into seeking to solve the world’s problems, others undermining biblical morality, and still others unsettling our psychological stability. The following articles attempt to help us to navigate our human lives in these difficult times.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[red-grad, a-christians-attitude-toward-reforming-society,a-christians-attitude-toward-government-and-politics,concerning-gender-identity-and-sexual-orientation, holding-marriage-in-honor,our-attitude-toward-seeking-professional-psychological-help,preserving-human-life]]

Share:

Our Relationship with Other Christians

Those of us who meet in the local churches are fully aware that we are a small minority among the Lord’s people and that those believers not meeting with us are fully our brothers and sisters in the Lord and in His Body. We have been charged by the Lord to maintain a testimony of the viability of practical oneness, but how do we keep the oneness of the Spirit with Christians not meeting in the local churches (Eph. 4:3)? How can we maintain oneness with our fellow believers without compromising the testimony that the Lord has given to us to uphold? The articles in this series give us principles that should guide us.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, receiving-all-believers-but-not-different-teachings,our-attitude-toward-ecumenism,our-attitude-toward-other-christians-and-their-work-part-1-maintaining-the-oneness-with-fellow-believers,our-attitude-toward-other-christians-and-their-work-part-2-the-vision-of-the-lords-recovery-being-contrary-to-todays-christianity,our-attitude-toward-other-christians-and-their-work-part-3-not-entangling-the-work-of-the-lords-recovery-with-others-work]]

Share:

Living in and for the Body

(See also Problems and Turmoils in the Church)

Today we realize that our living must be not only before the Lord individually but must also be for the building up of His Body. We also see that God’s enemy, Satan, resists the building up of the church (Matt. 16:18) and that our life and service can issue in either building up or tearing down (1 Cor. 3:14-15, 17). How then should we conduct ourselves in the house of God, the church of the living God (1 Tim. 3:15), especially in times of turmoil? The articles below present some keys to apply in our living in order to be preserved ourselves and to become a factor of preserving and restoring others.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[orange-grad, christ-the-cross-and-the-church,the-kind-of-person-the-lord-can-use-to-turn-the-age,magnifying-christ-in-the-midst-of-turmoil,restoring-fellowship-in-the-body-of-christ,forgiveness-and-the-building-up-of-the-body-of-christ,coming-to-the-lords-table,the-crucial-role-of-the-sisters-in-the-church-life,being-safeguarded-by-the-discernment-in-the-body,a-harmonious-coordination-between-generations-to-advance-gods-move]]

Share:

Problems and Turmoils in the Church

(See also Living in and for the Body)

We may think that the church is a place that should be free of problems. On the one hand, the church is the Body and Bride of Christ and, from this point of view, the church is glorious (Eph. 5:27). On the other hand, each of the churches is a collection of fallen human beings, redeemed by the blood of Christ and in the process of being transformed into His image (2 Cor. 3:18). Problems, some of them quite serious, arise out of that fallen nature and can create turmoils in the churches. These problems and turmoils become tests to us. The articles below give some guidance to facing and responding to problems and turmoils in the church.


[BEGIN LINE]

[[red-grad, concerning-turmoils,being-overcomers-with-a-vision-not-idealists-with-a-dream,when-problems-arise-in-the-local-churches-avoiding-two-errors,the-proper-way-to-deal-with-problems-in-the-church,handling-allegations-of-abuse,covering-not-covering-up,obsession-and-subjectivity]]

Share:

Clarifications regarding the Ministry and the Work

The ministry and the work are distinct from the local churches but exist for the sake of the local churches. The following articles address particular misunderstandings and misrepresentations of the functions of two entities—Living Stream Ministry and Defense & Confirmation Project—that were formed to support the ministry and the work. It also describes the relationship between these offices and the churches, the ministry, and the work as distinct aspects in, of, and for the Body.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, the-relationship-between-living-stream-ministry-and-the-local-churches,the-relationship-of-living-stream-ministry-to-the-ministry-and-the-work,dcp]]

Share:

Apostles and Elders

(see also Church Administration, Authority, and Leadership)

While elders are responsible for the administration of a local church (Acts 14:23), those who function as apostles (i.e., the leading co-workers) labor among the churches (Acts 15:36; 2 Cor. 11:28) and bear the responsibility to speak to and adjust the shortcomings and deviations of the churches. Some have argued that once a local church is established the apostles have no right to “interfere” with any matters in the church. These article debunk that claim and examine the New Testament pattern of apostles and elders, including their proper relationship to one another.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[green-grad, questions-and-answers-about-apostles-and-co-workers,the-ongoing-relationship-between-the-apostles-and-the-local-churches,selected-ministry-on-the-apostles-ongoing-role-in-established-churches,a-historical-sketch-of-the-ministrys-teaching-on-the-practice-of-the-church-and-its-administration,being-faithful-to-our-brothers-complete-ministry-concerning-the-practice-of-the-church-2,being-faithful-to-our-brothers-complete-ministry-concerning-the-practice-of-the-church-1,genuine-local-churches-part-2-following-the-teaching-and-leading-of-the-apostles]]

Share:

Avoiding Mistakes in Administering the Church

In God’s governmental arrangement the elders are responsible for the administration of a local church (Acts 14:23. Some have argued that with respect to its administration each local church is absolutely independent, or autonomous. The argument has even been made that the elders have unchallengeable authority over the affairs of their respective churches. These articles correct these claims, and the related claims that the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee supports the absolute autonomy of local churches and the unbounded authority of elders in them. In so doing, they present a biblical view of the proper functioning of elders in a local church.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[gold-grad, no-thought-of-independence-in-the-bible,on-independent-administration,genuine-local-churches-part-1-neither-autonomous-nor-independent,a-balanced-view-of-the-elders-authority,caring-for-both-the-headship-of-christ-and-the-fellowship-of-the-body,properly-representing-the-lord-in-the-exercise-of-discipline,the-elders-avoiding-entanglement-in-right-and-wrong]]

Share:

Clarifying the Ground Of Oneness

(See also Our Relationship with Other Christians)

If we want to practice the church according to God’s design, we must return to the pattern in the New Testament, setting aside the current divided situation among the members of the Body of Christ. This matter of how to carry out the church in a practical way has been obscured by 2000 years of Christian history and the loss of our visible oneness. These articles examine what the Bible lays out as the basis for establishing churches and some common unscriptural misaimings.

Note: We have chosen to list all seven articles on the ground of oneness for completeness and clarity, but readers new to the subject may want to read (1), (7), (6), (2) and (5), in that order. (3) and (4) deal with particular misaimings concerning the practice of the church.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-1-the-genuine-ground-of-the-church-according-to-the-teaching-and-practice-of-the-new-testament,assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-2-diligently-keeping-the-oneness-requiring-a-local-ground,assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-3-was-the-church-in-jerusalem-a-regional-church,assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-4-are-house-churches-biblical,assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-5-gods-choice-versus-doing-what-is-right-in-our-own-eyes,assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-6-the-ground-of-the-church-being-for-the-building-up-of-the-body-of-christ,assailing-the-ground-of-oneness-7-the-identifying-characteristics-of-a-genuine-local-church-and-the-forbidden-grounds-of-division-according-to-the-scriptures,concerning-the-boundary-of-a-local-church]]

Share:

Knowing the Function of the Ministry

The ministry of the new covenant is a crucial factor in the building up of the churches as the Body of Christ as evidenced by the gifts to the Body in Ephesians 4:11-12 and “the joints of the rich supply” in verse 16. As believers we need to see:

    • Christ (Matt. 16:16),
    • the church, the Body of Christ (v. 18), and
    • the ministry through which the Lord builds up His Body.

The following articles look at the ministry of the new covenant and some of the ways Satan would use to cut us off from the rich supply the Lord affords through it.


[BEGIN LINE]
[[blue-grad, the-one-unique-new-testament-ministry,genuine-ministers-of-the-new-covenant,concerning-having-one-publication-work,following-the-vision-or-following-a-man,the-minister-of-the-age-not-infallibility,does-the-ministry-replace-the-bible]]

Share:

Love—The Basis and Power of Authority

Some saints, including some leading ones, may have a wrong concept concerning the exercise of authority based on cultural traditions and natural concepts, not the Word of God or the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. Improperly exercising authority misrepresents both the ministry’s teaching and the local churches as a whole. The ministry in the Lord’s recovery presents the matter of authority in a thorough and balanced way, but some, lacking such a proper understanding, may exercise authority improperly, damaging the church and the saints and causing the ministry to be blamed (2 Cor. 6:3). In The Elders’ Management of the Church, Brother Lee shows the way that authority should be exercised, using the relationship between husbands and wives as described in Ephesians 5:25 as a basis. Verses 22-24 speak of the wife’s submission to her husband, but verse 25 does not speak of a husband ruling over his wife. Rather, it says, “Husbands, love your wives even as Christ also loved the church and gave Himself up for her.” In a chapter titled “How to Be an Authority,” Brother Lee explained:

The way this matter is presented is quite unusual. It says that the wives have to submit to their husbands. We know that the other side of submission is domination, yet God never charges the husbands to dominate over their wives. He only charges them to love their wives. The husband is an authority; he is the head. But how should the husband behave as the head? How should he behave as the authority? Ephesians 5 clearly shows that the way is in love. (199)

Christ loved the church and gave Himself up for her. In the same way, a husband should love his wife and give himself up for her. It is an ugly thing for a husband to demand submission from his wife. Furthermore, the more the husband demands, the less his wife may be inclined to honor and submit to him. Rather, if a man genuinely loves his wife and gives himself up for her, this will influence her to follow his lead in the family. It is the same for those who bear responsibility to represent the Lord’s authority in the church. For brothers bearing responsibility to claim authority in order to exercise authority is not the Lord’s way and does not work:

In some local churches I have seen brothers who act as elders by putting on a front. They say, “Oh, I am an elder!” They assume an elder’s bearing and speak with an elder’s tone. I must tell you that there is nothing more ugly in the church than to see such a thing. Please remember that the amount of love a person has is the amount of authority he possesses. A person can only exercise authority over those he loves. Without love there will be no basis for authority… Maternal love is the basis for a mother to exercise her authority over her children. Without love there is no ground for exercising authority. Therefore, we must see that the degree of love there is in a person is the degree of authority he can exercise. Love is the basis of authority and the power behind it.

It never works for an elder to try to assume authority in the church by force. Not only will this not be pleasing in the eyes of men, but it will have no confirmation from the Holy Spirit. You can assume your authority, but the Holy Spirit will not be there. You can only be an authority on one basis, and that is in love. If you genuinely love the brothers and sisters, the love itself will become the control, and it will become your authority over others. (200-201)

If a brother genuinely loves the saints and the church and gives himself up for them, the saints will spontaneously honor him and follow his lead. The brother’s love and self-sacrifice becomes the authority to take the lead among the saints. Thus, Brother Lee said, “Strictly speaking, to be an authority, as we put it, is simply love. You have to love the church, to love the brothers and sisters. This love will then become your authority” (201).

This is not to say that there is no need for authority in the church. Nor is it to give ground to any form of public airing of grievances, even in cases where authority is exercised improperly. The New Testament gives us clear patterns of how problems in the church should be addressed (Matt. 18:15-20; 1 Cor. 1:10; 1 Tim. 5:19). The church is the place on the earth where the Lord’s authority must be realized and properly represented. Still we must realize that just as Christ established His authority in the church by loving her and giving Himself up for her, so those who represent Him must conform to the same pattern.

The elders should realize that, while there is the need of proper authority in the management of the church, and without it there cannot be a proper management of the church, yet in being the authority, the elders must turn their authority into love. It should appear to others that authority is completely gone and that everything is love. Love is authority transformed, in much the same way that the body of the Lord Jesus was God transformed. He never caused others to feel that He was God. On the contrary, He caused others to feel that He was fully a man. In the same principle, those who are the authority should not cause others to feel that they are the authority. On the contrary, they should cause others to feel that everything is absolutely a matter of love. (203)

The elders are responsible, from time to time, to administer discipline. On this point Brother Lee drew on Ephesians 6, which shows that parents, and particularly fathers, are authorities in the family. Verse 1 says, “Children, obey your parents in the Lord, for this is right.” Verse 4 addresses the fathers, saying, “And fathers, do not provoke your children to anger, but nurture them in the discipline and admonition of the Lord.” To exercise discipline without provoking the one being disciplined to anger also requires love. Speaking of these verses, Brother Lee said, “We can see one thing clearly here: God appoints us to be the authority, yet He does not want us to take the way of discipline. In a family, if the parents lack love toward their children but apply strict discipline only, surely the result will not be good” (200). Without love discipline provokes anger. Hebrews 12:6a says, “For whom the Lord loves He disciplines.” Here love precedes discipline. The discipline issues out of love. Love thus becomes the basis for discipline, and discipline becomes the expression of love. God is love (1 John 4:8, 16), so to be without love is to be without God, who is the source of all authority. Thus, discipline without love misrepresents God’s authority. To exercise authority without love is to usurp Christ’s headship and to beat our fellow slaves (Matt. 24:49).

In chapter 6 of The Elders’ Management of the Church, Brother Lee referenced other passages in the Scripture to show different aspects of how to be an authority—in spirit, in resurrection, in patience, with discernment, and in coordination. Each of these aspects is vital, and the saints, especially those who bear responsibility in the church or any aspect of the service in the church, should read them with prayer and much consideration. Yet the largest portion of Brother Lee‘s speaking in this chapter concerns being an authority in love. Ephesians, the most crucial book in the Bible concerning the church, speaks of the heading up of all things in Christ and of Christ being made Head over all things to the church (1:10, 22). It also speaks of all the believers growing up into Christ the Head in all things (4:15). These are matters related to God’s authority, which is vested in Christ (Matt. 28:18; Acts 2:36; 1 Tim. 6:15). Yet this same book mentions love nineteen times. In Ephesians 4:15, where Paul says that “we may grow up into Him in all things, who is the Head, Christ,” he also gives the condition that enables this growth to happen—“holding to truth in love.” Holding to truth in love issues in growing up into Christ the Head in all things which in turn issues in the Body building itself up in love through the mutual supply of life among the members (v. 16). Where the love of Christ is expressed and the truth is upheld, there the Body of Christ is built up and there the genuine authority of God in Christ is manifest.

Share:

The Source of Authority—The Lord’s Presence

Acts 15 and Matthew 18 show us a critical point concerning authority, namely that authority derives from the Lord’s presence. This has great significance in our practice of fellowship and prayer. Acts 15 is the unique record of a gathering of elders and co-workers regarding a problem troubling the churches; Matthew 18:18-20 shows us how saints should pray in response to a specific problem within a local church.

In Acts 15:6 the apostles gathered with the elders in Jerusalem to address a matter that was troubling the Gentile churches, that is, the Judaizers’ insistence that the Gentile believers must be circumcised to be saved. Verse 7 begins, “And when much discussion had taken place, Peter rose up…” This indicates that those present were free to discuss the matter openly. However, from the moment that Peter rose up, the atmosphere in the meeting changed. What is important in our consideration here is not what the issue was, what Peter said, or what the ultimate decision was but the way in which Peter, Barnabas, and Paul conducted themselves and what their speaking brought in. In speaking on this matter, Brother Nee observed:

The most important thing in reading the Bible is to touch the spirit of the Bible. When Peter stood up to speak at that time, he did not debate at all. Once you get involved with the debate, you are not qualified to be a leader, nor are you qualified to be one in authority. One in authority does not contend with people. Once you contend, you lose your position. (CWWN, vol. 51: Church Affairs, 150)

Peter simply reported how God had worked when he visited the household of Cornelius and spoke to those gathered there, where it was God Himself who had freely given the Holy Spirit to a group of Gentiles (vv. 7-8; Acts 10). After his speaking, verse 15:12 says, “All the multitude became silent.” Brother Nee commented:

Brothers, the Bible has its spirit, and you must touch that spirit in order to grasp that book. Peter simply presented his points without being affected or losing his dignity. He was like a person in authority, simply speaking forth these things. I hope you would see that in a conference of the church, if you slip into arguments, you will become like the others and be disqualified from making decisions. (151)

The speaking of Barnabas and Paul is likewise striking. Brother Nee describes the scene and their speaking in this way:

Barnabas then stood up to speak, and Paul also stood up to speak. We need to pay special attention to the fact that when these two brothers stood up to testify, they had to be very serious before God. We must again try to touch their spirit. These two brothers definitely did not stand up to speak clamorously or lightly; they spoke with weight. We must understand the situation at that time. When Barnabas and Paul stood up to speak, their aim was to stop the contention, not to generate it. Contention is stopped by means of God’s presence. In this kind of meeting, idle talk must be stopped. Idle talk is stopped not by our speaking but by bringing people before the Lord. If we are not this kind of person, such a conference will break down. It is useless to imitate. When Barnabas and Paul stood up to speak, everyone was silent. When these two brothers stood up to speak, they could bring others before God. The other brothers were their seniors, but due to these two brothers standing up to speak, everyone was brought before God, and God’s presence was brought into the meeting. The noise of debate stopped, and everyone listened quietly to what God had done through their hands. (151-152)

After Peter, Barnabas, and Paul spoke the presence of the Lord was brought in, the brothers’ sense of the Lord’s mind in this matter was made clear, and the discord was dispelled. Concerning the gathering Luke uses the expression “it seemed good” three times:

Acts 15Verse 22: It then seemed good to the apostles and the elders with the whole church…

Verse 25: It seemed good to us, having become of one accord…

Verse 28: For it seemed good to the Holy Spirit and to us…

What was the factor that brought in the one accord among the apostles and elders? It was the presence of the Holy Spirit. What brought in the Holy Spirit’s presence? It was the speaking of Peter, Paul, and Barnabas. There is no indication in the text of Acts 15 when the presence of the Lord came in, but the fact that the letter to Antioch from the apostles, elders, and the church in Jerusalem that communicated the outcome of the gathering could say, “It seemed good to the Holy Spirit and to us.” This indicates that the Holy Spirit was present with those gathered and brought them under the Lord’s headship, resulting in their being attuned in the same mind and in the same opinion (cf. 1 Cor. 1:10). Thus, Brother Lee said emphatically, “This presence of the Holy Spirit is the authority for judgment in the church” (CWWL, 1960, vol. 2, 335).

Brother Lee was once asked, “What is the difference between having fellowship with one another and voicing our opinion?” The first sentence of Brother Lee’s response is very significant: “The purpose of fellowship is to gain the Lord’s presence” (CWWL, 1989, vol. 3, 141). Why is this the case? Because true fellowship in the Body always passes through Christ, the Head, whose headship is practically realized in the fellowship of the Holy Spirit bringing us the very presence of the Lord. Fellowship brings us into the presence of the Lord, and the presence of the Lord brings authority. This is why we have the experience that when we seek fellowship concerning a matter, we are often made clear even if we receive no direct answer to our question or concern. If that fellowship brings us into the presence of the Lord, His presence brings us under His heading up.

For this reason, when we come together to fellowship about a matter, what is crucial is that we seek to be in the presence of the Lord in order to represent Him.

The church is not a place where people express their opinion or where they debate. It is a place where God is feared, His lordship is honored, and His presence rests and is represented. Only when such is found is there the church.

To repeat, in the church there is God’s presence and the representation of this presence. This representation is the authority. (CWWL, 1960, vol. 2, 195)

This is why we should never argue or defend our opinion, even inwardly. To do so is to be in the self apart from the presence of the Lord. It is to insult the headship of Christ. Thus, Brother Lee said, “If we are a responsible one, we may fellowship regarding our feeling with the brothers and sisters. However, no matter what the brothers feel to do, we should not argue nor have any feeling whatsoever. This requires that our self, that is, our natural man, be dealt with” (CWWL, 1957, vol. 1, 595; see also CWWL, 1978, vol. 3, 437-438; 1981, vol. 1, 572).

The same principle is true in prayer, as Matthew 18:18 shows us. Verse 18 speaks of saints exercising the kingdom authority to bind and loose through prayer. Verse 19 shows us a precondition for such prayer being answered—“if two of you are in harmony.” Verse 20 makes it clear that this is more than mere agreement. There it says, “Where there are two or three gathered into My name, there am I in their midst.” The requirement is to be gathered out of ourselves and into the Lord’s name, which is His person. Where that happens, the Lord’s presence is there—“there am I.” Concerning this passage, Brother Lee said:

When we are gathered into the Lord’s name, we are gathered into His person. Then surely we have Him with us. We have His presence, and His presence is the authority of the kingdom of the heavens for us to deal with a sinning brother. Actually, we do not deal with the brother but with the Devil and with the demons. If we attempt to exercise the kingdom authority without the Lord’s presence, it will not work. Exercising the authority of the kingdom of the heavens to bind and loose must be done in the Lord’s presence.

The context of Matthew 18 indicates that the reality of the church is the Lord’s presence. The church must be certain that it has the presence of the Lord as its reality; otherwise, it has no genuine authority. The real and practical authority of the church is the Lord’s presence. (The Conclusion of the New Testament: The Church, the Kingdom, and the New Jerusalem, Messages 189-264, 2077-2078)

All of this is very applicable to our practice of the church life. We should not presume, because we occupy a certain position, to exercise authority either in fellowship or in prayer. This is offensive to the Lord. Rather, we should exercise to be in His presence and to be one with Him to bring those around us and matters of concern into His presence. This will honor His headship and allow Him to work out many things in and through the church, according to His deep and multifarious wisdom (Rom. 11:33; Eph. 3:10).

Share:

Christ, the Cross, and the Church

The Apostle Paul’s ministry shows us Christ as the center of God’s economy, the cross as the center of God’s operation in His economy, and the church, the Body of Christ, as the product of God’s economy (1 Cor. 1:23; Gal. 3:1; Eph. 3:8-10). Realizing this has profound implications for our practice of the church life. It constrains us to rely on nothing other than Christ and His cross to build up the church or to solve problems that arise in the practice of the church life.

How the Lord Builds the Church

These three matters—Christ, the cross, and the church—are the focus of the second half of Matthew 16, beginning from Peter’s declaration that Jesus is “the Christ, the Son of the living God” (v. 16). The Lord responded, “And I say to you also that you are Peter, and upon this rock I will build My church” (v. 18a). Following this Matthew wrote, “From that time Jesus began to show to His disciples that He must go to Jerusalem and suffer many things from the elders and chief priests and scribes and be killed and on the third day be raised” (v. 21). Then in verses 24 and 25 the Lord told His disciples, “If anyone wants to come after Me, let him deny himself and take up his cross and follow Me. For whoever wants to save his soul-life shall lose it; but whoever loses his soul-life for My sake shall find it.” Many times we focus on the unveiling of who Christ is and of His intention to build the church in this chapter, and we certainly treasure these matters. However, this passage also reveals the unique way that the church is produced and built up in two stages.

First, to produce the church the Lord had to pass through death and enter into resurrection (v. 21). In The Exercise of the Kingdom for the Building Up of the Church [Exercise], Brother Witness Lee explained, “The church comes into existence through the crucifixion and resurrection of Christ… If the Lord had not denied Himself and gone to the cross, He could not have been resurrected, and there would have been no church” (26). In the following message he added, “Unless Christ had been crucified and resurrected, He could not build up the church. The church came into existence through His death and resurrection” (29).

Second, for the building up of the church we must follow Him through denying the self, taking up the cross, and losing the soul-life (vv. 22-24). As Brother Lee said, “We must follow after Him. This means that we must deny ourselves as He did and must allow ourselves to be crucified as He did. Without this, it is impossible for the church to be built up” (26). It is through our identification with the crucified Christ that we can say in reality, “Not I but Christ” (Gal. 2:20). Only through such persons can the Lord build the church.

Human opinions and methods cannot build up the church because the church is something absolutely in resurrection, and only by applying the cross can we be ushered into resurrection. Without the Lord’s death and resurrection the church could not exist. In the same way, without our following Him by denying the self, taking up the cross, and losing the soul-life the church cannot be built up.

Dealing with Problems in the Church Life

What the Lord revealed in Matthew 16 concerning denying the self, taking up the cross, and losing the soul-life is realized in the practical church life. It is in the practical church life that we can apply Christ and His cross to the problems that arise. The principle of the cross is found in the Lord’s prayer in the garden of Gethsemane as He faced the ordeal of His crucifixion: “Not as I will, but as You will” (26:39b; Mark 14:36; Luke 22:42). Today, in order to be according to God’s will, we must apply the fact of our having been crucified with Him by bearing the cross so that we may live in His resurrection and walk in newness of life (Gal. 2:20; Rom. 6:4-6).

What, then, is the will of God? The will of God is to build up the church as the Body of Christ with all of the saints through their subjective experience of Christ (Eph. 1:9; 3:9-11, 16-19). A major aspect of this subjective experience is letting the mind of Christ—the mind of a God-man who submitted to the will of God by humbling Himself and becoming obedient unto the death of a cross—be in us (Phil. 2:5-8). It is significant that the Apostle Paul spoke of this in an epistle to an otherwise good church that was marred by friction between saints, causing them not to think the same thing or have the same love toward one another (4:2; 2:2). We need to realize that not only is the universal church, the Body of Christ, God’s will but also that all of the brothers and sisters the Lord has put us with are God’s will. If we exercise our own preference among the saints, we are outside of God’s will and are finished with the building. Thus, Brother Lee said:

If I say that I do not like a certain brother and will no longer spend any time with him, I spontaneously stop bearing the cross. As soon as I forsake the cross, the building ceases. The church has not been built over the past nineteen centuries because not many have been willing to take up the cross… We must bear the church and we must bear all of the saints, whether we like them or not. If we have our preference, we are not bearing the cross, and there can be no building. (Exercise, 36)
Many are able to get along with the church but not with some of the saints. If this is your situation, you are finished with the building. (37)

We need to see that Christ and His cross are God’s unique way of dealing with problems in the church life. It was to the church in Corinth, a church beset with many serious problems, that Paul wrote:

For the word of the cross is to those who are perishing foolishness, but to us who are being saved it is the power of God. (1 Cor. 1:18) But to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the power of God and the wisdom of God. (v. 24) For I did not determine to know anything among you except Jesus Christ, and this One crucified. (2:2)

In his Life-study of 1 Corinthians Brother Lee told us that in this epistle “Paul makes it very clear that the unique solution to all problems in the church is Christ and His cross” (35-36). Following this he said:

According to the human way, negotiation is the means of solving problems or resolving entanglements. A brother and his wife may attempt to solve problems in this way. However, this is not the divine way. God’s way is to supply you with Christ and terminate you by the cross. Whenever there is a problem in the family life or in the church life, the natural man may immediately try to negotiate and solve the problem through conversation. By the Lord’s mercy I can testify that whenever I face this temptation, deep within I have the sense that there is no need for me to talk or negotiate. My only need is to go to the cross and be terminated. Then Christ comes in with the supply to solve every problem. This is God’s way to solve all the problems in the church life.

We should pay our full attention to Christ. He is our unique preference and choice. Furthermore, we need to have a proper understanding concerning the cross, realizing that the purpose of the cross is to terminate whatever we are. We need to take this cross and enjoy Christ. This is the unique solution to all problems in the church. To the Jews the cross is an offense, and to the nations it is foolishness. But to us, God’s called ones, it is truly God’s power and God’s wisdom (1:24). (47-48)

In The Exercise of the Kingdom for the Building Up of the Church Brother Lee points out that the Lord took up the cross willingly and that we should do the same (31-33). This matches the principle in Paul’s epistles that we must take the initiative to apply our co-crucifixion with Christ by the Spirit (Rom. 8:13; Gal. 5:24-25). We must take the initiative, but the effectiveness of the death of Christ is in the Spirit.

Consider the matter of offenses, real or imagined, between saints. Such offenses are common in the practical church life, and it may seem impossible to get past them. They can run deep, especially in times of turmoil, and be used by Satan to cause saints to stumble. There is something in the self, in the soul-life, of fallen man that is unwilling to forgive and often feeds on offenses. But what is impossible with man is possible with God (Luke 18:27). Here we should take heed to Paul’s word to the Hebrew believers: “Looking away unto Jesus, the Author and Perfecter of our faith, who for the joy set before Him endured the cross” (Heb. 12:2a). We should consider the joy set before us—the enjoyment of Christ (2 Pet. 1:8), the building up of His Body (Eph. 4:12), the accomplishment of His eternal purpose (3:10-11), His return (Titus 2:13), and the reward awaiting His faithful ones (Heb. 10:35). This will strengthen us to bear the cross not as criminals but joyfully. Moreover, we should look away to the ascended God-man, Jesus Christ, who has pioneered the way into glory through the cross (2:10; 6:10; Phil. 2:9). We may also seek the proper fellowship of life from those in the Body with the standing and capacity to supply us and render help (1 Cor. 1:11). This will strengthen us to put away the encumbrance of offenses (cf., Heb. 12:1). This does not mean that we overlook wrongdoing. Rather, it means that we allow the Lord to operate in us so that our motive and way of dealing with wrongdoings is pure. To do this requires much and thorough prayer through the exercise of our spirit, turning our hearts absolutely to Him, so that our mind can be renewed and attuned to the Lord’s mind (Eph. 4:23; 2 Cor. 3:16; 1 Cor. 1:10) and our will can be aligned with God’s will (Luke 22:41-42; Acts 1:14). In this way we can be experientially one with Christ in His crucifixion and resurrection that we may be those in and through whom He can carry out the building up of His Body, the church (Eph. 4:15-16).

Share:

Holding Marriage in Honor

Marriage is a great matter in the Bible. The record of God’s restoration of His creation in Genesis 1 and 2 consummates with the marriage of one man, Adam, and one woman, Eve. The Scriptures also conclude with a marriage as the fulfillment of God’s eternal economy (Rev. 19:7; 21:9-11). God instituted marriage for two purposes—humanity’s propagation and the carrying out of His interests on the earth (Gen. 1:26-28; 2:18-25; 4:1). As believers, we should care for God’s intent for marriage. We should hold it in honor and honor our spouse as a co-heir of the grace of life (1 Pet. 3:7). However, today few marriages are practiced in a way that serves God’s interests according to His original ordination. In recent years Satan’s attack on the institution of marriage has intensified. As a result, it is common to completely disregard the reasons for which God ordained marriage. Instead, people practice fornication apart from marriage, readily end marriages that are no longer desired, reject having children out of selfishness, or participate in strange unions. These deviations from God’s ordination for marriage are widely applauded.

Since the fall of man Satan has organized everything related to man’s existence into a system in order to occupy and control man, making him unsuitable for the fulfillment of God’s purpose. Even marriage has become part of this system. As a result, marriage has been reoriented from serving man’s existence for God’s purpose to a means of serving man’s lusts and desires. Today’s carefree attitude toward separation and divorce is the issue of the worldly systematization of marriage. When their lusts and desires are no longer satisfied by their marriage, many feel free to divorce their spouse and pursue their desires elsewhere. Brother Lee observed that “toward the end of this age, this situation will be intensified and will reach its climax during the Lord’s parousia” (Life-study of Matthew, 736). As the people of God, we are not for marriage in and of itself or for its rehabilitation in society; we are for the Lord and His interest, and our focus is on cooperating with Him for the fulfillment of His economy. Hence, we must recognize that our living and service to the Lord very much depend on how we handle marriage.

In Hebrews 13:4 we are charged to “let marriage be held in honor among all, and the bed undefiled; for fornicators and adulterers God will judge.” At the time this epistle was written, marriage had already become fully systematized, being abused for the pursuit of man’s personal interests, and held in dishonor. Here the command to hold marriage in honor is specifically related to not committing fornication or adultery (cf. 1 Thes. 4:3-5; 1 Cor. 6:18). The Lord Jesus said that those who divorce for any cause other than fornication and marry another commit adultery (Matt. 19:9). Both divorce and adultery dishonor one’s spouse to the uttermost and disregard God’s purpose in ordaining marriage. If we consider marriage as part of God’s ordination for the fulfillment of His eternal purpose, we will hold marriage in all honor and, as a result, will realize the need to bestow honor upon our spouses.

Honoring Our Spouses

Peter wrote of the honor a husband should show to his wife: “Husbands, in like manner dwell together with them according to knowledge, as with the weaker female vessel, assigning honor to them as also to fellow heirs of the grace of life, that your prayers may not be hindered” (1 Pet. 3:7). Thus, he charged a husband to appreciate the preciousness and worth of his wife, assigning honor to her accordingly and considering her as a co-heir of the grace of life, not as a lesser party in the marriage due to her comparative weakness. Expounding this verse, Brother Lee observed:

Submission always goes with honor. If you do not submit to a particular person, how can you honor that one? This would be impossible. Honoring someone always implies a certain degree of submission. As we have already pointed out, this is a word of balance. Husbands must honor their wives, and, no doubt, the wives must also honor their husbands. (Life-study of 1 Peter, 209)

In the same message he said:

Some may think that saying that husbands are to be subject to their wives contradicts the word that wives should subject themselves to their husbands [Eph. 5:22]. Actually, as we will see, this is not at all a matter of contradiction; it is a matter of balance. Neither Peter nor Paul says clearly that husbands should be subject to their wives. But Peter says that husbands should honor their wives, and Paul, that husbands should love their wives. In Ephesians 5:21 Paul says, “Being subject to one another in the fear of Christ.” This seems to indicate that a husband and a wife are to be subject to each other. (205-206)

It is shameful for a husband to deprive his wife of the honor that is due her and yet expect her submission. For a husband to assign honor to his wife is for him to submit himself to his wife. Hence, honor and submission are mutually exercised in a proper marriage.

Peter charged husbands to honor their wives according to knowledge, a knowledge that is spiritual, not secular. Brother Lee characterized such spiritual knowledge in the following way:

If we have this knowledge, we shall know that God created woman the weaker vessel simply for the nature of the marriage relationship. If there is to be a proper marriage relationship, both parties should not be equally strong. One party should be stronger than the other. Therefore, the brothers should not think that the weakness of their wives is something to be despised. No, we must realize that our wives’ weakness was created by God specifically for the purpose of the marriage relationship. Therefore, we need to understand the reason for the weakness of the female, and we need to understand the nature of the marriage relationship. This is to have our married life governed not by the knowledge from human education but by spiritual knowledge. (207-208)

For the sake of the marriage relationship God ordained that the woman would be the weaker vessel. That the wife is weaker implies that the husband is weak also. All human beings are frail vessels (Psa. 78:39; 103:14; Isa. 40:6-8). Therefore, there is no basis for a husband to despise his wife for her relative weakness. Elsewhere Brother Lee said:

Although the husband should be sympathetic with his wife according to knowledge because she is weaker, he should not despise her for her weakness. On the contrary, he should assign honor to her because she is one flesh with him and a fellow heir of the grace of life. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1932-1949, vol. 3, 613)

Such a beautiful balance of mutually exercised honor and submission brings to the marriage a peaceful and enjoyable atmosphere and enables a husband and wife to be fellow heirs of the grace of life.

Fellow Heirs of the Grace of Life

Brother Lee called becoming fellow heirs of the grace of life the “most outstanding point” in Peter’s treatment of marriage. A marriage according to God’s ordination produces co-inheritors of the grace of life (1 Pet. 3v. 7)—the Triune God processed to be the indwelling Spirit supplying the believers with the riches of the divine life. Brother Lee continued:

A husband is the authority in God’s ordination, and a wife must submit to this authority; in the old creation God made the husband stronger and the wife weaker. Nevertheless, in God’s eyes a husband and wife are one person, and in His salvation a husband and wife are heirs together of the grace of life. Therefore, husbands should be sympathetic to their wives’ weaknesses on the one hand and assign honor to their wives on the other hand. (613)

While all believers are heirs of the riches of the Triune God as the grace of life, whether a husband and wife are co-heirs of the grace of life depends on their mutually honoring and submitting to each other. Furthermore, a husband and wife’s enjoyment of the grace of life brings into the marriage a life of mutual honoring and submission. Thus, the relationship between mutually honoring and submitting, on the one hand, and the enjoyment of the grace of life, on the other hand, becomes a cycle.

How the saints handle marriage has a great impact on the condition of a church. Brother Lee cautioned us, saying, “Whether a church is sound and healthy or loses its element and essence is very much dependent upon the marriage life. Do not consider the matter of marriage to be a light thing. We must hold it in honor” (Life-study of Hebrews, 613). We should not treat marriage as common, as those in the world do; it is something of God’s ordination. We should cultivate our relationship with our spouse as co-heirs of the grace of life and forsake the worldly view of marriage as being merely for self-gratification. In this way we can avoid the terrible damage of adultery and divorce, thus preserving ourselves and our spouse in a proper condition to participate in God’s move on the earth. May marriage be held in honor among all the saints in the Lord’s recovery for the strengthening of the churches and the fulfillment of God’s economy in the present age.

 

Share:

The Kind of Person the Lord Can Use to Turn the Age

A central goal of the Lord’s move in His recovery is to produce overcomers so that He can return to end this age and establish His kingdom (Rev. 12:10-11). If we aspire to be those who cooperate with the Lord for this purpose, we should pay attention to the kind of person the Lord used to usher in God’s kingdom in Israel. That person was Samuel. Concerning Samuel there are two particular points that we should pay attention to. First, he lived as a Nazarite. Second, he maintained such a living under God’s government even in the midst of turmoil.

Living as a Nazarite

Samuel was born of the tribe of Levi but not of the house of Aaron. Only the house of Aaron was ordained by God to serve Him as priests (1 Chron. 6:33-38; Exo. 40:12-15). Samuel ministered to the Lord as a priest not by birth but by the Nazarite vow (Num. 6:1-2). To be a Nazarite is not a matter of status or position but of voluntary consecration to the Lord. From his youth Samuel lived as such a one, separated to God and caring only for His interest.

In the consecration of a Nazarite there are four items of separation. First, a Nazarite should not consume anything “that is produced by the grape vine, from the seed even to the skin” (vv. 3-4). This means that a Nazarite does not partake of the intoxicating wine of worldly enjoyments but enjoys Christ, the tree of life, as his life supply. Second, a Nazarite could not allow his hair to be cut (v. 5). That was a sign that a Nazarite was to be absolutely subject to God and to all deputy authorities appointed by Him. Third, a Nazarite was not to be defiled by death, even the death of his close relatives (vv. 6-7). This means that we need to be separated from the natural affection that easily deadens us. Fourth, a Nazarite was to be careful not to be affected by the sudden death of one beside Him (vv. 8-9). As Nazarites we should avoid being affected by brothers and sisters in the Lord who may have been deadened by negative things such as gossip, criticism, and rumors. When confronted with these things, we need to care for life, not only for right and wrong. Sometimes saints who were positive, going on, and growing in the Lord are derailed and lose heart for the Lord and His interest by touching death through other brothers and sisters whom they are close to. The New Testament contains many cases of ones who began well but stumbled due to entanglement in one of these four categories, including Demas (2 Tim. 4:10), Barnabas (Acts 15:39), and all those in Asia (2 Tim. 1:15). Only if we ourselves remain in the way of life will we be able to render proper care to any who have been affected by death.

The essence of the Nazarite vow was not to do something for God but to be pure toward Him, separated unto Him as one under His rule and headship. Samuel did not do great feats for God, yet he was the one used by God to bring in His kingdom. Brother Lee contrasted Samuel with Samson, a Nazarite who lost his separation (Judg. 16:17-19):

Samson also was a Nazarite by his mother’s vow, but he was very different from Samuel. When the Bible speaks of Samson and the other judges, it often says that the Spirit of God rushed upon them (Judg. 14:6, 19). But there is no such word about Samuel. A Nazarite does not need rushing power; rather, a Nazarite needs a heart that is a reflection of God’s heart. Unlike Samson, Samuel did not gain a mighty victory by slaughtering a great number of others. On the contrary, Samuel was a Nazarite for God’s interest. (Life-study of 1 & 2 Samuel, 46)

Today the Lord desires to return, to end this age, and to bring in His millennial kingdom. Based on the example of Samuel, what He needs are not those who do great things in His name but those who live a life of voluntary consecration, separated from all other things to Him for His interest, which is the building up of the Body of Christ as the reality of the kingdom (Matt. 16:18-19; Rom. 14:17; cf., Matt. 7:21-23).

Remaining under the Government of God in the Midst of Turmoil

Samuel remained under the government of God, maintaining his Nazarite vow and serving the Lord in purity in the midst of a degraded situation, thereby becoming a channel God could use to restore a proper order under His headship to afford Him a way to establish His kingdom. Samuel learned many things while he was under the custody of Eli, even though Eli himself was not right before the Lord. Positively, he learned to minister before Jehovah and listen to God’s speaking (1 Sam. 2:11b, 18-19; 3:1-10). Negatively, he saw the deterioration of the Aaronic priesthood (2:12-36). He witnessed the ark being usurped by the elders of Israel and then captured by the Philistines, God’s severe judgment on the house of Eli for its corruption, and the glory of God departing from the Israelites (ch. 4). Rather than weaken Samuel in his future priesthood, these things became sober warnings to him.

Moreover, Samuel was not stumbled, nor did he rebel against Jehovah or any of his deputy authorities. He did not seek to overthrow the house of Eli or the Aaronic priesthood, despite the rottenness he observed firsthand. Rather, he maintained his Nazarite vow, keeping himself under the Lord’s headship and away from death, living before the Lord and receiving His revelation by His word (3:19-21). Thus, Brother Lee said:

As a priest Samuel replaced and terminated, in a sense, the stale Aaronic priesthood. He did not rebel against the house of Aaron, and he did not usurp anything of the house of Aaron. There was no revolution; there was only revelation. As Samuel was growing, God arranged the environment to perfect him and to build up his capacity to do everything that was needed for God to change the age. In the recovery the Lord will never allow any kind of rebellion, but He will bring in many changes, adjustments, and improvements, not through rebellion but through revelation. (28-29)

Brother Lee described Samuel as one who “behaved, worked, ministered, and served altogether in a mild, moderate, and proper way of revelation” (39-40). Samuel never acted independently of the Lord but only at His direction. In other words, he did not act according to his own opinion but acted absolutely according to the Lord’s leading. When the people of Israel lamented after Jehovah, it was Samuel, in his function as a prophet of God, who charged them to show that they were returning with all their heart to Jehovah by removing all the foreign gods and idols from their midst, directing their hearts to Jehovah, and serving only Him (7:3). If he had abandoned his own purity toward the Lord, he could not have been used by God to restore His people when they repented. When the children of Israel failed, he told them, “Moreover as for me, far be it from me that I would sin against Jehovah by ceasing to pray for you, but I will instruct you in the good and right way” (12:23). Because he was such a person, Samuel became a pivotal figure in the history of Israel (Jer. 15:1), functioning both as the last judge (1 Sam. 7:6, 15-17) and the one who, at the Lord’s direction, ushered in the kingdom by anointing first Saul (9:16; 10:1) and then David (16:12-13) to be kings over Israel.

The lessons here are applicable to us today. Suppose we see something that is not right in our local church, even related to the elders. How will we respond? In such circumstances we must be desperate before the Lord to be one with Him, living and acting under His ruling. This is not to say that saints should cover up wrongdoings that damage others or damage the church. Rather, it means that we must look to the Lord so that in everything we will take Him as our life, as our way, and as our Head, even in dealing with wrongdoings and offenses. We should not give vent to our anger, knowing that “the wrath of man does not accomplish the righteousness of God” (James 1:20). The Lord may lead us to pray or to seek proper fellowship. If we give ground to our own reactions and opinions, we may forfeit the opportunity to be used to bring in God’s kingdom. We must deal with every hint of rebellion in our being, knowing that rebellion has its source in God’s enemy. If we are not under God’s ruling in dealing with problems in the church, how can we be used by the Lord to establish His rule so that He can clear up the problems caused by man’s rebellion (cf. 2 Cor. 10:6, note 2; 1 Pet. 4:17)?

These principles are manifested also in the call to the overcomers in each of the epistles to the seven churches in Revelation 2 and 3. Some of the churches there were very degraded, but in no case did the Lord give any ground to rebellion. Rather, He charged the overcomers to be faithful to live in purity in the midst of the churches’ degradation in order to be qualified to receive the Lord’s reward at His return and to participate in His millennial kingdom.

First Samuel 10:25a says, “Then Samuel told the people the practice of the kingdom.” Just as he was able to call the people to direct their hearts to Jehovah and serve only Him because that was his condition already, so Samuel was able to speak to the people about the practice of the kingdom because he was already living such a life, a life under God’s ruling, caring only for His interest. This is the kind of person the Lord needs today. This is the kind of person we should aspire to be. Today the Lord as the Spirit is calling for us to be such people. May we be those who put away all encumbering thoughts and feelings, including offenses, and look away unto Him (Heb. 13:1) that we may take Him as our Head and care only for what pleases Him. In this way we can be His overcomers in this age who hasten His return to establish His kingdom.

Further reading: The Nazarite Vow; Life-study of 1 Samuel, messages 3-7; “Spiritual Principles, Life Lessons, and Holy Warnings Seen in the History of Samuel,” The Ministry of the Word, 26:2 (March 2022), 65-91; “How God Establishes His Kingdom,” The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Volume 47: The Orthodoxy of the Church & Authority and Submission, 147-153.

Share:

“Let Your Speech Be Always with Grace, Seasoned with Salt”

Public discourse in our society today is often characterized by extreme incivility and intemperance. The advent of the Internet and particularly social media has reinforced this trend. As those who have been purchased by the precious blood of Christ to partake of His holiness, we should resist this trend. Whether coming from a young person who is venting real or perceived grievances or from a leading one who is reviling others under the guise of “speaking frankly,” such utterances are unworthy of saints and defile both those who speak or write them and those who hear or read them.

The Bible sets a very high standard for the words that believers speak. Ephesians 4:29 says, “Let no corrupt word proceed out of your mouth, but only that which is good for building up, according to the need, that it may give grace to those who hear.” Paul’s word here indicates that our speaking must have four characteristics. First, it must contain no corrupt word. Second, it must be good for building up. Third, it must be according to the need. Fourth, it must give grace to those who hear. In his Life-study of Ephesians Brother Lee said of this verse:

The Greek word for corrupt signifies what is noxious, offensive, or worthless. Our conversation should not corrupt others, but should build them up. The church and every member of the church need the proper building up. This building up is accomplished primarily by our speaking. What proceeds out of our mouth should be that which is good for the building up of the church and all the saints.

Furthermore, the word out of our mouth should give grace to those who hear. Grace is God embodied in Christ as our enjoyment and supply. Our word should convey this as grace to others. The word that builds up others always ministers grace to the hearers. Our word should communicate God in Christ as enjoyment, imparting Christ to others as their life supply. (410)

In 4:16 Paul spoke of the Body building itself up in love by the mutual supply among the members, causing the growth of the Body. This mutual supply is the supply of life, which is the supply of grace out of our enjoyment of Christ. According to verse 29, our speaking should not tear down the church but should fit the saints’ need in their present situation to supply them with Christ that they may grow for the church’s building up (see The Vision, Practice, and Building Up of the Church as the Body of Christ, 116-117). The channel of this supply is our speaking words of grace that build up one another (cf. 1 Cor. 14:3, 5). The more we learn to be in the spirit and be ruled by the spirit, the more we will have the anointing and wisdom to speak words of grace to meet the present need. In such speaking, words that are noxious, offensive, or worthless have no place.

In Colossians 4:6 Paul wrote, “Let your speech be always with grace, seasoned with salt, that you may know how you ought to answer each one.” The word always is unambiguous and absolute; it means always, without exception. Here again we see that our speaking should always be with grace, that is, with the Christ we have experienced and enjoyed to be a supply to others. In this passage Paul added “seasoned with salt.” This expression is very meaningful and its pairing with grace is quite significant, as Brother Lee showed us:

What does the expression with grace, seasoned with salt mean? What is grace? The Scriptures reveal that grace is Christ (Gal. 2:20; 1 Cor. 15:10). And what is salt? Unlike honey or sugar, salt can be used to kill germs. The spiritual meaning of salt is the working of the cross to kill all the germs. Thus, for our word to be always with grace, seasoned with salt means that our word should always be filled with Christ and should always pass through the killing of the cross. (The Mystery of God and the Mystery of Christ, 20)

Dear saints, if we would practice this one thing—to exercise to have all our speaking filled with Christ and passing through the killing of the cross—many problems in the church life would be resolved. When problems arise, we are tempted to think that we are right and others are wrong and that we have the liberty to voice our opinion or give vent to our feelings. As a result, we may gossip, criticize, and argue, even stridently. We may not realize that such words are noxious, offensive, and worthless. They tear down rather than build up. They impart death rather than supply life. They are devoid of the element of Christ as grace and bear no taste of salt, the killing work of the cross. The Lord will never justify such speaking (cf. Matt. 12:36-37 and footnotes). We should neither speak nor receive such words.

The Bible charges us to all speak the same thing and even think the same thing (1 Cor. 1:10; Phil. 2:2). This is not some kind of outward conformity, robotic behavior, or rote performance. Rather, it is the issue of seeing the supremely preeminent Christ (Phil. 3:8-9). Such a seeing changes our thinking and reorients our living toward seeking Him for the building up of His Body. According to the book of Philippians, thinking the same thing means to seek to live and magnify Christ (1:20-21); to take the crucified and resurrected Christ as our pattern by working out our own salvation in cooperation with the inner operating God (2:5-9, 12-13); to gain Christ, be found in Christ, know Christ in His death and resurrection, and pursue Christ (3:8-10, 12,14); and to learn Him as the secret in our living in every circumstance (4:12-13). These things should saturate and permeate both our thinking and our speaking.

In Practical Lessons on the Experience of Life, Brother Lee devoted an entire chapter to “The Proper Speech for the Building Up of the Church” (211-223). He spoke at length about having our speech seasoned by “the killing element of the cross” and checking whether we have a pure motive, whether the Lord in our spirit is the source, and whether we have the proper position to speak. In his concluding word he said:

According to the lessons I have learned, the first thing we must be checked in is our speech. If we are truly willing to grow, the first thing the Lord must check is our talking, particularly our motive, the source, and our position. Whether or not it is right to say something depends on these three things. If we cannot get through these three points, we should forget about saying anything. We must be pure in motive, right in source, and proper in position; then we can say something. If we cannot get through one of the points, we must be checked. (222-223)

Later in this passage Brother Lee added, “May the word that we speak always be full of Christ, checked, controlled, and killed by the cross. We must learn this lesson; then we will see the growth, and we will realize the real building among us” (223).

For a brother or sister to cast off restraint and claim the right of free self-expression is not according to Christ. He said, “If anyone wants to come after Me, let him deny himself and take up his cross daily and follow Me” (Luke 9:23). Moreover, those who, in the name of “authority,” demean saints misrepresent the Lord. Matthew 24:49 speaks of one who “beats his fellow slaves.” Brother Nee said, “To beat is to usurp God’s disciplinary authority. Whenever you think you have special authority to rule over a fellow slave, you are beating. Matthew 23:8 says, ‘You are all brothers.’ To beat a brother also means to lose the ability for self-control” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Volume 15: Study on Matthew, 301). Brother Nee added, “If you hurt others with your words, or if you cause pain and suffering to others through your meanness or sarcasm, that is also to beat” (301). This does not annul the elders’ responsibility to administer discipline when it is needed. It does mean, however, that even in administering such discipline, the elders must be under the restraint of the cross, especially in their speaking. Referring to the story of the Good Samaritan in Luke 10, Brother Nee concluded, “We can only use oil and wine to heal wounds; we cannot perform surgery. God’s children already have enough sorrows. How can we add more painful wounds to them! Yet he who is proud and independent and has a temper finds it easy to beat others” (301). In the same vein Brother Lee said, “By His mercy and through His grace we must do the best not to beat the fellow slaves, the fellow believers. Do not criticize or murmur about them. Do not speak anything negative about them, because you do not have the time to do it. Your mouth was not made for criticizing but for speaking forth Christ” (The Way to Practice the Lord’s Present Move, 156). The same principle applies to all the saints. We should not take any excuse to demean others. We should rather seek to restore those who have stumbled (Matt. 18:15; Gal. 6:1). This does not mean that we cover up serious misdeeds that damage others, but even when we raise concerns about others’ conduct, our words and the way we speak them must express the One who is our life within and whom we represent (Col. 3:4; 2 Cor. 5:20).

This is not to say that we are made of marble, without any feeling. We will encounter situations that provoke us. In this Brother Lee gave us an excellent pattern:

Do not think that since I can give this message, I do not get angry. However, when I want to voice my resentment, a voice within me says, “Why are you angry? James 1:20 says that ‘the wrath of man does not accomplish the righteousness of God.’” I occasionally reason with God, saying, “Even so, this person has made me angry. Lord, let me be angry just this time.” But He says, “Calm down and pray,” and I have no choice but to kneel down and pray. Sometimes I am at a loss and can only say, “Lord, I am really angry.” This is a prayer. Do not think that such a prayer is poor. This kind of prayer can often lead me to be enlightened and repent to the Lord, saying, “Lord, be merciful to me and forgive me. I need the cleansing of Your precious blood.” After such a confession, the fellowship within is restored, and I am able to enjoy the Lord again. (The Proper Way for Believers to Meet and to Serve, 13)

This fellowship matches Brother Lee’s realization that “all the virtues taught by the Bible are through the cross, by the Spirit, and minister Christ for the producing of the churches for the building up of the Body” (The Divine and Mystical Realm, 29). May the Lord use these words to call us to repentance, to purify His recovery, to guard us from speaking improperly or receiving improper speaking, and to bind up the wounds of any who may have been damaged by others’ words so that His building work in and among us can proceed unhindered.

Share:

Restoring Fellowship in the Body of Christ

The fellowship of life in the Body of Christ is a most precious and vital matter (1 Cor. 1:9; 2 Cor. 13:14; Acts 2:42; 1 John 1:1-7). We should grieve whenever a brother or sister loses that fellowship for whatever reason, whether it be the church’s discipline exercised on that member, an accumulation of real or imagined offenses, or simply a drifting away. As those who love the Lord and His church, we should have an enlarged heart to seek to restore those who have been stumbled (2 Cor. 6:13). We must have the loving and forgiving heart of our Father God and the shepherding and seeking spirit of our Savior Christ (Luke 15; The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1994-1997, vol. 5, 20-25).

As we co-labor with the Lord to restore others to the fellowship of His Body, the way in which we conduct ourselves matters greatly. Speaking on 2 Corinthians 10:1, Witness Lee commented, “Paul tells us that he entreated the Corinthians through the meekness and forbearance of Christ. But he does not tell us the purpose of his entreaty. He tells us how he entreated, but he does not say why he entreated” (Life-study of 2 Corinthians, 438). Brother Lee then explained, “This indicates that Paul’s way of entreating is more important than the purpose of his entreaty” (438). He added, “We should learn of Paul to pay even more attention to the way we do something than for our purpose in doing that thing. Actually God cares more for the way we do things than for our purpose, our goal, in doing them” (439).

“Restore Such a One in a Spirit of Meekness”

Galatians 6:1 says, “Brothers, even if a man is overtaken in some offense, you who are spiritual restore such a one in a spirit of meekness, looking to yourself lest you also be tempted.” As Brother Lee noted, “In Greek the word for restore is the same as the word for mend in Matthew 4:21” (CWWL, 1964, vol. 4, 37), which indicates that James and John were mending their fishing nets when the Lord called them. Thus, restoring a saint who has stumbled is a kind of mending work, repairing the damaged fellowship in the Body.

Galatians 6:1 speaks of “a spirit of meekness.” As Brother Lee pointed out, this spirit “is our regenerated spirit, indwelt by and mingled with the Holy Spirit. Such a spirit is the issue of living and walking by the Spirit [in Gal. 5:16, 22-23, 25]. Notice that Paul speaks of a spirit of meekness. The meekness we need must be in our spirit. The source of what we do should be our spirit, not simply our kind heart” (Life-study of Galatians, 255). Meekness is a quality of our regenerated spirit. Watchman Nee described Galatians 6:1 as a kind of fatherly care by one who is more mature in the Lord, as implied in “you who are spiritual.” He added, “But even one who is spiritually more advanced than another should never take a ‘better-than-thou’ position, as if he is looking down from a pedestal to correct an inferior” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], vol. 46, 1271). Brother Lee also commented, “We should not go to this fallen brother to rebuke or condemn him. We should not contact him like a lawyer or a policeman to imprison him. We have to love him, cover him, pray for him, and restore him in a spirit of meekness” (CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, 567).

Entreating through the Meekness of Christ, Not Rebuking

In 2 Corinthians 10:1a Paul wrote: “But I myself, Paul, entreat you through the meekness and gentleness of Christ.” From this we can realize that the meekness needed to restore and entreat others is not a meekness we might have naturally but the meekness of the Christ who indwells our regenerated spirit. Paul lived Christ, so he lived out the virtue of Christ’s meekness (see The Conclusion of the New Testament: Experiencing, Enjoying, and Expressing Christ, Volume 1 (Messages 265-322), 3231-3232). We may naturally associate meekness with weakness, but this thought does not apply to the meekness of Christ in our spirit. In fact, Brother Lee told us, “The meekness of a transformed person is always full of life and full of power. Such meekness is living and refreshing and brings you into the presence of the Lord” (CWWL, 1963, vol. 4, 168). Meekness is an essential virtue in keeping the oneness in the Body of Christ (Eph. 4:2-3). The apostle Paul charged his younger co-worker Timothy to exercise meekness in correcting those who oppose, hoping for their repentance (2 Tim. 2:25). This does not mean that we compromise the truth or that we tolerate gross sin, idolatry, or heresy. Rather, it means that if we are not meek but arrogant toward those who oppose, they may be hardened rather than helped. The same is true when we seek to restore others to the fellowship of the Body.

Often, rebuking others offends and hardens them. The offense caused by the rebuke then becomes another obstacle to restoring fellowship. Brother Lee told us, “To be a good elder, the first thing that one must learn is to not rebuke people. Through many mistakes we have learned that rebuking never works” (CWWL, 1991-1992, vol. 1, 159). Some may argue that the Lord Jesus rebuked the Pharisees and Paul rebuked the Corinthians. Paul, however, suffered great affliction and anguish of heart until he heard from Titus that the Corinthians had received his word (2 Cor. 2:4; 7:6-7). Brother Lee noted, “This indicates that there was a danger in Paul’s rebuke to the believers” (160). Of the Lord Jesus’ rebuking certain people, Brother Lee said simply, “We are not the Lord Jesus” (160). Neither are we Paul. Some brothers are quick to exercise “authority” by rebuking others. This expresses their natural disposition, not the Lord. Brother Lee referred to such a practice as “foolishness” (160).

Restoring by Bringing the Lord to People and People to the Lord

Seeking to restore others involves bringing the Lord to them and bringing them to the Lord. First John 5:16 tells us that we should ask in prayer so that we may give life to recover others to the Lord. In this verse the Lord does not give life directly, but the one who asks becomes a channel to bring the Lord as life to others in his contact with them. As Brother Lee explained, “This does not mean that the asker has life of himself and can give life by himself to others. It means such an asker, who is abiding in the Lord, who is one with the Lord, and who is asking in one spirit with the Lord (1 Cor. 6:17), becomes the means through which God’s life-giving Spirit can give life to the one he asks for” (Life-study of First John, 331).

The elders should be patterns in such shepherding care to restore those who have fallen away (1 Pet. 5:1-2). In the last volume of the Elders’ Training books Brother Lee told us:

The elders should contact people in a way that is full of love, concern, and sympathy in a meek and humble spirit (Gal. 6:1), not in a way to convince, to catch, to arrest, but to recover, to bring people back to the Lord. Their contact should be with the full realization that what the people need is the Lord and what can solve the people’s problems is to meet with the Lord. In their contact with others, they should avoid a superiority complex, argument, offense, or any form of humiliation, always remembering well that the church is neither a police station nor a law court and that we are neither the policemen nor the judges. (CWWL, 1991-1992, vol. 1, 161)

“Confess Your Sins to One Another”

James 5:16a says, “Therefore confess your sins to one another and pray for one another that you may be healed.” In examining James 5:14-16 we should note that the confession and prayer is mutual—“to one another” and “for one another”—and between two parties—the one who is sick and the elders of that one’s local church (v. 14). Brother Nee said, “We have to confess our sins to one another because something is wrong in the Body of Christ, and the mutual confession of sins is needed. The sick have to confess to the elders, and the elders have to confess to the sick” (CWWN, vol. 38, 493-494). Some sicknesses may be due to partaking of the Lord’s table unworthily (1 Cor. 11:30), which is a matter of not properly discerning the fellowship of the Body (vv. 27-29). The principle in James 5 applies not only when someone is physically ill but also when a brother or sister becomes spiritually “sick” and loses the proper fellowship in the Body. The sick one must confess his or her attitude and conduct that led to the loss of the fellowship. As for the elders, according to Brother Nee, “It may be that the elders have been lacking in love. It may be that the elders have been negligent in care. Therefore, the elders have to confess these sins” (494; see also CWWN, vol. 44, 833). This word to the elders applies to all the saints as well, especially to those who bear a burden for others’ care. In some cases our actions and ways may have offended and stumbled others. Of course, we should confess such mistakes and seek forgiveness from those we have offended. But we should also admit any failures and shortcomings in our shepherding care. We should not be hindered by thinking more highly of ourselves than we ought to think but should humble ourselves to be patterns in confessing and seeking forgiveness (Rom. 12:3; 1 Pet. 5:3, 5).

Summary

If we allow the loving and forgiving heart of the Father and the shepherding and seeking spirit of the Son to abide in us, we will spontaneously desire to restore those who have fallen away from the Lord and the fellowship of His Body. To carry out such a burden, we must deal with any attitude of superiority, of judging others, or other form of pride so that we may contact others in a spirit of meekness, a meekness that is not ours but is the meekness of Christ lived out through us. We must pray ourselves into oneness with the Lord so that we can become a channel to give life to others, bringing the Lord to people and people to the Lord. As the Lord leads, we may confess our failures, including shortcomings in our shepherding care, to those who have stumbled and may gracefully receive their confession and repentance in return. If we seek and practice in this way, we will remove ourselves as a hindrance and open the door for the Lord to restore the proper fellowship in the Body.

Share:

9 – The Triumphant Ministry (4)

From chapter nine of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

In the 1960s the Lord’s triumphal procession continued on to the United States. Although Brother Lee had no intention to move to the West, on his third visit to this country the Lord constrained him to remain here for His work. As a man in his late fifties who had lived all of his life in the Chinese-speaking world, Brother Lee realized that carrying out the Lord’s work in the United States would involve considerable hardship. Nevertheless, undaunted by linguistic and cultural barriers, Brother Lee submitted himself to the Lord’s commission to minister in a new country, beginning with a conference in Los Angeles in December 1962. Throughout the 1960s he not only ministered in Los Angeles but also traveled extensively within the United States at the invitation of numerous Christian groups, many of which were dissatisfied with the denominations and had begun to meet as independent groups. Through these visits many seeking believers were captured by the Lord and decided to take the way of His recovery. One such group of Christians voluntarily sold their meeting hall, offered the money from the sale to the church in Los Angeles, and migrated to Los Angeles in order to meet with the church there. In the early years of the work in this country, from 1963 to 1969, most of the increase came from Brother Lee’s personal visitations throughout the States. Further, the church life in Los Angeles was so attractive and prevailing that many seekers of the Lord from various parts of the United States, and some even from Africa, New Zealand, and Europe, came to experience the sweet one accord. Many were led to consecrate themselves for Christ and the church and paid the price to migrate to Los Angeles for the church life, joining the ranks of the Lord’s conquered captives.

The work of the Lord’s recovery in the United States began with only about twenty-five saints meeting in a home. Eight years later, in 1970, Brother Lee held a conference with more than one thousand saints meeting in the Embassy Hotel in Los Angeles. In that year, under Brother Lee’s leadership, over four hundred saints migrated out of Los Angeles to ten major U.S. cities for the spread of the Lord’s testimony. By 1973 twenty-seven churches had been raised up in the United States, and a conference that Brother Lee held in the Los Angeles Convention Center that year was attended by more than three thousand saints. Surely this testifies to the triumph of the true new covenant ministry.

As a genuine new covenant minister, Brother Lee was not only a savor of life unto life to seeking believers who received his ministry but also a savor of death unto death to those who felt threatened by the results of his work. It was after the successful migration of the saints in 1970 that Brother Lee’s ministry began to encounter intensified opposition from leaders in organized Christianity, some of whom were alarmed that members of their groups were joining the local churches. Just as Paul was called a pestilent fellow (Acts 24:5), Brother Lee was accused of being “a trouble-maker” and agitating the religious status quo. However, as Brother Lee noted, the intense opposition from Christianity against the Lord’s recovery proved that His recovery in this country had become quite prevailing, since “people do not oppose anything that is not prevailing.”82 Brother Lee was a man of Chinese descent who ministered the word in accented English and did not have a theological degree or seminary training. Nonetheless, thousands of Americans eagerly received his ministry and eventually joined the Lord’s triumphal procession as defeated captives. This is because the sweet-smelling savor of Christ, who was constituted into our brother and emanated out of him, was a savor of life unto life to these hungry seekers of Christ.

As Brother Lee predicted in 1987, the United States proved to be “the center of the Lord’s spread throughout the earth to prepare the way for His return.”83 Indeed, from the United States, the Lord’s recovery spread to Europe, Australasia, Africa, and South America.84 Moreover, because Brother Lee released his messages in English, the Lord’s ministry in His recovery was no longer confined to the Chinese language and could easily be spread throughout the earth. By 1997, the year Brother Lee went to be with the Lord, a great number of books containing his messages had been translated into at least fourteen languages, including Chinese, Spanish, Russian, Korean, Japanese, and Portuguese. This paved the way for the ministry in the recovery to spread to every continent. During the 1970s and 1980s Brother Lee visited many countries, such as Australia, New Zealand, South Korea, Israel, Brazil, and a number of European countries, in order to strengthen the churches and perfect the saints. His tireless labor resulted in the building up of the local churches throughout the entire earth. By 1996 there were approximately two hundred-fifty local churches in the United States and two thousand three hundred local churches on earth, not including mainland China. This abundant fruit and glorious triumph of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery testifies that this ministry is indeed the genuine New Testament ministry.


81 CWWL 1973-1974, vol. 1, p. 136

82 CWWL, 1987, vol. 1, p. 3

83 CWWL, 1987, vol. 1, p. 3

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

9 – The Triumphant Ministry (3)

From chapter nine of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

One such believer was Brother Lee. Prior to his regeneration Witness Lee was full of ambition regarding his education and future, possessing lofty intentions not only for himself but also for the advancement of his country. At the age of nineteen he experienced a dynamic salvation and was captured by a gospel message that revealed man’s need to be saved from the usurping and enslaving hand of Satan (1 John 5:19; Acts 26:18; Matt. 12:26; cf. Exo. 1:8-14; 3:7-11). The same day on which Witness Lee believed in the Lord to be delivered from Satan’s tyranny (Col. 1:13), he also gave his whole life to serve Him (2 Cor. 8:5), vowing:

O Lord, even if You were to give me the whole world and make me the king, I would not want it. I want to take my Bible and go to the countryside to preach the gospel from village to village; I want to do this my whole life. If there is no water to drink, I will drink from mountain brooks. If there is no food to eat, I will eat tree roots.77

Seven years later the Lord used Brother Lee to raise up a church in his hometown of Chefoo. The following year Brother Lee again experienced the Lord conquering him; after three weeks of struggling to answer the Lord’s calling to set aside his job and serve the Lord by faith with his full time, he was at last subdued and gave up his lucrative position. About a year later Brother Nee and his co-workers asked Brother Lee to move to Shanghai to labor with them in the Lord’s work there, recommending him to seek the Lord’s leading concerning this move. When Brother Lee realized that this was the Lord’s leading, he migrated to Shanghai, willingly laying aside his work in the church in Chefoo as well as his personal intention to carry out a prevailing work in northern China (cf. Acts 16:6-10). It was because of such willingness to be conquered by the Lord and obediently enter into another’s ministry that Brother Lee could triumphantly manifest the savor of the knowledge of Him in his own ministry.

In particular, from the early 1930s to 1988 the Lord granted Brother Lee what he called “four major successes,” referring to his work in Chefoo, Shanghai, Taiwan with the Southeast Asian countries, and the United States.78 By shepherding the believers personally and ministering according to Brother Nee’s blueprint for the building of the church, Brother Lee ushered in a great revival in the church in Chefoo at the end of 1942. Beginning on January 1, 1943, the church met continuously for one hundred days. Over eight hundred saints offered themselves, their families, and all their possessions to the Lord for the church (cf. Acts 2:44-47; 4:32-37). The whole church preached the gospel actively, leading to hundreds of baptisms in the first five months of 1943 (cf. 5:42; 8:4). In the same year many of the saints migrated throughout northern China, including Manchuria and Inner Mongolia, for the spread of the gospel and the Lord’s testimony (cf. 8:1, 4; 11:19).

In 1947 the Lord’s triumphal procession moved to Shanghai, where Brother Lee continued to implement the blueprint of God’s building and presented the vision of the tree of life. Under Brother Lee’s ministry, the entire church in Shanghai participated in preaching the gospel. Through this revival many saints who had been affected by the turmoil in 1942, which had caused the church in Shanghai to stop meeting, were recovered and healed. Consequently, from the summer of 1946 to the summer of 1947, the number of saints attending the Lord’s table meeting in Shanghai increased from about three hundred to more than one thousand.79 In a few years more than one thousand saints in Shanghai consecrated themselves and their possessions to the Lord for the church. In those days the meeting hall of the church in Shanghai was often so crowded with people that some of the saints had to stand on the street outside during the meetings.

This triumphant ministry continued on to the island of Taiwan beginning from 1949, after Brother Lee obeyed the Lord to migrate there from Shanghai for the preservation and continuation of the ministry. Even though Brother Lee dearly wished to remain with Brother Nee and the co-workers in mainland China for the Lord’s testimony, they sent him out in order to ensure that the precious things entrusted to them by the Lord would not be lost. Realizing that this was the Lord’s perfect will for him (Matt. 26:39, 42), Brother Lee obeyed as a slave of the Lord and moved to the then-backward island of Taiwan (Phil. 2:8). Although the work began with a small number of saints and very few churches, through the Lord’s blessing on Brother Lee’s tireless labor and faithful ministry of the word, the number of saints in Taiwan increased more than thirtyfold within the first year. In less than six years, from 1949 to 1954, the number of saints increased from fewer than five hundred to about fifty thousand.80 The churches in Taiwan were so prevailing that when Brother T. Austin-Sparks visited Taiwan in 1955, he testified that in his entire life he had never spoken before such a marvelous congregation.81 The 1950s saw not only a revival and rapid increase in the churches in Taiwan but also the spread of the Lord’s recovery to countries in the Far East and Southeast Asia, including Japan, the Philippines, Malaysia, and Singapore. Through his labor hundreds of churches were raised up. Such a prevailing move was truly a splendid march of the victorious Lord “in every place” (2 Cor. 2:14).


77 CWWL, 1994-1997, vol. 4, p. 513

78 The Scriptural Way to Meet and to Serve for the Building up of the Body of Christ, p. 283

79 CWWL, 1981, vol. 2, p. 132

80 The Intrinsic Problem in the Lord’s Recovery Today and Its Scriptural Remedy, p. 42; The Crystallization of the Epistle to the Romans, p. 96; Life-Study of Romans, p. 72

81 Further Consideration of the Eldership, the Region of Work, and the Care for the Body of Christ, p. 25

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

9 – The Triumphant Ministry (5)

From chapter nine of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

That our brother’s ministry triumphed in every place he visited is confirmed by a note that Brother Lee wrote in 1977 on Joshua 1:5-7, which reads, “When I was called by the Lord to serve Him with my full time in 1933, He gave me verses 5 through 7 as a promise. Since then, for over forty years, this promised has been all the time fulfilled to me.”85 The verses are as follows:

No man will be able to stand before you all the days of your life. As I was with Moses, I will be with you; I will not fail you nor forsake you. Be strong and take courage, for you will cause this people to inherit the land which I swore to their fathers to give to them. Only be strong and very courageous, being certain to do according to all the law which Moses My servant commanded you. Do not turn away from it to the right or to the left, that you may have success wherever you go.

In view of the history of the Lord’s prevailing move among us, we bear witness that no opposer or dissenter was able to defeat Brother Lee’s ministry in all the years he ministered, from 1933 to 1997. As the Lord was with Brother Nee, so also He was with Brother Lee. The Lord never failed or forsook him; instead, our brother was empowered in the Lord’s grace to bring many of His children into the enjoyment of the all-inclusive Christ as the good and spacious land (2 Tim. 2:1; Col. 1:12; 2:6-7; Josh. 14:1; Phil. 1:19; Eph. 3:8; Col. 1:12; 2:6-7; Heb. 4:8-9; Matt. 11:28-29; cf. Deut. 8:7-10). Wherever he went for the Lord’s ministry, he had success. Just as Joseph was “a fruitful bough” whose “branches run over the wall” (Gen. 49:22), so also Brother Lee was an exceedingly fruitful bough whose branches spread Christ over every wall of restriction raised up by the opposers, magnifying and ministering Him in all circumstances (Phil. 1:19-21; 4:22).

The triumph of Brother Lee’s ministry was not only the fulfillment of the Lord’s promise to him in Joshua 1:5-7 but also the realization of an extraordinary God-given dream. One night, shortly before he was imprisoned and tortured by the Japanese military police in 1943, he dreamed of a gentleman who was taking a peaceful walk while carrying a cane. Suddenly, he came to a steep downward slope with four crooked steps. He descended the slope step by step with fear and trembling, leaning on his cane. When he reached the bottom, a German shepherd, whose color resembled that of a Japanese military uniform, pounced on him. However, although the gentleman was frightened, the dog did not harm him. After the dog left, he looked ahead and saw “a broad highway very straight and stretching on boundlessly, and the sun had just risen from the east.”86 As soon as he saw the broad highway, the rising sun, and the boundless, bright horizon, his heart felt free and released, and he “strode fearlessly onward.”87 Afterward, the Lord gave Brother Lee the understanding to interpret his dream. Brother Lee was the gentleman, and the cane signified the Lord’s grace, by which Brother Lee was walking (2 Cor. 1:12; 12:9; 1 Cor. 15:10). The four steps referred to the last four years of the Sino-Japanese war, which were a very difficult time for China, and the German shepherd signified the Japanese, who would trouble him but would not be permitted to harm him. This interpretation greatly comforted Brother Lee, for he realized that the Lord would preserve him despite his imprisonment, and that after this hardship the Lord would open for him a broad highway with a boundless future. In 1983 Brother Lee testified that the Lord’s rich blessing on his labor in Shanghai in the 1940s, in Taiwan and Southeast Asia in the 1950s, and in the United States in the 1960s and onward proved that his uncommon dream in 1943 was a genuine vision that had been and continued to be fulfilled in the Lord’s recovery, and that every day he “was walking on this broad highway step by step.”88 Not only did Brother Lee remain in this dream until he passed away, but he also brought many saints to see what he saw and participate with him in the Lord’s triumphant ministry. We believe that by the Lord’s mercy, many of these saints will continue in this dream and walk on this highway until the Body of Christ is built up unto the bright day of the Lord’s second coming.

For this reason, long after Brother Lee went to be with the Lord, the Lord’s move today in His recovery is still prevailing, and the entire earth is open to the spread of the divine truths in the holy Word presented by the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. Although Brother Lee departed to be with the Lord in 1997, his ministry has been continued by a group of his co-workers and propagated by countless saints in the local churches. Both the co-workers and the saints are captives of Christ who have been conquered by Christ through the ministry and are now diffusing the savor of the knowledge of Christ wherever they go. This is the fulfillment of Brother Lee’s earnest expectation expressed in 1982 that the young people in the local churches would participate in the new covenant ministry by scattering the incense of Christ in every place:

In my ministry I am not merely a teacher or a preacher—I am one scattering the incense of my Lord. I am beside myself with love for Him, and I desire to scatter His incense. Everyone in the Lord’s recovery must be a person scattering the incense of Christ. Wherever we go we should scatter this incense.

Some have wondered why a number of Christians in this country have been willing to receive my ministry. The reason is that I am scattering the incense of Christ. This is my unique occupation, my unique profession. My major in the heavenly university was scattering the incense of Christ. I expect that in the years to come many among us, especially the young people, will rise up to scatter Christ’s incense. Young people, your aspiration should be to scatter the incense of Christ.89

As Brother Lee gave message after message in conferences and trainings, he not only released points of truth but also scattered the incense of Christ to countless saints, including many young people, thereby imparting the Spirit of Christ as the divine fragrance into them (Rom. 8:9; 1 Pet. 1:11). Consequently, they were gloriously defeated by Christ and likewise became a fragrance of His sweetness. The Lord’s recovery has a bright future because of the saints who, under the genuine new covenant ministry, have been made captives in Christ’s triumphal procession, participate in His victory, and scatter the aroma of Christ in every place. Such ones will continue to carry out the new covenant ministry on the broad and bright highway until the bride is matured and the Bridegroom returns (Rev. 19:7; 3:11; 22:7, 12, 20).


85 CWWL, Bible Notes & Hymns, vol. 1, pp. 326-327

86 A Blessed Human Life, pp. 69-70

87 A Blessed Human Life, p. 70

88 A Blessed Human Life, p. 72; CWWL, 1986, vol. 2, p. 534; for detailed accounts of this dream see A Blessed Human Life, pp. 69-72; CWWL, 1981, vol. 2, pp. 99-103; CWWL, 1984, vol. 1, pp. 286-291; CWWL, 1986, vol. 2, pp. 531-534

89 Life-study of Second Corinthians, p. 158

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

9 – The Triumphant Ministry (2)

From chapter nine of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Triumph of the Ministry in the Lord’s Recovery

The ministry in the Lord’s recovery is likewise a triumphant celebration of Christ’s victory—first over the ministers themselves and then over those under their ministry. Before Brother Nee was captured by the Lord, he was recognized by both his classmates and professors as an exceedingly intelligent and capable young man. He harbored many grand dreams and plans for his future, and he despised Christians and preachers in particular, considering preaching a base profession with a meager income. At the age of seventeen, however, he entered a period of conflict over whether to receive Christ or not, knowing that if he did, he would have to resign all other pursuits to serve the Lord. Eventually, as his inner turmoil peaked, he knelt to pray and received a vision in which he saw himself as an unclean sinner and the Lord Jesus hanging on the cross as the gracious Savior welcoming him with outstretched arms (cf. Gal. 3:1-2). Overwhelmed by the Lord’s dying love, Brother Nee received Him as his Savior, confessing his sins with tears. From that day he decided to serve the Lord. Fully conquered by the Lord’s love, he discarded all his cherished worldly ambitions and his promising future to answer the Lord’s call (2 Cor. 5:9, 14-15). Thus was Watchman Nee defeated and added to Christ’s triumphal procession.

As a captive of the Lord, wherever Brother Nee went for the Lord’s ministry, he participated in His victory. Shortly after he was saved, Brother Nee was burdened and led by the Lord to preach the gospel to his schoolmates and countrymen. For a period of time he fasted every Saturday so that he might be empowered by the Lord to preach the gospel the next morning. As a result of his labor, by 1923 almost all of his schoolmates at Trinity College and hundreds of people in his hometown of Foochow had been led to salvation, thus bringing in a great revival. In the early 1920s he saw the revelation in the Bible concerning God’s intention to raise up local churches as a practical expression of the universal Body of Christ according to the scriptural principle of one church in one city. As a captive, he obeyed the Lord to carry out this vision, bearing and scattering the fragrance of Christ, which became to some a savor out of death unto death and to others a savor out of life unto life (Acts 26:19). Because he abandoned the denominations for being unscriptural, he was opposed by many denominational Christian leaders, including Western missionaries and Chinese preachers. However, he continued to minister Christ and establish local churches throughout China. Even though only a small number of Western missionaries listened to Brother Nee’s messages, those who did were astonished by his spiritual insight and weight, and some who had a pure heart were captured for the Lord’s recovery. Through Brother Nee’s spoken and published ministry countless believers were stirred up to consecrate themselves to the Lord for His move on earth, thereby joyfully entering into the triumphal train of the Lord’s vanquished foes (Rom. 12:1). By the time Brother Nee was arrested in 1952, more than one thousand co-workers had been brought into coordination with his ministry, which had raised up about four hundred local churches throughout mainland China and more than thirty local churches in Southeast Asia.

The crowning act of Brother Nee’s obedience to the Lord was his decision to remain in China for the work of the Lord’s recovery, knowing that this decision would cost him his life. Like the apostle Paul, Brother Nee considered his life of no account as if precious to himself, in order that he might finish his course and fulfill the ministry that he had received from the Lord Jesus (Acts 20:24). During his last visit to Hong Kong in January 1950, the brothers there implored him not to return to the mainland, fearing for his safety. However, Brother Nee determined to go back in order to care for the churches, co-workers, and believers in China, knowing that he would almost surely be sacrificed for the Lord’s testimony (Rev. 1:9; 2:13; 20:4). In so doing, Brother Nee lived out the reality of the hymn he wrote describing the spirit of a true captive of Christ:

  • Every moment, every member,
  •    Girded, waiting Thy command;
  • Underneath the yoke to labor
  •    Or be laid aside as planned.
  • When restricted in pursuing,
  •    No disquiet will beset;
  • Underneath Thy faithful dealing
  •    Not a murmur or regret.

  • Ever tender, quiet, restful,
  •    Inclinations put away,
  • That Thou may for me choose freely
  •    As Thy finger points the way.
  • Live Thyself, Lord Jesus, through me,
  •    For my very life art Thou;
  • Thee I take to all my problems
  •    As the full solution now.76

From the moment he was captured by Christ as a young man to his martyrdom after two decades of imprisonment, Brother Nee was manifestly a sweet fragrance of Christ wherever he went. The Christ who had been wrought into Brother Nee became both a pleasant aroma to God for His enjoyment and a savor of life unto life in the countless believers who joined themselves to this ministry and thus became part of Christ’s triumphant and fragrant procession.


76 Hymns, #403

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

8 – The Ministry Abounding with Glory (2)

From chapter eight of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Ministry in the Lord’s Recovery Abounding with the Glory of God

Like the ministry of the apostles in the New Testament, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery abounds with the glory of God. The brothers who minister according to the gospel of the glory of God are not only teachers of the truth but also luminaries that shine forth God in Christ as light (Phil. 2:15; Matt. 5:14). I along with many other saints have closely observed these brothers in their living and work and can testify that they have lived Christ as the truth for the shining of the gospel of the glory of Christ (2 Cor. 4:2; Phil. 1:19; John 14:6). Rather than walking in craftiness or conducting themselves in fleshly wisdom, they have conducted themselves in the grace of God in His singleness and sincerity (2 Cor. 1:12; 2:17). They have not adulterated the word of God for profit but have always ministered the pure word of God, even at the cost of risking opposition from religion (v. 17). They have not preached themselves but Christ Jesus as Lord of all, conducting themselves as our slaves for Jesus’ sake, never making themselves an object of attention but exalting Christ alone (4:5; Acts 10:26; Rom. 10:12).

In traditional Christianity, as preachers grow older, their ministry usually wanes. This is because their ministry mainly depends on their physical strength and natural intelligence, both of which gradually diminish with the passage of time. In vivid contrast, we have witnessed that the more the ministers in the Lord’s recovery advance in years, the more they shine with glory. This is because the afflictions that they have endured for the sake of Jesus have worked together to constitute them with the God of glory (Acts 7:2). Their spiritual vitality is ever increasing because they labor not by their natural strength but by depending on the exceedingly great power of God as their indwelling treasure (cf. Eph. 1:19-23). Therefore, the gospel that they preach is simply the shining of their Christ-saturated being and their Christ-expressing living; like the apostle Paul, their very being and living are their ministry.

This ministry conveys us into glory because the ministers exercise to live in the Holy of Holies, behold the glory of the Lord, and allow the God of glory to shine through their transparent vessels (Heb. 10:19, 22; 2 Cor. 3:18). This shining is not an outward, visible phenomenon but the spiritual shining of the invisible glory of God, such that those who are under this ministry enjoy a sweet, pleasant, and endearing inward shining of God in Christ. The ministry incorporates the very God who shines forth and speaks to His redeemed people from between the cherubim of glory on Christ as the propitiation place in the Holiest of all (Exo. 25:22; Psa. 80:1, 3; 99:1; Heb. 9:5). Commenting upon Exodus 25:18-22, Brother Lee describes our experience of God’s speaking to His people in glory:

When we listen to someone speaking in a meeting, as long as that speaking is the word of the Lord, we should have the sense that we are in glory. Whenever the word of God is spoken in the ministry, we sense glory within us. Many preachers today are eloquent. But when you hear them speak, you do not have any sense of God’s glory. You may admire their eloquence and appreciate their knowledge, but there is no sense of God’s glory. However, when you listen to the genuine ministry of the Word, you are attracted, not by eloquence or knowledge but by a sense of God’s glory. After you return home, the glory may follow you. Years later, you may still recall the glory you sensed in that meeting. From our experience we know that God meets with us in the midst of His glory and speaks to us in His glory.62

I wish to attest on behalf of the ministers of the word in the Lord’s recovery that when these ministers give a message, we often do sense the glory of God. We feel that that the God of glory is meeting and speaking with us from between the cherubim of glory in our spirit as the Holy of Holies, shining into us to fill us with Himself and make Himself known to us in Christ. By leading us to turn our heart to the Lord and exercise our spirit—cultivating a direct, personal, affectionate, and spiritual contact with the indwelling Christ—this ministry brings us face to face with Him in whose radiant countenance we behold the glory of God (Num. 6:24-26). As we enjoy this lovely, precious, charming, and endearing person, looking into the index of His eyes and sensing the shining of God’s glory in our heart, we love Him as the most excellent treasure in the universe, lose our taste for worldly idols, and are spontaneously transformed into His glorious image (2 Cor. 2:10; 4:6-7; 3:18). There is no greater joy or higher delight than gazing upon the incomparable glory of God manifested in the face of Jesus Christ in our mingled spirit. The ministry in the Lord’s recovery ushers us into such an indescribably intimate and unforgettable enjoyment of Him for our genuine transformation into His image from glory to glory so that we may become the New Jerusalem, a city of light that shines forth with the eternal glory of God in Christ the Lamb as the lamp (Rev. 21:10-11, 23; 22:5).


62 Life-Study of Exodus, pp. 1011-1012

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (8)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Walking in the same spirit and in the same steps with Brother Nee (2 Cor. 12:18), Brother Lee wrote the following hymn, which reveals that it is only through the work of the cross that the resurrection life is experienced by us and is poured from us into others. 

  1. If I’d know Christ’s risen power,
    I must ever love the Cross;
    Life from death alone arise;
    There’s no gain except by loss.
        CHORUS:
        If no death, no life,
        If no death, no life;
        Life from death alone arises;
        If no death, no life.
  2. If I’d have Christ formed within me,
    I must breathe my final breath,
    Live within the Cross’s shadow,
    Put my soul-life e’er to death.
  3. If God thru th’ Eternal Spirit
    Nail me ever with the Lord;
    Only then as death is working
    Will His life thru me be poured.

(Hymns, # 631)

Brother Lee also wrote the following hymn, which unveils that it is only through the death of the cross that Christ as the resurrection life not only shows its infinite power but also grows and multiplies:

  1. Death cannot hold the resurrection life,
    The life of God eternal manifest;
    ‘Tis uncreated, indestructible,
    ‘Tis Christ Himself, unconqu’rable, expressed.
  2. Death cannot hold the resurrection life,
    Though all its force against it may combine;
    Death only gives it opportunity
    To show the boundless pow’r of life divine.
  3. Death cannot hold the resurrection life,
    The more interred, the more it multiplies;
    All kinds of suff’ring only help it grow
    And fruits of life abundant realize.
  4. Death cannot hold the resurrection life,
    Thru every block and barrier it breaks;
    Conqu’ring the pow’r of darkness and of hell,
    It swallows death and victory partakes.
  5. Death cannot hold the resurrection life,
    All of God’s fulness it will manifest;
    God’s righteousness and holiness it yields,
    His glorious image by it is expressed.
  6. Oh, may I know this resurrection life,
    In every kind of death its pow’r outpoured,
    In my experience ever realize
    This life is nought but Christ my living Lord.

(Hymns, # 639)

These hymns confirm that to the ministers in the Lord’s recovery, the death and resurrection of Christ were not just factual historical events but also a constant subjective spiritual reality that they daily experienced for the ministry of life to the members of the Body of Christ. Further, these hymns attest that the ministers in the Lord’s recovery were much more than expositors of the Bible; they were grains of wheat who died to themselves to impart the divine life to us in resurrection for the building up of the Body of Christ.

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (7)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Continuing the pattern set by Sister Barber, Brother Nee composed a splendid hymn about the deep and thorough work of the cross on our soul-life. The following stanzas of this hymn poignantly illustrate the glorious result of a minister of Christ’s subjective experience of the death of the cross – the ministering of life to others in abundance for the multiplication of the divine life:

  1. First the blood, and then the ointment,
    Cleansing, then anointing comes;
    If we pass not thru Golgotha,
    Ne’er to Pentecost we’ll come.
    If the blood has never cleansed us,
    Ne’er the Spirit’s pow’r we’ll know,
    If for Christ we’d truly witness,
    Self-life to the Cross must go.
        CHORUS:
        Through the Cross, O Lord, I pray,
        Put my soul-life all away;
        Make me any price to pay,
        Full anointing to receive.
  2. Christ, the Rock, must first be smitten,
    That the living water flow;
    Without death the Spirit’s fullness
    Ne’er could dwell in man below.
    If with Christ we die completely,
    Willing thus our all to lose,
    He will clothe us with His power
    And to win the world will use.
  3. When we see the ripened harvest
    Of the golden countryside,
    We may know that many seeds have
    Fallen to the earth and died.
    Ere the fruit of life may blossom,
    We must surely suffer death;
    If with Christ we’ve not been buried,
    We’ll not feel the Spirit’s breath.
  4. Since it must be thus, I pray, Lord,
    Help me go the narrow way;
    Deal with pride and make me willing
    Thus to suffer, Thee t’obey.
    I for greater power pray not,
    Deeper death is what I need;
    All the meaning of the Cross, Lord,
    Work in me — for this I plead.

(Hymns, #279)

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (6)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The following hymns capture the sentiments and aspirations of these precious saints in the Lord’s recovery who took the narrow way of death and resurrection to minister life to others for the growth and building up of the church.

When Sister Barber went to China by faith the second time in the early twentieth century, she “made a firm decision” in the Lord not to travel but to “bury” herself in a small town named Pagoda, where she remained until her death in 1929, “praying daily and ministering to those whom the Lord brought to her.”58 The following hymn written by Sister Barber characterizes the intrinsic significance of her hidden yet fruitful and valuable life and service to the Lord as a pure seed sown and buried in the ground to bear abundant fruit, whom Brother Lee esteemed “as a seed of life” “sown in China by the Lord for His recovery.”59

  1. Buried? Yes, but it is seed
    From which Continents may feed;
    Millions yet may bless the day
    When that seed was laid away.
  2. Buried! hidden! out of sight!
    Dwelling in the deepest night;
    Losing, underneath the sod,
    Everything, except its God.
  3. Buried, unremember’d, lost
    So thinks man: but all the cost
    God has counted to display
    Life abundant one glad day.
  4. Art thou buried? God’s pure seed
    Doth thy heart in silence bleed?
    Change thy sighing into song,
    Thus alone can harvests come.60

This hymn proved to be autobiographical and prophetic: because our sister was willing to be sown in China as a seed of life, rich harvests of the divine life were reaped, and countless saints throughout the earth have fed on the riches of this life released through her. One such example was Brother Nee, who received from her immeasurable help concerning the constricted way of the cross and the genuine ministry of life. He was “a seed that grew out of her” and became “a great vessel for the recovery of the proper church life.”61


58 CWWL, 1978, vol. 2, p. 148

59 Watchman Nee: A Seer of the Divine Revelation, pp. 17, 73

60 James Reetzke, M. E. Barber, A Seed Sown in China (Chicago, IL: Chicago Bibles & Books, 2005), p. 148

61 Life-study of John, p. 314

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (4)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Yet another bout of attack came in the late 1980s as a small number of men who had been reputed to be pillars in the churches became divisive and attempted to overthrow the ministry in the Lord’s recovery—seeking to draw the saints in the churches after themselves and their own so-called ministries (Acts 20:30). But once the darkness of the turmoil passed, the day manifested each one’s work: whereas Brother Lee’s ministry budded, blossomed, and bore fruit, that of the dissenting ones became dead, dry, and fruitless (Num. 17:5-8). Those who had been under the speaking of the dissenters testified that when these ones were under the Lord’s ministry in His recovery, their speaking imparted life and light and was full of authority and anointing, but after they abandoned the ministry, their speaking injected death and darkness and lacked both authority and anointing. In contrast, Brother Lee’s ministry continued to yield fruit to feed the Lord’s children with resurrection life , and his ministry only grew richer, stronger, and higher (2 Cor. 3:6; 4:17). As a beneficiary and eyewitness of Brother Lee’s ministry in that last decade, I can testify that in this most mature stage of his life and ministry, each time he ministered the word rivers of living water flowed out of his innermost being (John 7:38), raising the tide of life in the Body of Christ (Rev. 22:1).

The Lord’s blessing also bore witness to whose was the genuine ministry. Overwhelmingly, the churches that followed the dissenting ones became barren and decreased in numbers, while those that continued to receive the ministry in the recovery flourished. The dissenters, who once banded together to undermine Brother Lee’s ministry, eventually divided from one another, and many of the saints who had joined them sadly returned to their former manner of life in the world or to the divided and degraded situation in organized Christianity (Eph. 4:17-22). In contrast, many hundreds of saints who have remained under the ministry in the Lord’s recovery are still being brought deeper into the divine oneness and its attendant blessings (Psa. 133:1-3; cf. Eph. 4:3-6). The storms have not only served to discipline, educate, and test these saints but also to establish them for the furtherance of God’s move in His economy. For instance, in January 1991 Brother Lee observed that in the immediate aftermath of the turmoil in the late 1980s, “Actually, while we were passing through a turmoil in which the enemy attempted to destroy the church, the Lord still gave the church a twenty-five percent increase through our early practice of the new way.”56 Further, beginning in 1991 many saints migrated to Russia and Eastern European countries for the spread the Lord’s testimony there. This fresh move of the Lord in the recovery through His ministry was richly blessed, resulting in the raising up of many churches in the former Soviet Union, an atheist nation, and in Eastern Europe. As a result of the saints’ labor under this ministry, by October 1996 at least thirty-seven churches had been established in the former Soviet Union. Today there are one hundred ninety-one churches in that region, comprising approximately five thousand saints. This abundant blessing on the work of the ministry was a manifestation of the fruit of the resurrection life and a strong vindication of the Lord’s ministry in His recovery.

Regrettably, among believers today it is rare to find those who are willing to take this costly way of death and resurrection or appreciate its value in the Lord’s eyes. In how many so-called ordination ceremonies are newly initiated ministers instructed that what qualifies them to serve God is to be terminated through the cross and brought into resurrection? On the contrary, in organized Christianity ministers of the word are trained to develop their natural life, ability, and strength, with the view that the Spirit will employ their human capacity, eloquence, and charisma in His work of grace upon a congregation. Hardly a preacher today has the notion, much less the experience, that the Spirit is actually within him and seeks to be released by the breaking of his outer man. By contrast, in the Lord’s recovery the constricted way to minister the word is to deny every aspect of the natural life by being conformed to Christ’s death in order to impart the Spirit as the reality of resurrection life (Matt. 7:13-14; 16:24; Psa. 16:11; Phil. 3:10; Rom. 1:3-4; 8:11). This way was pioneered by the Lord Jesus Himself, was faithfully followed by the apostles, and remains a mark of the New Testament ministry. As the faithful disciples stayed with the Lord because only He had words of eternal life (John 6:68), should we not remain with those who have taken the way of the cross in order to receive from them the supply of resurrection life (Phil. 1:19; 2:16)? We should heed Paul’s word to not be ashamed of either the Lord’s testimony or of His servants (2 Tim. 1:8). How very regrettable it would be if we mistook the shame and death they suffer as signs of their being disapproved and were thus defrauded of the riches of resurrection wrought into them for our sake!


56 CWWL, 1991-1992, vol. 1, p. 39

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (2)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Mark of Death and Resurrection on the Ministry of Brother Nee

Like the ministry of the apostle Paul, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery bears the mark of death and resurrection. No ministry in the present age has spoken concerning Christ’s death and resurrection and the application of this truth to the believers’ life and work so extensively, effectively, and experientially as the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee. Their ministry on this subject produces a deep echo of reality because they, like the Lord Jesus and the apostle Paul, were crucified and resurrected persons. Brother Nee taught that the principle of death and resurrection is not only “the ground of our acceptance with God” but also “the basis of our life and service for Him.”40 This was borne out in his life and ministry. In a message given in the late 1930s, where he stated that “death and resurrection…mark God-recognized ministry,”41 Brother Nee testified of being decisively broken by the cross over a long period of time before experiencing resurrection:

The Lord graciously laid me aside once in my life for a number of months and put me, spiritually, into utter darkness. It was almost as though He had forsaken me, almost as though nothing was going on and I had really come to the end of everything. And then by degrees He brought things back again. The temptation is always to try to help God by taking things back ourselves; but remember, there must be a full night in the sanctuary—a full night in darkness. It cannot be hurried; He knows what He is doing.

 

We would like to have death and resurrection put together within one hour of each other. We cannot face the thought that God will keep us aside for so long a time; we cannot bear to wait. And of course I cannot tell you how long He will take, but in principle I think it is quite safe to say this, that there will be a definite period when He will keep you there. It will seem as though nothing is happening; as though everything you valued is slipping from your grasp. There confronts you a blank wall with no door in it. Seemingly everyone else is being blessed and used, while you yourself have been passed by and are losing out.  Lie quiet. All is in darkness, but it is only for a night. It must indeed be a full night, but that is all. Afterwards you will find that everything is given back to you in glorious resurrection; and nothing can measure the difference between what was before and what now is!

 

I was sitting one day at supper with a young brother to whom the Lord had been speaking on this very question of our natural energy. He said to me, “It is a blessed thing when you know the Lord has met you and touched you in that fundamental way, and that disabling touch has been received.” There was a plate of biscuits between us on the table, and I picked one up and broke it in half as though to eat it. Then, fitting the two pieces together again carefully, I said, “It looks all right, but it is never quite the same again, is it? When once your back is broken, you will yield ever after to the slightest touch from God.”42

During the six-year period beginning in 1942 in which he was forced to stop ministering, Brother Nee did not attempt to vindicate himself or recover his ministry. Instead, he remained silent, abiding in the mold of the Lord’s death by enjoying Him as resurrection life (Phil. 3:10). During those years Brother Nee told a certain brother that “there was no possibility to ever resume his ministry.”43 In his mind, his public ministry had been put to death. Much to his surprise, however, after a dark night of six years, the Lord restored Brother Nee’s ministry in 1948 through the labor of a few faithful co-workers, primarily Brother Witness Lee. Many of the saints who had opposed Brother Nee repented of their mistakes, and the church in Shanghai was fully recovered, renewed, and revived. Following the revival, Brother Nee conducted a training in Mount Kuling for four months, which resulted in “a tremendous spiritual explosion”44 and the raising up of hundreds of churches throughout China. In 1950 Brother Nee went to Hong Kong with Brother Lee, and their ministry issued in a great revival that increased the number of saints meeting with the church from about three hundred to more than two thousand. This great blessing upon the saints and churches in China was the issue of the genuine new covenant ministry marked by life out of death. After the resumption of his ministry, Brother Nee repeatedly emphasized the importance of the breaking of the outer man and the release of the spirit for the ministry of life, asserting that “the extent that a man is broken determines the amount of ministry he has.”45 Brother Nee was truly a person broken by the discipline of the Holy Spirit, one who became an outlet through which Christ as the resurrection life could be released to save sinners and supply the saints.

Brother Nee’s life of suffering under the shadow of the cross for the ministry of the resurrection life culminated in twenty years of imprisonment. He was arrested in 1952, following the expulsion of foreign missionaries from China during the Korean War, and was held without trial for four years. In 1956 he was falsely condemned, judged, and sentenced to fifteen years of imprisonment, a term that was extended when he refused to renounce his faith. He died in prison on May 30, 1972. During his imprisonment, although Brother Nee’s outward ministry was terminated, his ministry of life continued. A few months prior to his death he wrote his sister-in-law, “I maintain my joy…I hope you will also take care of yourself and be filled with joy in your heart.”46 His words bear a striking resemblance to Paul’s utterance in Philippians, also written from prison: “Even if I am being poured out as a drink offering upon the sacrifice and service of your faith, I rejoice, and I rejoice together with you all. And in like manner you also rejoice, and you rejoice together with me” (Phil. 2:17-18). Even in his bonds Paul was a strong factor of the Philippians’ progress and joy of the faith because he lived, magnified, and ministered Christ, functioning in a hidden way as a joint of supply to the Body of Christ (1:19-25; Eph. 4:16; Col. 2:19). Similarly, Brother Nee, though outwardly confined, continued to function as an incalculable means of supply to all the saints.

During his imprisonment Brother Nee surely ministered life to the Body of Christ by prayer. Like the apostle Paul, who ministered to the churches and the believers from prison by unceasingly remembering them and making mention of them in his prayers (Eph. 1:16-23; 3:14-21; Phil. 1:3-4; Col. 1:9; 2 Tim. 1:3; Philem. 4), Brother Nee undoubtedly continued to minister life through his ceaseless petition and intercession on behalf of the saints day after day. Years later Brother Lee would testify that “in eternity we will see that much of what the Lord has gained in His recovery during the past two decades was due to Brother Nee’s prayer in prison.” Brother Lee also stated that “prayer is the spiritual conclusion to our entire spiritual career.”47 How fitting that in the last years of his life Brother Nee continually burned incense before God in prayer, and that God answered his prayers by dispensing the rich grace of life to the churches and the saints throughout the earth (Psa. 141:2; Luke 1:9-10; Rev. 5:8; 8:3-4). It was during those years that a number of Brother Nee’s books were translated, published, and made available to the children of God throughout the earth. Through those books, many seeking ones were captured by the Lord to take the way of His recovery and began meeting with the local churches and receiving the ministry in the recovery. It is reserved for God to know how dearly Brother Nee served the church by laying down his life for the release of the divine life to her (1 John 3:16; John 10:10-11) and how greatly we still benefit from his living out Paul’s words: “So then death operates in us, but life in you” (2 Cor. 4:12).


40 CWWN, vol. 33, p. 169

41 CWWN, vol. 33, p. 172

42 CWWN, vol. 33, pp. 183-184

43 Life-study of Genesis, p. 1469

44 Watchman Nee: A Seer of the Divine Revelation, p. 223

45 CWWN, vol. 57, p. 263; cf. CWWN, vol. 59, p. 45

46 Watchman Nee: A Seer of the Divine Revelation, p. 182

47 Fellowship Concerning the Urgent Need of the Vital Groups, p. 121

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

2 – The Ministry of the Spirit and of Righteousness (2)

From chapter two of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

 

The Ministry of Righteousness

In 2 Corinthians 3 Paul speaks not only of the ministry of the Spirit but also of “the ministry of righteousness” (v. 9). Whereas the Spirit refers to God living and operating within us to supply us with the riches of life, righteousness refers to the image of God expressed to become our appearance outwardly (cf. Col. 3:10; Eph. 4:24; Rom. 8:4, 29). The Spirit is the realization of the resurrected Christ, who is the righteous One (Acts 3:14). Hence, when the believers are saturated with the Spirit by receiving the ministry of the Spirit, Christ is wrought into them and expressed through them as subjective righteousness in their living (Matt. 5:20). The righteous requirements of the law are spontaneously and unconsciously fulfilled in them (Rom. 8:4), and they become right with God and others, even becoming the very righteousness of God in Christ (2 Cor. 5:21).

Such was Brother Lee’s goal and the testimony of his conscience concerning his ministry, as he explicitly stated, “This new covenant ministry is the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. In the recovery we only minister Christ as the life-giving Spirit and as our living righteousness.”9 Many saints in the Lord’s recovery can affirm that by receiving this ministry, they became right with God in many aspects of their daily life, experiencing deliverance from sinful habits and addictions. For example, in the 1960s a number of hippies who came to hear Brother Lee minister the word were dynamically saved and turned from their former manner of life to begin living out the proper humanity of Jesus (Eph. 4:22-24). This drastic change was not effected by outward regulations but by the ministry, which led them to call upon the name of the Lord and pray-read the Word of God (Rom. 10:12-13; 2 Tim. 2:22; Eph. 6:17-18; cf. Jude 20-21). Through these life practices they were supplied with the Spirit to spontaneously live out Christ, the righteous One (1 Cor. 12:3, 13). Similarly, by enjoying the ministry in the recovery, many became right not only with God but with others, including a number of couples who were brought back from the brink of separation or even divorce into pleasant oneness and harmony in the Lord.

The glorious issue of the ministry of the Spirit and of righteousness is the adornment of the bride, the wife of the Lamb, for her participation in the marriage dinner of the Lamb (Rev. 19:7-8). The overcoming believers as the bride of Christ will be clothed in fine linen, which is “the righteousnesses of the saints” (v. 8). As the believers partake of the Spirit of life, Christ as their subjective righteousness is constituted into them and lived out of them to become their garment of righteousness (Rom. 8:2, 4). In order to prepare our wedding garment and thereby make ourselves ready for the marriage dinner of the Lamb, we need to remain under the ministry of the Spirit and of righteousness (Phil. 1:19-21). May we receive mercy from the Lord to never depart from the ministry in the Lord’s recovery that we may be overcomers filled with the Spirit and clothed with the wedding garment of righteousness at the marriage dinner of the Lamb.


9 Life-study of 2 Corinthians, pp. 263-264

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

5 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part One: Revelation (4)

From chapter five of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Our appreciation of the profundity of the divine revelations received by the ministers in the Lord’s recovery is strengthened when we consider them in contrast to popular yet superficial (or even erroneous) teachings found in traditional Christianity. For instance, a great many preachers hold a narrow view of God’s salvation, seeing it primarily as a deliverance of humankind from God’s wrath and punishment. In contrast, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery presents the full scriptural revelation concerning God’s complete salvation. Such a salvation indisputably includes the precious and foundational matter of judicial redemption accomplished through the vicarious death of Christ, in which the believers in Christ are saved from God’s condemnation (Rom. 3:24-25; 5:8-9; Gal. 3:13), yet the ministry goes on, as Paul does in the book of Romans, to stress “much more” God’s organic salvation, in which the believers are brought into the enjoyment of the divine life by being regenerated, sanctified, renewed, transformed, conformed, and glorified (John 3:16; Eph. 4:23; Rom. 5:10; 6:4, 22; 8:2, 17, 29-30; 12:2). By receiving this comprehensive and balanced view of God’s full salvation, we have learned not only to appreciate Christ’s eternally efficacious redemption as the unique basis for our justification before God but also to enjoy the continual operation of His divine life within us so that we attain the lofty goal of His salvation in becoming the same as He is in life, nature, element, and expression, but not in the Godhead (Col. 3:4; John 3:6; 2 Pet. 1:4; 2 Cor. 3:18; Phil. 3:21; 1 John 3:2).

The subject of eternal life provides another area of contrast between biblical revelation in the Lord’s recovery and the common teachings in traditional Christianity. Eternal life is erroneously understood by many popular preachers to merely mean everlasting human life untouched by death—thus relegating the believers’ experience of the eternal life to the distant future. The ministry in the Lord’s recovery, on the other hand, offers a fully scriptural and deeply spiritual understanding of eternal life that not only transcends all physical conceptions of the blessings in eternity future but also unlocks the believers’ present enjoyment of God’s gift of life in His Son (Rom. 6:23; John 1:4). Eternal life is nothing less than the divine, uncreated, indestructible, and incorruptible life of God (John 3:16; Eph. 4:18; Heb. 7:16); it is God Himself embodied in the Son, realized as the life-giving Spirit, and imparted into the believers’ tripartite being to become their life, saving them and enabling them to reign over all things (Col. 2:9; 1 Cor. 15:45; Col. 3:4; Rom. 5:10, 17; 8:6, 10-11). Under the shining of such a rich and experiential understanding of eternal life released by the ministry in the Lord’s recovery, many saints have been saved from a purposeless Christian life spent in passive expectation of a blissful afterlife to come. Instead, they have been perfected to partake of the Triune God as eternal life in the present age and to receive the dispensing of this life into their spirit, soul, and body that they may “have life” and “have it abundantly” and thus be saved in life and reign in life over Satan, sin, and death (John 10:10; 5:40; Rom. 8:2; 16:20).

Such superficial views of salvation and eternal life described above are matched by the erroneous yet pervasive concept of “going to heaven,” according to which many preachers mistakenly portray the New Jerusalem as a literal, physical city replete with earthly pleasures designed to satisfy the believers’ soulish longings. In contrast, the ministry in the recovery unveils the intrinsic significance of the holy city as a symbolic vision of the fulfillment of the desire of God’s heart and the ultimate issue of God’s work with and within humanity: a consummate union, mingling, and incorporation of God and man; an eternal mutual abode of the redeeming God and His redeemed people; a universal couple—the Spirit and the bride—composed of Christ the Lamb and the believers as His wife; and an eternal, corporate enlargement, expansion, and expression of the processed and consummated Triune God in His chosen, redeemed, regenerated, transformed, and glorified tripartite people (Rev. 21:2, 9-11, 22; 22:17). It is under such a heavenly vision of the New Jerusalem that, instead of harboring false hopes of one day inheriting a heavenly mansion, we aspire to abide in the Triune God and enjoy His abiding in us in order to be increasingly mingled with Him today so that we may become the New Jerusalem as His corporate dwelling place, beloved counterpart, and organic increase and expression (1 John 4:12-16; John 3:29-30; 14:2, 23; 15:4-5; Eph. 1:23; 3:19; 5:25-27). The weight and preciousness of these scriptural revelations given in the Lord’s recovery are in such contrast with common Christian teachings that we can only thank the Lord for His mercy that we could see them, while also remembering the great price paid by Brother Nee and Brother Lee to release them in the face of opposition.

PreviousHomeNext

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

6 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part Two: Suffering (2)

From chapter six of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Afflictions Suffered by Brother Nee and Brother Lee for Their Revelations

The ministry in the Lord’s recovery is not only rich in the divine revelation of the Bible; it is also costly, having been obtained at a great price by those who suffered under the vision they had received. Throughout his Christian life, Brother Nee’s portion was to endure profound suffering for the sake of his ministry. These sufferings are well chronicled in chapter 21 of his biography, A Seer of the Divine Revelation in the Present Age, written by Brother Lee. Brother Nee was led by the Lord not to work as an employee of any organization but rather to live purely by faith in God. Under the Lord’s sovereign care like the lilies of the field (Matt. 6:28-30; S.S. 2:1-2, 16), he learned to serve the Lord even through dire poverty. In the early days of his ministry in Shanghai, there were times when he had nothing but a little bread to eat for the entire day. In 1922, he was burdened to publish a magazine in order to care for the increasing number of newly saved believers, but he had no money to print the magazine. He wrote articles for the magazine by faith, believing that if he completed the draft, God would supply the means to publish it. Shortly afterward he received a donation from a saint that allowed him to print fourteen hundred copies of his first magazine entitled The Present Testimony.

Throughout his ministry Brother Nee also suffered various illnesses. In 1924, due to intense labor and lack of adequate physical care, he contracted tuberculosis, which he suffered from for five years. During this period of illness he spent four months to complete the three volumes of The Spiritual Man. Concerning this labor he testified:

At that time my disease became so aggravated that I could not even lie down. While writing I sat on a chair with a high back and pressed my chest against the desk to alleviate the pain. The writing of this book was a real labor of blood, sweat, and tears. I despaired of life, yet God’s grace brought me through. After completing each time of writing, I would say to myself, “This is my last testimony to the church.”22

Following the publication of the book, Brother Nee was told by a doctor that his medical condition was hopeless and that he had only a few weeks to live. However, he was miraculously healed by standing on the words of the Bible that became God’s living speaking to him: that he would live, stand, and walk by faith (Rom. 1:17; 2 Cor. 1:24; 5:7). Brother Nee was also afflicted with a heart disease called angina pectoris for the last forty years of his life until he went to be with the Lord in 1972. As early as 1934, he told Brother Witness Lee that he might die at any moment. The pain was so intense that many times while speaking in meetings, he would break out in a cold sweat or need to lean on the podium for support. Because of his ill health, he learned to greatly depend on the Lord and to minister not by his physical strength but by resurrection life.

Brother Nee also suffered severe opposition from the denominations, primarily due to his teaching concerning the genuine ground of the church—having only one church in each city for the practical expression of the one Body of Christ in that locality—which annulled the standing of all the denominations (1 Cor. 1:2; 2 Cor. 1:1; Rev. 1:11; 2:1, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14). Brother Nee boldly exposed and renounced the denominations’ deviation from the truth in the Scriptures concerning the proper ground of locality, condemning the denominations as divisions (1 Cor. 1:10-13; Gal. 5:20; cf. Rev. 3:8). Consequently, he was fiercely criticized and opposed by both native Chinese Christians and Western missionaries, in secret and in public. The denominations sought to destroy his ministry, despising him and spreading false rumors, just as certain opposers dishonored Paul and his co-workers and disseminated an “evil report” against them (2 Cor. 6:8). This fulfilled the Lord’s prophetic word in Matthew 5:11 concerning His faithful disciples: “Blessed are you when they reproach and persecute you, and while speaking lies, say every evil thing against you because of Me.” Because Brother Nee and his co-workers willingly went forth unto the lowly and suffering Jesus outside the camp of organized Christianity, they bore His reproach, bearing the cross (Heb. 13:13; Matt. 16:24; cf. Exo. 33:7-11).

But persecution came not only from the outside; Brother Nee suffered even more at the hands of those within the church. Two years after the church life began to be practiced in his hometown of Foochow, he was unjustly excommunicated by his co-workers for standing for the truth of the Lord’s recovery and opposing the practice of having the leading co-workers formally ordained as preachers by a denominational missionary. Most of the believers in the church in Foochow had been saved through Brother Nee’s preaching and expressed their disagreement with this unfair treatment. However, Brother Nee was led by the Lord not to vindicate himself but to learn the lesson of the cross by enduring this suffering. He then left Foochow and moved to Pagoda, where he received a burden from the Lord to publish his second magazine, The Christian. He wrote all the major articles for this monthly publication, which had four main burdens: to preach the gospel, to expound the Bible, to speak concerning the church, and to cultivate the believers’ spiritual life. This magazine enjoyed a wide circulation, having ten thousand subscribers. By reading Brother Nee’s articles, many young people throughout China, including Brother Witness Lee, were enlightened to see the truths in the Word, including the degradation of the denominations and the scriptural way to practice the genuine church life. It was through the suffering caused by his unjust excommunication that Brother Nee was able to release these precious messages full of light and revelation, which opened the eyes of many young lovers of the Lord to see Christ and the church unveiled in the Bible (Eph. 5:32).

In 1942 Brother Nee suffered again from dissension within the church life when a great turmoil broke out against him in the church in Shanghai due to a misunderstanding. Brother Nee had been helping his brother’s pharmaceutical business because he felt that the profit from the factory could meet the needs of the co-workers, many of whom had died due to malnutrition or were suffering poverty with their families. Brother Nee would later state in tears that he had been compelled to go into business in order to support his co-workers, just as a widow may be forced to remarry for the survival of her children. However, misconstruing Brother Nee’s intentions, most of the saints in Shanghai, including the co-workers and elders, opposed him so vehemently that he was forced to discontinue his ministry for six years. By passing through this trial Brother Nee was pressed into the mold of Christ’s death for the deepening of his ministry, which became a rich heritage to all the churches in His recovery. He learned by experience that God sovereignly arranges our environment through the discipline of the Holy Spirit in order to break our outer man so that our inner man may be released, enabling us to impart the divine life to others in both our public ministry and our personal contact with them (2 Cor. 4:16; Rom. 8:16, 28-29; 1 Cor. 6:17).

The reason Brother Nee’s ministry is full of supply, always imparting to us more than mere knowledge by ushering us into the experiential reality of the divine revelation, doubtlessly comes down to this one fact: it was acquired at the high price of severe personal sufferings. If we have enjoyed the sweet fragrance of frankincense, the fragrance of resurrection, pervading his writings, it is surely because he followed the Lord in His sweet death to remain on the mountain of myrrh (S.S. 4:6).

Following the footsteps of Brother Nee as his senior co-worker and spiritual father, Brother Lee also suffered much for the experience of the revelations he received. In 1943 Brother Lee was used by the Lord to usher in a great revival in the church in Chefoo. However, at the peak of the revival the city was invaded by the Japanese army, and Brother Lee was imprisoned and tortured by the Japanese military police for about thirty days. After his release he became gravely ill with tuberculosis and was bedridden for six months. As a result, he was forced to leave Chefoo and move to Tsingtao, away from the responsibilities of the church and the work, in order to rest and recuperate. During the subsequent two years of acute limitation, the Lord showed him the vision of the tree of life, revealing that the tree of life not only opens and closes the Scriptures but also forms a line that runs throughout the entire Bible (Gen. 2:9; Rev. 2:7; 22:2, 14, 19; cf. Psa. 36:9; Ezek. 47:12; John 6:48; 14:6; 15:1). The Lord used this vision to measure Brother Lee’s ministry, showing him that although he had helped to bring in the revival in Chefoo, his ministry was “still short of the element of the divine life”23 and that “there was much truth but too little life” in his messages.24 Hence, he repented to the Lord, confessing that he was short of life and that his ministry was “deficient in the element of the divine life.”25 He also realized that every problem, either in the church, the work, or the ministry, is the result of a shortage of life. The vision of the tree of life was a great turning point for Brother Lee, and the messages that he spoke on the tree of life in the 1940s laid a foundation for the revival of the church in Shanghai and the resumption of Brother Nee’s ministry in 1948. In accordance with the character of the new covenant ministry, it was by suffering from a life-threatening and protracted sickness that Brother Lee received the vision concerning the tree of life, which has continued to benefit countless children of God throughout the earth to this day.


22 Watchman Nee: A Seer of the Divine Revelation in the Present Age, p. 91

23 CWWL, 1983, vol. 1, p. 516

24 CWWL, 1983, vol. 3, p. 332

25 CWWL, 1983, vol. 1, p. 516

PreviousHomeNext

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

6 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part Two: Suffering (3)

From chapter six of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Much like Brother Nee, Brother Lee experienced immense opposition from organized Christianity. Because of his faithfulness to the deeper truths in the Word of God, such as the Triune God and the genuine ground of the church, the oneness of the unique Body of Christ, many actively opposed his ministry, publishing books and articles teeming with baseless accusations and vicious rumors. Responding to the deliberate and malicious misrepresentation of his ministry, Brother Lee stated, “Our unique burden and commission is not to fight against the opposers but to present the divine truths revealed in the Bible to others”26 (1 Tim. 2:7; 2 Tim. 2:15). He realized that “the opposers’ erroneous accusations against us concerning our belief may serve as the dark background that helps to highlight the divine truths that the Lord has shown us in the Bible.”27 In other words, the relentless opposition to his ministry enabled Brother Lee to continually receive and release fresh revelations from the Word of God concerning the Divine Trinity, the person of Christ, and the church as the Body of Christ and the one new man. Since Brother Lee went to be with the Lord in 1997, the co-workers who have continued his ministry have met similar opposition from Christianity as they continue to faithfully present these truths in spoken messages at conferences and trainings and written articles published in the journal Affirmation and Critique.

Holding to Watchman Nee’s pattern, Brother Lee also suffered from dissension within the local churches. In the 1970s certain divisive persons sparked a turmoil among the churches in the United States that wounded Brother Lee deeply. In a message given in 1978 in the midst of the turmoil, he said, “This message is not the result of Bible study; it is the result of intense suffering. Because of this suffering, I have been greatly exercised before the Lord in an attempt to understand the situation.”28 Gradually, the Lord showed him that the underlying cause of the turmoil was a shortage of God wrought into the instigators (cf. Col. 2:19). Brother Lee realized that although the dissenters claimed to have seen the ground of the church and to care for the Lord’s recovery, they actually damaged the oneness among us because they were not sufficiently filled with the Triune God, who is the unique element of the believers’ oneness (Eph. 4:4-6). Brother Lee also realized that they had not allowed the Triune God to spread into their inward parts and transform them, because they were unwilling to let the cross deal with their natural life (2 Cor. 3:18; Matt. 16:24-25). It was because of this intense suffering that Brother Lee received an invaluable revelation regarding our need for the cross to deal with us thoroughly so that we might be transformed in life and receive the dispensing of God into every part of our being in order to be built together and thus safeguarded from dissension and division.

Another turmoil arose in the 1980s, when certain ambitious brothers attempted to establish their own personal kingdoms by drawing away the saints after themselves and cutting off the churches under their influence from both the ministry and the other local churches (cf. Acts 20:30). Seeing yet again brothers whom he loved and had raised up in the Lord’s recovery turn away from him and ravage the churches brought Brother Lee tremendous suffering. However, through this trial he realized that all the turmoils and all the problems of the church are due to a lack of knowing the Body of Christ, and that the unique scriptural remedy for this illness is to see, know, care for, and honor the Body.29 Brother Lee was also troubled by what he perceived as a deviation from “organic matters into organizational matters” and a departure from “intrinsic things to the outward things.”30 For instance, since the dissenting ones held an organizational—rather than organic—view of the Body of Christ, they erroneously claimed that each local church is an absolutely autonomous body of Christ that is self-governed and separated from the other churches. This unscriptural teaching cuts the local churches into disconnected pieces and thus divides the Body of Christ. Against this backdrop, Brother Lee presented a deeply organic and intrinsic view of the Body of Christ as an organism of the Triune God (Eph. 4:4-6). In light of this revelation, Brother Lee emphasized that the universal church as the Body of Christ is not a lifeless human organization but an organism constituted with the life of the Triune God. Just as it is impossible for any part of our physical body to be autonomous from the rest of the body, so also it is impossible for any local church as part of the mystical Body of Christ to be fully autonomous or independent from other churches. Although each church may be independently responsible for some business affairs or other practical matters, there should be a fellowship, a circulation, of the divine life of the Body flowing among all the churches (1 Cor. 10:16-17; Acts 2:42; 1 John 1:3, 7). Moreover, Brother Lee pointed out that the local churches, though necessary, are not the goal of God’s economy but the procedure to reach that goal, which is the unique Body of Christ (Eph. 1:10, 23; 4:12, 16).31 Under God’s wise sovereignty, as Brother Lee passed through great affliction from the turmoil in the 1980s, his ministry on the Body of Christ was strengthened and developed. Just as the apostle John, while suffering exile on the Island of Patmos, received spiritual visions concerning the testimony of Jesus (Rev. 1:9; cf. 19:10), so also Brother Lee, in the midst of his sufferings, received fresh visions in the Word of God concerning the organic Body of Christ as the ultimate goal of God’s economy.

Brother Lee was able to minister the reality of the riches of the Triune God because he was willing to suffer for what had been revealed to him. When he released the truths concerning the deification of the believers with the new hymn “What Miracle, What Mystery!” in February 1994, he told the brothers that “the enemy Satan would do things to frustrate me from releasing the high peaks of the divine revelation according to the entire teaching of the New Testament.”32 In a letter written on March 24, 1997, Brother Lee stated:

In October 1995 I discovered a thorn in my body from a messenger of Satan that I might not be lifted up. By the Lord’s rich mercy and sufficient grace, I have lived and ministered to you the deeper truths as His and your slave for over a year….As the Lord provides me the strength and time, I intend to continue to serve and speak in the coming days.33

Brother Lee’s ministry stirred up opposition from the enemy due to its strategic importance in spiritual warfare. Brother Lee stated, “Satan hates the high peak of the divine revelation concerning the ultimate goal of God’s economy,” particularly “this one main point—that God became a man so that man may become God in life and in nature but not in the Godhead to produce the organic Body of Christ for the fulfillment of God’s economy to close this age and to bring Christ back to set up His kingdom.”34 Brother Lee knew that since ministering the high peak truths would provoke Satan to afflict him with a thorn in his flesh, these truths could only be released at a tremendous personal cost. Undeterred by the prospect of suffering, Brother Lee, by the Lord’s abounding grace, was willing to pay the highest price to minister the high peak truths in order to build up the Body for the consummation of the divine economy.


26 CWWL 1980, vol. 2, p. 431

27 CWWL 1980, vol. 2, p. 431

28 Truth Messages, p. 100

29 The Problems Causing the Turmoils in the Church Life, pp. 28-30, 35

30 The Mysteries in God’s New Testament Economy, p. 12

31 Practical Points Concerning Blending, p. 22

32 CWWL, 1994-1997, vol. 5, p. 525

33 CWWL, 1994-1997, vol. 5, p. 525

34 The Crystallization of the Epistle to the Romans Messages 1-17, p. 159

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (9)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Those who minister in this way, as our brothers did, are truly grains of wheat who allow the death of Christ to break the shell of their soul-life for the release of the eternal, uncreated, resurrection life of Christ from within them to nourish others with the riches of this life (Heb. 4:12; 1 John 5:11-13, 16). Furthermore, they are willing to be identified with Christ as the spiritual rock smitten on the cross to flow out the Spirit of life as the living water in resurrection, and because of this they experience the smiting, the termination, of their natural life through the work of the cross so that the life-giving Spirit as the river of water life can flow from within them to others freely, purely, and abundantly (Exo. 17:6; Num. 20:8; 1 Cor. 10:4; John 7:37-39; 19:34; 2 Cor. 4:10-11, 16; Rev. 22:1). Because the “alabaster flask” of their outer man is broken through the operation of the death of Christ, the fragrant “ointment” of “very valuable pure nard” within the flask—the indwelling compound Spirit as the ointment—can be released from them not only to satisfy the Lord but also to fill the church as the house of the living God with the fragrance of Christ as the resurrection life (John 12:3; Mark 14:3; Matt. 26:6-13; 1 Tim. 3:15; cf. Lev. 2:1). Their earthen vessels are broken through the application of the cross to their natural life, allowing them to manifest and minister to us the resurrected Christ of glory as the excellent and powerful treasure, thereby supplying the church with Christ as the life-giving Spirit, the sufficient grace, and the perfect power (2 Cor. 4:7-17; 3:6; 12:9, 10). They are also grains of sand who continually remain in the crucified Christ as the wounded oyster, receiving the life-giving Spirit as His life-juice around them and thereby being formed into pearls of great value (John 15:4-5; Phil. 3:10; 1:19; 1 Cor. 15:31, 45b), serving as gates of pearl, channels of life, through which God’s elect can enter into the blessings of the holy city, the New Jerusalem (Matt. 13:45-46; Rev. 21:21; 22:14). Undoubtedly, our brothers Watchman Nee and Witness Lee were such ones who experienced the death of Christ deeply and thoroughly for the release of the nourishing, flowing, fragrant, precious, and powerful resurrection life.

Since Brother Nee and Brother Lee carried out their ministry by dying to themselves to release the resurrection life, long after they went to be with the Lord their ministry remains and prevails throughout the earth. Many Christian revivals and groups have flourished and then withered, attracting a great following for a period of time only to fade away and lose impact after the death of their founders. This is primarily because of a shortage of the ministry of life due to an insufficient degree of experience of the death of Christ. In contrast, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery has stood the test of time in the past century. This is principally because our brothers’ work is not the mere endeavor of outward activity carried out by natural human zeal but the rich outflow of the resurrection life released through their continual experience of the death of the cross. The issue of their labor in the Lord is not a mass Christian movement animated by human effort and enthusiasm but the multiplication of the divine life produced through their death as grains of wheat and their ministry of the resurrection life.

Today we witness the result of their ministry of life: many local churches raised up throughout the earth to be practical expressions of the organic Body of Christ. The lasting result and the enduring impact of their ministry attest to the Lord’s approval of their ministry. Because they faithfully served the Lord by following Him into the ground, they and their ministry were honored by the Father (John 12:24-26), who as the God of resurrection recognizes only that which has passed through death into resurrection (Rom. 4:17; 8:11; 2 Cor. 1:9; Heb. 11:19). Although our brothers are now with the Lord, their ministry continues to be a source of life supply to the believers throughout the earth. By the Lord’s mercy and grace, many saints in the Lord’s recovery likewise are being perfected and supplied to take the way of falling into the ground and dying for the multiplication of Christ as life and the glorification of the Father. Because the Lord’s recovery among us was initiated, is sustained, and will be supplied by such a ministry of resurrection life released through death, “this work” is not “of men” but “of God”; hence, the recovery will not be overthrown but will continue to grow and prevail until the Lord returns (Acts 5:39).

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (5)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Brother Nee and Brother Lee as Grains of Wheat Falling into the Ground and Dying to Bear Much Fruit in Resurrection

At its heart, the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee is characterized by the principle of life out of death exemplified in Christ’s death as a grain of wheat for the impartation and multiplication of life in resurrection. According to John 12:24, the Lord as the lone “grain of wheat,” the only begotten Son of God, fell into the ground and died, laying down His soul-life to release the divine life from within the shell of His humanity, so that in resurrection He might impart this life into the believers to bring them forth as many grains, the many sons of God as His organic increase and multiplication (John 10:10-11; 3:29-30). In the immediately following verses the Lord indicated that if the believers as many grains of wheat, “the good seed” (Matt. 13:24-25, 38; 1 Cor. 15:35-54), aspire to serve the Lord so as to be honored by the Father, they should “follow” the crucified Lord into the ground, hating and losing their “soul-life” through death, so that in resurrection they too would release His eternal life from within them, thereby bearing others as abundant fruit for the propagation of the divine life (John 12:25-26; 14:6; 1 John 3:16). Brother Lee stated in Life-study of Matthew that the Lord’s recovery among us in the twentieth century issued from Sister M.E. Barber, a British missionary, and Brother Nee as seeds of life sown into the ground:

Miss M. E. Barber did not come to China to work. She was in China sowing Christ, even sowing herself in Christ. She was a seed sown into that district in China. Eventually, something grew out of that seed. The Lord’s recovery today is the produce of the seed sown by Sister Barber and Brother Nee….

Recently an opposer told a brother, “We are going to stop you.” He said that they were planning to stop the Lord’s recovery. If the opposers try to do this, they will find themselves in trouble. Do not touch anything of life, for the more you touch it, the more it multiplies. If you leave it alone, it may remain dormant. But if you touch it, it will grow. Suppose you say to some seed, “Seed, I shall stop you. I shall bury you in the earth.” How good that would be for the seed! But if you leave the seeds on a pedestal, appreciating them, looking at them, and treasuring them, that will be the most effective way to stop them. But if you try to terminate the seed by burying it in the earth, the seed will grow. The opposers simply do not know what the Lord’s recovery is. The Lord’s recovery is not work, teaching, or theology. It is a seed; it is the living Christ as a seed….Who can stop the Lord’s recovery? The seed has already been sown….The recovery as the seed of life has been sown in America, Europe, Brazil, and many other places. No one and nothing can stop it.57

In essence, Brother Nee and Brother Lee carried out their ministry not by teaching biblical doctrine or moral behavior but by sowing themselves in Christ as the seed of life into the ground for the multiplication of the divine life in resurrection. To a great degree, the Lord’s recovery in the past century is the organic issue of the seed sown by these brothers who willingly and faithfully laid down their soul-life to release the eternal life to the believers for the increase of this life.


57 Life-study of Matthew, pp. 439-441

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (3)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Mark of Death and Resurrection on the Ministry of Brother Lee

The pattern of Brother Nee was reproduced and continued in Brother Lee’s ministry, which also distinctly bore the mark of death and resurrection. During his month-long imprisonment by the Japanese army in 1943, he was tortured for two three-hour sessions a day, an experience he later described as a walk through “the deep valley of the shadow of death” (Psa. 23:4).48 His experience of nearly dying from tuberculosis immediately following his imprisonment forced him to set aside his responsibilities related to the church and the work for a few years. Brother Lee testified that during that time the Lord dealt with every part of his inner being, cleansing and purifying him thoroughly concerning his motives and intentions (Eph. 5:26; 1Pet. 1:22; James 4:8; 1 John 3:3). Eventually, the Lord healed him not by a gift in power but by grace in the resurrection life—not suddenly with a miracle but gradually through the impartation of resurrection life into his mortal body (Rom. 8:11).49

It was also during this period of recuperation that the Lord revealed to him the controlling vision concerning the tree of life (Gen. 2:9; Rev. 2:7; 22:2, 14), which issued in a revival in Shanghai and Nanking in 1947. The revival spread to a number of local churches in the southern provinces, including Hong Kong, Canton, Swatow, Amoy, and Foochow. Having passed through “so great a death,” Brother Lee experienced the God of resurrection, the One who tears down the old creation within us through the work of the cross and builds up His new creation by dispensing His resurrection life into the depths of our being (2 Cor. 1:8-10; 4:16). After Brother Lee’s God-given ministry had been offered back to God on the altar of the cross, it was gloriously restored to him in resurrection and became a blessing to believers throughout the earth (Gen. 22:9-18; Heb. 11:17-19; James 2:21). Surely Brother Lee’s ministry was one that passed through death into resurrection.

From 1955 through 1961 Brother Lee emphasized the building of the church according to the Lord’s prophecy in Matthew 16:18. For this reason the gates of Hades unleashed an assault of death against his ministry and the churches (v. 18). From 1959 to 1965 there was a storm among the churches in Taiwan caused by several ambitious younger co-workers. These dissenting ones, who had been under Brother Lee’s training, spread inaccurate and insidious claims concerning the end of Brother Lee’s ministry and the churches.50 A letter written in May 1961 by one of these dissenters even compared Brother Lee’s work to the tower of Babel and the image of Nebuchadnezzar and threatened to tear it all down.51 Although a few leading co-workers in Taiwan urged him to leave the United States and return to Taiwan to address the situation, Brother Lee chose not to return to Taiwan for several years. During these years he often gave these co-workers a concise reply:

Let them do it and see how much they can do. You need not worry at all. If the work on the island of Taiwan is of the Lord, they cannot destroy it; if it is destroyed, the Lord will still raise it up in resurrection. If they can destroy it, should it not be destroyed? Let us not worry.52

Brother Lee’s reply clearly alluded to the Lord’s word in John 2:19 concerning His death and resurrection: “Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up.” This prophecy was fulfilled two thousand years ago when the Lord’s physical body was torn down in crucifixion and resurrected three days later. Yet the principle of death and resurrection implied in this word has continued to operate in the church, the Lord’s mystical Body, throughout the past twenty centuries: the more the church is devastated by death, the more it is built up in resurrection (cf. Acts 8:3-8, 26-40; 12:1-2, 24; 13:1-4; John 12:24, 32). Brother Lee realized that, in a sense, the ravaging of the church by the enemy is necessary, because, like a refining fire, it destroys everything natural so that what is spiritual may be manifested in resurrection (Dan. 11:35; 12:10; Zech. 13:9; Mal. 3:2-3; cf. 1 Cor. 11:19; 15:46). After passing through the onslaught of death brought in by the turmoil, the churches in Taiwan were not only preserved but also purified and established in resurrection (Isa. 48:10; Jer. 9:7), just as the churches in China were revived and strengthened after the resumption of Brother Nee’s ministry (Eph. 3:16; 6:10; 1 Pet. 5:10). Furthermore, the turmoil in Taiwan was used by the Lord in His leading Brother Lee to migrate to the United States and begin to minister there, a move that issued in the raising up of many churches throughout the Western hemisphere. The result of the turmoil is proof that the ministry in the Lord’s recovery is a ministry in resurrection; the churches in Taiwan, which were raised up through this ministry, were shown to be not the work of man but the work of God, constituted with the death-overcoming resurrection life (John 11:25; Acts 5:38-39).

The operation of death unto resurrection in the churches did not stop with events in Taiwan but continued as the ministry in the Lord’s recovery spread to the United States. The experience of the cross and the God of resurrection is not a one-time event but a lifelong matter; for a genuine minister of the new covenant, deliverance from death must be a continual process (2 Cor. 1:9-10; cf. Phil. 3:10-11). On the eve of the storm among the churches in the United States in the 1970s, Brother Lee went to the Lord in prayer concerning what he perceived as signs of dissension and a deviation from the way of life. The Lord’s word to him was “not to do anything outwardly or make an issue of anything but to go to the cross.”53 By the Lord’s mercy and grace, the more he remained on the cross, the more living messages in resurrection he received. In those days he gave the Life-study of Ephesians trainings as well as conferences, which were published in books such as The Experience of Christ, Life Messages, and The Exercise of the Kingdom for the Building Up of the Church. Brother Lee testified:

Christ crucified is the way of my ministry. When I die with Him, I have much to minister. I have learned this secret. Whenever I need to speak, I go to the cross. Then I receive a word from the Lord. A word from the crucified Christ is a word in resurrection, and a word in resurrection is boundless. If we have merely learned something of dead letters, after we speak it, that is the end of it. But if we go to the cross and are willing to die there, our speaking will be in resurrection. Christ crucified is the way of our ministry.54

Brother Lee likened his ministry to a medical treatment that administered the crucified Christ as a divine antibiotic to the churches.55 In his endeavor to heal the churches affected by the storm, Brother Lee carried out his ministry by contacting the crucified Christ, remaining in Him, receiving a living and bountiful word in resurrection, and imparting this living word to the churches (1 Cor. 1:18, 24; John 6:63, 68; 15:4-5; 17:8; Phil. 2:16; Acts 5:20). He did not merely learn the theological doctrine concerning the cross of Christ and pass it on to others; rather, he experienced the crucified Christ and ministered this very One in resurrection as an experiential reality (1 Cor. 2:2; 15:45b). Instead of exercising his natural human wisdom to develop a solution to problems among the churches, Brother Lee was faithful to simply abide in the crucified Christ and minister this Christ to the churches. Consequently, the storm abated within a year, and many of the churches were healed and strengthened.


48 Life-Study of the Psalms, p. 145

49 Life-Study of 1 Corinthians, pp. 537-538

50 CWWL, 1981, vol. 2, pp. 298, 302-303

51 CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, p. 555

52 CWWL, 1981, vol. 2, p. 299

53 The Recovery of Christ as Everything in the Church, p. 32

54 The Recovery of Christ as Everything in the Church, p. 32

55 The Recovery of Christ as Everything in the Church, p. 31

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

8 – The Ministry Abounding with Glory (3)

From chapter eight of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The New Covenant Ministry—the Heavenly Treasure in Earthen Vessels

The new covenant ministry is a matter of the Christ of glory as the precious treasure shining in the believers as earthen vessels. When Paul refers to Christ as the treasure of glory indwelling him and his fellow workers in 2 Corinthians 4:7, he states that the treasure is in earthen vessels, not golden boxes. As descendants of Adam, Paul and his fellow apostles in and of themselves were nothing more than earthen vessels; they were weak, poor, “sinful, fallen, and low.”63 Similarly, although the ministers of the word in the Lord’s recovery contain, express, and minister Christ as the treasure, they as earthen vessels are not without weaknesses and imperfections. Brother Lee was not ashamed of acknowledging this:

We must humble ourselves and admit that we are all earthen vessels. You are an earthen vessel, and I am also an earthen vessel; we all are earthen vessels. Nevertheless, a treasure is contained in these earthen vessels. The co-workers, elders, deacons, and brothers and sisters all have weaknesses because they are earthen vessels. How can earthen vessels not have weaknesses? Are we not earthen vessels? Do we not have weaknesses? We must admit that we all have the same problem, and we all need the Lord’s mercy…I will never deny that I am full of problems, because I am an earthen vessel in Adam. However, please do not forget that we all have many problems, because we are all earthen vessels in Adam…We all have defects, and we all are earthen vessels.64

Recognizing that he was an earthen vessel, Brother Lee emphatically disclaimed any pretense to infallibility: “Today I testify before all that I am also a fallen man. I have made mistakes, and I have my weaknesses. This cannot be denied.”65

Not even the apostle Paul was free from mistakes. At the conclusion of his third apostolic journey, he disregarded the Spirit’s admonition not to set foot in Jerusalem (Acts 21:4) and participated in a Nazarite vow, a Judaic practice belonging to the Old Testament dispensation. According to his own teaching, such practices should be renounced in light of God’s New Testament economy (vv. 15-26). Paul’s involvement in this practice jeopardized God’s New Testament economy by bringing in a mixture of Judaism. Therefore, God allowed a riot to prevent Paul from completing his Nazarite vow (vv. 27-30). However, his subsequent arrest and imprisonment were arranged by God so that he would have a quiet environment in which to write his last eight Epistles for the completion of the divine revelation (Col. 1:25). These eight Epistles were included in the canon of the New Testament alongside the six Epistles written by Paul prior to his failure, showing that it did not invalidate his ministry but rather afforded the sovereign God an opportunity to manifest His wisdom for the carrying out of His economy (Eph. 3:10). Brother Lee testifies that this was also his experience:

Our failures, mistakes, defeats, and wrongdoings have also given God opportunities to display His wisdom. None of us likes to be mistaken; on the contrary, we all want to be right. Although I have always intended to do the right thing, I have nevertheless made many mistakes, even some big mistakes. I certainly hate these mistakes, but I can testify that they have afforded God the opportunity to show forth His wisdom.66

But though Paul and his co-workers were not perfect in the eyes of God, they nevertheless lived a life that was worthy of the new covenant ministry, conducting themselves irreproachably in the eyes of men (1 Tim. 3:2). In 2 Corinthians 6:3 Paul boldly declared, “We give no occasion of stumbling in anything that the ministry may not be faulted.” Similarly, Paul called on the Thessalonians to bear witness to the holy, righteous, and blameless manner in which he and his fellow apostles conducted themselves toward the believers (1 Thes. 2:10; cf. Heb. 13:18). For this reason Paul had the standing in the Lord to exhort the believers to imitate him, an imitator of Christ, that they also might be imitators of Christ (1 Cor. 4:16; 11:1; Phil. 3:17). In the same manner, those taking the lead in the Lord’s ministry in His recovery live a life that matches their ministry. Although in the sight of God they are not blameless, for no flesh is such (Gal. 2:16), in the sight of men they are without reproach. They have kept themselves unspotted from the world, fully separated from the world according to God’s holy nature (James 1:27), and they are holy, good, pure, and excellent in all their manner of life in Christ (1 Pet. 1:15-16; 2:12; 3:2). Hence, their holy, God-expressing, and Christ-magnifying living, the foundation of their ministry, is a proper pattern that is worthy of our imitation (2 Thes. 3:7, 9).


63 Life-Study of 2 Corinthians, p. 89

64 Christ Making His Home in Our Heart and the Building Up of the Church, p. 89

65 CWWL, 1981, vol. 2, p. 320

66 Life-Study of Ephesians, p. 273

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

8 – The Ministry Abounding with Glory (5)

From chapter eight of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The ministers of the new covenant are earthen vessels that contain a heavenly treasure—the Lord of glory wrought into them to be their ministry (James 2:1; Heb. 1:3; Col. 1:25-29). When we consider them, we should learn to see beyond the earthen vessel and discern the divine treasure within. This is to know them not according to the flesh but according to the spirit, not according to their outward appearance but according to their inward reality (2 Cor. 5:16-17; cf. John 8:15-19). With our natural human sight it is not difficult to see the imperfections and weaknesses in the earthen vessels of the new covenant ministers. However, it is only with a spirit of wisdom and revelation and by having the eyes of our heart enlightened that we can see the riches of Christ constituted into them to be the intrinsic content of their ministry (Eph. 1:17-18; 3:8; 1 Cor. 1:30; 2:7-8). In Brother Nee’s words, “Sometimes…our eyes only see the earthen vessel. Those who know God, however, are able to see the treasure in earthen vessels when they look at God’s children.”71 Brother Lee echoes this thought:

We all have defects, and we all are earthen vessels. However, we thank the Lord that He is the treasure in us, the earthen vessels. When we enjoy the saints, we do not look at the earthen vessels; rather, we enjoy and appreciate Christ, who is the treasure in the earthen vessels. No matter how weak a believer is, how many shortcomings or failures he has, or how insignificant he seems to be, we must admit that he has a portion of Christ and that his portion is precious. If we look at the saints from this point of view, we will immediately see that they have a portion of Christ for us to enjoy…The Lord wants us to enjoy the treasure and not look at the earthen vessel. This can be likened to drinking water from a bottle. We should focus on the water, not the bottle that contains the water. We all must see that every believer is an earthen vessel with weaknesses, but he also contains Christ, the treasure.72

Every genuine new covenant minister is a living paradox: an earthen vessel in which the glorious Christ dwells as a priceless treasure, and a lowly thornbush in which the God of glory burns as the holy flame of fire (Exo. 3:2-4; Deut. 33:16; Mark 12:26-27). We need to shift our gaze from the earthen vessel to the heavenly treasure within, from the thornbush to the divine fire. Brother Lee underscores the importance of this matter, offering a personal testimony:

According to God’s principle in His creation, in order for anything to grow there is the need for a negative side. Take the example of a chicken. We all appreciate chicken eggs, breasts, and legs, but we certainly do not care for chicken dung, feathers, and bones. Nevertheless, without dung, feathers, and bones, a chicken cannot grow. In order for a chicken to be a chicken, it must have these things. But it is not our portion to eat them. We should enjoy the eggs, the breasts, and the legs, and forget the dung, the feathers, and the bones. If we concentrate on the positive aspects of the chicken, we shall receive much nourishment.

 

I admit that the church in Los Angeles has made certain mistakes, and I confess that I have made mistakes. The elders can testify of this. Everybody makes mistakes. No one can deny this. I have had to make mistakes in order to grow. These mistakes are my “dung.” If you eat this, you are foolish. I also admit that I have “feathers.” The church in Los Angeles also has had a certain amount of “feathers” and “bones.” However, without these “feathers,” “bones,” and “dung,” neither the church in Los Angeles nor my ministry would be able to exist. Do you intend to gather up the “feathers” and say, “Look! This is the church in Los Angeles. Look! This is what Brother Lee has done. See all these awful ‘feathers.’” If you do this, you will not damage the church in Los Angeles or my ministry, but you will surely damage yourself. To do this is not wise. These who have been perfected to be pillars, who surely are not less intelligent than you, are wise. Their eyes are much clearer than yours. But they refuse to devote their attention to the negative things. They would say, “Although Brother Lee has some ‘dung,’ he has a great many eggs. I don’t care for the ‘dung’ issuing out of his ministry—I want to eat all the ‘eggs,’ ‘breasts,’ and ‘legs.’ I have no time to hear about ‘feathers’ and ‘bones.’” Let us follow the example of such brothers to forget the negative things and to feast upon the “eggs,” “breasts,” and “legs.”

Three or four of us knew Brother Nee very intimately. He fully opened himself to us, and we knew his imperfections. But we realized that these imperfections were the “dung” that enabled him to exist. Unlike others, we would not cling to his “feathers,” nor to the “bones” of the “chicken” in Shanghai. If we had done this, we would have sacrificed ourselves. I never suffered such self-inflicted damage. Rather, I enjoyed the fresh, nourishing “eggs,” “breasts,” and “legs” of Brother Nee’s ministry. When a great turmoil was aroused against his ministry, I was not ashamed to say that I was an absolute follower of Brother Nee. I did not care what others said about his mistakes. I only knew how grateful I was to him for the perfection he had rendered to me. I knew the nourishment I had received from him. Even when we are in the New Jerusalem, I shall be able to say that the Lord used Brother Nee to perfect me. Apart from his ministry, I would never be the person I am today.73

In a similar vein, in The Knowledge of Life Brother Lee admonishes the saints not to criticize or resist those who have the ministry of the Holy Spirit lest they sustain a tremendous loss:

When the Holy Spirit performs this enlightening work within man, it is a very tender and delicate matter. As soon as He meets resistance from man, He immediately withdraws…Not only does the Holy Spirit work in this way; even those who have the ministry of the Holy Spirit work in this way. A servant who knows God and is used by God is always happy to help others. Yet if you criticize him or intentionally resist him, he will not contend with you, reason with you, or argue concerning right or wrong. He has only one way: He simply withdraws, having nothing more to say to you and being no longer able to help you. Thus, he who likes to contend is foolish, and the loss he suffers is tremendous! Toward one who has the ministry of the Holy Spirit, we should really be careful! You may freely criticize those who walk on the street, but you should not freely criticize nor purposely dispute with one who has the ministry of the Holy Spirit. This does not mean that your criticism is not right or your disputation not reasonable; perhaps all your criticisms are right, and all your disputes are reasonable; but one thing is certain: as soon as you criticize him and dispute with him, his ministry toward you is finished. He may be able to help thousands of people, but he cannot help you. It is not that he would not help you, but he cannot help you. Even if he wants to help you, you would gain nothing. What a serious matter this is! How careful we should be!

 

Thus, toward both the Holy Spirit who speaks within us and the ministers who speak without, we cannot engage in criticism or dispute. The enlightening of the Holy Spirit within man cannot be disputed with, for once you dispute with Him, you will be in darkness for at least several days. This period of darkness is both a punishment and reminder to you.74

If we focus on the imperfections and weaknesses of those who minister to us and close our heart to them, we will suffer loss, for we will disqualify ourselves from receiving the rich portion of Christ that God has deposited into them for the sake of the church. We need to feast on the positive aspects of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery and disregard its negative aspects so that instead of inflicting damage on ourselves, we may be nourished and perfected by the ministry (1 Tim. 4:6; Eph. 4:12). May we receive mercy from the Lord to see beyond the fallible earthen vessels to the perfect heavenly treasure contained within so that the God of glory who has shined in the hearts of the new covenant ministers may also shine in ours for our transformation into the image of the Christ of glory. Thus may we become the New Jerusalem shining forth the glory of God in Christ for eternity (Rev. 21:10).


71 CWWN, vol. 56, p. 453

72 Christ Making His Home in Our Heart and the Building Up of the Church, p. 89-91

73 Life-Study of Genesis, pp. 1139-1140

74 CWWL, 1953, vol. 3, pp. 195-196

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

8 – The Ministry Abounding with Glory (4)

From chapter eight of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Many saints who knew Brother Lee can bear witness that he lived a life of the highest moral standard, a life characterized by the excellent virtues needed in a servant of the Lord: extraordinary love (1 Cor. 12:31b; 13:1-8a; Matt. 5:44), boundless forbearance (Phil. 4:5-7; Matt. 18:21-22), unparalleled faithfulness (1 Cor. 4:2; 7:25b), absolute humility (1 Pet. 5:5-6; 3:8; Eph. 4:2; Phil. 2:3), utmost purity (Matt. 5:8; 1 Tim. 1:5; 2 Tim. 2:22), supreme holiness and righteousness (1 Pet. 1:15-16; 2 Pet. 2:5; Matt. 5:20; Rom. 14:17), and brightness and uprightness (John 8:12; Luke 11:34-36; Psa. 36:10).67 To some, such a description of Brother Lee’s life may sound hyperbolic, but I believe that those who spent considerable time with Brother Lee can attest before the all-seeing and all-knowing Lord that each of these virtues was exhibited in our brother’s life and service. In my teenage years, in the late 1980s, I was disturbed to learn of several highly publicized scandals involving prominent televangelists in the United States whose immoral private lives contradicted their public sermons, greatly damaging the Lord’s testimony in this country and giving His enemies much occasion to blaspheme Him (Ezek. 36:23; 2 Sam. 12:14). In those years I was encouraged and even astounded when I read Brother Lee’s personal testimony concerning how for many decades he, by the Lord’s grace, had been preserved from earthly defilements to be a chaste virgin for the Lord:

In order to be a living overcomer we must be kept by the Lord’s grace from every defilement and pollution and live on earth like virgins. In the eyes of the worldly people it means little whether we go to the movies or not. But in the eyes of the saved ones it is serious for me to go to a movie theater. If I did, I would be defiled. We must live a life of virginity, a life of chastity. The reason I neither smoke nor drink is that I do not want to be defiled. On occasion some brothers have offered me a drink of beer. But I have always refused. The Lord’s mercy and grace have preserved me for more than fifty years. I will not sell myself so cheaply as to be contaminated by drinking beer. Although it may not be sinful to drink beer, I will not allow the drinking of beer to defile my virginity. But do not be legal about things like this. I can sit in the presence of brothers who are drinking beer and not be bothered at all. It is absolutely not a matter of legality; it is a matter of our desire to preserve ourselves as virgins for the Lord. We all must say, “Lord Jesus, I love You. Because I love You, I will remain as a virgin for You. Lord, I don’t want to be defiled or polluted by anything. Lord, I want to keep myself for You.” As a young man, I prayed this way day by day. How I thank the Lord that He has truly answered my prayer.  

 

In my travels throughout the years, I have found myself in many different situations. In these situations there have been a great many temptations. But I can testify, even before the accuser, that the Lord’s grace has preserved me. Although there have been television sets in many of the hotel rooms, the Lord can testify for me that not once did I turn on the television. It would not have been sinful for me to watch television, but I would have been defiled. As I was in my room I said, “Lord, I don’t want to be defiled. I want to be kept as a virgin for You. Lord, I did not come to this city for television, but for Your testimony. I know the brothers and sisters cannot see what I am doing in my hotel room, but the demons can see.” If I had turned on the television set, my testimony for the Lord Jesus would not have had impact. But because my conscience testified that I was not defiled and that I was kept as a virgin for the Lord Jesus, my speaking had an impact.68

How many preachers in Christianity have the boldness in the Lord to offer such a powerful testimony concerning their personal life with a pure conscience before the Lord, Satan, and men, thus commending themselves as ministers of God in pureness and in a holy spirit (1 Tim. 3:9; 2 Tim. 1:3; 2 Cor. 6:6)? The dynamic impact of Brother Lee’s ministry of the word on the saints was largely based upon his exceedingly holy, righteous, and blameless living, which proves that his messages are not based on abstract theories but on the reality in Jesus lived out in this faithful servant of the Lord (Eph. 4:21).

Brother Andrew Yu, a close co-worker of Brother Lee, testified to the notable consistency between Brother Lee’s ministry and his living:

He showed me the way to love the Lord. He showed me the way to serve Him and to live Him. He became a pattern to me of all the things that I heard from his messages. He is the living example of a God-man living. Through his seemingly ordinary living shone a testimony that was extraordinary… Our brother’s speaking on the podium and his living off the podium were consistent. I saw our brother talking to the president of a nation. I saw him talking to some of the most influential men on earth as well as some of the most lowly men in society. I witnessed him talking to his wife, his children, and his grandchildren. I saw him talking to young people, to mothers, to elders, to co-workers. I was with him in his house, in the meetings, in the car, on airplanes, on vacations, in restaurants, in hospitals, at weddings, at funerals. In all of his conversations, he spoke like a God-man. He never behaved improperly…There was something noble about our brother. Words cannot describe his manner. He lived in the divine and mystical realm. Our brother was a living duplication of Jesus Christ. I have never met a man so faithful in everything he did. He was faithful to the Lord, faithful to Brother Nee, faithful to his wife and family, and faithful to his co-workers.69

Brother Kerry Robichaux, who worked intimately with Brother Lee on the Recovery Version of the Bible, offered a similar testimony:

Before a person begins to work closely with a well-known and admired leader, a co-worker of his may hold a high respect for that leader, but after spending considerable time working closely with the leader, in many cases he is fully disappointed and disillusioned with the leader’s character and life because they do not match his outward persona or reputation. However, the opposite was true of my experience with Brother Lee. The longer I served with Brother Lee in the publication work in the Lord’s recovery, the more my respect and admiration for our brother grew because of the consistency between his work and living. I was in awe of his purity, truthfulness, and faithfulness.70


67 The Glorious Vision and the Way of the Cross, pp. 35-37

68 Life-Study of Revelation, pp. 534-535

69 Andrew Yu in Witness Lee: Speakings from the Memorial Meetings, pp. 57-58

70 Kerry Robichaux’s testimony given in a class of the full-time training in Anaheim

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

5 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part One: Revelation (2)

From chapter five of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Revelations Received by Brother Nee and Brother Lee

From The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Brother Nee and Brother Lee received great and profound revelations concerning the Triune God and His eternal economy, and these precious truths formed the content of their ministry to the saints. To be clear, the revelations received by these two brothers were always based uniquely on the Word. Indeed, one of the hallmarks of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery is that the teachings and practices presented by this ministry take the Holy Word as their sole basis. From the beginning of the Lord’s recovery among us, Brother Nee declared that we do not have any creed; we have only the Bible as our creed.15 Similarly, Brother Lee proclaimed that although we may seek help from spiritual books, we must not treat any of them as our highest authority, for the Bible is “our highest authority, our constitution,” and “our criterion.”16 Brother Nee and Brother Lee did not accept any standard or authority other than the Bible. If a certain teaching or practice was not according to the Bible, no matter how long or dearly cherished, the brothers rejected it. Conversely, they faithfully taught any truth clearly revealed in the Bible, no matter how severe the opposition to its proclamation might be. In 1925 Brother Nee stated,

The Bible is our only standard. We are not afraid to preach the pure Word of the Bible, even if men oppose; but if it is not the Word of the Bible, we could never agree even if everyone approved of it.17

In keeping with this thought, Brother Lee testified, “Using the Bible as our only standard, we accepted whatever was according to the Bible and rejected whatever was not according to the Bible”18; “in our fellowship with others, our attitude is that if we are wrong in any of our teachings or practices according to the Bible, we are willing to be adjusted.”19

Brother Nee and Brother Lee unwaveringly confessed the essential items of the Christian faith delivered once for all to the saints (Jude 3), which include: the Bible as the infallible and divinely inspired Word of God (2 Pet. 1:21; 2 Tim. 3:16); the Triune God (Matt. 28:19; 2 Cor. 13:14; Eph. 3:14-17); the incarnation of Christ as God becoming man (John 1:14; 1 Tim. 2:5; 3:16), His substitutionary, redemptive death on the cross (Rom. 5:8; 1 Pet. 1:18-19; 2:21, 24; 3:18), His bodily and spiritual resurrection (1 Cor. 15:44-46; Luke 24:39), His ascension to the heavens to be enthroned as the Lord of all (Acts 1:9-11; 2:36; 10:36), His dwelling in the believers as their life (Col. 1:27; 3:4; Rom. 8:10; 2 Cor. 13:5; Gal. 2:20), and His second coming (Rev. 19:7; Rev. 22:20); and the believers’ dwelling with God in eternity (Rev. 21:2-3; 22:3-5). On the other hand, they also categorically rejected all heretical doctrines and repudiated the groups that hold such doctrines, including the Mormons, the Jehovah’s Witnesses, and various modernists. Many theologians who have studied the ministry publications have publicly testified that what Brother Nee and Brother Lee ministered is fully according to the common faith. Moreover, the seeking saints in the churches—who, like the noble Bereans in Acts 17:10-12, have carefully compared the teachings of Brother Nee and Brother Lee to the Scriptures to see whether these things are so—can attest that their ministry matches the Word in content, substance, and flavor (v. 11).

An outstanding feature of both Brother Nee and Brother Lee was an avid love for the Bible. They read the Bible diligently and voraciously, and by so doing gained a comprehensive knowledge of the Word of God (2 Cor. 6:4, 6). As a young man, Brother Nee loved the Bible so much that he read through the New Testament once a week for an entire year, carrying his Bible with him and reading it wherever he went. Within the first four years of his Christian life, Brother Nee had read through the entire Bible at least fifty times, and by the age of forty six he had read through the New Testament more than two hundred times.20


15 Elders’ Training, vol. 8, pp. 7-8

16 CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, p. 193; CWWL, 1966, vol. 3, p. 53; CWWL, 1986, vol. 3, p. 63; CWWL, 1994-1997, vol. 2, p. 252

17 CWWN, vol. 7, p. 1231

18 CWWL, 1977, vol. 1, p. 157

19 CWWL, 1977, vol. 1, p. 166

20 Samuel Chang’s testimony given in a meeting; CWWN, vol. 57, p. 220

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

5 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part One: Revelation (3)

From chapter five of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Through their reading of the Holy Word, both Brother Nee and Brother Lee not only apprehended its factual contents with a sober mind but also received revelation of its spiritual significances by means of a spirit of wisdom and revelation (Eph. 1:17). Conscious of the inability of the natural mind to understand the Bible, they exercised their regenerated spirit to contact the Lord through a prayerful reading of the Word, thereby receiving revelations from the Lord through His Spirit in their spirit (Matt. 11:27; 16:17; Gal. 1:12; 1 Cor. 2:10-15). Endeavoring to transcend fanciful imaginations, doctrinal concepts, religious traditions, secular philosophies, and cultural bias (Rom. 12:2; 2 Cor. 3:16-17), they received mercy from the Lord to be unashamed workmen who cut straight the word of the truth, interpreting the word of God in its various parts rightly without distortion under the divine guidance (2 Tim. 2:15). Brother Nee and Brother Lee abided by the principle of interpreting the Bible with the Bible: “The basic principle of interpreting the Bible is that in order to interpret any verse we need to consider not only the context of that verse but also the context of the entire book and a bird’s eye view of the entire Bible concerning God’s purpose.”21 Under the enlightenment of the Spirit, the brothers surely received many priceless revelations concerning the Triune God, His complete salvation, and His eternal economy contained in the Holy Word. It is worth considering the expansive breadth and profound significance of the truths concerning Christian faith and practice that the Lord revealed to Brother Nee and Brother Lee, which include but are not limited to the following items:

  1. the assurance of the believers’ salvation (John 10:28-29; Rom. 8:16; 10:9-13; 1 John 3:14; 5:13)
  2. the difference between eternal salvation by grace through faith and the kingdom reward as the result of working according to the Lord’s will (Eph. 2:8; Gal. 2:16; Matt. 16:27; 1 Cor. 3:14; Rev. 11:18; 22:12)
  3. the evil of denominationalism in dividing the believers (cf. 1 Cor. 1:10-13; Gal. 5:19-20)
  4. the clergy system as a human hierarchical organization annulling the function of the members of the Body of Christ (cf. Rev. 2:6, 15; Matt. 20:25-26; 23:8-11; Eph. 4:16)
  5. the universal priesthood of all believers (1 Pet. 2:5, 9; Rev. 1:6; 5:10; cf. Exo. 19:6)
  6. the truth concerning the death, resurrection, ascension, and second coming of Christ (1 Cor. 15:3-4; Luke 24:51; Eph. 4:8-10; 1 Thes. 1:10)
  7. the indwelling of the Holy Spirit for life and the outpouring of the Holy Spirit for power (John 7:38-39; 14:17; 20:22; Rom. 8:9, 11; Acts 2:1-4, 17-18, 33; 10:45)
  8. the tripartite nature of man (1 Thes. 5:23; Heb. 4:12)
  9. Christ as life (John 11:25; 14:6; 1 John 5:12; Col. 3:4)
  10. the law of the Spirit of life (Rom. 8:2)
  11. the overcoming life of Christ (John 16:33; Rev. 5:5; 12:11; Rom. 5:17; 8:37; 1 John 5:4, 18; cf. Phil. 4:13)
  12. the calling of the overcomers (Rev. 2:7, 11, 17, 26; 3:5, 12, 21)
  13. the boundary and ground of a local church (Acts 8:1; 13:1; 1 Cor. 1:2; Rev. 1:11)
  14. the centrality and universality of Christ (Col. 1:15-20; 3:10-11)
  15. the practicality of the church life related to proper meetings and the service of the elders and the deacons (Acts 4:24, 31; 5:42; 12:12; 14:24; 20:7, 11, 28; 1 Cor. 10:17; 14:31-33; Phil. 1:1; 1 Tim. 3:1-13; Titus 1:5-9)
  16. the genuine oneness of the church (1 Cor. 12:13; Eph. 2:16; 4:3-6; John 17:11, 21-23)
  17. the authority of the Holy Spirit in the Body (Acts 13:1-4; 16:6-7)
  18. the Holy Spirit as the reality of the Christian’s life and living (John 16:12-15; Gal. 5:16, 25)
  19. the deputy authority in the church (Acts 20:28; 2 Cor. 10:8; 13:10; Phil. 1:1; Titus 1:7; 1 Pet. 5:2)
  20. the building of the church and the coordination in the church life (Matt. 16:18; Rom. 12:4-5; Eph. 4:11-16)
  21. spiritual warfare as a matter of the Body (6:10-18; cf. Rom. 16:20)
  22. the discipline of the Holy Spirit (Heb. 12:5-11; cf. Rom. 8:28)
  23. the breaking of the outer man for the release of the spirit (2 Cor. 4:7-12; cf. John 12:24-25)
  24. the believers’ human spirit (Eph. 1:17; 2:22; 3:5, 16; 4:23; 5:18; 6:18)
  25. the resurrected Christ as the life-giving Spirit (1 Cor. 15:45b; 2 Cor. 3:16-18; John 14:17-20)
  26. enjoying the Lord—eating, drinking, and breathing Him (John 6:57; 7:37; 20:22)
  27. the all-inclusive Christ as the good land (Col. 1:12; 2:7; cf. Josh. 14:1; Deut. 8:7-10)
  28. the economy of God (1 Tim. 1:4; Eph. 1:10; 3:9-10)
  29. pray-reading the Word of God and calling on the name of the Lord (Eph. 6:17-18a; Acts 2:21; Rom. 10:13; 2 Tim. 2:22; cf. Psa. 27:8; Jude 20-21)
  30. the believers’ transformation for God’s building (Rom. 12:2, 4-5; 2 Cor. 3:18; cf. 1 Cor. 3:12-17)
  31. being joined to the Lord as one spirit (1 Cor. 6:17; cf. 2 Cor. 3:17; Rom. 8:16)
  32. the all-inclusive, compound, life-giving Spirit (Phil. 1:19; 1 Cor. 15:45b; Exo. 30:23-25)
  33. the seven Spirits of God being the sevenfold intensified Spirit (Rev. 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6)
  34. the scriptural way of meeting and serving (Matt. 28:19; John 15:16; 21:15-16; 1 Thes. 2:7-8; Heb. 10:24-25; 1 Cor. 14:1, 3-4, 26, 31)
  35. the teaching of the apostles (Acts 2:42; Titus 1:9; cf. 1 Tim. 1:3-4)
  36. the ministry of the New Testament (Acts 1:17, 25; 2 Cor. 3:6, 8-9; 4:1; 5:18; Eph. 4:12)
  37. the eternal life of God for the believers’ salvation and reigning in life (Rom. 5:10, 17, 21)
  38. God’s complete salvation—judicial redemption and organic salvation (v. 10, 17; Gal. 4:4-6)
  39. the Body of Christ as the organism of the Triune God (Eph. 1:3-23; 4:3-6, 16; Col. 2:19)
  40. the deification of the believers (John 1:12; 3:6; 12:24; 15:5; Rom. 8:29-30; 2 Cor. 3:18; 2 Pet. 1:4)
  41. the Triune God as the divine and mystical realm (John 14:10, 20; 17:21; cf. 15:4)
  42. the New Jerusalem as the consummation of God’s eternal economy (Rev. 21:2—22:5)

These great revelations concerning the Triune God and His eternal economy constitute the very rich “capital” with which Brother Nee and Brother Lee ministered to the saints for their enjoyment of the Triune God.


21 CWWL, 1977, vol. 1, p. 163

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery—Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery—
Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

by David Yoon

Contents

Preface

Chapter One – Introduction

Chapter Two – The Ministry of the Spirit and of Righteousness

Chapter Three – The Ministry of Reconciliation

Chapter Four – The Betrothing Ministry

Chapter Five – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part One: Revelation

Chapter Six – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part Two: Suffering

Chapter Seven – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection

Chapter Eight – The Ministry Abounding with Glory

Chapter Nine – The Triumphant Ministry

Chapter Ten – Conclusion

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

6 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part Two: Suffering (4)

From chapter six of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

 

External Opposition and Internal Dissension Authenticating the New Testament Ministry

Contrary to the adage that asserts that where there is smoke there must also be fire, opposition does not invalidate a minister of the new covenant but actually forms part of his qualification. Even a cursory survey of the ministries of the Lord Jesus and the apostle Paul makes abundantly clear that the lives of new testament ministers are marked by persecution, not only from the Gentiles but all the more from religious persons and even the ministers’ intimate friends. The Lord Jesus, unequivocally the most qualified minister of the new covenant, was rejected by the Jews, God’s beloved elect. He “came to His own, yet those who were His own did not receive Him” (John 1:11). The Pharisees defamed the Lord Jesus as being in league with Beelzebul, the ruler of demons (Matt. 12:24), and the Jews said that He Himself was demon-possessed and insane (John 8:48; 10:20). The Lord’s words in Luke 4:23-27 provoked such hatred that the congregants in the synagogue attempted to kill Him (vv. 28-29). But eventually it was one of the twelve, one whom the Lord Jesus addressed as “friend,” who betrayed Him, and that with a kiss (Matt. 26:48-50). It was not profane Romans who bought Judas’ wicked service but the esteemed leaders of the Jewish religion. It was deeply religious people who arrested Jesus, judged Him, took counsel against Him to put Him to death, delivered Him to an imperial governor, falsely accused Him, and ultimately persuaded the crowds to call for His crucifixion (Matt. 26vv. 3-5, 47-68; 27:1-2, 18-26). And when the Lord was arrested, His close and beloved disciple Peter denied Him, while all His own abandoned Him in the very hour of trial (26:55-56, 69-75). Knowing that all of this was to transpire, the Lord Jesus warned His disciples of the persecution that would befall those who followed Him: “It is sufficient for the disciple that he become like his teacher, and the slave like his master. If they have called the Master of the house Beelzebul, how much more those of His household!” (10:25). The apostles would be “hated by all,” delivered up to sanhedrins, and scourged in synagogues (vv. 17, 22; 23:34). The Lord foretold that just as the religious world had hated and persecuted Him, so also it would hate and persecute the disciples, even considering this persecution a service to God (John 15:18-25; 16:2; 17:14; 1 John 3:13). The Lord’s prophecy was fulfilled numerous times in Acts (Acts 4:1-3; 5:17-18, 40; 6:11-14; 7:57-59; 26:9-12). Virtually everywhere the apostle Paul went for the carrying out of his ministry, he was persecuted—not primarily by the Gentiles but by religious figures in the Sanhedrin and the synagogues. Furthermore, even Paul’s own co-workers and spiritual children forsook him. Barnabas, who had brought the apostle Paul into his ministry and labored as a fellow apostle with him for a period of time (9:26-27; 11:25-26; 13:2; 14:14), dissented with Paul and separated from him, going his own way while Paul went on in the ministry (15:36-41). According to 2 Timothy, when Paul faced imminent martyrdom, Demas, one of his co-workers, abandoned him because he loved the present age (2 Tim. 4:10; Philem. 24). Even those who had been raised up in Christ under Paul’s ministry abandoned him. Under the leadership of Phygelus and Hermogenes, the believers in Asia, who had formerly received Paul’s ministry, forsook him (2 Tim. 1:15). Alexander the coppersmith did many evil things against Paul, greatly opposing his ministry (4:14-15). At the time of Paul’s first defense, none of the believers in Rome were with him to support him, but all abandoned him (v. 16). In brief, just as the Lord Jesus was mocked, blasphemed, counted as nothing, and shamefully executed as a criminal (Mark 9:12; 15:29-32; Phil. 2:8; Deut. 21:22-23; Heb. 12:2), so also Paul and his fellow apostles were dishonored, reviled, persecuted, and defamed, becoming “a spectacle to the world,” “the offscouring of the world, the scum of all things” (1 Cor. 4:9-13). The fact that both the Lord Jesus and the apostle Paul were opposed by Judaism and forsaken by many of their followers does not nullify or devalue their ministry. On the contrary, it manifested their approvedness in being faithful and obedient to God (Matt. 26:39; Phil. 2:8; Rom. 6:19; Heb. 5:8; Rev. 1:5; 3:14; 1 Cor. 7:25;1 Tim. 1:12). Likewise, opposition from organized Christianity and dissension from those within the local churches neither invalidates nor diminishes the integrity of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. Instead, they prove its genuineness as a faithful continuation of the ministry of the despised, hated, and persecuted Jesus of Nazareth, as well as that of the apostle Paul, who went forth outside the camp of religion, bearing His reproach (Heb. 13:13). The rejection that Brother Nee and Brother Lee suffered only served to broaden their vision of the divine economy, deepen their experience of Christ, and enrich their ministry of life. Indeed, it is against this backdrop of rejection and persecution that the glorious vision of God’s economy that Brother Nee and Brother Lee faithfully released shines all the more brilliantly. Because Brother Nee and Brother Lee possessed genuine ministry formed and enriched by high revelations of Christ and immense “afflictions of Christ” (Col. 1:24-29), their speaking was not empty “sounding brass” or “a clanging cymbal,” both of which give sounds without imparting life (1 Cor. 13:1). Rather, they were sufficient ministers of the unsearchably rich Christ as the life-giving Spirit (Rom. 15:16; Eph. 3:8; 2 Cor. 3:6). Many saints with a measure of spiritual discernment can testify that our brothers, whether in their public ministry or in times of personal fellowship, touched the depths of their being, speaking words that resonated with their spirit and effected a genuine change in their Christian life. This is because their messages were drawn from the depths of their being that had been thoroughly constituted with the very Christ who had made His home in their heart and been formed in them (Eph. 3:18; Gal. 4:19). The impact of their ministry of the word is aptly described by the psalmist’s words: “Deep calls unto deep.” Regrettably, the effect of the sermons given by many preachers in today’s Christianity is characterized by shallowness (cf. Mark 4:5; Matt. 13:5, 21). Because their preaching issues from the exercise of either natural talent or a spiritual gift devoid of spiritual depth, it can affect others only in a superficial way. Even though their preaching may feed the infants in Christ with the milk of the word (1 Cor. 3:1-2; 1 Pet. 2:2), it cannot reach the hidden depths of the seeking believers who hunger for “solid food,” the healthy teaching of God’s eternal economy that nourishes their inner man for them to arrive “at a full-grown man” (Psa. 51:6; Heb. 5:12; 1 Tim. 1:3-4, 10; Eph. 4:13). In contrast, when we hear or read messages given by Brother Nee and Brother Lee, we have a clear witness in our spirit that this is the genuine ministry worthy of our close following: the mature ministry of Christ who has been deeply experienced, enjoyed, and expressed by the minister through suffering and intense pressure, which ministry is well able to perfect us and feed us with solid food for us to “be brought unto maturity” in life and “presented full-grown in Christ” (Rom. 8:16; 2 Tim. 3:10; 1 Tim. 4:6; 1 Cor. 3:2; Heb. 5:11—6:1).

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

How should a believer evaluate whether the ministry in the Lord’s recovery—that is, the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee and their co-workers who have continued to minister on the same line—or any ministry is part of the new covenant ministry revealed in the pages of the New Testament? David Yoon, who serves in the editorial section of Living Stream Ministry, has written a short monograph that directly addresses this question. In it he establishes the pattern of the apostles’ living, teaching, and ministry of life recorded in the New Testament as the standard for assessing to what degree the work of a “minister” is part of the unique new covenant ministry. He then measures the ministry in the Lord’s recovery according to that standard. To those who hunger for a pure and full ministry of the word of God, this monograph will be very instructive, enlightening, and strengthening. Readers are encouraged to take all the matters presented in this monograph to the Lord in prayer with a pure, noble, and seeking heart (Matt. 5:8; Acts 17:11; Matt. 7:7).

Read: “The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery—Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant,” by David Yoon.

Share:

The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Preface

From chapter six of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

In recent years various defamatory statements have been published both in print and online with the express purpose of shaking the saints’ confidence in the leadership of the Lord’s recovery, often by presenting a list of allegations against the leading ones in the ministry and the local churches, both past and present, including Brother Nee and Brother Lee. Others have taken up the responsibility to challenge the veracity of such claims as well as the accuracy of purportedly scriptural objections. But due to human nature as well as the nature of the fiery darts that the devil employs against the believers, it is possible that after coming into contact with such accusations that are later proven to be baseless, some saints may remain shaken, and it is possible that even a thorough factual and scriptural refutation may not result in complete inward restoration. Therefore, in this document I seek to address the spiritual nature of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery in order to assure the hearts of the saints of its authenticity. It is not enough to be convinced that a negative claim has proven to be inaccurate at best and often outright libelous. Much more, we need to see the immense positive value of our inheritance as those who are mercifully chosen to be in the Lord’s recovery.

Although I wrote this document in fellowship with other members of the Body of Christ, the enclosed contents are the fruit of my own investigation and represent my personal thoughts and convictions before the Lord. Any deficiencies or errors are likewise my own, and I would appreciate being alerted to them. I submit this writing to the discernment of the Body, knowing that my treatment of this subject, though extensive, is not exhaustive. I look to the Lord to bless it so that many saints would receive an uplifted appreciation of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery and as a result reap from this ministry the rich spiritual blessings that the Lord has prepared for His lovers.

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

1 – Introduction

From chapter one of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The publications that have negatively impacted a number of saints in the local churches are characterized not only by false accusations of certain wrongdoings against the leading ones in the Lord’s recovery but also a gross mischaracterization of both the person and ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee, with the intention of undermining the saints’ confidence in the ministry and even prompting them to forsake it. This recalls the situation among the saints in Corinth at the time Paul wrote his second Epistle to them. The authenticity of Paul’s apostleship had been called into question, not only by the false Judaistic apostles but by the Corinthians themselves. Due to the saints’ accusations and their failure to come to his defense, Paul was forced to vindicate his own apostolic authority. He felt compelled to do so not for his own sake but for the sake of the Corinthians, for their “building up,” so that they might be brought back to a sober realization concerning their relationship with the apostle (1 Cor. 11:16-17; 12:1, 19). Regretting this shameful necessity, Paul told the Corinthians that his commendation as an apostle should have come from them, among whom the signs of his apostleship had been wrought (v. 11). For my part, I refuse to commit the same error. As a beneficiary and a witness of the many signs of the new covenant ministry that have been wrought among us in the local churches by Brother Nee and Brother Lee, I cannot be silent in the face of the attacks that have been directed against these faithful servants of the Lord. I consider it my privilege and duty to commend the ministry in the recovery as the authentic ministry of the new covenant and by so doing to encourage the saints who have been shaken to return to a proper understanding and full enjoyment of this ministry.

Concerning this Witness Lee says:

We should learn from this verse [2 Cor. 12:11] that there are occasions when we need to say something on behalf of the elders or those in the ministry. If a certain brother is the target of attack or opposition, he may not be able to say anything to defend himself. In such a situation we need to speak up and commend him. For example, years ago when Brother Nee was the target, I did something to vindicate him. The young ones especially need to learn to commend someone in such a situation. They should be bold to speak out. They should not be silent, and they should not be held back.1

The Divine Standard of Ministry

My burden in this document is to consult the Bible for a divine standard of what constitutes the genuine New Testament ministry. Among so many voices affirming or questioning, upholding or denying, whose voice rings true according to the pure revelation of the Word? Upon detailed investigation, an unmistakable correspondence emerges between the New Testament pattern of proper ministers and the ministry carried out in the Lord’s recovery by Watchman Nee, Witness Lee, and those co-workers who have closely followed them to live to and serve the Lord in the same spirit and in the same steps (2 Cor. 12:18, cf. 2 Tim. 3:10). Such a comparison will serve to strengthen the saints’ trust in, and uplift their appreciation of, the ministry of Brother Watchman Nee and Brother Witness Lee, which has been continued by the co-workers in today’s recovery. The goal is not to elevate these men, who are but slaves of Christ for our sake, or in any way to give them an air of infallibility, but rather to maintain the saints in the divine truth and grace that this ministry so richly imparts for the fulfillment of our God’s desire and purpose (Eph. 3:2, 7-11). May we all be spared from being tossed by waves of dissent and carried about by the winds of different teachings in the sleight of men, and may we hold to the truth of God’s New Testament economy revealed in His Word in order to grow up into our Head, Christ, in all things, so that out from Him the Body may build itself up in love (Eph. 4:14-16).

The Unique and Genuine New Testament Ministry

According to the Bible, what is the ministry of the new covenant (which I will also call the New Testament ministry)? It is the service that the believers render to God in order to carry out God’s new covenant of grace for the accomplishment of His New Testament economy. The book of Ephesians reveals that the work of the new covenant ministry is to impart the unsearchable riches of Christ into the believers for the building up of the Body of Christ (3:8, 18; 4:12-13). Although this ministry is uniquely one (2 Cor. 3:8; 4:1; Acts 1:17, 24-25; 1 Tim. 1:12), it is not the ministry of any one person but the corporate ministry of the Body of Christ carried out by the personal ministries (i.e., services) of all the perfected members of the Body (2 Tim. 4:5; Col. 4:17; Acts 21:19; Rom. 11:13; 1 Cor. 12:5; Eph. 4:12). Because he clearly saw the corporate nature of the unique New Testament ministry, Brother Lee acknowledged that the ministry in the Lord’s recovery is not “one man’s individual ministry but a corporate ministry of the Body.”2 He further clarified that his own ministry did not encompass the entire New Testament ministry but was only “a part of the one ministry.”3 Therefore, let no one mistake the purpose of this document, which is not to contend that the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee is the only ministry of the New Testament or equivalent to the entire New Testament ministry—a claim that they themselves would wholeheartedly deny. Rather, my intention is to investigate whether or not theirs meets the biblical standard of ministry.

That standard is clearly laid out in 2 Corinthians, which contains the definitive description of the genuine new covenant ministry. Indeed, to present such a description is one of the main purposes of this Epistle. Against the backdrop of the inauthentic and false apostleship of his opposers, Paul defines the characteristics of legitimate and true ministers. All ministries must therefore be measured according to this standard. After much study, I am convinced that the ministry in the Lord’s recovery is fully genuine, as it closely adheres to the pattern of the New Testament apostles. But concerning this matter the burden of proof lies mainly with the testimony borne by the conscience of the saints, to whom the apostles commended themselves in vindicating their ministry (2 Cor. 4:2). Dear fellow saints, let us consider together the characteristics of the new covenant ministry and examine whether the ministry in the Lord’s recovery matches the criteria laid out by the apostle.


1 Life-Study of 2 Corinthians, p. 494

2 CWWL, 1994-1997, vol. 1, p. 27

3 CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, p. 407

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

2 – The Ministry of the Spirit and of Righteousness (1)

From chapter two of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Ministry of the Spirit

According to Paul’s word in 2 Corinthians, the ministry of the new covenant is first “the ministry of the Spirit” (3:8). This implies that the Spirit, who is the realization of the resurrected Christ (John 14:17-20; 2 Cor. 3:17), is the essence of the new covenant ministry. This corresponds with the prophecy in Jeremiah 31:31-33, in which Jehovah declares, “I will make a new covenant with the house of Israel and with the house of Judah…I will put My law in their inward parts and write it upon their hearts; and I will be their God, and they will be My people.” In Ezekiel 36:26-28 Jehovah makes a similar proclamation to the children of Israel: “I will also give you a new heart, and a new spirit I will put within you…And I will put My Spirit within you…and you will be My people, and I will be your God.” Whereas Jeremiah 31:33 speaks of God putting His law into our inward parts and hearts, Ezekiel 36:27 speaks of God putting His Spirit within us, indicating that the law of God here is none other than the Spirit of God who is dispensed into us (Rom. 8:9, 11). In contrast to the outward and objective law of the old covenant, in God’s new covenant of life He dispenses His own Spirit as His law—“the law of the Spirit of life” (Rom. 8:2)—into us so that we may be saturated with the new essence of His life.

Today in His heavenly ministry, Christ as the Mediator of the new covenant executes God’s promise to impart into us the life-giving Spirit as the reality of all the bequests in the new covenant (2 Cor. 3:6; 1 Cor. 15:45b; Isa. 42:6; Phil. 1:19). Likewise, in cooperation with Christ, the genuine ministers of the new covenant dispense not the letter that kills but the Spirit who gives life (2 Cor. 3:6). Hence, the authentic new covenant ministry is appropriately referred to as “the ministry of the Spirit” (v. 8), as it is constituted with the life-giving Spirit. It should come as no surprise then that the new covenant ministers are able to impart the life-giving Spirit to others only by being saturated with this Spirit themselves (Acts 6:3, 5, 10; 13:52). What qualified Paul and his fellow apostles to be sufficient as ministers of the new covenant was not a religious education or the accumulation of theological knowledge but the constitution of the life-giving Spirit in their inward parts (2 Cor. 3:5-6). In fact, the profound view that Paul presents is that the ministry is not simply a work that the ministers carry out. Rather, it issues out of their constitution, that is, their Spirit-saturated being.

The new covenant ministers impart the Spirit with whom they are constituted into the believers to make them a “letter of Christ,” “inscribed not with ink but with the Spirit of the living God; not in tablets of stone but in tablets of hearts of flesh” (vv. 1-3). The resurrected Christ, who as both Alpha and Omega constitutes the entire spiritual alphabet, is realized as the divine ink of the life-giving Spirit inscribed upon the believers as letters of Christ through the apostles as the writers (Rev. 22:13; 1 Cor. 15:45b). The effect of the apostles’ ministry is that the believers become not only individual letters conveying Christ to others but also a corporate letter of Christ, the Body of Christ as His universal expression (Eph. 2:15-16; 1:22-23).

Brother Lee’s ministry followed this pattern of the genuine new covenant ministry in both content and goal. Although he did not possess a theological degree, he was a sufficient minister of the new covenant because he was thoroughly constituted with the Spirit. Indeed, he was fully occupied and possessed by the Spirit. Perhaps this was because his personal discovery of the reality of the Spirit represented a major turn in his experience of the Lord:

I tried to change my behavior for years, but I was never successful. One day I realized that I had been anointed and sealed [with the Spirit]. When I saw this, I was happy, beside myself, and full of praise to the Lord. It seemed that I forgot where I was. Spontaneously I began to be kind to my mother, yet I had no realization that I was being kind to her…According to my feeling, I had no change, but actually I was altogether a different person, a person bearing the image of God. This was not the result of trying to improve my behavior; it was the result of His anointing.4

Anyone who has even a casual familiarity with Brother Lee’s ministry knows that he disparaged self-improvement and behavioral correction. Instead, the unique emphasis in his ministry in helping the saints to live a proper human life, family life, Christian life, and church life was to exhort them to turn their hearts to the Lord and exercise their spirit to touch the Lord Spirit (2 Cor. 3:16-18). Since the Spirit had become his own content—the content of his being and living—the Spirit also became the content of his ministry.

In keeping with the apostles’ pattern, the goal of Brother Lee’s ministry was to produce letters of Christ by inscribing the life-giving Spirit of the living God into the saints. Concerning this matter he stated:

I am not here just to preach the gospel or teach the Bible. My burden is to write living letters of Christ…It is not my desire merely to pass on doctrine…Rather, I care for the writing of Christ in life. Then the saints will receive not only the knowledge of doctrine, but the actual inscribing of Christ in their hearts.5

Whereas many teachers in traditional Christianity speak of the Spirit in terms of power or influence, few speak of—much less minister—the life-giving Spirit as the reality of Christ. Brother Lee realized that proclaiming the scriptural yet overlooked truth concerning the resurrected Christ being the life-giving Spirit (1 Cor. 15:45b; 2 Cor. 3:6, 17-18) would make him unpopular and would draw fierce opposition from organized Christianity and even from some in the local churches. Indeed, a former co-worker of Brother Nee, though admitting the truth that Christ became the Spirit, strongly warned Brother Lee that if he taught this, he would not be received by most Christian teachers in the United States.6 It is a testament to Brother Lee’s unwavering faithfulness to the Lord that he nevertheless declared this crucial truth with boldness and perseverance, ministering the life-giving Spirit into the believers in order to produce them as letters of Christ. So central was the Spirit to his ministry that he regarded the resurrected Christ being the life-giving Spirit as “the most significant item of truth recovered by the Lord in the twentieth century”7 and testified, “If I could not speak on Christ as the Spirit, I would have nothing to speak.”8

The organic issue of their ministry of the Spirit becomes the apostles’ boast and vindication. As a tree is known by its fruit (Matt. 7:15-18), Paul and his fellow apostles did not need any validation in addition to the believers in Corinth, who had become their living letters of commendation (cf. 1 Cor. 9:1-2). Similarly, countless saints in the Lord’s recovery can testify that the ministry of Brother Lee has dispensed and continues to dispense the Spirit as the “ink” into their hearts, producing an indelible inscription of Christ within and a radiant expression of Christ without. The thousands of saints who have been saved and perfected under Brother Lee’s ministry are not only letters of Christ but also living letters of commendation for Brother Lee and his ministry. In particular, graduates of the full-time training, who dedicated two years of their life to being constituted with the ministry in the Lord’s recovery, now number in the thousands, while hundreds more sign up to attend year by year throughout the earth. Many of these saints have been inscribed with the Spirit to such a degree that not only do they themselves testify of the benefits they have received from this ministry, but their family, friends, and colleagues can read Christ in their renewed manner of life. In their post-training journey the graduates pass through deep valleys of weeping as well as high peaks of unspeakable joy (Psa. 84:5-6; 1 Pet. 1:8), and some may even experience a winter of spiritual dormancy before entering into a spring of spiritual revival (S. S. 2:10-13; Acts 3:20; cf. Hosea 6:1-2; Hab. 3:2). Yet despite their varied circumstances and changing spiritual seasons, the great majority of the graduates of the training continue to receive and participate in the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. They have especially been trained to exercise their spirit in their daily life for the release of the spirit in the church meetings to contribute to the ministry of the Spirit in the local churches for the expression of Christ. Under this ministry, they have become both letters and letter-writers of Christ.

In stark and sobering contrast, like the Judaizers in the apostle Paul’s day, those who recklessly spread false accusations and distorted rumors against the faithful co-workers in the Lord’s recovery have cast the ministry of the Spirit aside. What they minister is not the life-giving Spirit to produce shining letters of Christ but evil suspicions and unhealthy gossip that produce spiritual death (1 Tim. 6:4, 20; 5:13; 2 Tim. 2:16, 23). Who can testify that upon reading their defamatory publications, the readers were supplied with the Spirit to express Christ? Or who can attest that they read the person of Christ in the vitriol broadcasted to an unsuspecting audience online? It is a tragic and serious matter to cut oneself off from the ministry of the Spirit, and thus from the bountiful supply of the Spirit and the unsearchable riches of Christ. Let us all receive mercy from the Lord to remain in this ministry that the Spirit of the living God may be inscribed into our hearts day by day, constituting us with the all-inclusive Christ and making us a living letter of Christ, His organic corporate expression (Acts 2:42; 6:4; 1 Tim. 4:6; 2 Tim. 3:10).


4 CWWL, 1977, vol. 2, p. 324

5 Life-study of 2 Corinthians, pp. 53, 170-171

6 CWWL, 1990, vol. 2, p. 395

7 CWWL, 1981, vol. 2, p. 108

8 CWWL, 1990, vol. 2, p. 395

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

4 – The Betrothing Ministry

From chapter four of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

THE BETROTHING MINISTRY

Under the ministry of the new covenant the believers are not only fully reconciled to God but betrothed to Christ, as Paul says in 2 Corinthians 11:2-3, “For I am jealous over you with a jealousy of God; for I betrothed you to one husband to present you as a pure virgin to Christ. But I fear lest somehow, as the serpent deceived Eve by his craftiness, your thoughts would be corrupted from the simplicity and the purity toward Christ.” Paul was not a dispassionate trainer seeking to one day present the saints as learned theologians to Christ. He had allowed the very jealousy of God to become his own, and so he regarded the believers in Corinth as virgins and his ministry as espousing them to Christ their Husband. Paul feared that just as Eve was diverted by the serpent from the tree of life to the tree of the knowledge of good and evil (Gen. 3:1-6), so also the Corinthian believers would be deceived by the Judaizers, the ministers of Satan (2 Cor. 11:13-15), to become distracted from the pure enjoyment of Christ as their life, life supply, and everything. It is a precious function of the ministry of the new covenant that it betroths the believers to Christ, causing them to love Him in simplicity and purity and enjoy Him as their life and everything in order to become His chaste bride.

The church in Ephesus serves as a tragic example of falling away from the betrothing New Testament ministry. In Ephesus certain dissenters had departed from the simplicity and purity of Paul’s ministry (cf. Acts 20:29-30). When Paul directed Timothy to charge these ones not to teach anything but God’s economy, he indicated that his goal was to keep the saints in love (1 Tim. 1:3-5), implying that the differing teachings were not only causing discord among the saints but also leading to their estrangement from Christ, their Husband. In order for the saints to preserve their bridal love for the Lord and brotherly love for one another, it was imperative that they continue steadfastly in the teaching of the apostles, including  Paul’s ministry, which was centered on the unique teaching of the divine economy (Acts 2:42; Eph. 1:9-10; 3:8-9). Sadly, the church in Ephesus did not heed the warning and eventually forsook the apostle Paul’s betrothing ministry (2 Tim. 1:15; cf. 3:2, 4). As a result, she left her first love, her bridal love for Christ, and consequently lost the enjoyment of Him as the tree of life (Rev. 2:4, 7). Furthermore, by departing from Christ her husband, Ephesus sowed the seeds of degradation that would eventually blossom into apostasy. How serious this is! Only by remaining in the betrothing new covenant ministry can we maintain our first love for Christ as our unique Husband and partake of Him as our life and life supply.

We need to see in this negative example a crucial criterion for genuine ministry: does it cause us to love the Lord and love all the saints (1 Tim. 1:4-5)? A great many saints in the Lord’s recovery can attest that the ministry in the recovery has betrothed them to Christ, revealing the loveliness and preciousness of Christ as their husband and encouraging them to love Him with a single and pure heart. Following the pattern of the Lord in Luke 24:27, this ministry opens the Word of God to us by explaining to us clearly in all the Scriptures countless aspects of our dear Lord Jesus, which include the unsearchable riches of the all-inclusive Christ and the immeasurable dimensions of the all-extensive Christ (Psa. 119:130; John 5:39; Eph. 3:8, 18-19; Col. 1:15-20; 2:16-17). As a result, our hearts, like the disciples’, burn with love for Him and with the zeal of God’s house, the church (Luke 24:32; John 2:17).

Moreover, the ministry in the recovery reveals that the intrinsic content and central thought of the Bible is a romance, in the most pure and holy sense, of a universal couple—the Triune God in Christ as the Bridegroom and His chosen and redeemed people as the corporate bride—and that this mysterious couple is the secret of the universe and the fulfillment of the desire of God’s heart (Gen. 2:21-24; S.S. 1:2-4; Isa. 54:5; 62:5-7; Jer. 2:2; 3:1, 14; 31:3, 32; Ezek. 16:8; 23:5; Hosea 2:7, 19-20; Matt. 9:15; John 3:29; 2 Cor. 11:2; Eph. 5:25-32; Rev. 19:7-9; 21:2, 9-10; 22:17). The ministry also opens up the practical way to enter into the experience of this romance, leading us to cultivate a personal, affectionate, private, and spiritual relationship with Christ by having much intimate and secret fellowship with Him—even telling Him a thousand times a day, “Lord Jesus, I love You” (John 21:15-17; 2 Cor. 5:14-15; John 14:21, 23).12 Furthermore, the ministry exhorts us to be built together as His corporate bride and to be one with the church-loving Christ to forsake ourselves on her behalf, so that Christ may gain His ultimate rest and satisfaction in His perfected bride, the New Jerusalem (Eph. 4:16; 5:23-27; 1 John 3:16; Rev. 21:2, 9-10).

Brother Lee began his first Life-study training with the classic statement that “the Bible is a romance,” and he concluded his more-than-twenty-year study with Song of Songs, in which he unveiled the progressive experience of a lover of Christ. Surely he had a portion in the betrothing ministry of the new covenant! Indeed, where else have we ever heard of a universal romance between a mysterious divine-human couple? To whom can we go to hear of Christ descending from His majesty to court us, a mere country girl, and by His salvation make us His counterpart, His queen (S.S. 1:1-8; 6:13)? What other ministry unlocks the experience of the high peak of the divine revelation—that God became man to make man God in life and nature (but not in the Godhead)—through the history of love in an excellent marriage as portrayed in the Song of Songs? It behooves any lover of Christ to dive into this ministry that from beginning to end so faithfully and purely espouses us to Him.

Regrettably, in organized Christianity many preachers and leaders have used their gifts and charisma to draw groups of Christians after themselves to create a following, their own “increase.” The ministers of the new covenant in His recovery never did this. Instead, they presented to us Christ as our Husband, the most pleasant person in the universe, and unveiled to us through the Word His supreme preciousness, unrivaled loveliness, and surpassing worth, stirring up our love for Him that we may be His increase, His bride (Phil. 3:8; John 3:29-30). Although we at times may become distracted by idols, vain substitutes for Christ, in the world or in our heart (Ezek. 14:3; 1 John 5:21), whenever we encounter the ministry—whether by reading a few pages of a publication, listening to a message, or singing a hymn—we are motivated to love the Lord again, being captivated afresh by His unsurpassed beauty and brought back to the enjoyment of Him as our Husband and our life supply. As a case in point, for many years I have been immensely supplied by Brother Lee’s poignant description of His profound love for the Lord Jesus:

Since I was a little boy, I learned to sing that little hymn, “Jesus Loves Me, This I Know, For the Bible Tells Me So.” At that time I was taught to love Him because He died for me. That is good, but we must not merely love Him because He died for us. That is not sufficient. Oh, we love Him because He is so lovable! If He would throw me into hell, I would still love Him, because He is altogether lovely. I care more for what He is! I just love this person.13

The love that Brother Nee and Brother Lee had for the Lord Jesus could not be quenched by many waters of trials or drowned by many floods of persecution, because to them the Lord was the chief among ten thousand and altogether lovely (S.S. 8:7; 5:10, 16). Because their ministry has opened our eyes to the Lord’s inestimable loveliness, despite our passing through fiery ordeals, we cannot but love Him, treasure Him, and remain loyal to Him (1 Pet. 2:4, 7; cf. Dan. 3:13-18; 1 Pet. 1:6-8). Now we, too, have seen that He is fairer than the sons of men and is altogether desirable (Psa. 45:2).

Because Brother Nee and Brother Lee were ardent lovers of Jesus, those who gave Him the preeminence in all things and sacrificed everything for His interest (Rev. 2:4; Col. 1:18), their ministry is able to produce many such lovers of Jesus. Both Brother Nee and Brother Lee were like Mary, who sat at the Lord’s feet and listened to His word; they received the revelation concerning the Lord’s incomparable preciousness and, in expressing their love for this precious One, broke their alabaster flask to pour ointment of great value on Him, “wasting” upon Him all that they had and were for the satisfaction of His heart (Luke 10:39, 42; Matt. 26:6-13; Mark 14:3-9). As a result, the fragrance of Christ fills the church as the house of the living God (2 Cor. 2:14-15; John 12:3; 1 Timothy 3:15). Each time we read their publications or sing their hymns, we not only see the revelation concerning the precious Lord but also breathe in this sweet aroma. It is this rare and exquisite fragrance of Christ that creates in us a deep and lasting spiritual hunger to know and love the Lord and motivates us to demonstrate our love for Him by breaking our own alabaster flask, consecrating ourselves to Him unreservedly for His satisfaction.

In the past century innumerable saints in the local churches have seen the Lord’s utmost worthiness through the help of this ministry and have followed the footsteps of our brothers to willingly and joyfully pour out on the Lord their material possessions, advanced degrees, promising careers, respectable positions, and even costly spiritual treasures (S. S. 1:8). They did so under no compulsion other than the constraining love of Christ in response to His incomparable loveliness as revealed in the Bible and opened up through this ministry (2 Cor. 5:14). Upon coming into contact with the ministry in the Lord’s recovery, many former clergymen in organized Christianity, out of their love for the Lord, laid aside their titles and salaries as pastors, took up common jobs in the secular world, and served the Lord and the saints simply as brothers in the churches. Under the ministry that encouraged them to love the Lord as their Husband to the uttermost, thousands of brothers and sisters have set aside their bright futures or well-paying jobs in order to serve the Lord full-time, while countless others, though holding a secular job, have lived to the Lord by spending on Him their being, their time, and their energy (2 Cor. 5:14-15; 12:14-15). Many saints have answered His call to set aside their careers or migrate to the ends of the earth, following the Lamb wherever He may go in order to please Him and meet His need (Rev. 14:4; 2 Cor. 5:9; Col. 1:10; Rom. 12:1-2). Dear saints, let us close our ear to anyone who would distract us from the purity and simplicity of the betrothing ministry. May we continue to receive the ministry in the Lord’s recovery that presents to us the lovely Christ, reveals His incalculable value, and kindles our fervent love for Him so that we may be produced to be Marys, who waste ourselves on the Lord.


12 CWWL, 1972, vol. 1, “Life and Building as Portrayed in the Song of Songs,” p. 235

13 CWWL, 1973-1974, vol. 2, p. 11. In saying “If He would throw me into hell, I would still love Him,” Brother Lee was speaking hypothetically to make a point. This statement recalls the declaration of Daniel’s three friends when king Nebuchadnezzar threatened to throw them into the blazing furnace of fire (Dan. 3:1-16): “If it be so, God whom we serve is able to deliver us from the blazing furnace of fire, and He will deliver us out of your hand, O king. But if He does not, let it be known to you, O king, that we will not serve your gods nor worship the golden image that you have set up.” (vv. 17-18). Being abundantly clear regarding the assurance and security of the believers’ eternal salvation (Heb. 5:9; Eph. 5:8; John 10:28-29), Brother Lee certainly was not suggesting that the Lord would allow one of His believers to perish. He was merely testifying that the Lord is lovable not only for what He has done and will do for us, but even more for who and what He is; even if the Lord would not do anything for us, nevertheless, He would still be altogether lovely.

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

5 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part One: Revelation (1)

From chapter five of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Ministry Produced through Revelation Plus Suffering

Second Corinthians reveals another—and very personal—characteristic of the new covenant ministry: it is the product of revelation plus sufferings. Though revelation may come suddenly (Acts 9:3-6), ministry does not immediately follow. This is because ministry requires the believers to grow in the divine life and is formed not only by receiving “revelations of the Lord” but also experiencing “the sufferings of Christ” (2 Cor. 4:1; 12:1; 1:5; 1 Cor. 3:1-2, 5-7). Hence, ministry differs from gift or teaching. Balaam’s donkey suddenly spoke with human language; this was certainly a miraculous gift but certainly did not qualify as ministry (Num. 22:28-30). God does entrusts the revelation of His mystery, “the stewardship of God,” not to believers who merely possess some gift but to those who have a ministry (1 Cor. 9:17; Col. 1:25; 1 Tim. 1:11-12). These ministers are “chosen vessel[s]” to the Lord (Acts 9:15) to whom He shows not only glorious visions of Christ (vv. 3-6, 17; 26:16) but also “how many things [they] must suffer on behalf of [His] name” (9:16). The suffering that follows the revelations produces endurance and approvedness in the apostles (Rom. 5:3-4; 1 Thes. 2:4) and brings about a weighty and glorious expression of the God of resurrection in their very being and their daily living (2 Cor. 1:9 4:11,17)—a manifestation of the divine, heavenly, powerful treasure in human, earthly, weak vessels (vv. 1, 7). The issue of their suffering is life ministered to and operating in the saints (v. 12) and grace and thanksgiving abounding in the church unto the glory of God (v. 15). How much greater is ministry than gift or teaching!

The genuine ministry, which is produced through revelation plus suffering, is seen clearly in the pattern of the apostle Paul. From his conversion Paul, a Pharisee trained at the feet of Gamaliel and exceedingly knowledgeable in the letter of the Old Testament, received the revelation concerning Christ as the centrality and universality of God’s economy (Col. 1:17, 25-28; 3:10-11; Eph. 3:8-11). This revelation became the content of Paul’s ministry (vv. 2-5). In fact, Paul identified his gospel, which he received through a revelation by Jesus Christ (Gal. 1:12), as the proclamation of Jesus Christ according to the revelation of the mystery (Rom. 16:25). This mystery is principally of two aspects: Christ as the mystery of God and the church as the mystery of Christ (Col. 2:2; Eph. 3:4-6; Matt. 16:16-18). But authentic ministry is not merely the passing on of a teaching, knowledge, or even a revelation but an expression of what we are in Christ; it is a manifestation of the Son of God as the gospel who has been not only revealed in us but also formed in us (Gal. 1:16; 4:19). Without revelation Paul would have had nothing to minister; however, in order for what was revealed to him to be wrought into him to become his ministry, Paul needed to pass through many sufferings. Just as a painted pattern is made one with a porcelain vase through intense heat, so also the revelation given to Paul was “burned” into him through severe suffering for the purpose of bringing forth genuine ministry. Therefore, Paul needed the revelation he received to be burned and constituted into him by suffering. Ministry is costly. How much a believer is able to minister the riches of Christ to others—not merely teach them about Christ—depends not only on the amount of revelation he has received but also the extent to which he has suffered for what has been revealed to him. While suffering of itself is not a sign of ministry, proclaiming the revelation of God’s New Testament economy coupled with suffering is. Conversely, the absence of suffering indicates a lack of genuine, faithful ministry.

Whereas much preaching in traditional Christianity is primarily a matter of gift, which is shallow and often comes with little price, the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee is most costly and precious because it was formed through profound revelation14 accompanied by immense suffering. This chapter will cover the scriptural revelations received by Brother Nee and Brother Lee, and the following chapter will cover the sufferings in the apostle Paul’s ministry and in the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee. These two chapters should be read and considered together, for neither revelation alone nor suffering alone is sufficient to produce ministry. Both are indispensable for bringing forth genuine ministry.


14 The Greek word translated revelation in the New Testament (ἀποκάλυψις) literally means “the opening, the lifting, of a veil”; its intrinsic meaning pertains to the spiritual significance of the Scriptures concerning the Triune God, His full salvation, and His eternal economy (Matt. 28:19; 2 Cor. 13:14; Rom. 5:10; Eph. 1:10; 3:9). To receive revelation does not mean to see something further than what is recorded in the Bible. We believe that the Bible contains the completed divine revelation (cf. Col. 1:25), beyond which there is no further revelation of God. The last chapter of Revelation severely warns against adding anything to or taking anything away from the Word of God (22:18-19), making it nothing less than blasphemy for anyone to proclaim a so-called revelation outside that which has been written in the Bible. Genuine revelations concern the intrinsic significance of the Scriptures concerning the all-inclusive Christ as the embodiment of the Triune God, who is realized as the Spirit (Luke 24:27, 32, 44-45; Acts 28:23; Gal. 1:15-16; Col. 2:9; 2 Cor. 3:17; cf. Neh. 8:13), and concerning the church as the Body of Christ, the organism of the Triune God (Eph. 1:22-23; 3:16-19; 4:4-6; Col. 1:18, 24; 2:19; 1 Cor. 12:12-13). Such revelations are received from the Lord through the enlightenment of the divine Spirit in the believers’ regenerated human spirit, “a spirit of wisdom and revelation,” as they prayerfully read and carefully study the Bible in fellowship with God, turning their heart to the Lord and exercising their spirit to contact the Lord Spirit (1 Cor. 2:9-16; Eph. 1:17; 3:4-5; 6:17-18; Rev. 1:10; 4:2; 17:3; 21:10; 2 Cor. 3:14-18; 13:14; 2 Tim. 2:23).

PreviousHomeNext

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

6 – The Ministry Produced through Revelation and Suffering, Part Two: Suffering (1)

From chapter six of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Apostle Paul’s Suffering for His Revelations

The apostle Paul not only needed to receive revelations to become a genuine minister of the new covenant; he also had to pass through sufferings in order for those revelations to be wrought into him. Thus, in vindicating his apostolic authority Paul was compelled to speak not only concerning the visions and revelations the Lord had given to him (2 Cor. 12:1) but also of his suffering a thorn in the flesh, a messenger of Satan, which the Lord allowed to buffet him so that he would not be exceedingly lifted up by the transcendence of those revelations (v. 7). It was through such suffering that what Paul saw was constituted into him to become his ministry. Instead of removing the thorn, the Lord said to him, “My grace is sufficient for you, for My power is perfected in weakness” (v. 9a). As a result, Paul declared, “Most gladly therefore I will rather boast in my weaknesses that the power of Christ might tabernacle over me. Therefore I am well pleased in weaknesses, in insults, in necessities, in persecutions and distresses, on behalf of Christ; for when I am weak, then I am powerful” (vv. 9b-10). What Paul received was not merely a revelation of the sufficiency of the Lord’s grace but also a deep, subjective experience of the Lord as grace through suffering, issuing in real ministry (1 Cor. 15:10; Gal. 2:20; 5:4). The stewardship of God’s grace that Paul received was not a mere gift—an ability bestowed by the Spirit in a short period of time, which is objective, doctrinal, superficial, and temporal. Instead, his stewardship was a ministry—a constitution in and of the divine life formed through many years of suffering, which is subjective, experiential, deep, weighty, costly, and eternal (1 Cor. 9:17; Eph. 3:2; Col. 1:25). Thus, whereas in 1 Corinthians Paul dealt negatively with gifts, in 2 Corinthians he emphasized positively that what he had received was the ministry (2 Cor. 4:1). In 1 Corinthians Paul stated that although the believers in Corinth did not “lack any gift” (1:7), there was a litany of problems among these immature and fleshly believers, such as divisions, strifes, parties, fornication, lawsuits, partaking of the Lord’s table in an unworthy manner, and heresy concerning resurrection (1:10-13; 5:1-13; 6:1-11; 11:17-34; 15:12-19). In 2 Corinthians the apostle did not boast of any gift but commended himself as a minister of the new covenant, a minister of God, Christ, and the life-giving Spirit (6:4; 11:23; 3:6), whose sufficiency was from God and whose ministry produced the believers as letters of Christ and sought to build them up and perfect them to think the same thing and be at peace with one another (2 Cor. 3:2-5; 10:8; 12:19; cf. Phil. 2:2; Rom. 15:5). Paul incisively diagnosed the believers’ preoccupation with gifts as a factor that divides them and tears down the church as the temple of God (1 Cor. 3:17), but he prescribed the enjoyment of the ministry of life to keep them in oneness and build up the church as the Body of Christ (2 Cor. 13:10-11; Eph. 4:12). For this reason, in Colossians he did not promote a particular gift or teaching but underscored in no uncertain terms: “I Paul became a minister” (Col. 1:23).

It is crucial to see the scriptural contrast between gift and ministry. A gift is a capacity given by the operation of the Spirit to enable a believer to carry out spiritual services and may be obtained in a relatively brief time. Ministry, however, is a constitution of Christ as eternal life within a believer and is produced by a lengthy period of the experiences of the unsearchable riches of the all-inclusive Christ, which experiences are gained not only through high revelations concerning the excellent person and work of Christ (Phil. 3:8) but also through unrelenting sufferings, consuming pressures, and the killing work of the cross (v. 10). For instance, a believer who has a teaching gift may speak a message on the cross accurately and eloquently. In contrast, a believer who possesses a life-dispensing ministry is what he speaks, for he lives a crucified life in resurrection day after day and is thus qualified to minister to others not just the biblical teaching of the cross but also the spiritual reality of the cross that he himself has experienced. Because Paul was a bona-fide minister of the new covenant, in whom the message was one with the messenger, he testified with a pure conscience not only that he preached Christ crucified (1 Cor. 1:23-24) but also that he was determined not to know anything among the Corinthians except this Jesus Christ crucified (2:2) and that he “always” bore about in his body “the putting to the death of Jesus,” allowing death to operate in him continually to minister life to others ceaselessly (2 Cor. 4:11-12). Such life-imparting ministry can be formed only through revelation plus suffering. 

Accordingly, in 2 Corinthians Paul not only speaks of exceedingly great revelations and visions but also describes in detail numerous trials and tribulations (1:5-11; 4:8-12; 6:4-10; 7:4-5). For instance, in 6:4-10, where Paul commends himself and his co-workers as “ministers of God,” Paul lists as part of their qualifications endurance, afflictions, necessities, distresses, stripes, imprisonments, tumults, labors, fastings, and long-suffering. Paul further describes various afflictions that befall the genuine new covenant ministers: dishonor from the devil and those who follow him, evil reports that come from the opposers and persecutors, being perceived as deceivers in the sight of religious and philosophical persons, dying in suffering persecution, being seen as disciplined by God in the opposers’ superficial realization, being made sorrowful by the negative condition of the churches, being poor in material things, and having nothing in an earthly sense. In 2 Corinthians 11, where he emphasizes his status as a minister of Christ (v. 23), he enumerates a number of additional afflictions, including stripes, being beaten with rods, being stoned, being shipwrecked, hunger, thirst, poverty, all manner of perils, drawing near to death, and, in his own words, there was above all, “the crowd of cares pressing upon me daily, the anxious concern for all the churches” (vv. 24-28).

Unlike some contemporary preachers who emphasize health, affluence, and material prosperity as signs of God’s blessing on His genuine elect, Paul, a follower of the despised, persecuted, and crucified Jesus, boasted of his weakness, afflictions, and poverty (v. 30). The reason Paul had the greatest ministry among the apostles in the New Testament was not only that he received the highest revelation concerning Christ but also that what he had seen was engraved upon his being through a commensurate degree of suffering. For instance, the comfort Paul and his co-workers gave to the believers in Corinth was neither theoretical nor secondhand; it was the very comfort with which they had been comforted by the God of all comfort as they underwent multitudinous afflictions in the course of their ministry (1:3-5). God in Christ as the believers’ abounding comfort had been wrought into them, and from that constitution they could comfort others in every affliction (vv. 4-6).

At his conversion, Paul received a commission from the Lord to be a minister and a witness both of the things in which he had seen the Lord and of the things in which the Lord would appear to him (Acts 26:16). Shortly afterward, the Lord told Ananias that He would show Paul how many things he must suffer on behalf of His name (9:16). This indicates that Paul as a God-commissioned minister would endure many sufferings for the sake of the formation, enrichment, and carrying out of his portion of the new covenant ministry. The Lord’s prophecy concerning Paul’s destiny to suffer for his ministry was fulfilled most significantly in the last phase of his life during his lengthy imprisonment by the Romans. Even though Paul’s bonds caused him considerable suffering and effectively terminated his spoken ministry, they did not terminate his written ministry. On the contrary, his last eight Epistles, most of which were written in his confinement, only became richer, higher, and deeper. In these Epistles, Paul presented the profound revelation concerning God’s New Testament economy for the completion of the word of God, furnishing immeasurable supply and benefit to the church throughout the generations (Col. 1:24-29; Eph. 3:9). Ultimately, when the time of his departure was at hand, Paul declared that his sufferings as a prisoner of his Lord were for the sake of the gospel of divine grace and eternal life, which he continued to preach as a God-appointed herald, apostle, and teacher (2 Tim. 1:8-12; 4:6). How we need to thank the Lord that Paul willingly participated in Christ’s sufferings for the constitution of this precious ministry that we could receive the untold riches that poured out of his being as a living sacrifice (2 Cor. 1:5; Phil. 3:10; Col. 1:24; cf. 1 Pet. 4:13)!

PreviousHomeNext

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

7 – The Ministry Bearing the Mark of Death and Resurrection (1)

From chapter seven of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Mark of Death and Resurrection on the Ministry of the Apostle Paul

Perhaps the most essential characteristic of the new covenant ministry revealed in 2 Corinthians is that it bears the mark of death and resurrection. In 4:7-18, Paul confirms the genuineness of “this ministry” (v. 1) by presenting what amounts to a description of the apostles’ living—not their work. In other words, the proof of an authentic ministry lies not in great accomplishments, such as saving crowds of sinners or establishing churches, but in living a crucified life for the manifestation of the resurrection life. This is because the apostles’ life-imparting ministry was fully based upon a life in which they were constantly put to death for the sake of Jesus. In verses 10-12 Paul declares, “[We are] always bearing about in the body the putting to death of Jesus that the life of Jesus also may be manifested in our body. For we who are alive are always being delivered unto death for Jesus’ sake that the life of Jesus also may be manifested in our mortal flesh. So then death operates in us, but life in you.” The expression the putting to death of Jesus refers to “the working of death, the working of the cross, which the Lord Jesus suffered and passed through.”35 Before the Lord was nailed to the cross at Golgotha, He spent thirty-three and a half years living a crucified life, denying His human life and living by the divine life moment by moment. The cross was at work not only through the persecution by His opposers but also through the troubles caused by His disciples, His mother, and His brothers (Matt. 2:7-12, 16-18; John 2:3-4; 7:3-5; Luke 9:54-55). It was through this killing of the cross that the Lord lived and manifested the resurrection life in His human living. In the same principle, Paul and his fellow apostles always experienced the killing work of the cross for the sake of Jesus, which continually issued in the manifestation of His resurrection life within them. And because they were members of the organic Body of Christ and “members one of another” in a corporate union in the divine life, this resurrection life was spontaneously imparted into all the fellow members of the Body (Eph. 5:30; 1 Cor. 12:27; Rom. 12:5; Col. 3:4). Therefore, Paul and his fellow apostles ministered the resurrection life of Jesus to the believers not merely by speaking messages but even more by living the resurrection life under the continual killing of the cross. This is the genuine work of the new covenant ministry.

Immediately after speaking concerning His life-releasing death as a grain of wheat in John 12:24, the Lord issued a call to the believers to participate in this aspect of His death, saying, “He who loves his soul-life loses it; and he who hates his soul-life in this world shall keep it unto eternal life. If anyone serves Me, let him follow Me; and where I am, there also My servant will be. If anyone serves Me, the Father will honor him” (vv. 25-26). Just as the Lord hated His soul-life, remaining under the shadow of the cross throughout His earthly sojourn, and died and resurrected in order to impart life to the believers, so also the believers should hate their soul-life, take the way of the cross throughout their Christian life, and die to themselves in order to dispense life to others (Luke 14:26). As a reproduction of Christ, Paul continually lived a crucified life in resurrection, allowing the death of Jesus to consume his outer man for the renewal and resurrection of his inner man, so that the divine life in his spirit might be imparted to others (2 Cor. 4:16).

Only a crucified and resurrected person can be a genuine minister of the new covenant. This principle is illustrated by God’s vindication of Aaron’s priestly ministry in Numbers 17:1-10. There Aaron’s rod, a dead and dried-up piece of wood, budded overnight, producing blossoms and bearing ripe almonds. The budding rod signifies the believers’ experience of Christ in His resurrection as their authority in the God-given ministry, and almond blossoms signify the resurrection life coming out of death (Heb. 9:4). This indicates that God “only recognizes those who have passed through death and resurrection as His servants”; “hence, the mark of ministry is resurrection.”36 In other words, “all services to the Lord must pass through death and resurrection before they will be acceptable to God,”37 and “God approves, commissions, and uses only those who are in resurrection.”38 In 2 Corinthians 1:8-9 Paul testified concerning the afflictions that befell him and his co-workers in Asia: they were excessively burdened, beyond their power, so that they despaired even of living; they had the response, the sentence, of death in themselves so that they should not base their confidence on themselves but on God, who raises the dead. After he realized his utter hopelessness and extreme weakness, Paul no longer trusted in himself but in the God of resurrection. Therefore, he attested that his sufficiency and power as a new covenant minister was not from himself but from God (3:5; 4:7). Paul’s life was a mysterious yet harmonious spiritual paradox in which he simultaneously experienced the operation of death and the manifestation of resurrection life: “as dying and yet behold we live; as being disciplined and yet not being put to death; as made sorrowful yet always rejoicing; as poor yet enriching many; as having nothing and yet possessing all things” (6:9-10); “I am filled with comfort, I overflow with joy in all our affliction” (7:4); “when I am weak, then I am powerful” (12:10); “we are pressed on every side but not constricted; unable to find a way out but not utterly without a way out; persecuted but not abandoned; cast down but not destroyed” (4:8-9).39 As a result, Paul could feed the believers with “ripe almonds,” ministering to them the God of all comfort, the Father of compassions, and the resurrected Christ as the life-giving Spirit, and blessing them with the love of God, the grace of Christ, and the fellowship of the Holy Spirit (1:3-4; 3:6; 13:14).


35 Holy Bible Recovery Version of the Bible, 2 Cor. 4:10, note 1

36 CWWN, vol. 47, p. 245

37 CWWN, vol. 47, p. 249

38 CWWL, 1960, vol. 1, p. 280

39 CWWN, vol. 56, pp. 450-452

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

8 – The Ministry Abounding with Glory (1)

From chapter eight of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

Paul’s Ministry Abounding with the Glory of God

Because it is in resurrection, the ministry of the new covenant abounds with the surpassing and eternal glory of God (cf. Luke 24:26, 46; Acts 3:13, 15). In 2 Cor. 3:10-11 Paul indicates that the glory of the apostolic new covenant ministry surpasses the glory of the Mosaic ministry of the old covenant, for the former was temporary and has been done away with, whereas the latter is eternal, remaining forever. In describing the ministry he and his fellow apostles had received (4:1), Paul says, “We all with unveiled face, beholding and reflecting like a mirror the glory of the Lord, are being transformed into the same image from glory to glory, even as from the Lord Spirit” (3:18). The ministry of the new covenant is nothing less than beholding and reflecting the glory of the Lord to be transformed into His image from one degree of glory to another through the enjoyment of the Lord Spirit. For the new covenant ministers to behold the glory of the Lord is for them to see the Lord of glory themselves, receiving an infusion of Him as the Lord Spirit into their inward parts for their transformation into His image; for them to reflect the glory of the Lord is to enable others to see the Lord through them, infusing others with the Spirit so that they also may experience this transformation. As Paul and his co-workers had turned their heart from everything to the Lord Himself, they were constituted sufficient ministers of the new covenant, filled with the resurrected and glorified Lord as the Spirit to impart Him into others (vv. 16-17).

According to 2 Corinthians 4, Paul and his co-workers, who had the ministry of the new covenant (v. 1), proclaimed “the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the image of God,” so that the illumination of this gospel might shine on others (vv. 4-5). The gospel of the glory of Christ preached by the apostles is not theology or doctrine but a wonderful, attractive person, Jesus Christ, in whose face we see the glory of God. Hence, those who receive this gospel enter into face-to-face fellowship with Christ and obtain an inward, subjective knowledge of the glory of God. In verse 6 Paul declares that the God who commanded light to shine out of darkness shined in the hearts of the apostles to illuminate “the knowledge of the glory of God” in the face of Jesus Christ. The illumination of the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ in verse 6 corresponds to the illumination of the gospel of the glory of Christ as the image of God in verse 4, indicating that God shined in the apostles’ hearts so that they might likewise illuminate others. In other words, the apostles as new covenant ministers preached the gospel of the glory of Christ not merely by relaying the facts of the gospel but by shining into others the very God in Christ who has been shined into the depths of their being.

Paul then immediately states, “We have this treasure in earthen vessels that the excellency of the power may be of God and not out of us” (v. 7). According to the context, this treasure in earthen vessels refers to the Christ of glory, the embodiment and expression of God, who dwells in the believers as the Lord Spirit (3:18; 13:5; 1 Cor. 2:8). In themselves the apostles were weak, fragile, and poor earthen vessels. However, when God shined into their hearts, He dispensed the Lord of glory as the precious treasure into them to make worthless vessels ministers of the new covenant with a priceless ministry. This treasure, which supplied them to carry out their ministry in the midst of unrelenting pressure and affliction, increased in them through their sufferings (1 Cor. 2:4; Eph. 1:19; Col. 1:29). Their momentary lightness of affliction wrought within them an eternal weight of glory, such that the more the ministers underwent “the sufferings of the Christ” (2 Cor. 1:5), the more they shone as “Christ’s glory” (2 Cor. 8:23).

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

9 – The Triumphant Ministry (1)

From chapter nine of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

The Triumph of Paul’s Ministry

In 2 Corinthians the apostle Paul reveals that the apostolic ministry of the new covenant is not only surpassingly glorious, abounding with the eternal glory of God, but also always triumphant, celebrating the glorious victory of Christ. In 2:14-16 Paul employs paradox to describe the triumph of the new covenant ministry by offering the following vivid description:

But thanks be to God, who always leads us in triumph in the Christ and manifests the savor of the knowledge of Him through us in every place. For we are a fragrance of Christ to God in those who are being saved and in those who are perishing: to some a savor out of death unto death, and to the others a savor out of life unto life. And who is sufficient for these things?

Here Paul alludes to a Roman custom in which a general returning from a successful campaign would parade through the streets of Rome with the prisoners he had taken. The victorious commander would lead the long procession as a display of his triumph until presenting his spoils at the Capitol. Part of the pageantry accompanying the procession was the burning of incense, which to the captives who were about to be executed was a savor of death, but to those who were to be spared, it was a savor of life.75 Paul likens the Lord Jesus to such a victorious General and himself and his co-workers to the conquered captives in His triumphal procession. Formerly, Paul was an enemy of Christ used by Satan to persecute the believers and ravage the church of God (Gal. 1:13, 23). However, when the resurrected and ascended Christ appeared to him from the heavens, he was defeated by Christ and placed in His train of vanquished foes (Acts 9:1-30; cf. Eph. 4:8). Henceforth, wherever Paul and his fellow apostles, his fellow captives of Christ, traveled for the sake of the ministry, they as incense-bearers scattered abroad the excellent knowledge of Christ as a sweet fragrance (Phil. 3:8). To the believers the apostles as a fragrance of Christ were a savor of life unto life, but to those destined to perish, a savor of death unto death. Hence, in a seeming paradox, on one hand the apostles were defeated ones captured by Christ, but on the other hand, they were participating in His victory throughout their ministry journeys under His leading.

The ministry of Paul and his fellow apostles brought the victory of Christ wherever they went (Rom. 8:37; cf. 1 Cor. 15:54, 57; 1 John 5:4-5). Despite intense opposition, God always led them in triumph in the Christ. Their ministry was unconquerable and ever-victorious, for it was one with the triumphant Christ. Through Paul, the gospel of God’s kingdom spread to the Gentile world, reaching a significant portion of the territory around the Mediterranean Sea. Paul’s preaching was so widespread that by approximately A.D. 60, a few years before his imprisonment, Paul declared to the Romans that as “a minister of Christ to the Gentiles” he had “fully preached the gospel of Christ” from Jerusalem to Illyricum, a region in Southeast Europe (Rom. 15:16, 19). Through Paul’s triumphant ministry throughout the known Gentile world, many sinners were led to salvation, numerous churches were raised up, the name of the Lord was magnified, and “the word of the Lord grew mightily and prevailed” (Rom. 15:16; Acts 19:17, 20; 2 Thes. 1:12).

Moreover, because it bore and emitted the fragrance of Christ in every place, this ministry had a potent effect on people, issuing in life to some and death to others. In carrying out their ministry, Paul and his fellow apostles received both glory from the lovers of God and dishonor from the followers of the devil (2 Cor. 6:8; 1 Cor. 4:10); they received both evil reports from the opposers and good reports from the believers (Matt. 5:11; 2 Cor. 12:16; 1 Cor. 4:13; Rom. 3:8); and they were despised as deceivers in the eyes of the Judaizers and people of other religions and philosophies but esteemed as true in the eyes of those who loved the truth of God (cf. Matt. 27:63; 2 Cor. 4:2; 1 Thes. 2:3). According to the book of Acts, Paul repeatedly faced both warm reception and vehement opposition; while some rejoiced, glorified the word of the Lord, were persuaded, believed, welcomed him, received his word with all eagerness, followed him, and joined him (Acts 13:43, 48; 17:4-7, 11-12; 18:7-8; 19:18-19; 21:17; 28:14-15, 23-24), others plotted to kill him, opposed him, contradicted his speaking, blasphemed God, persecuted him, cast him out from their borders, attempted to treat him outrageously and stone him, stoned him until he was left for dead, beat him with rods, threw him into prison, agitated and stirred up crowds against him, scoffed at him, were hardened against him, spoke evil of “the Way,” instigated an uproar against him, and beat him in an attempt to kill him (9:23-25; 13:8; 13:45, 50; 14:5, 19; 16:16-24; 17:13, 32; 18:6; 19:9, 23-41; 20:3; 21:31-36; 23:2-3, 12-22; 25:1-5; 27:42; 28:24-29). Just as the Lord Jesus came to cast fire on the earth, issuing in divisions among people (Luke 12:49), so also the apostles’ ministry stirred up trouble almost everywhere they preached. For instance, after they spoke the gospel to Jews and Greeks in Iconium, “the multitude of the city was divided, and some were with the Jews and some with the apostles” (Acts 14:1-4). They were accused of throwing the city of Philippi into confusion (16:20), caused “no small disturbance” in Ephesus (19:23), and were labeled as “men who have upset the world” (17:6). Paul was referred to as “a pest and an agitator of insurrections among the Jews throughout the inhabited earth” (24:5). As Paul and his fellow apostles marched in Christ’s triumphal procession, scattering the sweet incense of Christ, many who inhaled this aroma of Christ were likewise conquered by Christ, were made captives obedient to the faith, and joined the procession celebrating Christ’s perpetual victory over His enemies (Rom. 1:5; 16:26).


75 J. Conybeare and J. S. Howson, The Life and Epistles of St. Paul, vol. II (London: Longmans, Green, and Co., 1881), p. 98

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

10 – Conclusion

From chapter ten of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

After comparing the ministry of the apostle Paul as presented in 2 Corinthians with the ministry of Brothers Watchman Nee and Witness Lee, we must conclude that the ministry in the Lord’s recovery is the genuine New Testament ministry. Although the aspects and qualifications of proper ministers covered in these few pages are not exhaustive, they certainly form the core of what constitutes a genuine new covenant minister. If anyone regards himself as having a share in this ministry, we must ask whether he matches the above pattern of the apostle Paul. Does he minister the life-giving Spirit into the believers in order to produce them as letters of Christ? Do the believers under his ministry receive Christ so that they may live and magnify Him as their subjective righteousness? Is the result of his ministry that believers are brought into peace and oneness with God, even to the extent that they continually live in their regenerated spirit as the practical Holy of Holies? Does the minister betroth the believers as a pure virgin to Christ as their unique Husband rather than draw them to himself?

With regard to our brothers Nee and Lee, after careful study and with a pure conscience before God and men, I must give a resounding yes to all these questions. Furthermore, Brother Nee and Brother Lee not only received transcendent revelations in the Bible but were also willing to pass through the intense suffering required for these revelations to be made a rich supply for the saints. As a result, their ministry bore the mark of death and resurrection. As persons who repeatedly and continually experienced the termination of the cross and the God of resurrection, they ministered life to others by dying to themselves. And in resurrection, the ministry of these brothers manifestly abounds with glory. Though they were but earthen vessels, their writings continue to shine forth the divine treasure into thousands of seeking believers to transform them into the New Jerusalem, the city of glory. And until today, their ministry is being spread by the faithful co-workers throughout the earth, diffusing the sweet fragrance of Christ, which year after year compels yet more to join Christ’s triumphant procession.

These unmistakable consistencies between the apostle Paul’s ministry and that of Brother Nee and Brother Lee indicate that Paul’s life and ministry were organically reproduced in our brothers; to a great extent, the intrinsic contents of Paul’s autobiography recorded in 2 Corinthians were duplicated in our brothers’ history. Indeed, we must ask: since the time of the apostles in the first century, where else have we witnessed a life and ministry that so closely matches the pattern of the apostle Paul? Like Paul, Brother Nee and Brother Lee bore the brands of Jesus, their beloved Master, continually living a crucified life in resurrection for the ministering of life to others and remaining obedient to God for the accomplishment of His will at any cost (Gal. 6:17). They were imitators of the apostle Paul, even as he was an imitator of Christ (1 Cor. 4:16; 11:1), and their ministry is a faithful reproduction of that of the Lord Jesus, the prototype of a New Testament minister, and of Paul, the foremost pattern given by the Lord (1 Cor. 15:10; 1 Tim. 1:16).

Dear saints, who are we to have been given such a weighty and valuable treasure? Should we not be grateful to the Lord for crowning us with His lovingkindness? It is truly His sovereign mercy that brought us into contact with this precious ministry (Rom. 9:15-23). May the Lord open our eyes to see its true value, and may His mercy continue to keep us in this ministry for the carrying out of God’s New Testament economy so that He might gain the bride of Christ, the New Jerusalem—the fulfillment of His heart’s desire for His eternal corporate expression and counterpart (Rev. 21:2, 9-10).

Previous Home

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

3 – The Ministry of Reconciliation

From chapter three of The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery – Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant

THE MINISTRY OF RECONCILIATION

In 2 Corinthians 5:16-21 the apostles as ambassadors of Christ beseeched the believers, “Be reconciled to God” (v. 20). They regarded their ministry as a work of reconciliation involving two steps that correspond to the two aspects of God’s full salvation: bringing sinners back to God through His judicial redemption, and bringing believers into God to make them fully one with Him through His organic salvation. The first step is mentioned in verse 19: “God in Christ was reconciling the world to Himself, not accounting their offenses to them.” This refers to sinners being reconciled to God through the objective aspect of Christ’s death on the cross, where He died that we might be forgiven of our sins and justified by God (1 Cor. 15:3; 1 Pet. 2:24; 3:18). The second step of reconciliation is mentioned in the following verse, in which Paul beseeches the believers in Corinth (not unbelievers in the world) to “be reconciled to God” (v. 20). Here, reconciliation refers to believers living in the natural life being brought to God out from the flesh through the subjective aspect of Christ’s death. Christ died not only for our sins but for us, the sinners, that is, for the termination of our fallen nature; He was made sin that we might become the righteousness of God in Him (2 Cor. 5:14-15, 21). To be fully reconciled to God is to be saved in His life to the uttermost (Rom. 5:10; Heb. 7:25), until there is no trace of enmity, separation, or discrepancy between God and us but complete peace, oneness, and harmony (Rom. 5:1; 8:6; 1 John 3:2).

These two steps of reconciliation are signified by the two veils of the tabernacle in the Old Testament. The first step is portrayed by the screen, the outer veil at the entrance of the tabernacle. Through the reconciliation of the propitiating blood a sinner could pass through this screen and enter into the Holy Place of the tabernacle, which signifies the dwelling place of God (Exo. 26:36-37). The pillars attached to this screen signify evangelists who provide an entrance for sinners to come into God’s dwelling place (Acts 2:14; 1 Pet. 2:5, 9-10). The second step of reconciliation is portrayed by the second veil, the veil within the tabernacle separating the Holy Place from the Holy of Holies (Exo. 26:31-32; Heb. 9:3). This inner veil signifies the flesh of Christ that was rent through His death on the cross to open a new and living way for man to contact God in Christ as the propitiation place in the Holy of Holies, which typifies the regenerated human spirit (Matt. 27:51; Heb. 10:19-20; Rom. 3:25; Heb. 4:12, 16; cf. Exo. 25:22). The pillars attached to this veil signify the overcoming believers who live in union with the crucified Christ, those who no longer live in their flesh (that is, in their soul, their natural life) but bear the testimony of having been crucified with Christ (Rom. 8:13; Gal. 2:20; 5:24; cf. 2:9; Rev. 3:12). Such believers, having passed through the second veil to dwell with God in their regenerated human spirit, seek to bring their fellow believers from the Holy Place into the Holy of Holies to enjoy God Himself in His fullness (Rev. 1:10; 4:2; John 14:19; 2 Cor. 13:4; 1 Thes. 5:10).

Paul and his fellow apostles were such pillars, fully reconciled to God in their inward being through a thorough experience of Christ’s death and ushering God’s people into their spirit as the true Holy of Holies that they might abide in God and live with Him (1 John 2:27-28; 4:13). Because they themselves were abiding in the Holy of Holies, they could call others to come forward to join them there (Heb. 10:22; cf. 4:16). It is crucial to see that God entrusts the ministry of reconciliation to those who themselves have been fully reconciled to God through Christ. Apart from the pillars there is no entrance—signifying that only by the ministry of such ones who co-work with God can we be fully reconciled to Him (1 Cor. 3:9; 2 Cor. 6:1; Mark 16:20). If we do not receive their ministry, we will unavoidably be severed from this work of bringing the believers fully back to God and presenting every man full-grown in Christ (Col. 1:28-29).

In carrying out the ministry of reconciliation, Paul exhorts the believers to no longer live to themselves but to live to the crucified and resurrected Lord (2 Cor. 5:15, 18, 20). This means that they would no longer live in their flesh (as fleshly men) or in their soul (as soulish men) but in their spirit, the practical Holy of Holies (as spiritual men) (1 Cor. 2:14-15; 3:1-3). Regrettably, many teachers in traditional Christianity are not able to carry out this ministry, because they consider man a dichotomous being of only body and soul, neglecting the biblical revelation that man is a tripartite being composed of body, soul, and spirit (1 Thes. 5:23). The soul was created as an organ to express God but became corrupted through Adam’s fall to become the self, an entity independent of God with its own expression (Luke 1:46; 9:23); the categorical demand of the Lord Jesus is to deny this mutated part of our being (Matt. 16:24). The spirit, which was created to contact, receive, and contain God, is born of the Spirit at the time of a believer’s regeneration to become the place of fellowship and service to God (John 3:6; 4:24; Rom. 1:9; 7:6; 12:11); the unequivocal teaching of the New Testament is to walk by this regenerated spirit (8:4). Those who maintain that man is bipartite are equally unaware of the peril of living according to the fallen soul and of the importance of living according to the regenerated spirit (1 Cor. 2:14-15). As a result, they cultivate the human soul as a means to serve God and thereby unwittingly encourage the development of fallen humanity. Under their erroneous teaching, countless believers remain in a soulish state (cf. Jude 19). Like the Israelites who spent forty years roaming the wilderness, these misguided believers tarry aimlessly in their soul and fall short of the promised land of their regenerated spirit (Heb. 4:8-12), where their divine inheritance, Christ as the life-giving Spirit, lies tragically untapped (Gal. 3:14; 5:16, 25; Rom. 8:16).

The ministry in the Lord’s recovery not only affirms the scriptural view that man is composed of body, soul, and spirit but also repeatedly stresses the pivotal importance of the mingled spirit—the human spirit mingled10 with Christ as the life-giving Spirit—as the focal point of the believers’ experience of the Triune God and the vital means by which God carries out His eternal purpose. It is in their mingled spirit that the believers are born of God to become His children (John 3:6; Rom. 8:16), and it is in their mingled spirit that the believers realize their organic union with God in Christ (1 Cor. 6:17), receive revelation from God to know Him and His economy concerning Christ and the church (Eph. 1:17; 3:3-5), worship the Father as true worshippers (John 4:23-24), serve God in newness and in the gospel of His Son (Rom. 1:9; 7:6), spontaneously fulfill the righteous requirement of the law (8:4), partake of the grace of the Lord Jesus Christ (Gal. 6:18; Phil. 4:23), are renewed in their mind (Eph. 4:23; cf. Rom. 6:4; 7:6), and are built into God’s corporate dwelling place (Eph. 2:22). Further, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery has tirelessly exhorted the saints to walk according to their spirit, regarding this practice as the apostle Paul’s “unique commandment” (Rom. 8:4; cf. Gal. 5:16, 25).11 By encouraging the believers to live in their mingled spirit, this ministry has shepherded many to become spiritual men, those who live in their spirit as the Holy of Holies, enjoying direct fellowship with God face to face (1 Cor. 2:15; 2 Cor. 2:13; 6:7; 3:18; 4:6).

The overwhelming majority of believers today have been reconciled to God only partly, having passed through the first veil but still living mostly in their flesh, their natural life (1 Cor. 3:1, 3). This is largely because most of them are under superficial teachings that emphasize the objective aspect of Christ’s death as the price of their redemption; they are not taught concerning the subjective aspect of Christ’s death as the means of deliverance from the flesh. In contrast, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery unveils the death of Christ as the means by which God in Christ not only judicially redeems fallen human beings but also terminates the flesh of the believers for their full reconciliation to God. Further, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery provides a way to experience this vision. We see under the Spirit’s enlightenment that our old man was crucified with Christ (Rom. 6:6), we realize that the efficacy of Christ’s terminating death is an element of the all-inclusive, compound, life-giving Spirit (Phil. 1:19; Gal. 5:16, 24-25), and we put to death by the Spirit the practices of the body, thereby allowing the Spirit to execute the death of Christ upon our flesh (Rom. 8:13). By receiving the word of the cross presented by the Lord’s ministry in His recovery, numerous saints have learned to apply the death of Christ to their flesh by the Spirit, thereby experiencing the rending of their flesh that they might be fully reconciled to God, entering into a deep harmony and oneness with God in the Holiest of all.

In brief, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery has shepherded many saints to deny their soul and live in their spirit by remaining faithful to the word of the cross (1 Cor. 1:18). The word of God as a sharp two-edged sword divides soul from spirit (Heb. 4:12), exposing what is soulish and condemning the natural life. By releasing the word of the cross, this ministry has saved many from wasting years wandering in their soul and opened the way for them to enter into the highest enjoyment of Christ in their mingled spirit (Deut. 12:9; Col. 1:12). It is a great validation of Brother Lee’s ministry that under his perfecting many of his co-workers experienced the breaking of their flesh for the second step of reconciliation and have gone on to serve the saints with the ministry of reconciliation, ushering them into the Holy of Holies for their uttermost enjoyment of the Triune God.


10 The human spirit can be said to be mingled with the divine Spirit (cf. Lev. 2:4) because the former is joined to and indwelt by the latter without confusion or without producing a third substance (1 Cor. 6:17) while the distinction between the two spirits is preserved in their combination (Rom. 8:15).

>11 The Divine Dispensing of the Divine Trinity, p. 236

Previous Home Next

© 2023, David Yoon. All rights reserved.

Share:

When Problems Arise in the Local Churches: Avoiding Two Errors

When problems arise in the local churches, there is a tendency among some to ask, “If this ministry and the local churches are really a recovery of the Lord, how could such things happen?” To answer this question, we need to consider the record of the New Testament concerning the nature and function of the ministry and concerning the standing versus the condition of the local churches.

The Ministry and the Local Churches

The Bible recognizes only two ministries—the ministry of the old covenant and the ministry of the new covenant (2 Cor. 3:7-9). As their designations imply, these two ministries issue from two covenants, indicating that in the Bible the word ministry refers to man’s service to God in co-laboring with Him to carry out His covenant. The content of the old covenant is the law, which places demands on man according to the attributes of God, such as His righteousness, holiness, and glory. The content of the new covenant is God’s economy, in which He dispenses Himself in Christ as the Spirit into His chosen and redeemed people to constitute them the Body of Christ. Thus, the function of the unique New Testament ministry is to preach the unsearchable riches of Christ (2 Cor. 4:1; 1 Tim. 1:12; Eph. 3:8), to make known God’s economy (v. 9), to minister the Spirit of life into people (2 Cor. 3:3, 6, 8), and to perfect others to do the same (Eph. 4:12) in order to afford God a way to accomplish His goal in His economy to build up the Body (vv. 4:15-16). This function becomes the measuring stick to evaluate whether a personal ministry is part of the New Testament ministry.

Whether or not a particular Christian group is a genuine local church is not a matter of condition but of standing. A local church is an expression of the universal Body of Christ in a particular locality. As such, it receives all believers and participates in the universal fellowship of the Body of Christ with all other genuine local churches. The different local churches will vary in their spiritual condition, and a local church’s condition may vary over time. Moreover, in principle, a local church consists of believers at various stages of maturity in life. We will inevitably be disappointed if we expect all the local churches to be wonderful all the time. The church in Corinth had a multitude of serious problems, including gross sin, yet Paul called it “the church of God which is in Corinth” (1 Cor. 1:2). In Colossae the believers were in danger of being defrauded of Christ due to human philosophy and culture (Col. 2:18, 8). From Ephesus John wrote of a domineering one, Diotrephes, who would not even receive the apostle (3 John 9). Most of the seven churches in Asia John wrote to in Revelation were not in a good condition (Rev. 1:11; ch. 2—3). Nevertheless, these abnormal situations did not alter the genuineness of the standing of these local churches.

A Proper Assessment and Two Errors

If we assess the ministry among us in the Lord’s recovery fairly, we will realize that it has opened up the Word of God, particularly along the line of the experience of Christ as life for the building up of the church to accomplish God’s goal in His economy. Furthermore, this ministry has borne abundant fruit, as testified by the thousands of local churches and millions of lovers of Christ it has produced worldwide, as well as the large number of faithful servants of our Lord. In accord with the apostles’ teaching, it strongly admonishes believers concerning the problems caused by sin, culture, and abuse of authority. In every respect the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee qualifies as part of the New Testament ministry (see David Yoon, “The Ministers in the Lord’s Recovery—Genuine Ministers of the New Covenant,” which makes this point much more thoroughly [To be published on this site in the next few weeks]).

If we are not sober in our consideration of the New Testament, we may make two errors concerning the problems that we observe in a particular local church. First, we may generalize from isolated and limited observations and wrongfully assume that these problems are common to all the local churches. Second, we may blame the ministry for what are, in fact, local shortcomings caused by failure to closely follow the ministry’s teaching and leading. Our assessment of the ministry in light of observed shortcomings in the churches should be consistent with what we see in the New Testament Epistles, most of which were written to address problems in certain local churches. In other words, those who took the lead in the ministry were laboring to bring those churches back to the line of God’s economy from some manner of deviation. For example, to the Corinthians Paul pointed to Christ and His cross as the solution to all the problems and strifes in that church (1 Cor. 1:10-11; 2:2). Galatians was written to turn believers back from the law to Christ (2:19, 21; 3:1-5). Paul wrote to the Philippians, at least in part, because of strife among certain serving ones in the church (4:2); he asked the saints there to “make my joy full, that you think the same thing, having the same love, joined in soul, thinking the one thing” (2:2), that is, to pursue and gain Christ (3:8-14). Because some of the Hebrew believers were drifting back to Judaism, the Epistle to the Hebrews uplifted Christ as being superior to everything in that religion (1:1-4; 2:9; 3:3, 5-6; 4:14; 7:25-26; 10:18; 12:2).

If we judge a ministry by the failures of others, then we have to condemn the Lord Jesus for Judas (Luke 22:47-48), Peter and the other original apostles for Ananias and Sapphira (Acts 5:1-11), Paul for all the problems in the Gentile churches and even among his co-workers (2 Tim. 1:15; 4:10, 16), and John for Diotrephes (3 John 9). That would not be fair. Neither is it fair to blame the ministry of Watchman Nee, Witness Lee, and those co-workers who continue to labor in the same line because some local church members, even leading ones, act in a disorderly manner, contrary to the ministry’s teaching. Similarly, though sin, culture, or domineering men surely damage a local church and its testimony, the presence of these things does not alter a church’s standing, nor should we assume that such things characterize all local churches. Moreover, we should not take the excuse of improprieties in a church to incite strife and division (2 Tim. 2:23; 1 Cor. 1:10).

The Source of a Local Church’s Problems

The problems among the churches seen in the New Testament arose because the believers did not closely follow the teaching of the apostles brought to them by the New Testament ministers. In his first Epistle to his younger co-worker Timothy, Paul wrote, “If you lay these things before the brothers, you will be a good minister of Christ Jesus, being nourished with the words of the faith and of the good teaching which you have closely followed” (1 Tim. 4:6). In his Second Epistle to Timothy he wrote of those who had deviated from the apostles’ teaching and then commended Timothy, saying, “But you have closely followed my teaching, conduct, purpose, faith, long-suffering, love, endurance” (2 Tim. 3:10). Both verses speak of closely following the ministry. This implies that some did not closely follow Paul’s teaching. As a result, their Christian life had a different outcome. Paul also charged Timothy, saying, “And the things which you have heard from me through many witnesses, these commit to faithful men, who will be competent to teach others also” (2 Tim. 2:2). The words to faithful men indicate that among the believers some were faithful to the teaching of the apostles and others were not. Paul’s word to the Colossians that in the new man “there cannot be Greek and Jew, circumcision and uncircumcision, barbarian, Scythian, slave, free man, but Christ is all and in all” (Col. 3:10-11) would not have been needed if racial, religious, cultural, and social distinctions did not persist in the church in Colossae. In his first Epistle Peter wrote to the elders, “Nor as lording it over your allotments but by becoming patterns of the flock” (1 Pet. 5:2). Peter would not have needed to charge the elders not to lord it over the saints if there had been no such cases. Thus, the ministry is not to blame for failures in local churches. In fact, it is the leadership in the ministry and the work that is vitally needed to address the problems that cause those failures.

A Proper Response

What, then, should we do when faced with problems or a turmoil in a church? Above all we must seek to overcome by living and magnifying Christ (Phil. 1:19-21). The only way to be a factor in the building up of the Body of Christ is to closely follow the apostles’ teaching brought to us by the ministers of the New Testament (Eph. 4:11-12). This requires that we be people of vision, not idealists (Acts 26:19), see the same revelation that the apostles saw (Eph. 1:17-23), become imitators of the faith of the New Testament ministers (1 Cor. 4:16; 11:1; Phil. 3:17; 1 Thes. 1:6; 2 Thes. 3:7, 9; Heb. 13:7), and take the way of life, not the way of rebellion or of fomenting contentions among the brothers over issues of right and wrong (1 Cor. 11:6; 1 Tim. 6:14; 2 Tim. 2:14, 23; Titus 3:9). As we have indicated in many articles, this does not mean that we overlook problems. Rather, as priests we follow the pattern of the apostles to bear before the Lord the problems in the churches and the saints who are entangled in them and to deal with those problems in a proper way and with a proper spirit (Eph. 4:2; 2 Cor. 11:28; Rom. 15:1; Gal. 6:1-2; Col. 3:13). This is our responsibility to the Lord, to the church, and even to those who cause problems (Matt. 18:15).

Furthermore, the Lord never tells us to abandon the genuine ground of the church, no matter what the condition of that church may be. Rather, in each of the seven churches in Revelation there is a call to overcome (Rev. 2:7, 11, 17, 26; 3:5, 12, 21). Such a call indicates that not all improper situations among God’s people will be resolved in this age and that not all believers will overcome, whether they meet with the local churches or not. Only those who remain faithful to the Lord in the churches in the midst of all manner of circumstances will overcome. These maintain the testimony of Jesus as luminaries shining in the darkness of this age (Rev. 1:9; Phil. 2:15) and afford the Lord a way to advance in the accomplishment of His economy. For this they will be rewarded by Him at His coming (Rev. 22:12).

Share:

The Crucial Role of the Sisters in the Church Life

The sisters have a crucial role in the church life that is most highly valued. According to God’s arrangement, the sisters stand in a unique position to uphold God’s government as an anti-testimony to the rebellious disorder of the world. The sisters also have an irreplaceable role in bringing forth the church life in their locality. 

In addressing the crucial role of the sisters in the church life, Brother Lee identified three leading functions. The first of these is what he called the “greatest lesson for Christians to learn,” the lesson of being submissive (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1968, vol. 1, 83). This lesson applies to all Christians, both brothers and sisters, so the idea that females submit and males do not submit is a fallen concept that must be repudiated. The Bible charges us to submit to one another (Eph. 5:21) as a way to be filled in spirit and as an issue of being filled (v. 18). Brother Lee identified four requirements to practice genuine submission: being supplied with the divine life, enjoying grace, being under the working of the cross, and denying the self. By taking care of the matter of submission “the church will be strengthened, enriched, and renewed” (84).

While a brother’s submission may not be readily perceived, a sister’s submission is recognized even by unbelievers and testifies to the evil powers that the divine government is upheld in the church (1 Cor. 11:10). As the old creation has become rebellious to God’s order and authority, God must gain an anti-testimony to the disorder by maintaining the God-created distinction in function between the brothers and the sisters (cf. 1 Cor. 11:3; 12:13; 14:34). In Galatians 3:28 Paul reveals that there is no longer any distinction between male and female as constituents of the new creation in Christ, yet in 1 Corinthians 11 and 14 Paul also shows that in the church the distinction between male and female according to the old creation must still be observed. The church is the unique place on earth where the order of God’s governmental authority is upheld and maintained. The church being an anti-testimony to the rebellious disorder of the world depends largely upon the sisters’ willingness to submit to God’s governmental arrangement.

The second leading function of the sisters in the church is to pray (Acts 12:12). Prayer is crucial for the Lord’s move and for the building up of the church (2 Thes. 3:1). The sisters’ prayer in particular is a great factor in the health of a church. Genuine prayer depends much on submission. For example, if a sister is not submissive, she will not be able to pray properly for the elders but instead may criticize them even in her so-called prayers. However, by practicing submission a sister will be supplied to pray for the elders and many matters related to the Lord’s interests (85)

The third leading function of the sisters is to care for the church services. Every saint, including the sisters, should serve the Lord both in practical matters and in preaching the gospel and shepherding others. Properly speaking, even our dealing with practical matters should be a priestly service in which there is the dispensing of Christ as life to others. The sisters’ proper care for the services of the church depends on the first two functions of submission and prayer. Some sisters may not know how they should function in the church. However, if they will take care of submission and prayer, spontaneously, they will realize how to function in serving the church (86).

According to the divine arrangement in the church, oversight of the administration and services of the church has been placed in the hands of the responsible brothers who serve as overseers (Acts 20:28; 1 Tim. 3:2; Titus 1:6-7). However, Romans 16 stands out in the New Testament because of Paul’s lengthy commendation of the importance of the sisters’ service. Paul points out that while taking the lead in bearing the services, the sisters also kept the order in God’s arrangement. Verse 3 mentions Prisca before Aquila, indicating that she took the lead in rendering practical and necessary service to the church in Rome, but the mention of her husband Aquila shows that Prisca still maintained the proper order in God’s arrangement.

The sisters’ function in the church is indispensable in at least two ways. First, the services in the church life cannot be carried out apart from the sisters’ function. In fact, Brother Lee told us that the sisters should carry out most of the service in the church (CWWL, 1967, vol. 1, 269-270, 304). Second, the sisters’ function manifests the order in God’s governmental arrangement as an anti-testimony to the fallen world. We should be rescued from discounting the importance of the sisters’ function simply because they are not also charged with the oversight and administration of the church. Such a tendency to discount the sisters’ function may result from excessively exalting the brothers’ standing in the church or from the influence of fallen contemporary fashions in the world regarding gender roles. Much rather, the sisters’ service constitutes “the crucial factor” in carrying out the practical church life (CWWL, 1975-1976, vol. 1, 130)

Far from occupying a secondary standing in the church, the sisters’ service is needed to perfect the brothers’ service. While the elders may exercise oversight over the various aspects of the church life, the sisters possess insight to recognize needs in a particular service. With a proper spirit the sisters may help the elders to recognize particular needs in the church and become burdened for these needs in the carrying out of the elders’ service. Accordingly, Brother Lee observed:

In a proper situation, the brothers should quickly receive the sisters’ feelings, but the brothers should make the decisions. The sisters should come forward without hesitation to let the brothers know their feelings about a matter, and the more the brothers receive their feelings, the better it will be. The sense of the sisters is very fine; this is an innate quality of the sisters. (CWWL, 1967, vol. 1, 345)

However, Brother Lee also cautioned:

The sisters should not do anything that the brothers have not yet decided on and agreed upon. Everything should pass through the brothers. If the brothers are slow, the sisters can apply a little pressure so that the brothers will become burdened. However, if the brothers do not agree or do not reach a decision, the sisters should not do anything. If we realize this principle, there will not be any problems. If we do not maintain this principle, the more the sisters do, the greater the problem will become. In the end, the church in that locality will suffer great loss. (346)

The brothers who bear responsibility should receive the fellowship of the sisters concerning the needs in the church services. They should listen to the sisters, respecting them as those who have insight, and the sisters must be strengthened to come forward in a proper spirit to make the brothers aware of particular needs in the church. Once the feeling of the Lord becomes clear in a matter, however, the brothers who exercise oversight should make the needed decisions, and the sisters should not carry out any service apart from the brothers’ decision (346)

Brother Lee mentioned five particular areas in which the sisters’ shepherding function is vital: the work with the children (including young people), recovering dormant sisters, cooperating in the student work, learning to be spiritual nursing mothers, and giving hospitality (304-308). None of these services is trivial or menial. Rather, all are priestly services vital to the Lord’s interests in the church. There is a desperate need in the church life for sisters who can function by ministering life to others according to their need and by prayer for their growth. In caring for younger ones, rather than speaking in a merely doctrinal way, the sisters should exercise discernment to minister particular truths that are needed for their growth in life (CWWL, 1975-1976, vol. 1, 43-44). Further, there may be saints who can be served by a sister’s prayer and intercession for them, even though she may not interact with them directly (45)

In carrying out their irreplaceable functions, the sisters must also be aware of two matters that endanger the effectiveness of their function. The first matter is not thinking the same thing. Paul charged Euodias and Syntyche, two sisters in the church in Philippi, to “think the same thing in the Lord” (Phil. 4:2). The apostle made the same charge to the whole church, indicating that the dissension between these two sisters affected the church in Philippi generally (2:2). The dissension Paul addressed was related to the mind but affected the saints’ love toward one another and damaged their oneness. Not thinking the same thing, which is related to lacking in and being distracted from the subjective knowledge and experience of Christ, greatly frustrates our function in the church life (3:7-10; CWWL, 1975-1976, vol. 1, 133).

The second matter that endangers the function of the sisters is gossip. Gossip kills our praying spirit, spreads death to the hearers, and annuls our ability to minister life to others. In the church life we may become aware of many affairs of the saints. If the saints’ affairs do not involve us, in principle, they are not our business, and we do not need to talk about them. Instead, we should allow the Lord to take care of the saints’ affairs. Nor should we inquire too much into the saints’ affairs when only a little inquiry is needed (133). Only after prayerful consideration before the Lord should we bring a matter concerning others to a more mature saint out of care for those involved.

What is our protection against those matters that endanger our function? We must forget all negative things and all matters other than Christ Himself. A dissenting mind and a gossiping mouth are real tests that expose our condition and our need for further growth in the divine life. While gossip brings in death, prayer produces the genuine growth in life and the building up. “If anyone tells us something negative,” Brother Lee observed, “we should have no heart for it. This is a basic lesson that we must learn” (135).

The sisters should neither be influenced by trends in contemporary society concerning the role of females nor be paralyzed by excessive fear of overstepping God’s governmental arrangement. Brother Lee warned us, “The more we allow ourselves to be troubled by this matter, the more complicated we will become and the less we will function in the way of life.” He encouraged the sisters to be simple and go to the Lord daily for fellowship and pursue growth in the divine life, saying, “If the sisters grow in the Lord, they will spontaneously keep the proper order in the Body and will be clear concerning their function in the church life” (CWWL, 1964, vol. 3, 98). May we all remain simple before the Lord, offering our service in the Body out of our enjoyment of the Lord and the riches of the divine life.

Share:

Caring for Both the Headship of Christ and the Fellowship of the Body

God’s desire is to head up all things in Christ (Eph. 1:10). In His plan the church as the Body takes the lead to be headed up in Christ by its members holding Him as the Head and growing up into Him in all things (4:15). Upholding the headship of Christ is crucial for the building up of the Body. As Ephesians 4:15-16 shows, the Body issues from the Head: “But holding to truth in love, we may grow up into Him in all things, who is the Head, Christ, out from whom all the Body, being joined together and being knit together through every joint of the rich supply and through the operation in the measure of each one part, causes the growth of the Body unto the building up of itself in love.” On the one hand, we grow up into Christ. On the other hand, we function to supply life to one another out from the Head. Only that which is out from Christ is His Body. Whoever usurps the headship of Christ damages the Body. Brother Lee told us, “Among God’s people today there should be no head other than Christ. Any head or subhead is an insult to the headship of Christ. God honors the headship of His Son to the uttermost, and He desires that we also honor the headship of Christ” (CWWL, 1978, vol. 3, 62)

Christ is the head of every man (1 Cor. 11:3), the head of each local church, and the Head of the Body (Eph. 1:22-23; Col. 1:18; 2:19). If the saints do not know Christ as their Head in their daily living, there will be no “out from whom,” which means there will be no “growth of the Body unto the building up of itself in love.” Likewise, if the elders in a church do not hold the Head but administrate the church according to their natural disposition or opinion, they may take the lead in the church in name and outward form, but their administration of the church will not contribute to the building up the Body of Christ. Without the headship of Christ, our church life will be in vain and have nothing to do with the working out of God’s economy to head up all things in Christ (Eph. 1:10)

However, to say that there is “no head other than Christ” does not mean that there is no authority in the church other than from Christ directly. Rather, God has ordained that His authority be represented by the church and in the church by members who are one with His Son. If we claim to uphold the Lord’s headship but cast aside others’ fellowship, we risk falling into self-deception and obsessive self-vindication, believing that we alone know the mind of the Lord, have His leading, and honor His headship. Such is the case when fellowship or expressions of concern from other churches are condemned as “outside interference” that undermines the headship of Christ. The same is true when a brother asserts that there is an impenetrable boundary around a local church’s administration and that those who function as apostles among us, who are outside of that local church’s eldership, have no right to touch local matters. This insistence is hypocritical in cases where the brother who raises this objection has exerted influence over leading ones in neighboring local churches to adopt his opinions and particular courses of action.

Such accusations of “outside interference” are reminiscent of words uttered by John Ingalls in 1989. Ingalls, an elder in the church in Anaheim, was a leader in a rebellion that caused turmoil among the churches. He openly criticized Brother Lee in a church meeting, saying, “There has been much outside influence exercised upon the church which has made it very difficult to go on by getting our leading directly from the Lord.” Brother Lee’s response to this accusation is very enlightening and applicable today:

In the Lord’s recovery we work and serve in the Body of Christ. So, in our work and service to the Lord, we are related both to the Lord as our Head and to the ones who work and serve together with us as fellow members of the Lord’s Body. Hence, the New Testament teaches us to be subject not only to the Lord but also to one another in the fear of the Lord (Eph. 5:24a, 21). Thus, in the Lord’s work and service, in the matter of “getting our leading directly from the Lord,” we need to consider our relationship with the ones who work and serve together with us. It is hardly possible for us to receive a leading directly from the Lord without taking care of the ones with whom we work and serve. If we get our leading directly from the Lord without considering the fellow members of the Lord’s Body who are laboring with us, we will surely jeopardize the oneness of the Body. We constantly need the cooperation and the coordination to keep us in a balanced situation in which we take care not only of the Lord’s leading directly but also of the co-working ones’ realization. On the other hand, when we take care of the co-working ones’ realization, we should also seek the Lord’s leading directly. This way of balance is the safe way and the proper way to save us from being independent, whether intentionally or unintentionally, and to keep the oneness of the Body so that the Body can be built up without the suffering of any loss. (CWWL, 1989, vol. 4, 417-418)

We must keep two principles in balance—seeking the Lord as the Head and paying attention to the sense of those with whom we co-labor. By doing so we honor the Body, of which Christ is the Head. To trust only in one’s own discernment of the mind of the Lord denies the very real possibility that one might be wrong. For a brother to decry what he considers “outside influence,” to declare that he will no longer be a “man-pleaser,” and to label those who disagree with him as “man-pleasers” is to despise the feeling of the Body. A brother who accepts the premise that no one outside his area, including the apostles, can touch  any church in his area sets himself up as the ultimate arbiter to know the mind of the Lord. To think in this way is to not be sober-minded but to think more highly of oneself than one ought to think (Rom. 12:3). Brother Lee continued:

A local church is under the authority of Christ as the Head, represented by the elders. Hence, the saints in a local church should obey the elders (Heb. 13:17). The churches as the Body of Christ are under their Head, Christ, represented by the apostles. Hence, the churches should obey the apostles (2 Cor. 2:9; 7:15; 10:6). To obey the elders in a local church and to obey the apostles among the churches does not mean that the obeying one does not need to obey the Lord directly. When he is seeking the leading directly from the Lord, he should also take care of the elders in the local church, because he is living and working in the church as a part of the Body. When the churches are seeking the leading directly from the Lord, they should also take care of the apostles, because they are all living and working with the apostles in the churches as the Body of Christ. Whether in a local church or among all the churches, we should be Body-conscious, taking care not only of the Head but also of His Body. Since we are living and working in the Body, we have the Body with the Head. We cannot have the Head without the Body; neither can we have the Body without the Head. We should seek to obey the Head with a relationship to the Body, and we should also seek to obey the Body with a relationship to the Head. We all need to realize that in our natural life we are very independent. So, to take care of obeying both the Lord and the elders or the apostles at the same time is not an easy thing for us. (423)

Saying that one will obey the Head while ignoring the Body is a mask for independence and unaccountability. The issue of such an attitude is that a person is easily misled into subjectivity, mistaking his own feelings for the Lord’s and, in effect, doing the very thing he accuses others of—usurping the headship of Christ. We need a balanced view of the headship of Christ. While it is true on a personal level as regards our daily living that Christ is the head of every man (1 Cor. 11:3), we should also realize that God gave Christ “to be Head over all things to the church, which is His Body” (Eph. 1:22b-23a). As the Head, He placed some in the Body to bear responsibility as elders to shepherd and lead a local church and others to function as apostles to shepherd and lead the churches as the Body (1 Cor. 12:28; Eph. 4:7). The elders and the apostles are the Lord’s provision to supply and lead the members of His Body (Eph. 4:11-12, 16; 1 Thes. 5:12; 1 Tim. 5:17; Heb. 13:7; 1 Cor. 11:1; Phil. 3:17). As believers who seek to live to the Lord under His headship for the building up of His Body, we should seek the Lord personally and should also be open to receive fellowship from one another, especially from the leading ones. As Brother Nee explained:

All leadings should pass the test of Body fellowship. Every leading of the Body comes to us through other members. Human subjectivity can become a great obstacle. As soon as a man becomes subjective, he will not be able to receive leadings from other members. We have to learn to submit to the church and to go along with others’ opinions. Thinking that we are always right is extreme arrogance. The supply of the Body and the leading of the Body often are one and the same thing. (CWWN, vol. 60, 263-264)

Stubbornly refusing the fellowship of the Body inflates the self and renders one unfit to be properly built up with others. What the Lord needs today are those who renounce self-exaltation and any thought of being a victim; who give Christ the preeminence in every aspect of their lives, seeking to live Him and live to Him as the unique source, the Head of the Body; and who have a Body-consciousness such that they honor the Body, care for the Body, and avoid doing anything to damage the Body.

Share:

The Relationship of Living Stream Ministry to the Ministry and the Work

Just as there is a definite distinction between Living Stream Ministry (LSM) and the local churches, there is also an important distinction between LSM and the ministry and the work in the recovery. In a broad sense the Bible uses the word ministry to refer to the service that God’s people render to Him. However, in some passages the expressions the ministry or this ministry are used more particularly to refer to the service of those who open the divine revelation and supply the churches with the riches of the Word of God through the apostles’ teaching (Eph. 4:12; 1 Tim. 1:12; 2 Cor. 4:1; 3:6; Acts 2:42; Titus 1:9). The work refers to the preaching of the gospel and raising up of local churches for the increase and spread of the Lord’s testimony in the move of God’s economy on earth (Acts 13:2). LSM does not exercise leadership in either the work or the ministry. Rather, LSM is a Levitical service that directly serves the ministry and cooperates with the work. LSM neither directs nor controls the work and the ministry, though some dissenters foster that misunderstanding. If we see that the ministry and the work are distinct from LSM, we will avoid much confusion, which is contrary to the nature of our God (1 Cor. 14:33, 40). The New Testament shows that the ministry and the work initiated by God are carried out in an orderly way and absolutely according to His divine arrangement (cf. Mark 6:7-11; Luke 10:1; Acts 6:1-4, 13:2-3, 6-7).

Witness Lee said that he established Living Stream Ministry “to publish the messages in book form and to distribute these messages in both video and audio tapes” (A Timely Word, 39). He described it as “a Levitical service serving my ministry to put out the word of God in print and through video and audio tapes” (39). Although there have been many technological advances, to this day LSM’s role remains that of a publisher and distributor of the ministry. In support of this role it facilitates the release of the ministry by providing practical services in the carrying out of trainings and conferences (for a more complete description see “The Relationship between Living Stream Ministry and the Local Churches“). All these functions are in the nature of a Levitical service. In the Old Testament the Levites were engaged in the service of God, but there was a definite distinction between those who offered practical service in the outer court and the priests who ministered in the sanctuary (Ezek. 44:11, 15-16). The Levites served under the oversight of the priests (Num. 3:32; 4:19, 27-28, 33). In the same way, the burden of the ministry and the work in the recovery, including the ministering of the word in trainings and conferences and the raising up, visiting, and strengthening of local churches, is not borne by LSM but by the blending co-workers.

Brother Lee’s experience with Brother Nee showed him the need for entities to publish and distribute the ministry. He called these “ministry stations,” which are for, but distinct from, the churches, the ministry, and the work of the organic Body of Christ. For example, in speaking of the Taiwan Gospel Book Room, which publishes the ministry in Chinese, Brother Lee made a definite distinction between the ministry itself and a ministry station that serves it:

The ministry station is composed of the Levites who serve the ministry. We all should see that the fact that the churches on the earth today can be established and supplied is altogether due to this ministry. And this ministry can become widespread, for the most part, due to the help rendered through the Levitical service in the ministry station. Suppose for these twenty years I had gone to the United States, and there had been no issue of publications, cassette tapes, or videotapes. In that case the spread of the ministry would have been reduced by more than one-half. The expansion of this ministry depends not only on the effectiveness of the ministry itself but also on the effectiveness manifested by the coordination between the work of the Levites in the ministry station and the ministry. (Words of Training for the New Way, vol. 1, 26-27)

The ministry is one thing, and the ministry stations that serve it are another; they are not synonymous. “The ministry” does not mean, and has never meant, Living Stream Ministry. Rather, “the ministry” refers to the unique New Testament ministry. Moreover, the leadership in the ministry in the Lord’s recovery is in actuality the apostles’ teaching as a controlling revelation brought to the churches through those co-workers who have been constituted with a particular portion and function to minister Christ, to bring to light the revelation of the Bible concerning God’s economy, and to perfect others for the building up of the Body of Christ (Acts 1:17; 6:4; 1 Tim. 1:12; Eph. 3:9; 4:11-12, 16).

The Ministry and the Work Being Directly under the Holy Spirit

The Body of Christ is an organism constituted with the divine life. Whereas the local churches are the expressions of the Body, the ministry and the work are the activity of the Body to serve the churches in fostering growth and propagation. Human organization is just as foreign to the organic ministry and work of the Body as it is to the local churches as the living expressions of the Body. The Body is the basic principle of the churches, the ministry, and the work, and all three, being organically related, are under the Head, Christ. The scriptural pattern set forth in Acts 13 is unambiguous. Barnabas and Paul were set apart unto the work by the brothers in Antioch and proceeded with the divinely sanctioned work of raising up and establishing local churches without any direction from the church in Antioch, much less from any man-made organization (Acts 13:2-4). Brother Nee points out:

The only scriptural record of the sending forth of apostles is found in Acts 13, and there we see that it is the prophets and teachers [in the church in Antioch] who set them apart for their ministry. Scripture provides no precedent for the separation and sending forth of men by one or more individuals, or by any mission or organization; even the sending out of workers by a local church is a thing unknown in the Word of God. The only example provided us there is the separating and sending forth of apostles by the prophets and teachers. (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Vol. 30: The Normal Christian Church Life, 28)

The separation of Paul and Barnabas from the church in Antioch unto the work indicated that their activities were to be absolutely under the Spirit’s leading (16:6-7). In the same way, those who take the lead in the ministry or in the work in the recovery today do not do so under the direction of any organization or local church. This principle helps to ensure that the co-workers who bear the burden of the ministry and the work among the churches remain directly and intimately under the Spirit’s leading without being simultaneously constrained by the particular needs, interests, or concerns of any controlling entity. It also assures that their ministry and work is not sectarian but universal, not for building up an organization but for the benefit of the entire Body of Christ. Brother Nee continues:

In sending Barnabas and Saul from Antioch, the prophets and teachers stood for no “church” or mission; they represented the ministry of the Body. They were not the whole Church; they were only a group of God’s servants. They bore no special name, they were bound by no particular organization, and they were subject to no fixed rules. They simply submitted themselves to the control of the Spirit and separated those whom He had separated for the work to which He had called them. (30)

Maintaining Distinctions in Practice

In the Lord’s recovery, the co-workers do not act under the direction of LSM in either the work or the ministry. Rather, certain brothers who function in the ministry seek the Lord together for His present speaking to the churches, and it is in the fellowship of the blending co-workers that the current burden for the work is sought directly from the Lord. According to their function, these brothers are, as were Paul and his co-workers, separate from any local church or any organization, but they are not independent of one another, for they are, by definition, those who co-labor together with one another and with the Lord in the one ministry and the one work for the building up of the Body of Christ (1 Cor. 3:6-9; 16:10; 2 Cor. 6:1).

The Bible gives examples of brothers who function in multiple capacities. Peter and John, for instance, were apostles and elders (1 Pet. 1:1; 5:1; Matt. 10:2; 2 John 1). The same thing exists today. A brother may be an elder in a locality, a co‑worker, and an LSM serving one concurrently. Just as an elder’s service is circumscribed by his locality, so each role in which a brother serves has its own sphere with its own boundary. Although a co-worker may also be an elder or bear responsibilities at LSM, his function as an elder remains in the sphere of his locality, and his function as a serving one in LSM remains in the sphere of LSM. Conversely, in the fellowship of the co-workers such brothers do not function in their role as elders or as LSM serving ones; rather, they function according to their role in the ministry and the work in the recovery. It is incorrect either to attribute actions taken by the co-workers to LSM or to assume that LSM directs the co-workers in the work or the ministers in their service in the ministry. Although LSM exists to serve and facilitate the ministry to the churches and may be asked to support the work, it remains distinct from both the ministry and the work. Saints who fail to maintain the proper distinctions in their concepts or speech can foster misunderstanding, which Satan can use to sow dissent and ultimately division. Similarly, those who serve in multiple capacities must endeavor to maintain these distinctions to avoid confusion and disorder. This exercise preserves the ministry and the work under the direct leading of the Holy Spirit for the benefit of all the local churches produced by the work and supplied by the ministry for their organic building up as the Body of Christ as God’s goal in this age.

Share:

No Thought of Independence in the Bible

Recently the promotion of the independence, or autonomy, of a local church’s administration has reemerged. This mistaken concept is not new. For example, in the late 1980s some brothers pointed to earlier published statements referring to the administration of a local church being independent from that of other local churches and from workers, ignoring qualifiers that such independence was limited to its business affairs. These dissenters pressed the independence of the local eldership much further. In 1993, looking back over our history, Brother Lee commented:

But some may argue by saying, “Brother Lee, didn’t you say that the administration of the churches should be local and independent?” I may have said that many years ago, but if you asked me to repeat such a saying today, I would not do it. We may think that the local churches are independent, but in the Bible I cannot find the thought of independence. Who is independent from whom in the Body of Christ? (The Issue of the Dispensing of the Processed Trinity and the Transmitting of the Transcending Christ, 86, emphasis added)

If we would take this word before the Lord, He would surely enlighten us to see that any attitude of independence is contrary to the Body of Christ. On the one hand, a local church does have a limited measure of independence in its business affairs. However, to promote the attitude or thought of being independent such that an eldership can make decisions irrespective of the Body is to mislead the saints. The Bible shows us that elders are appointed in every church and in every city and that the boundary of a church is the city (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5; Rev. 1:11). Thus, the seven local churches in Revelation 1 through 3 are identified by the city in which they are located. Further, there are references to both the church universal and the churches located in a region (Acts 15:41, 16:1; Rev. 1:4). These points are biblical. Those who promote the independence of the local churches say that because elders are appointed in each church, the churches are independent in all their affairs. It is true that each local church has its own eldership that is responsible before the Lord for the business affairs of the church, for the care of the local saints, and for following the teaching and fellowship of the apostles (Acts 11:30; 1 Pet. 5:1-2; Titus 1:9). However, this does not mean that the churches are independent of one another. Further, the thought of independence fades in consideration of the local churches as local expressions of the one Body of Christ. The thought of independent local churches is not found in the Bible and is contrary to the nature of the Body of Christ, in which not only the individual members are dependent on the other members but even the churches are dependent on one another. Concerning independence and the local churches Witness Lee stated:

If we claim to be independent, we damage ourselves. We should never forget that God has only one church. The church in Anaheim is just a small part of the church of God. We should not think that there is the church of God plus the church in Anaheim. When we speak of the church of God, we imply the local church. Through the years I have learned the following lesson. The more we honor the uniqueness of the church, the more blessings we will receive. The church in which you are meeting today may be in Spokane or in Anaheim, but we have to remember that these are just parts of the church. They are not independent. We are dependent upon one another. All the churches need the help of the other churches because we are one Body. We have to see the Body. (87)

This word matched what he said in 1988, when the rebellion began, concerning independence, first related to the believers and then among the churches:

In God’s economy and in the Body of Christ independence is a devilish word. We Christians should never be independent. We should not be independent of God or of one another. We cannot go on in the Christian life if we isolate ourselves from one another. Furthermore, no local church can be absolutely independent from the other local churches. The local churches should be dependent on one another. The church in Seattle should be dependent on the church in Spokane, and the churches in the United States should be dependent on the churches in England. We must be careful concerning the creeping in of different teachings related to matters such as autonomy and federation. (The Body of Christ, 18, emphasis in original)

The Bible shows us that the church began to degrade near the end of the first century as some began to teach different things and that the church continued its downward course as some turned away from Paul and the teaching of the apostles (1 Tim 1:3; 2 Tim 1:15; cf. Acts 2:42). Church history affirms that the degradation continued until it was brought under the centralized, hierarchical system of the Roman Catholic Church. Beginning roughly from the Reformation, Protestants adopted differing organizing principles, such as state churches, free churches, denominations, and independent assemblies, with differing forms of church government, such as episcopal, presbyterian, or congregational. Yet none of these took the organic Body of Christ as its basis. For example, of the independent assemblies of the Brethren movement, Witness Lee said:

The Brethren were raised up in Great Britain a century and a half ago. They were very good, and we received much help from them. However, they made some serious mistakes. One of these mistakes was placing too much emphasis on the independence of the local assembly. It seems that the Brethren either did not see or forgot that a local church is a part of the unique Body of Christ. (The Conclusion of the New Testament, (Msgs. 189-204), 2179)

Without the Body of Christ there could be no genuine local churches. Without the local churches, there would be no practical way to experience and enjoy the Body of Christ. Each local church expresses, however incompletely, the one Body of Christ in its locality, but it does not do so independently from all the other local churches. Moreover, a local church is not a “local body of Christ,” as that would mean that there were many bodies of Christ, a great heresy (Eph. 4:4). The earth has only one moon that shines in every city; no matter how many cities it shines upon, it is the same moon. Brother Lee used this metaphor to illustrate that the local churches are the expression of the universal Church, the Body of Christ:

When we say that we are the church in a certain locality, such as the church in Los Angeles, this is not a name but a description of a fact. We are just the church. The church does not have a name, just as the moon does not have a name. Once in the Far East, someone was so impressed with the United States that he said even the moon was bigger there. But there is no such thing as an American moon or a Chinese moon. Just as there is one moon, there is only one church. When the moon appears in London, it is the moon in London; when it appears in Los Angeles, it is the moon in Los Angeles. Regardless of where the moon appears, it is still the same moon. Just as there is the moon in Los Angeles and the moon in London, there is the church in Los Angeles and the church in London. There is one church, and this church is manifested or expressed in different localities. (The Satanic Chaos in the Old Creation and the Divine Economy for the New Creation, 110)

Consider the following statement by Witness Lee:

…the management of a local church is, on the one hand, local in its administration yet, on the other hand, not isolated in its communication. Not only is there the mutual sharing of finances; even in other practical affairs we see the same thing. The churches in the various localities are managed separately, yet they are not separated absolutely. They are still the universal, corporate Body of Christ. For anyone to stress the autonomy or independence of a local church is too much. It destroys the oneness of the Body of Christ. (The Perfecting of the Saints and the Building Up of the Body of Christ, 24-25)

Stressing independence is against the realization and practice of the Body of Christ, and contending for independence damages the oneness of the Body of Christ. Although they are overseen locally, the local churches are not separated organically from one another. Together they manifest the corporate Body of Christ.

The local churches are neither independent from one another nor federated together; they are neither an organization nor an affiliation. The harmonious relationship among the local churches and with those who labor among the churches is not a matter of an organizational system. Rather it is wholly a matter of life in the organic Body of Christ with Christ Himself as the Head and as all in all (Eph. 4:15; Col. 3:10-11). Although practically limited by geographic location, the local churches are governed by the vision and realization of the Body of Christ, a living organism that is transcendent of time and geography.  May we all realize to a greater extent that the local churches are not united by organization nor merely independently associated but are organically related in the unique Body of Christ.

Share:

Genuine Local Churches, Part 1 – Neither Autonomous nor Independent

Some have taught that any fellowship or intervention by the apostles or any fellowship of concern from other local churches is improper interference in a church’s local administration; this has no basis in Scripture nor in the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee. Some who promote this errant teaching try to draw a distinction between independence and autonomy. They acknowledge Brother Lee’s biblical teaching that the local churches are not autonomous, but they promote a model in which a local church is absolutely independent in its administration and that this is a faithful representation of the teaching of our brothers. However, the distinction between autonomy and independence is spurious and grossly misrepresents the teaching of Brother Nee and Brother Lee concerning genuine local churches.

On at least two occasions during his later ministry Brother Lee used the terms autonomy and independence in apposition to each other:

It is impossible for any of the local churches to be autonomous, to be independent from the other churches. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1988, vol. 3, 284)

 

For anyone to stress the autonomy or independence of a local church is too much. It destroys the oneness of the Body of Christ. (The Perfecting of the Saints and the Building Up of the Body of Christ, 24-25)

He also defined autonomy as “independence”:

The word autonomy denotes self-government or independence with respect to local affairs. (CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, 289)

 

Autonomous means “self-governed, independent.” (CWWL, 1989, vol. 1, 377)

Independent, autonomous self-government in the administration of a local church separates that local church not only from the apostles but also from the other local churches. It erects an organizational boundary that separates the churches and nullifies the supply and correction in the organic fellowship the churches share with the apostles and with one another.

The errant teaching of the independent self-government of the churches has been promoted by appeals to the following statement from The Testimony and the Ground of the Church:

The administration of every local church is local; it is independent in each locality. This is the local administration. This principle absolutely must not be violated. (179)

Much has been made of this statement, implying that it sets forth the principle of absolute, independent self-government by the elders, such that for the apostles or other local churches to touch the local affairs of a church is to cross boundaries and improperly interfere. However, Brother Lee uses the term independent in this chapter to indicate that the local churches are independent from an “organizational union,” not of their organic relationship (183). He said, “On one hand, the Bible says that the local churches do not have any relationship according to administrative organization; that is, there is no head church or federation, and every church carries out its administration locally. On the other hand, the Bible says that the churches in all the localities should be the same in their actions” (183). This balancing word clarifies that when Brother Lee spoke of the administration of a church being local, he was not intimating the erection of rigid organizational boundaries that cannot be crossed. If the churches were entirely self-governed or independent with respect to their local affairs, unable to be supplied and corrected by the apostles and other local churches, according to Brother Lee’s definition, there would be no means for the churches to be the same in their actions. The New Testament churches all had the same customs (1 Cor. 11:16), all having been instructed in Paul’s ways (7:17) and having been taught the same teaching by the apostles (4:17; Acts 2:42; cf. Col. 4:15-16).

Genuine local churches are organically related to each other in the one Body of Christ (Eph. 1:22-23). For the local churches to be administratively united is something outward and denies the inward reality of the organic relationship the churches share with one another in the Body. In the same manner, for the local churches to be autonomously divided from one another through the erection of supposed jurisdictional boundaries is also an organizational concept. Just as it is wrong for genuine local churches to be organizationally united, so also it is wrong for them to be organizationally autonomous from one another, as both practices damage the oneness and vitality of the churches.

While the teaching of autonomy claims the independent jurisdiction of the local elders in matters involving the administration of a local church, Paul, in his function as an apostle, was not constrained by any notion of organizational boundaries. He gave a command to the elders in Corinth and further stated that he would come in person to set other local affairs in order (1 Cor. 5:1-5, 11; 11:34; CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, 439). That the church in Corinth listened to the apostle and obeyed his charge demonstrated that they were not independent in their administration of the church. Although the elders failed initially in not addressing the situation of gross immorality in the church, they faithfully carried out the apostle’s judgment and charge (2 Cor. 2:6-9). In this matter, like others in his Epistle, Paul intervened in the local affairs of the church in Corinth.

While Brother Lee recognized that the local churches were necessarily distinct in their business affairs, he found no basis for their being independent of one another in the administration of local matters and even in their business affairs. Brother Lee also recognized that from time to time a church may need to “interfere” with the local affairs of another church if a correcting word was necessary:

But some may argue by saying, “Brother Lee, didn’t you say that the administration of the churches should be local and independent?” I may have said that many years ago, but if you asked me to repeat such a saying today, I would not do it. We may think that the local churches are independent, but in the Bible I cannot find the thought of independence.…

The churches may be different in their business affairs, but even in this matter they should not claim that they are independent. What if the church in Anaheim made a decision to meet at two o’clock in the morning? The leading ones there may claim that the local church has its own jurisdiction and that no one can interfere with them. But the church in Santa Ana may ask, “Why have you brothers in Anaheim made such a decision to meet at two o’clock in the morning?” The brothers in Anaheim may say that those in Santa Ana should not interfere with them, that this is not their business, and that the church in Anaheim is independent and has its own jurisdiction. But to meet at two o’clock in the morning is peculiar and odd to the uttermost. In this matter the church in Anaheim needs the helpful advice from the church in Santa Ana. It is not wise to make a decision to meet at two o’clock in the morning. This illustration shows that we need the advice and help from the other churches even in business affairs and practical things. (The Issue of the Dispensing of the Processed Trinity and the Transmitting of the Transcending Christ, 86)

As Brother Lee has aptly stated, “Yes, we do stress the local churches, but we do not stand for the autonomy of the local churches” (The Practical Points concerning Blending, 22). The local churches stand on the local ground, having no organizational relationship with other local churches and having one eldership for one city, to whom the administration and business affairs of the local church are entrusted by the apostles (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5). However, to advocate for the independent self-government of the elders with respect to all local affairs and insist on any impermeable jurisdictional boundaries causes a local church to become a local sect, which, contrary to the intrinsic nature of the Body of Christ, is organizational rather than organic (CWWL, 1993, vol. 1, 54; The Problems Causing the Turmoils in the Church Life, 29, 35). To say that “no one should interfere with the affairs of their local church” is in error, and to claim that this view is supported by the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee is to abuse their ministry and to stand outside the teaching of the Scriptures (CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, 253).

Share:
Series: Genuine Local Churches

Genuine Local Churches, Part 2 – Following the Teaching and Leading of the Apostles

The teaching of the autonomy of the local churches claims that apostles who touch the affairs of a local church improperly interfere in that church’s local administration. This error, which was covered in the first article in this series, is rooted in the mistaken thought that elders independently self-govern the affairs of a local church apart from the leading of the apostles.

First Corinthians 11:16 says, “But if anyone seems to be contentious, we do not have such a custom of being so, neither the churches of God.” Here “churches” is plural, pointing to the fact that each local church has its own administration. In that limited sense it is permissible to speak of them as being “independent.” However, Paul’s emphasis is not on their separateness but on their oneness, in that they all shared the same custom, that is, not to be contentious concerning the apostles’ teaching. Brother Lee followed Paul’s emphasis in this verse when he commented that while “the local churches are independent of one another, yet they all act in the same way according to the apostles’ teaching” (1 Corinthians 11:16, footnote 2). Though the churches are not organizationally united, they could “all act in the same way” because they all received the apostles’ teaching. Regarding his practice among the churches Paul wrote to the Corinthians, “I have sent Timothy to you, who is my beloved and faithful child in the Lord, who will remind you of my ways which are in Christ, even as I teach everywhere in every church” (1 Cor. 4:17, emphasis added). It was not by outward organization that the churches everywhere acted in the same manner, but in their receiving the apostles’ teaching. Thus, 1 Corinthians 11:16 indicates that the churches were not independent of the apostles and their teaching.

While the churches are distinct in their business affairs, being directly administrated by their respective elders (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5), the apostles still bear responsibility to train, oversee, and even discipline the elders whom they have appointed and to address disorder in a church (1 Tim. 5:19-20; 1 Cor. 11:34). In 1 Corinthians 5 Paul rebuked the elders for tolerating the gross immorality of a brother in the church. Paul even charged the elders to remove him from their midst (vv. 1-5, 13). Then, after having dealt with so many other local affairs in the church, he wrote, “The rest I will set in order when I come” (11:34). These verses indicate that once the elders were appointed, the apostle did not leave the elders to administrate the church without his perfecting and oversight (A Timely Trumpeting and the Lord’s Present Need, 15-18). Rather, when the elders failed to act properly in overseeing the administration of the church in their locality, Paul “interfered” with the local affairs to correct and set matters in order (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1988, vol. 3, 254). Commenting elsewhere on this verse Brother Lee said:

From this we can see that although the apostles commit the local administration to the elders, they still bear a responsibility toward the church and have authority concerning it. If the local elders were independent of the apostles, Paul could not have spoken to them as he did. That Paul was able to say, “The rest I will set in order when I come” is proof that he still bore a responsibility in Corinth. (CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, 185)

Upon placing the administration of the church in the hands of the elders, the apostles did not abandon their ongoing responsibility and authority among the churches. Because the churches were not independent of Paul in his apostleship, he could charge the elders in Corinth by his writing to them concerning the local affairs of the church, and he could also come to them personally to set other affairs in order. In 2 Timothy 2:3 Paul commended Timothy for closely following his teaching, conduct, and purpose, among other things. This surely included following Paul’s pattern in caring for the churches. To criticize those who serve as apostles today for following the same pattern is to misaim.

Paul charged his young co-workers Titus and Timothy concerning the appointment and reproof of elders (Titus 1:5; 1 Tim. 5:19-20). In 1 Timothy 5:19 Paul wrote, “Against an elder do not receive an accusation, except based upon two or three witnesses.” Concerning this verse Brother Lee taught:

Here we can see that problems with elders in a church should be presented to the apostles and decided by them. By this we can see that the local churches cannot declare independence from the apostles. After a church has been established and its elders had been appointed, if the church became independent to the extent that the apostles could not intervene in its affairs, Paul would not have charged Timothy as he did here. (CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, 185)

Although responsibility for the administration of a church is placed in the elders’ hands upon their appointment, that church does not thereby become independent of the apostles. Rather, the apostles continue to exercise care over the elders by teaching and leading them and, when necessary, by reproving, or even removing, them (vv. 19-20).

What then is the proper relationship of a genuine local church to the apostles? Brother Lee took up this point when he said:

Under normal circumstances a local church acts according to the leading of the apostles, and the elders administrate the church according to this principle. In this case the independence of administration is not a problem. The basic work of the church is carried out by the apostles; the churches are established by the apostles and go on according to the apostles’ leading. When a local church acts in a proper manner, there is no need for the apostles to intervene, but this is not to say that the apostles cannot intervene. Although a local church is under the leading of the elders, if the elders or the church do not act according to proper principles under the leading of the apostles, the apostles still have the right to intervene. (CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, 186)

The proper administration of a local church by its elders involves not only closely following the apostles’ teaching but also being one with the apostles’ leading. Although the local administration of a church has been placed into the elders’ hands, if deviation from the teaching and leading of the apostles occurs, the apostles may need to intervene to address the situation. Doing so does not mean that the apostles take over the elders’ function to lead the local church. Rather, the apostles take the action needed, including disciplining or removing one or more elders, but leave the church in the hands of the local saints. Such intervention is one responsibility that the apostles bear toward the churches. As Brother Lee stated, insofar as a local church is in one accord with the apostles who supply and care for the church, “the independence of administration is not a problem.” The question of independence becomes an issue only when the standing of a local church toward the apostles becomes improper. “For a church to stand independent of the apostles,” Brother Lee shared, “is equivalent to rejecting the apostles” (186). Proper elders exercise no independence toward the apostles whose teaching they receive and whose leading they follow.

Genuine local churches act in the same way not because they are outwardly organized but because they are under the teaching and leading of the apostles. Promoting the thought of autonomy to the extent of disallowing intervention by the apostles nullifies the biblical means of correcting and adjusting a church that has departed from the proper way. Such a stand violates the organic relationship that exists between the apostles as joints of the rich supply and the churches that are being supplied (Eph. 4:16). To claim that Watchman Nee and Witness Lee taught that local churches are governed independently by their elders apart from the apostles and the other local churches is a gross abuse of their ministry. On the contrary, while allowing for the distinctiveness of the churches in the administration of their respective business affairs, Brother Lee sets forth the proper condition of a local church wherein the elders bear a responsibility to follow the teaching and leading of the apostles, by whom they were appointed, and the apostles bear a responsibility to care for the churches that have been produced and supplied through their ministry. This is consistent with the organic relationship that exists between the churches and the apostles.

Share:
Series: Genuine Local Churches

Being Faithful to Our Brothers’ Complete Ministry Concerning the Practice of the Church (1)

Isaiah 28:13a contains an important principle in knowing the revelation of the Bible. It shows that any truth in the Bible cannot be understood from a single passage. As Witness Lee explained:

It is mysterious and very meaningful that God has arranged His Word in this way. Isaiah 28:13 says that God’s word is “rule upon rule, rule upon rule; / Line upon line, line upon line; / Here a little, there a little.” God’s intention is that we not take His Word in a light way. We must spend time to consider each verse and learn what other verses it is related to. If we consider each verse by itself, God’s Word remains a puzzle to us, but after we fit the verses together, the Word conveys a clear picture to us. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1971, vol. 3, 19)

Many wrong teachings, even gross heresies, have arisen through selective quoting of the Bible. If we want to be preserved in the Lord’s way, we must embrace all the truth in a balanced way.

The same principle applies to handling the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee, particularly in view of the progressive nature of their ministry. To quote them selectively, especially to quote their earlier ministry and ignore their later ministry, according to one’s own biases, does not faithfully represent their teaching and can lead to error, as events in the late 1980s and in recent years illustrate. In both cases brothers trumpeted a few words from a series of messages that Brother Nee gave in Hankow in 1937 that were the source of The Normal Christian Church Life (NCCL). In one of these messages he said, “Once a church was established, all responsibility was handed over to the local elders, and from that day the apostles exercised no control whatever in its affairs” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], Vol. 30: The Normal Christian Church Life, 44). Based on these words some have claimed that once a local church is established, the apostles have no ground to touch it or its administration in any way.

However, eleven years later, in 1948 at Kuling, Brother Nee gave the messages that became the book Church Affairs. In those messages he revisited his earlier speaking to correct a misunderstanding that had arisen. He said:

After the meeting in Hankow, some brothers misunderstood. They thought that though the elders are appointed by the apostles, they did not have to listen to the apostles. This is impossible. When there were brothers who did not respect the elders and problems occurred, the letter of accusation by two or three was sent to Timothy. In other words, the authority for the appointment of the elders is with the apostles, and the authority for the removal of the elders is also with the apostles. (CWWN, vol. 51: Church Affairs [Church Affairs], 143)

Yet some today quote Brother Nee’s early ministry from 1937 and disregard his later speaking that it is “impossible” for the elders not to have to listen to the apostles. In other words, they claim that Brother Nee taught that the apostles cannot correct a local church’s elders, the very thing that he labeled as a misunderstanding of his meaning. Another portion from The Normal Christian Church Life shows how quoting selectively and divorcing words from their context can create an impression other than the author’s intent. In the following example the words in italics have been quoted, omitting the text that immediately precedes them:

Since there is a spiritual relatedness between the various local churches, no one church may strike out on an individualistic line, and taking advantage of its independence, decide things after its own good pleasure. Each must rather cultivate a relationship with the other churches, seeking their sympathy and working with their spiritual good in view. On the other hand, since each [local church] is totally independent of the other, the decision of a church in any locality is absolutely final. There is no higher court of appeal; the local court is the supreme court. There is no organization to whose control it must submit, nor is there any organization over which it exercises control. It has neither superiors nor subordinates. (NCCL, 64)

It is evident from the context that Brother Nee was speaking concerning the relationship between local churches, not between the churches and the apostles. Moreover, the broader context of the quote charges a local church not to take the excuse of administrative independence to act in an individualistic manner, yet this is the very thing those who quote selectively seek to justify. Later in the same series of messages Brother Nee said:

A local church is the highest Christian institution on earth. There is none above it to whom appeal can be made. A local church is the lowest scriptural unit, but it is also the highest scriptural organization. Scripture warrants no centralization in Rome which could give Rome authority over other local churches. This is God’s safeguard against any infringement of the rights of His Son. Christ is the Head of the Church, and there is no other head in heaven or on earth. (65)

This statement warrants a hearty “Amen!” A local church cannot be subservient to any central organization, such as a denominational headquarters, a mission board, or a “mother” church. Those who seek local autonomy without accountability misuse this quote to condemn any “outside” touching of the administration of a local church as infringing upon the headship of Christ. That misrepresents Brother Nee’s teaching. Although Brother Nee condemned any controlling organization ruling over the local churches, he did not consider that the apostles, whom those leading the churches must listen to, constitute an “outside” organization or infringed on the headship of Christ. The same one who proclaimed that there is no organization over the local churches also taught both before and after the Hankow meetings that the biblical function of apostles includes not only appointing but also removing elders if necessary (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5; 1 Tim. 5:19; CWWN, vol. 22: The Assembly Life & The Prayer Ministry of the Church, 30; Church Affairs, 143). To argue based on The Normal Christian Church Life that any intervention by the apostles in the affairs of a local church constitutes organizational control or a centralization of authority over the churches is not faithful to the teaching of either Brother Nee or the New Testament.

Brother Lee frequently referred to Brother Nee’s correction of the misunderstanding of his words in Hankow (CWWL, 1967, vol. 1, 203; 1986, vol. 3, 62, 85; 1987, vol. 3, 187; 1988, vol. 3, 126, 140, 173, 255, 275, 294, 445, 544; 1988, vol. 4, 13, 209; 1991-1992, vol. 2, 121, 533; vol. 4, 308; 1993, vol. 1, 154; vol. 2, 98; 1994-1997, vol. 1, 127). For example, in Life-study of First Timothy Brother Lee said:

Some have had the concept from reading Brother Nee’s book The Normal Christian Church Life that once apostles have appointed elders in a particular local church, the apostles do not under any circumstances have the right to interfere with the affairs of that church. This, however, is a misunderstanding of Brother Nee’s word. In another book, Church Affairs, Brother Nee points out that after the elders have been appointed by the apostles, they should take the lead in the church according to the apostles’ teaching. If the elders lead others astray or if they are wrong in some way, accusation against them can be made by the saints to the apostles. (84-85)

Later, commenting on what Brother Nee actually said in 1937, Brother Lee said:

In this quotation from Brother Nee’s book, we should notice the phrase in its affairs. Some quote Brother Nee’s words without realizing the significance of this phrase. (Brother Nee in his book entitled Church Affairs, chapters 1 and 9, corrected this misuse of his word.) The apostles were to keep their hands off the administration of the local church in its business affairs, not in its need of the apostles’ teaching, instruction, and charge. (CWWL, 1986, vol. 3, 62)

Thus, Brother Lee affirmed Brother Nee’s view that the business affairs of a local church are in the hands of the elders, not in the hands of the apostles. However, this does not negate the apostles’ responsibility and obligation to teach, instruct, and charge those in the local churches in order to help them continue “steadfastly in the teaching and the fellowship of the apostles” (Acts 2:42). This is demonstrated in the New Testament by Paul’s charge to the confused and disorderly church in Corinth to “remove the evil man from among yourselves” (1 Cor. 5:13) and his stated intention to “set in order” the things not addressed by his letter when he returned to Corinth (11:34b).

In order to faithfully represent the ministry of Watchman Nee on the relationship between the apostles and the local churches, one must take into consideration the length and breadth of his entire ministry. Those who misunderstood Brother Nee in 1937 did not have the advantage of his correction of their misunderstanding until 1948. Those who repeat this error today do not have the same excuse. To misrepresent Brother Nee’s teaching by presenting isolated excerpts from his early ministry and ignoring the context of these excerpts, their plain meaning, his later correction of others’ misunderstanding, and Brother Lee’s affirmation and development is to be unfaithful to Brother Nee’s ministry and to the reader.

Share:
Series: Being Faithful to Our Brothers’ Complete Ministry Concerning the Practice of the Church

Being Faithful to Our Brothers’ Complete Ministry Concerning the Practice of the Church (2)

A different teaching has recently been circulated that says that those who function as apostles have no standing to touch the administration of a local church. To buttress that claim the following quote from Brother Witness Lee’s Truth Messages is used:

Do apostles have authority? According to my knowledge of the New Testament, the apostles have no authority in themselves to control the churches. Only the word ministered by them has authority. If the churches and the saints go on according to the Word, according to God’s oracle, the apostles have no authority to touch the churches. But if a church goes astray or is misled, then the apostles have the obligation and responsibility to deal with the situation according to God’s word, which has authority…. The authority of apostles is spiritual and is in their ministry of the word. They have no authority in position to interfere with the church affairs. (34-35)

There is nothing wrong with this quote. However, the expressions it uses must be read and considered carefully in light of the New Testament and the complete ministry of our brother. To that end a bit of background is helpful. The message from which these words were taken was given in late 1978. The churches in the United States had just passed through a turmoil in which a brother had declared himself “the universal coordinator of the one new man” and tried to bring in a strong element of hierarchy by travelling to various places, removing elders, and installing those loyal to him in their place. He independently gave various orders in the name of the ministry. With this brief background we can rightly understand Brother Lee’s word.

No authority in themselves” – The ministry has been very consistent through the decades that no man has authority in himself. All authority comes from God. He is the unique authority, and He has given all authority to His Son, Jesus Christ, who is the unique Head of the Body, the church. Whatever authority the leading ones in the work, the ministry, or the church exercise derives from their being one with Him. They are merely channels through whom God’s authority is manifested. Thus, they have “no authority in themselves” (emphasis added; see The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], vol. 22: The Assembly Life & The Prayer Ministry of the Church, 16, 19; CWWN, vol. 47: The Orthodoxy of the Church & Authority and Submission, 209, 211-212, 218). Concerning elders Brother Nee said, “The elders do not have any authority in themselves; they only have the authority of God” (CWWN, vol. 22, 29). Thus, the authority of the apostles and the elders is on the same basis. It is not something they possess in themselves. If their exercise of authority issues from themselves, it is not genuine. Only that which is out from God is real authority.

To control the churches” – Any form of control, whether by the apostles or the elders, usurps the headship of Christ. Neither the apostles nor the elders are to “lord it over” the saints (2 Cor. 1:24; 1 Pet. 5:3). In the context of Brother Lee’s speaking in the Truth Messages, to control meant to supplant a local church’s elders as the ones who administer that church or to establish a hierarchical organization with a “CEO” at the top giving orders and those below him carrying them out. Such things are foreign to the organic nature of the Body of Christ and have never been the practice in the Lord’s recovery.

Interfere with the church affairs” – The term church affairs has a particular meaning in the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee. As noted in the first article in this series, “The apostles were to keep their hands off the administration of the local church in its business affairs, not in its need of the apostles’ teaching, instruction, and charge” (CWWL, 1986, vol. 3, 62) [italics added]. It does not mean that the apostles have no ground to intervene if the elders act improperly, as the last sentence in the first paragraph quoted at the beginning of this article makes clear: “But if a church goes astray or is misled, then the apostles have the obligation and responsibility to deal with the situation according to God’s word, which has authority” (Truth Messages, 35) [emphasis added].

With such understandings it is clearly wrong to take Brother Lee’s word in Truth Messages as ground to accuse those who function in an apostolic role of improperly exercising authority or control when they are carrying out their obligation and responsibility to deal with situations. This is more than evident from the New Testament and from the ministry of our Brother Lee. Most of the Epistles in the New Testament were written to address deviations or other problems in the churches. In particular, three passages, two in First Corinthians and one in First Timothy, show us ways in which the apostles carried out their responsibility. In 1 Corinthians 5:2 and 13 Paul charged the Corinthians to remove from their midst a person who was living in gross sin. Then in 11:34, after dealing with so many problems in the church there, he said, “And the rest I will set it order when I come.” In 1 Timothy 5:19 he told his younger co-worker, “Against an elder do not receive an accusation, except based upon two or three witnesses.” A person who narrowly applies Brother Lee’s word from the Truth Messages would fault the apostle Paul for exercising authority improperly, controlling the churches, and interfering with the church in Corinth’s affairs, but this does not accord with either the New Testament or with Brother Lee’s ministry. Brother Lee spoke at length on these portions of the Word in the mid 1960s and late 1980s. For example, in 1965 he said the following concerning the two portions from 1 Corinthians:

The elders, standing on the ground of the local church, are responsible for the administration of a church. Although this administration is independent of other localities, it is not independent of the apostles. At least two passages in 1 Corinthians demonstrate the apostles’ responsibility for and authority concerning the church. The first is in chapter 5, where Paul wrote to the church in Corinth to rebuke them for tolerating the sin of the evil brother and to tell them to remove him from their midst (vv. 1-5). The apostle Paul gave such a command to the church there because the church had failed to fulfill its duty. The second passage is in chapter 11, which Paul concludes by saying, “The rest I will set in order when I come” (v. 34). From this we can see that although the apostles commit the local administration to the elders, they still bear a responsibility toward the church and have authority concerning it. If the local elders were independent of the apostles, Paul could not have spoken to them as he did. That Paul was able to say, “The rest I will set in order when I come” is proof that he still bore a responsibility in Corinth. (CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, 185)

In 1988, ten years after he gave the Truth Messages, he said the following concerning 1 Timothy 5:19:

To whom should an accusation against an elder be made? The answer is clearly that it should be made to the apostles. This is another strong proof that after an apostle has appointed elders, the elders are still under the apostle’s authority and management. After they have appointed men as elders, the apostles still have the authority to deal with the elders, even to judge, condemn, and reprove the elders. This is the clear word of the Bible. (CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, 281)

These are not examples that happened only once. Many other portions from the ministry of both Brother Nee and Brother Lee that date from both before and after Truth Messages speak of these matters in the same way.[1] A brief word Brother Lee gave in 1965 shows that he saw no contradiction between saying that no co-worker should control the churches and saying that co-workers should intervene to correct misbehavior.

If someone is doing a work with the intention of controlling the churches in every place, his work will be rejected by the Lord. The work of the co-workers is to support rather than to control the churches. However, if certain ones misbehave in the churches, the co-workers should correct them. (CWWL, 1965, vol. 4, 194)

It is therefore unprincipled to criticize the leading co-workers for improper interference as they carry out their obligation and responsibility in their care for the churches and the Lord’s testimony. Those who hear such criticisms should be warned: It is dangerous to draw conclusions from solitary, isolated statements. Those who cite quotes taken out of context from Brother Lee’s ministry while ignoring other parts that contradict their conclusions are unfaithful stewards of this ministry. Saints who are presented such quotes in a way that undermines confidence in the present leadership in the Lord’s recovery should not receive them uncritically.


[1] CWWN, vol. 22, 30; vol. 51, 143; vol. 57, 74, 309; CWWL, 1950, vol. 2, 287; 1956, vol. 2, 487, 511; 1965, vol. 4, 170, 185-186; 1967, vol. 1, 203-204; Life-study of First Timothy, 84; CWWL, 1984, vol. 1, 405, 410; 1984, vol. 4, 248, 271, 274, 496; 1985, vol. 2, 69; 1985, vol. 3, 337; 1986, vol. 1, 304; 1986, vol. 3, 63; 1987, vol. 2, 90; 1987, vol. 3, 187; 1988, vol. 1, 594; 1988, vol. 3, 144, 165-166, 202, 203, 213, 254, 277, 280-281, 292-293, 439, 543; 1988, vol. 4, 8, 12-13, 95, 209-210; 1989, vol. 4, 327, 507; 1991-1992, vol. 4, 315; The Conclusion of the New Testament: The Church, the Kingdom, and the New Jerusalem (Msg. 189-204), 2169; for a larger sampling see pages 8 through 21 of https://shepherdingwords.com/pdf/Ministry Excerpts Pertinent to Facing a Recent Situation.pdf).

Share:
Series: Being Faithful to Our Brothers’ Complete Ministry Concerning the Practice of the Church

On ‘Independent’ Administration

Words have power. On the one hand, they are the means by which God has chosen to communicate His self-revelation, the Bible, to man (Heb. 1:1, 3; 2 Pet. 1:21), the means by which the Lord imparts His life into us (John 6:63), and the means by which the Lord’s servants open the Scriptures (Neh. 8:7-8; Psa. 119:130; Luke 24:45; Acts 8:30-35). On the other hand, words can be misused by Satan to create a system of error through winds of teaching in the sleight of men (Eph. 4:14). History shows that the words of the ministry and even the words of the Bible can be used to build up a system of error if they are used selectively or with meanings other than those intended.

The meanings we attach to words are critical to a proper understanding of what others say. Moreover, the words of others test our purity. Do we use terms as they were originally intended, or do we bend them to our own ends according to our own biases or agendas by enduing them with our own meanings? To handle the Bible or the ministry of our brothers Watchman Nee and Witness Lee in a proper way, we must care for the intended meanings and context of words and must avoid taking passages in isolation. Moreover, we must always keep in view the Lord’s desire to build up His Body organically. Likewise, we should not receive the speaking of others if they do not follow these principles.

Some have misused fragments of the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee to assert that their use of the word independent to describe the administration of a local church means that a church’s elders are free to discount the concerns of other local churches or the fellowship of leading co-workers. To discern whether this is a fair reading of our brothers’ ministry, we need to compare the meaning of the word independent with the word’s usage in the context of their ministry and look at whether a complete and balanced reading of their ministry supports such an interpretation.

Dictionary definitions of the word independent fall into two general categories. The first describes an organizational principle in which one entity is not governed by another. The second describes an attitude of being self-reliant, free from the influence and guidance of others. Concerning the administration of a local church, the first meaning is proper with the caution that it does not preclude those who serve in an apostolic function from intervening, if necessary, in a local church’s affairs (1 Tim. 5:9; 1 Cor. 11:34); the second definition is not proper under any circumstance.

When Brother Nee and Brother Lee used the word independent to describe the administration of a local church, they meant that a local church was not governed by some external organizational entity, such as a mission board or denomi­national headquarters. This has nothing to do with the apostles’ God-ordained responsibility to correct an errant elder or an errant church. Such action is not organizational but part of their organic function in the Body of Christ (2 Cor. 13:10).

Furthermore, if the elders in a church take the word independent to mean “free from the influence of others” and use it as license to ignore the fellowship of other churches, they have gone too far and contradict the principle of the Body. Brother Nee explained that the independence of the local administration from any outward organization “does not imply that the different local churches have nothing to do with one another, and that each can simply do as it pleases without considering the rest, for the ground of a church is the ground of the Body.” Rather, he said, “In organization the churches are totally independent of one another, but in life they are one, and consequently interdependent” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], Volume 30: The Normal Christian Church Life, 62).

This has been the teaching and practice from the beginning of the Lord’s recovery in China. In his very first extended speaking on the practice of the church in the New Testament, Brother Nee described the elders’ administration of an assembly, that is, a local church, as independent, yet he said:

We cannot act independently. If you know that the thing you are about to do in your locality will be considered inappropriate in other localities, you must not take care of the views of the few in your locality and do it anyway. If you do it, you are not discerning the Body of Christ. (CWWN, Vol. 22: The Assembly Life & The Prayer Ministry of the Church, 58)

From this, we see that our meeting cannot act independently. Every assembly should care for the other assemblies. Before we do anything, we should consider how our actions will relate to the other assemblies. (65)

No assembly can act independently. Not only should individuals not act independently, but the whole assembly should not act independently. (65)

He further said that although the administration of an assembly is independent, “if this assembly is seeking after God’s will in a definite way, it will not act presumptuously, using the excuse that the administration of churches is local; instead, it will consult the other assemblies, hoping to walk scripturally and according to the Lord’s desire” (69). These words show a careful balance between the way in which a church’s affairs are administered and the attitude that the church’s elders should have.

In The Normal Christian Church Life (NCCL) Brother Nee reiterated this point, saying that though a local church’s administration is independent organizationally, it should not act independently:

Since there is a spiritual relatedness between the various local churches, no one church may strike out on an individualistic line, and taking advantage of its independence, decide things after its own good pleasure. Each must rather cultivate a relationship with the other churches, seeking their sympathy and working with their spiritual good in view. (CWWN, Vol. 30: NCCL, 64)

Thus, Brother Nee’s word that the administration of a local church should be independent of any outside organization did not mean that the elders in a local church should neglect concerns of other churches or dismiss the fellowship of the leading co-workers as outside interference (see also “Being Faithful to Our Brothers’ Ministry Concerning the Practice of the Church (1)”).

Brother Lee also taught that although each local church has its own administration, its elders should not act in an independent manner. In 1965 he spoke at length concerning the relationship between the apostles and the local churches and among the local churches themselves. He said, “The Bible is not a book of organizational regulations. If the co-workers and elders in a locality neither fear God nor live in the spirit but instead maintain their independence in the administration of the church according to the outward letter of the Bible, not allowing others to intervene in their work, their service will be worthless” (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1965, Vol. 4, 194).

In the late 1980s a small group of brothers promoted the idea that every local church should be independent. At that time Brother Lee stressed the organic nature of the Body of Christ. He said, “Likewise, all the local churches on the whole earth are one organism, the Body of Christ. It is impossible for any of the local churches to be autonomous, to be independent from the other churches” (CWWL, 1988, Vol. 3, 284). Overstressing local independence undermines the organic view of the Body in favor of an organizational view. Concerning the promotion of local administrative autonomy, Brother Lee commented, “Everyone likes this practice because everyone likes to be independent and equal. No one likes to be under anyone else. But we have to realize that the church of Christ is not a political institution. The church of Christ is an organism just like our body. The Bible says, ‘The church, which is His Body’ (Eph. 1:22-23)” (CWWL, 1988, Vol. 4, 25). In the last stage of his ministry, Brother Lee reflected on the use of the word independent to describe the administration of the local churches, saying, “I may have said that many years ago, but if you asked me to repeat such a saying today, I would not do it. We may think that the local churches are independent, but in the Bible I cannot find the thought of independence” (CWWL, 1993, Vol. 2, 544).

In practice, the administration of a church is local and is, therefore, in a limited sense independent, but the elders should reject any attitude of independence. They bear responsibility before the Lord for administrating the business affairs of that church and for shepherding the saints allotted to their care (1 Pet. 5:2-3). This is part of the Lord’s arrangement for the practical expression of His Body. The elders must realize, however, that their oversight must be carried out in view of all the other local churches in the Body of Christ. They must see that they cannot carry out their service in isolation with an independent attitude, because their decisions and actions affect not only their own local church but also all the other local churches with which they are joined in the unique fellowship of the Body of Christ (1 Cor. 1:9; 1 John 1:3). The actions and decisions of a group of local elders can adversely affect other churches and damage the fellowship among them. If a local eldership persistently waves the flag of “independent” local administration as justification for insulating itself from receiving fellowship from co-workers or other churches in spite of the damage that the eldership’s decisions have caused, those who bear the responsibility to exercise an apostolic function among the churches may be required to intervene for the sake of the saints, the Body, and the Lord’s testimony. May the Lord preserve us from being carried about by any contrary winds of teaching, that we may instead grow up into Christ the Head in all things for His testimony and for the building up of His Body in oneness (Eph. 4:14-16).

Share:

Coming to the Lord’s Table

 

The Lord Jesus in the night in which He was betrayed took bread, and having given thanks, He broke it and said, This is My body, which is given for you; this do unto the remembrance of Me. Similarly also the cup after they had dined, saying, This cup is the new covenant established in My blood; this do, as often as you drink it, unto the remembrance of Me. For as often as you eat this bread and drink the cup, you declare the Lord’s death until He comes. (1 Cor. 11:23b-26)

The Lord Himself instituted His table as a declaration of His death and resurrection through which He has become our life and life supply and has made us members of His Body (1 Cor. 11:26; Col. 3:4; John 6:57; Eph. 5:30). It is also a weekly reminder of our most basic need—to receive the person and work of Christ, as symbolized by the bread and wine on the table. To be able to participate in the Lord’s table is a great privilege, but it is not without conditions, as Paul wrote:

So then whoever eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord in an unworthy manner will be guilty of the body and of the blood of the Lord. But let a man prove himself, and in this way let him eat of the bread and drink of the cup. For he who eats and drinks, eats and drinks judgment to himself if he does not discern the body. (1 Cor. 11:27-29)

To understand Paul’s warning, we must answer three questions: What is it to eat the bread or drink the cup of the Lord in an unworthy manner? What is it to prove oneself? What is it to discern the body?

When we see the word unworthy, our immediate reaction may be that we are unworthy, that we have shortcomings in our living and our service to the Lord, but that, although true, is not what is meant here. Watchman Nee gave us the meaning of the word unworthy here, saying, “The most important thing to remember when we come to the table is to be counted worthy. This does not refer to whether or not the person is worthy but whether or not his attitude is worthy” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], Vol. 48: Messages for Building Up New Believers (1), 271; see also Life-study of 1 Corinthians, 485). Therefore, to take the table in an unworthy manner is not a matter of the worthiness of our person before the Lord but of how we approach partaking of His table.

It is concerning the manner in which we come to partake of the Lord’s table that a man must “prove himself.” Such proving is not to introspect concerning our spiritual condition. Brother Nee wrote, “The proving in this verse is not an examination which Christians have in the pursuit of holiness; rather, it speaks of coming before the Lord to eat the bread and drink the cup” (CWWN, Vol. 9: The Present Testimony (2), 219). He added, “Self-examination in this verse concerns whether or not we come to the Lord’s table to remember the Lord. It does not ask us to turn inward to search for wrongs so that we can pursue after spiritual progress” (219). Thus, proving one’s self is a matter of examining our realization of and attitude toward what the Lord’s table represents.

What, then, makes one unworthy to partake of the Lord’s table? It is to not discern the Lord’s body. The bread on the table is a symbol with a twofold significance. It signifies the Lord’s physical body which was broken for us on the cross so that He could impart Himself into us as the bread of life (John 6:35, 48). It also points to the Lord’s mystical Body, comprised of all those who have partaken of Christ and have entered into the unique fellowship of Christ, which is the fellowship in which every member of the Body of Christ participates (1 Cor. 10:16-17; 1:9).

Paul chastised the saints in Corinth because many took the Lord’s table in a light and loose way and without regard for one another (10:20-22). On the one hand, they did not honor the One who had sacrificed Himself for them; they treated His table as common. On the other hand, they dishonored their fellow members in the Body. If we consider the whole of this epistle we can see that underlying the turmoils in the church in Corinth—such as divisions, immorality, and legal disputes (11:18; 5:1; 6:6)—was a lack of mutual care. Even their spiritual seeking was self-centered (14:4, 12). This is why chapters 12 through 14 speak of the Body being blended together so that the members would have the same care for one another (12:24-25), of love being the most excellent way (12:31—13:13), and of building up one another (14:3-5, 12, 26).

Often when we speak of discerning the body in relation to the Lord’s table, we mean that we must discern that the bread we partake of represents the fellowship of the entire Body of Christ and not that of a sect. However, we also have to realize that we may be in a genuine local church and still be divisive ourselves. Brother Lee taught us that in coming to the Lord’s table we need to keep two words in mind—remembrance (11:24) and fellowship (10:16). We remember the Lord and have fellowship with one another (Experiencing Christ as the Inner Life, 47-49). To discern the body means that we take care of both aspects. Thus, Brother Lee told us:

You also must examine whether you are sectarian. If you have a problem with any of the saints, you should not partake of the Lord’s table until you thoroughly deal with it. The context of those verses shows that we must beware of any divisiveness. If the table is divisive in its testimony, or if you yourself are divisive in your relationship to the saints, you must not partake. When there is no division—that is, when the table is the table of oneness and when you have no problem with any member of the Body—you are free to partake. (Life Messages, Vol. 1, 309-310)

We must remember that any saint we have a problem with is one for whom Christ died, one whom Christ purchased to Himself, even as we are. Just as Christ has received him, so also we must receive him (Rom. 15:7). We cannot be selective.

First Corinthians 11:29 speaks of discerning the body, which implies that we need to realize that the bread at the Lord’s table signifies the entire Body of Christ. To touch the one loaf while we have a problem, even inwardly, with another member is to fail to discern the Body. In order to discern the Body, we must either put aside our inward problems with others or refrain from taking the bread. Otherwise, our participating in the loaf is a false performance, for we are not actually one. (CWWL, 1978, Vol. 2, 97)

If we take the loaf when we have a problem with a brother, we are not discerning the Body. This should be a clear warning to all of us. If we criticize a brother and then partake of the bread, we are not discerning the Body. If we discern the Body, we will first clear up the situation with the brother. If the criticism was only in our thoughts, we may confess our sin to the Lord and ask Him to cover, forgive, and cleanse us. When we come to the Lord’s table, we must come in a condition of having no problems with other members of the Body. This is what it means to discern the Body. (CWWL, 1977, Vol. 2, 65)

Dealing with problems between brothers is not a small matter, as evidenced by the Lord’s speaking in the Gospel of Matthew, a book on the kingdom. Matthew 5:23-24 says, “Therefore if you are offering your gift at the altar and there you remember that your brother has something against you, leave your gift there before the altar, and first go and be reconciled to your brother, and then come and offer your gift.” Our offering to God cannot be accepted as long as we are conscious of having a problem with another brother. Moreover, in Matthew 18:23-35 the Lord told a parable of a king who desired to settle accounts with his slaves. One slave, whom the master forgave a debt of ten thousand talents, went and choked a fellow slave who owed him one hundred denarii. The master then asked him, “Should you not also have had mercy on your fellow slave even as I had mercy on you?” He then ordered the unforgiving slave to be punished. The Lord concluded the parable, saying, “So also will My heavenly Father do to you if each of you does not forgive his brother from your hearts” (v. 35). This shows the seriousness of harboring offenses against fellow believers. On the one hand, we must seek forgiveness from those whom we have offended. On the other hand, we must forgive others from the heart.

Seeking and exercising forgiveness are especially needful in a church that has experienced turmoil, because in turmoils there are many opportunities for offenses to occur. In such circumstances we need to come to the Lord, open to Him without reservation, and obey His inward leading absolutely. Although only the Lord can heal situations in which offenses abound, our cooperation through confessing and repenting to Him and to those we have offended, forgiving those who have offended us, and seeking reconciliation with our fellow members give Him the ground to do so.

Romans 12:18 gives us an important balancing word. It says, “If possible, as far as it depends on you, live in peace with all men.” Brother Lee explained:

We need to live in peace with others, as far as it depends on us to do so. Sometimes it is not possible to live in peace with all men, because others are not willing to have a life of peace. There is nothing we can do in such a situation. This is the reason Paul says that we should live in peace with all men “if possible.” As far as it depends on us, we should do our best to live in peace with everyone. (Truth Lessons, Level 4, Vol. 3, 84)

The Lord’s table should remind us week by week of our need to keep the oneness. Keeping the oneness is vital to the Lord’s blessing on His recovery. The anointing, the Lord’s grace as the dew, and the commanded blessing of life are all dependent on the oneness (Psa. 133). The building up of the Body through the mutual supply in love in Ephesians 4:16 depends on keeping the oneness in verse 3. Week by week we should honor the Lord at His table by discerning the body, both in our remembrance of Him, the Head, and in caring for the church, His Body, comprised of all the saints, as the issue of His work. If the saints in His recovery would pay close attention to this matter and practice it diligently, our enjoyment of the Lord in His table and in the church life would be greatly uplifted and His building work among us would be greatly advanced. May the Lord take us on in this way.

Share:

A Historical Sketch of the Ministry’s Teaching on the Practice of the Church and Its Administration

Whenever we seek to understand a truth from the Bible, we must take care of the principle of “here a little, there a little” (Isa. 28:10) and of caring for, but not being limited to, the background of the words spoken. The principle of “here a little, there a little” means that no truth is completely unveiled in one passage of the Word. Rather, we need to look at the full breadth of the divine revelation, not at isolated statements. Furthermore, understanding the background of a book of the Bible greatly informs our understanding of what that book says. For example, while what is written in the New Testament Epistles is universally applicable (1 Cor. 4:17; 7:17), each Epistle was written to address a particular situation. Without understanding those situations, we will not be able to fully grasp the significance of the apostles’ writing.

The same principles apply to understanding the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. To treat the ministry of our brothers Watchman Nee and Witness Lee on the practice of the church fairly, we must not take fragments of their teaching selectively, according to our own tastes, biases, or agenda. Moreover, while the biblical principles that they taught apply to all the local churches at every time and in every place, their speaking was often related to a context that informed their ministry on a particular aspect of church practice at a given time. This becomes evident as we trace the history of our brothers’ ministry concerning the practice of the church and of its administration in particular.

Brother Nee received much help from the British Brethren, particularly the writings of John Nelson Darby, a leader among those who became known as the Exclusive Brethren. In 1932 a group of Exclusive Brethren visited the churches in Shanghai and Foochow (Fuzhou). Brother Nee then visited England at their invitation the following year. On that trip he also met with T. Austin-Sparks, an independent, deeper life minister. In 1934, after his return to China, Brother Nee gave the messages that became The Assembly Life. Realizing that the concepts of both the Brethren and of Austin-Sparks did not match the biblical model for the practice of the church, Brother Nee laid out what the local churches had practiced from their inception in 1922. Those messages were the first extended exposition on the practice of the church life, including the boundary of the local church.

In 1937, first in Shanghai and then repeated in Hankow, he gave an expanded explanation of the New Testament practice of the church. The latter messages were translated into English and published in 1939 under the title Concerning Our Missions. This book, which is now known as The Normal Christian Church Life, pointed out the failings of both the practice of the Brethren and of congregations associated with particular works or ministries, whether denominational or independent. He also clearly showed the relationship among the churches, the ministry, and the work, all of which function in harmony in the one Body of Christ. At that time he used the word independent to describe the administration of a local church, meaning that it was not answerable to a mission board, denominational headquarters, head church, or any other organizational entity.

Due to a turmoil in the church, Brother Nee suspended his public ministry from 1942 to 1948. When he resumed his ministry he spoke the messages published in Church Affairs. In one of those messages he corrected a misunderstanding some promoted based on his messages from 1937, namely, that after the apostles appoint elders, the elders do not need to listen to the apostles. Brother Nee said simply, “This is impossible.” He then explained that the apostles  are the ones to both appoint and remove elders (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], Vol. 51: Church Affairs, 143). Between 1948 and 1951 Brother Nee also gave the messages later compiled into Further Talks on the Church Life.[1] After the disruption caused by the Second Sino-Japanese War (1931-1945) and the ensuing large influx of believers into the local churches, Brother Nee’s ministry in these messages laid a solid foundation concerning matters including the ground of the church, the content of the church, the unity of the church, and the service of the church.

Through Brother Nee’s work and ministry, a number of local churches were raised up outside mainland China. In the 1950s, following the Communist revolution in China, the number of saints in the churches outside China swelled, particularly in Taiwan, where tens of thousands were saved through the gospel. On two occasions, in 1955 and 1957, T. Austin-Sparks was invited to Taiwan to render spiritual help to the saints there. On his second visit he sought to undermine the ground of the church, which was foundational to the Lord’s move in His recovery. In Austin-Sparks’ way, ministry was central, not the church, but Brother Lee knew from the Word that the church is the center of God’s plan and that the ministry is for the building up of the church (Eph. 4:12). Brother Lee spent months to help the saints know both the local ground and the proper relationship between the ministry and the church.[2]

Despite his labors, some gifted, young, and immature co-workers adopted Austin-Sparks’ view and caused a great turmoil and loss among the churches in Taiwan. In 1965 Brother Lee responded to the pleas of the elders in Taiwan and returned to clear up that situation. While he was there he spoke clearly regarding the ongoing relationship between the apostles and the churches and the responsibility of the apostles to deal with problems in a church’s eldership (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1965, vol. 4, 163-196).

Another turmoil broke out in 1978, caused by an ambitious worker, Max Rapoport, who sought to build up a hierarchical structure. This worker attempted to overturn entire elderships and install brothers loyal to him. In a series titled Truth Messages Brother Lee plainly told the saints that anyone who acquiesced to such usurpation of the headship of Christ was not practicing the truth. However, to use Brother Lee’s word to say that the apostles have absolutely no authority to deal with problems in a local church is not faithful to the entire scope of the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee or to the full text of what Brother Lee said:

According to my knowledge of the New Testament, the apostles have no authority in themselves to control the churches. Only the word ministered by them has authority. If the churches and the saints go on according to the Word, according to God’s oracle, the apostles have no authority to touch the churches. But if a church goes astray or is misled, then the apostles have the obligation and responsibility to deal with the situation according to God’s word, which has authority. (Truth Messages, 34-35)

In a hierarchical organization, each level has line authority over those who are lower on the organization chart to exercise control over the entire organizational tree. This concept is foreign to the Bible. The Body of Christ is an organism in which there is no hierarchy of God, Christ, apostles, elders, and common saints. Nevertheless, the apostles are responsible before God to correct misconduct by local elders or severe disorder in a church (1 Tim. 5:19; 1 Cor. 11:34).

In the late 1980s another rebellion arose, led by John Ingalls and others, this time promoting the view that every local church is an independent autonomy. At that time and in the years that followed, Brother Lee again spoke concerning the apostles’ ongoing relationship with the church and their responsibility to deal with problems in a church’s eldership. He also made clear that any concept of absolute independence or autonomy was organizational and contrary to the organic oneness and nature of the Body of Christ (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1988, vols. 3 and 4; 1989, vols. 1, 3, and 4; 1990, vol. 2; 1991-1992, vols. 2 and 4; 1993, vols. 1 and 2; 1997, vol. 2).

This brief survey demonstrates the importance of taking the words of the ministry as a whole and not selecting only those portions that suit us. It also shows the value of understanding the historical context in which certain words were spoken. Doing these things gives us a broad and balanced view of the practice of the church life and its administration. A proper church is one that stands on the local ground. Its administration is committed to a group of elders appointed by the apostles. The elders do not look at their church as their domain to exercise authority independently, but they administer their church in view of and in the fellowship of the organic Body of Christ. As long as the elders conduct themselves properly, the apostles do not directly intervene in the church’s affairs, though they may still teach, train, and exhort both the elders and the church (Eph. 4:11-12; 2 Tim. 2:22; Acts 20:17, 28; 1 Tim. 4:13). However, if the elders abuse their authority or neglect their responsibility, the apostles have the right and responsibility to intervene. In all these things we will be safeguarded if we see that the Body of Christ is not an organization but an organism.

[1] These messages were published in English in 1968 to disprove claims that Brother Nee had abandoned the local ground in his later teaching.

[2] In 1957 alone Brother Lee shared the following message series:

The Faith, Testimony, and Ground of the Church
The Recovery and Practice of the Testimony of the Church
The Ground of the Church and the Service of the Body
The Testimony and the Ground of the Church
The Administration of the Church and the Ministry of the Word
The Supply of the Word, Shepherding, and the Administration Needed for the Building Up of the Church
The Ground of the Church and the Ministry That Builds Up the Church

Share:

Concerning Gender Identity and Sexual Orientation

There is much talk in modern society concerning gender identity and sexual orientation. If we are going to represent the Lord as luminaries shining in a dark world (Phil. 2:15), it is important that we have a biblical understanding of God’s heart and His ways concerning these subjects. It is easy to impose our own biases and predispositions on the subject, refashioning God according to our own image, rather than vice versa. If we are overly sympathetic, we may compromise God’s righteousness and His testimony (Psa. 89:14; cf. Rom. 1:32). If we are rigidly judgmental, we may preclude some from receiving the Lord’s marvelous salvation (Matt. 23:13). On the one hand, God is absolutely and uncompromisingly righteous; on the other hand, He is compassionate and tenderhearted.  To uphold the Lord’s testimony in these matters, we first need to see the biblical standard according to God’s creation and His ordination for humanity. We can then look at what our attitude and standing should be in the midst of today’s darkness and confusion.

Male and Female in God’s Creation

The Bible is consistent. It recognizes no distinction between the sex and gender of a person. God created humanity with only two genders—male and female. The very first mention of man says unequivocally, “And God created man in His own image; in the image of God He created him; male and female He created them” (Gen. 1:27). Genesis 5:2a confirms this, saying, “Male and female He created them.” In the New Testament, the Lord Jesus affirmed this fact, saying, “And He answered and said, Have you not read that He who created them from the beginning made them male and female” (Matt. 19:4; cf. Mark 10:6). Thus, the testimony of Scripture in both the Old and New Testaments is that God created man with only two genders—male and female. There is no third gender, no hybrid genders, no gender spectrum, and no changing of one’s birth gender. Everything else, including any form of gender confusion, is a product of the fall of man, even in the small number of cases of biological ambiguity (cf. Matt. 19:12).

Marriage and Sex According to God’s Ordination

Moreover, the Bible only recognizes one man joined to one woman as marriage. Every time marriage according to God’s ordination is mentioned, it is between a man and a woman (Gen. 2:24; Matt. 19:4-5; Mark 10:6-7; 1 Cor. 7:2). The Bible explicitly refers to homosexual activity as “an abomination” (Lev. 18:22; 20:13a). In Paul’s account of man being under God’s condemnation, he refers to such activity as “contrary to nature” (Rom. 1:26-27). The Bible is also clear that fornication, that is, any sexual activity—homosexual or heterosexual—outside of marriage is contrary to God’s righteousness and, therefore, is sin and causes the participant to come under God’s righteous judgment (Exo. 20:14; Heb. 13:4; 1 Tim. 1:8-10). Believers are charged to “abstain from fornication” (1 Thes. 4:3; cf. 1 Pet. 2:11). Any form of fornication is a work of the flesh and is antithetical to the sanctifying work of the Spirit (Gal. 5:19; 1 Cor. 6:9, 11; 1 Thes. 4:3; 2 Thes. 2:13).

What Our Attitude Should Be

Two portions of the New Testament are particularly significant in showing what our attitude should be. First Corinthians 6:9-11 says:

Or do you not know that the unrighteous will not inherit the kingdom of God? Do not be led astray; neither fornicators nor idolaters nor adulterers nor effeminate nor homosexuals nor thieves nor the covetous, not drunkards, not revilers, not the rapacious will inherit the kingdom of God. And these things were some of you; but you were washed, but you were sanctified, but you were justified in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ and in the Spirit of our God.

There are four key points here. First, the phrase “such were some of you” indicates that the gospel reaches those who are in a fallen state, including fornicators, idolaters, adulterers, the effeminate, and homosexuals. This means that we should not discriminate regarding to whom we present the good news of Jesus Christ. Second, the same words—“such were”—indicate that though this was their past condition, it was not their present condition or practice. Third, these verses show the means by which this change occurred—“but you were washed, but you were sanctified, but you were justified in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ and in the Spirit of our God.” Fourth, verse 9 shows that those who continue in such practices “will not inherit the kingdom of God.” In this verse, as well as Ephesians 5:5, to inherit the kingdom of God is something in addition to a believer’s initial salvation. It points to the reward of participating as an overcomer in the millennial kingdom that the Lord will establish at His second coming.

The second passage is 1 Corinthians 5:11: “But now I have written to you not to mingle with anyone who is called a brother, if he is a fornicator or a covetous man or an idolater or a reviler or a drunkard or a rapacious man, with such a one not even to eat.” Here those believers who continue in such practices lose the fellowship of the church. This is seen in this chapter in the case of a brother living in gross immorality, which elicited the Apostle Paul’s charge to “remove the evil man from among yourselves” (v. 13b).

The church is the kingdom of God on the earth today (compare Matt. 16:18 and 19; 1 Cor. 4:17 and 20; Rom. 14:17). Thus, the church must come fully under the ruling of God in Christ, which includes being governed by God’s ordination, not man’s opinion, as the standard of conduct. The church testifies of the proper order under God’s administration. The church takes Christ as her Head (Eph. 1:22; 5:23; Col. 1:18) and takes the lead in all of God’s creation to be headed up in Him (Eph. 1:10; cf. 4:15). For that reason, the church cannot allow those who continue to rebel against God’s ordination to remain in her fellowship. Otherwise, the church will lose its function and testimony. Just as participation in the millennial kingdom is conditional, so participation in the church’s fellowship is likewise conditional.

It is significant that in speaking of the forfeiture of the church’s fellowship and of the kingdom reward, the emphasis is on the person and not on the act. In other words, it is not a matter of a single lapse but of an ongoing practice such that the sinful behavior becomes characteristic of what that person is. As Brother Lee explained regarding 1 Corinthians 6:11:

Paul does not simply deal with a certain sin; he deals with the person who lives in that kind of sin. There is an important distinction here. For example, to commit fornication is different from being a fornicator, one who lives in that sin and remains in it. A fornicator is not merely one who commits fornication as David did in the Old Testament; he is a person who lives in that sin. That sin becomes his living. Thus, such a person becomes a fornicator. (Life-study of 1 Corinthians, 325)

To accommodate their approval of immorality, some attempt to circumvent the Bible’s full revelation of the character of God by refashioning Him according to their own tastes, speaking of God being only a loving God full of compassion and tenderheartedness. This is surely an aspect of God’s nature, but He is also absolutely holy and righteous (Rev. 4:8; 1 Pet. 1:15-16; Rev. 15:3). Those who remake God after the likeness of fallen man according to their own preferences are actually committing idolatry (Rom. 1:21-23). According to Romans 2:4, the kindness, forbearance, and long-suffering of God all aim to lead sinners to repentance (see also 2 Pet. 3:9, 15). To invoke such divine attributes to imply that God approves immoral activities is deceitful. To the contrary, genuine repentance among those who have come to know the love of God includes forsaking the immoral practices described in Romans 1 (cf. 2 Cor. 12:21).

One further word is needed. The churches, as shining golden lampstands, bear witness to Christ and His salvation in the midst of this perverse age (Rev. 1:12, 20; Phil. 2:15). No matter what our personal feelings may be, there is no ground in the Scripture for churches to become involved in social movements promoting “biblical mores.” In this matter the churches should follow the pattern of the Lord Jesus and of the apostle Paul. Even though sexual perversions were not uncommon in the Roman Empire, neither the Lord nor the apostles ever initiated or participated in social campaigns against those perversions lest the significance of the gospel and of the Lord’s salvation be obscured.

Our God is a merciful and compassionate God. He “desires all men to be saved and to come to the full knowledge of the truth” (1 Tim. 2:4). Thus, Jesus declared that “every one who believes into Him would not perish, but would have eternal life” (John 3:16). However, God is also a God of purpose (Eph. 1:9-10; 3:11). His salvation is to deliver us out of the authority of darkness and transfer us into the kingdom of the Son of His love (Col. 1:13). His mercy reached us with the gospel in our pitiful state as fallen sinners in rebellion against God’s authority. Now He is saving us to the uttermost in and by His indestructible life (Rom. 5:10; Heb. 7:25) to fully sanctify us to be “holy and without blemish” as His bride (1 Thes. 5:23; Eph. 5:27; cf. 1:4). We must not compromise such a high and glorious calling to accommodate the fashion of this age (Eph. 4:1; Rom. 12:2; Titus 2:12). May the Lord find us faithful to keep His word (Rev. 3:8, 10).

Share:

Leadership in the Lord’s Recovery, Part 1: The Lord’s Concept of Leadership versus Man’s Concept

 

The Lord’s Concept of Leadership Versus Man’s Concept

In this three-part series we will examine the matter of leadership among the local churches in the Lord’s recovery and how it conforms to the pattern revealed in the Bible. Without some kind of leadership, it is impossible for any group of people to work in a coordinated way and avoid falling into confusion. God, who has the highest purpose with the highest goal, has entrusted His people with the highest and most noble work. Moreover, He is not a God of confusion (1 Cor. 14:33). Therefore, the Bible shows clearly that with God’s people, there is always leadership. God, the supreme authority in the universe, has exalted Christ to be the unique Leader (Rom. 9:21-22; Acts 5:31). Yet, the Bible records that God also raises up some to express and represent His authority in taking the lead among His people under His continual direction (Eph. 1:1; Acts 20:28; Heb. 13:7, 24). Because the Lord’s recovery is for the recovery of truth and practice, including in the matter of leadership, it is vital that we discern God’s arrangement for the leadership of His people. This discernment begins with the recognition that the Lord’s concept of leadership is very different from man’s fallen concept.

The Lord’s Concept of Leadership

In both the Old and New Testaments we see that God is the unconditional, absolute Leader of His people and that His intention is that He would govern them directly (Judg. 8:23; 1 Sam. 8:7; 12:12). For this reason, the New Testament indicates that all authority, which is needed for leadership, has been given to Christ, and any who genuinely express and represent that authority do so in oneness with Him (Matt. 28:18; 2 Cor. 2:17). He is the unique source of authority, and apart from Him there exists no proper expression of authority. In the July 2019 semiannual training Ron Kangas gave a message in which he emphasized this truth:

God’s authority is actually God Himself; authority issues out from God’s own being (Rev. 22:1). The Greek word for authority is exousia. The noun ousia means “being,” and ek or ex means “out from.” Authority issues out from God’s own being. No angel or human being has such authority. This is why no one who has been enlightened would ever dare to even think that he or she has any authority. Authority is God Himself. (The Ministry of the Word 23:7 (July 2019), “Authority, Rebellion, the Vindication of Delegated Authority, and a Proper Representative of God,” 222)

Besides God, no one has authority in and of himself. No one can claim to have authority in and of himself or to be the leader among God’s people. Yet the Bible clearly shows that God designates some as delegated or deputy authorities both in human society and in the church. He has established these authorities to maintain society in general and to administrate His people in particular (Rom. 13:1-7; 2 Cor. 10:8; 13:10). To teach that because individual believers are under Christ as the Head they need not submit to those whom the Holy Spirit has sovereignly placed to take the lead among God’s people is unbalanced and contradicts the teaching of the New Testament (1 Cor. 12:28; Acts 20:28; Heb. 13:17). Without question, if someone is not in submission to these indirect authorities, neither are they in submission to God’s direct authority.

What Leadership Is Not

Having seen something of the divine concept concerning leadership revealed in the Bible, we may now examine what the leadership in the church is not, and we may thereby expose the fallen human concept.

Not an officially designated person or group of people: Because Christ alone is the Leader (Acts 5:31), no person can rightfully claim any kind of official leadership among God’s people. All proper leadership is organic, that is, in life and according to the Spirit, not by way of an official, permanent position as in an organization. For example, Peter took the lead at the beginning of Acts (Acts 1:15-22). However, later James exercised leadership (15:13, 19). When Barnabas and Saul set out from Antioch, Barnabas took the lead (13:2). However, when confronted with opposition, Paul, as one “filled with the Holy Spirit,” began to take the lead in speaking for the Lord because he had the greater spiritual capacity (v. 9). These examples indicate that leadership among God’s people is not official but organic according to the spiritual condition of each servant of the Lord and the sovereignty of the Holy Spirit. Neither Watchman Nee nor Witness Lee ever claimed to be the official leaders in the recovery, nor do any of the co-workers today. Rather, the ministry in the Lord’s recovery strongly teaches that the leadership in the churches is actually through the apostles’ teaching and those who bring this teaching, as we will see in Part 2 of this series.

Moreover, among the local churches there is no “head church.” In church history elevating one church above others opened the door for the development of the Roman Catholic Church with its manifold evils.  God’s intention is that all the local churches would be on the same level and be kept thus by blending in the unique teaching and fellowship of the apostles (Acts 2:42). It is against the truth for larger or more established local churches to direct smaller, less established churches or for a certain local church to direct the other churches in the surrounding region. Rather, each church is committed by the Spirit to the administration of its local elders (14:23; 20:28) and is kept in the unique fellowship of the Body of Christ by blending.

Similarly, there can be no central organization that directs all the local churches on the earth. After surveying the chaotic and divisive situation among the denominations in Europe, North America, and China, Brother Nee spoke strongly against this degraded practice. The Lord showed him that to have any kind of headquarters among the churches, the ministry, and the work was to subvert Christ as the Head and propagate division among God’s people. According to man’s fallen concept, an umbrella organization is necessary to unite, direct, and control all the churches on the earth, but God disagrees. There is no hint in the New Testament of an organization directing the churches, the ministry, or the work.

Not any kind of man-made governmental system: With God’s people there is neither democracy nor autocracy. These systems are of the world and have absolutely no place in the church of God. With God’s people there is only theocracy. The Lord does not relinquish His headship to any person or group. For this reason, the churches do not vote concerning what way the recovery should take, nor is there a person or group that makes decisions on behalf of all the churches or the saints. The presence of such practices is a sign of degradation (Rev. 2:6, footnote 1; 3:14, footnote 1; 3 John 9-10).[1] The New Testament indicates that those who take the lead do so neither democratically nor autocratically but according to the Spirit’s leading, by seeking the Lord’s will in prayer (Acts 1:24-25, 13:2, 15:27-29).

Not the exercising of lordship but the service of slaves: The New Testament also makes abundantly clear that those who take the lead among God’s people must do so not as lords but as slaves (Luke 22:25-26; 1 Peter 5:2-3; 2 Cor. 4:5). In man’s fallen concept, leaders are considered great and are exalted above others, but this is completely contrary to God’s thought. Leadership in God’s eyes is a humble service, even a slavery (Matt. 20:25-28; Acts 13:36). Furthermore, to lead is not to command others but to set an example for them to follow (Acts 20:34-35; 2 Cor. 4:11-16). Witness Lee faithfully taught this New Testament principle:

In the church no one should exercise lordship. Matthew 20:25-28; 23:8-11; and 1 Peter 5:1-3, 5 reveal that the rulers of the nations exercise lordship over the people, but in the church there is no exercise of lordship. We have the lordship, but it is the lordship of the Lord Himself. No one in the church, regardless of how much responsibility he bears, how much life he ministers to the saints, or how much he has been afforded the Lord’s grace for the building up of the local churches, should ever exercise any lordship over others. We all are brothers (Matt. 23:8). (The Speciality, Generality, and Practicality of the Church Life, 64)

In the world the leaders have authority over others and rule over others. In the churches the elders are the leading ones, but they are not rulers. They should be examples, taking the lead to serve and care for the church so that the believers may follow in the same way. (The History of the Church and the Local Churches, 17)

Man’s concept of leadership is organizational, worldly, hierarchical, and even satanic. In the Lord’s recovery we should utterly reject this fallen concept. In the following articles we will see more concerning the biblical pattern of leadership and how that recovered truth is practically applied in the Lord’s recovery today.

[1] To comply with civil laws (Rom. 13:1) a church may form a corporation to secure legal protections and hold its assets. The common practice among the churches is that the board of directors for such a corporation be chosen from among the appointed elders, because the administration of a church’s practical affairs is among the eldership’s responsibilities (Acts 11:29-30).

Share:
Series: Leadership in the Lord's Recovery

Leadership in the Lord’s Recovery, Part 2: The Biblical Pattern of Leadership

 

In the previous article we saw that man’s concept of leadership and authority is directly opposite to the Lord’s concept. For the natural man leadership is an organizational, hierarchical, and prestigious matter. However, God does not sanction this kind of leadership among His people because all leadership and authority is with God Himself and flows out from Him. The Bible strongly testifies to the principle that God’s leadership of His people is both actual and practical and that it involves a human channel. Those who take the lead in a proper way express God as the unique authority; they do not have authority in and of themselves to lead or direct others. God’s people certainly require direction, but God’s intention is that His people would be directed by His speaking. In this article we shall see how this principle is established in the Bible and how God’s speaking is the real, actual, and practical leadership of His people on the earth.

The divine arrangement for the leadership of God’s people can be seen in the history of Israel. In the Old Testament the law was given by God at Mount Sinai through the human channel of Moses. By the law and with the divinely ordained priesthood, God’s speaking was incontrovertibly established among His people and became the highest authority, the deciding factor, and the source and basis for all leadership, much like a nation’s constitution:

The law was the constant speaking of God. The law, like the United States Constitution, may be considered as the first written constitution of God’s people written by God Himself. The Old Testament, however, shows us that the written constitution of God by itself was not adequate. There was still the need of God’s instant constitution, His instant speaking. God’s instant speaking always goes along with His written word. The theocracy among the nation of Israel was a government according to God’s constant speaking as written in the law or God’s instant speaking as revealed through the breastplate of the high priest by means of the Urim and the Thummim (Exo. 28:30; Lev. 8:8; Num. 27:21; Deut. 33:8; 1 Sam. 28:6; Ezra 2:63; Neh. 7:65). (Elders’ Training, Book 9: The Eldership and the God-ordained Way (1), 40)

God’s written word, the law, along with God’s instant speaking by means of the Urim and the Thummim, formed God’s divine constitution for His people. This divine constitution was a great matter, for it distinguished the nation of Israel as a unique kingdom on the earth directly under divine government (Exo. 19:6). God’s speaking was a divine constitution for this kingdom, making God’s direct administration of His people actual and practical and preserving the nation of Israel as a theocracy so that God could carry out His move on the earth. For this reason, even after God permitted Israel to take the worldly way of having a monarchy, He strongly charged the kings to uphold the law and raised up prophets to strengthen them (Deut. 17:14-15, 18-19). Moreover, when the children of Israel were recovered to the good land, the responsibility for leadership lay with those who were knowledgeable in the Scriptures and were able to teach others (Ezra 7:6, 11). This indicates that the actual leadership among God’s people was God’s speaking. Concerning the relationship between God’s speaking and His leadership, Witness Lee points out:

In every age of the work of God through His speaking, there has been a leader. At the time of the law, Moses was the leader. After Moses, Joshua became the leader. Actually, the leadership is not the person. The leadership is God’s speaking. All the people in the age of the law did not actually follow Moses. Practically speaking, they followed the word of God spoken by Moses. (The Problems Causing the Turmoil in the Church Life, 16-17)

Thus, the leadership in the Old Testament was God’s speaking through the human channel of those who faithfully brought that speaking to God’s people. Such ones had no authority in and of themselves. However, their speaking, which was actually God’s own speaking, was full of divine authority. This speaking was the real leadership and became a living constitution to keep God’s people under the divine government for the carrying out of the divine economy.

In the New Testament this principle endures. Christ as the Word of God, as the One who speaks for God and speaks forth God, replaces both the law and the prophets (John 1:1, 14; Rom. 10:4; Matt. 17:1-8). As the incarnate Word of God, the Lord Jesus did not speak His own word but spoke the word of the Father, who sent Him (John 12:49-50; 14:24). His teaching was not His own but the Father’s (John 7:16-18). In resurrection and ascension Christ as the Head continued to speak through the members of His Body, particularly the apostles (Matt. 10:19-20; Acts 4:29). The apostles also did not speak from themselves but what the Spirit, the reality of the resurrected and ascended Christ, gave them to speak (John 16:13; 1 Thes. 2:13; 1 Cor. 2:13). This speaking became the apostles’ teaching, a direct continuation of the Lord’s own teaching in the gospels:

What the Lord Jesus taught in the four Gospels became the first part of the apostles’ teaching. Then, based on this, Peter taught something more, and based on this teaching, Paul taught even further. Eventually, Paul, Peter, John, and others wrote the Epistles and Revelation. All these teachings are the teaching of the apostles, and all these portions of the apostles’ teaching are the contents of the New Testament, which is God’s New Testament economy. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1988, vol. 3, 446-447)

As the law was the constitution for Israel as God’s Old Testament people, the teaching of the apostles is the constitution for the church as God’s New Testament people:

In the Gospels the leadership in the New Testament was a person, the Lord Jesus. From Acts to Revelation, however, the leadership is no longer a person; it is the teaching of the apostles. We may compare the teaching of the apostles to the Constitution of the United States, which is higher than even the president (cf. Gal. 1:8). Neither Peter nor Paul controlled the churches. Rather, their teaching governed the churches. Paul told Timothy to charge certain ones not to teach different things other than God’s economy (1 Tim. 1:3-4). The teaching of the apostles, which is the teaching of God’s economy, is the unique leadership. John says, “Everyone who goes beyond and does not abide in the teaching of Christ does not have God” (2 John 9). We should not join ourselves to such a one, for he is evil. This again proves that after the four Gospels the governing leadership is not a person; rather, it is the teaching of the New Testament. (CWWL, 1988, vol. 3, 447)

The New Testament shows that the apostles took the lead among the churches. However their authority was not exercised by their controlling others but primarily through their teaching the New Testament truths and presenting themselves as a pattern (1 Cor. 4:17; Phil. 3:17; 2 Thes. 3:9; 1 Tim. 4:12). The product of their ministry and work was local churches in various cities (Acts 14:21-23). Once a local church was raised up, the apostles appointed local brothers according to the Spirit’s guidance to take the lead there as elders (v. 23; 20:28; Titus 1:5). Rather than exercise hierarchical control over these elders, the apostles left the responsibility of caring for the believers in that locality in their hands and continued their ministry and work to raise up and establish more local churches (Acts 14:24-25). However, they certainly expected and exhorted the elders to take the lead according to the apostles’ teaching and admonished the believers under the care of the elders to follow them (Titus 1:7-9; Heb. 13:17).

The apostles did not allow anyone to teach differently (1 Tim. 1:3-4). Considering their word to be God’s own speaking, the apostles were bold to encourage, charge, and admonish all the local churches raised up and strengthened through their ministry to remain faithful to that speaking (1 Thes. 2:13; 2 Thes. 2:15; 1 Tim. 6:3-4; 2 Pet. 3:2). They also bore the responsibility to address conduct that deviated from their teaching (1 Cor. 11:34; 1 Tim. 5:19). As Brother Lee explained:

The apostles do not control the churches, but the churches should follow the teaching of the apostles. Acts 2:42 says, “They continued steadfastly in the teaching and the fellowship of the apostles.” The apostles do not exercise their own authority; instead, the real authority is the teaching of the apostles. All the churches and elders should keep the teaching of the apostles. If they do not, the apostles should come in to correct the situation according to the authority of the teaching of the apostles. (CWWL, 1988, vol. 1, 594-595)

Conclusion

According to the Bible, God’s leadership of His people is through His constant and instant speaking through the human channel of those who bring His speaking to His people. God’s speaking establishes and makes practical God’s divine government by becoming a living constitution for God’s people to follow. In the Old Testament this constitution was based on the Mosaic law, but in the New Testament it is based on the teaching of the apostles as the direct continuation of the Lord Jesus’s teaching in the Gospels.  Therefore, leadership in the New Testament is, universally, through the apostles’ teaching and, locally, through the elders’ shepherding and overseeing of the churches according to the apostles’ teaching. The apostles do not exercise control over the elders, nor do the elders exercise control over the saints; rather, the divine revelation received through the New Testament ministry, the teaching of the apostles, is the controlling factor:

In the Lord’s recovery we reject the notion of one person controlling persons and matters. We do have some leadership, but not the leadership of one controlling person. Instead, we have the leadership of one controlling revelation in the one ministry through those who bring in the revelation of the ministry. The revelation controls, and it controls through those who bring in the revelation. The revelation in the Lord’s recovery controls us and restricts us. (Leadership in the New Testament, 20)

In the final article in this series we will see how this vital and precious principle has been recovered and applied in the Lord’s recovery both historically and among the local churches on the earth today.

Share:
Series: Leadership in the Lord's Recovery

Leadership in the Lord’s Recovery, Part 3: Applying the Biblical Pattern of Leadership

 

As we have seen, God’s intention is that He, the unique source of authority, would lead His people directly. No person, organization, or system should usurp God’s leadership over His people, which is practically carried out by God’s speaking through those who faithfully bring His speaking to His people. In the New Testament this speaking is the teaching of the apostles, the entire content of the New Testament. Witness Lee explained:

The apostles’ teaching comprises the twenty-seven books of the New Testament in four main parts. The first part of the New Testament was spoken by the Lord when He was in the flesh on the earth. The second part was spoken by the apostle Peter as a continuation of the Lord’s word in the four Gospels. The third part was spoken by the apostle Paul in portions of the Acts and in his fourteen Epistles. The fourth and final part of the speaking in the New Testament was given through the apostle John. Besides these four main parts of the New Testament, there are also James and Jude, but these dear saints did not have as important a role as the three apostles mentioned above in the composing of the New Testament.  (The Scriptural Way to Meet and to Serve for the Building Up of the Body of Christ, 95-96)

The apostles’ teaching as God’s New Testament speaking is the actual and practical leadership among the local churches. This has been the case since the Lord’s present recovery began in China in 1922 with Watchman Nee. Brother Lee recounted Brother Nee’s pattern of not assuming any kind of official position:

I was with Brother Nee for years. We never considered him the official leader, and he never regarded himself in this way. Whenever someone thought of Brother Nee as the leader and came to him for instructions, Brother Nee would never say a word. Only when a person came to him for fellowship would he open himself to share something. He never assumed that he was the official leader. (Leadership in the New Testament, 11)

Certainly, Brother Nee took the lead, but not in an official way or in the way of controlling or directing others. Actually, it was Brother Nee’s pattern of living according to the Bible and His faithful teaching of the Bible that were the real leadership:

In 1934 there was a turmoil in the church in Shanghai, mainly directed against Brother Nee. At that time I assured him that I completely followed him, not because of who he was but because of the teaching and revelation he brought into the Lord’s recovery. Brother Nee and I had not known each other formerly; we had no personal affection. He took the lead, and I followed him because he had the revelation in his teaching and he kept the revelation. I also told him that if one day he would deviate from the revelation he had passed on to us, I would still follow the revelation, but I would no longer follow him. (47)

Brother Nee was greatly encouraged by these words from Brother Lee. When Brother Nee’s public ministry was terminated by his imprisonment in 1952, the revelation that Brother Nee had imparted through his ministry, which so richly opened the New Testament, was faithfully carried forward by Brother Lee. This assured that the Lord’s recovery on the earth would continue to flourish in mainland China and beyond. In the matter of leadership, as in all matters in Brother Nee’s ministry, Brother Lee was faithful not only to his senior co-worker’s speaking but also to his pattern:

According to God’s economy, there is just one leader among His people—the Lord Jesus Christ: “And do not be called leaders; for One is your Leader, that is, Christ” (Matt. 23:10, NASB). Anyone who considers me the leader in the Lord’s recovery is not practicing the truth. If anyone asks you who the leader in the church is, you need to say that the leader is Christ. To answer in this way indicates that we know the truth and practice the truth. If someone claims that Witness Lee is the leader, you need to tell him, “Witness Lee is our slave.” (8)

Brother Lee considered himself a slave who served the churches through the ministry in the Lord’s recovery. Less than three months before his passing in 1997, he wrote a letter to the churches expressing his assurance that there were some among his co-workers who were following his pattern. Leadership in the New Testament reproduces the following part of his letter: “The Lord has shown me that He has prepared many brothers who will serve as fellow slaves with me in a blended way. I feel that this is the Lord’s sovereign provision for His Body, and the up-to-date way to fulfill His ministry” (6).

It has been over 25 years since Brother Lee spoke these words. Today those who function to take the lead through the ministry of the apostles’ teaching still endeavor to take the way of blending (1 Cor. 12:24). Blending requires one to be harmonized and coordinated with others to serve in the principle of the Body (Ezek. 1:10-14 and footnotes). It requires that all the leading ones be limited and balanced by one another so that each experiences the putting to death of the cross in order that the life of Christ can be imparted to others (2 Cor. 4:11-12). Blending also ensures that the personality of one strong or capable “leader” is not imprinted onto the churches in the recovery, but rather the Lord’s headship is preserved (cf. 3 John 9; 1 Cor. 1:12). Blending necessitates that all who take the lead in the ministry in the recovery seek the will of the Spirit together (Acts 13:1-4) and are coordinated together to follow the Spirit’s leading to release the Lord’s up-to-date speaking concerning the revelation of the New Testament, the apostles’ teaching, the central and primary item of which is God’s New Testament economy to build up the Body of Christ, consummating in the New Jerusalem as God’s eternal goal (Eph. 3:9; Rev. 21:2). As should be the case with the eldership in a local church, the service of the co-workers who function to take the lead in the ministry and the work is a corporate, blended service.

If we are clear concerning the pattern of leadership in the Bible and the living out of this pattern through Brother Nee and Brother Lee, we will realize that we in the Lord’s recovery today are not following a person or any kind of organization. Today we must be a people who follow a vision (Acts 26:19). This vision is the revelation of God’s New Testament economy as the central item of the apostles’ teaching, the extract of the New Testament and the whole Bible. This revelation was fully recovered through Brother Nee and Brother Lee’s ministry and is the priceless heritage of the saints in the Lord’s recovery today. This revelation, as the actual leadership in the Lord’s recovery today, must become our vision.

Without question Christ is the unique Head of the Body (Col. 1:18a; Eph. 1:22b-23). Yet according to the New Testament, we should be those who are willing to be led by others and follow their pattern insofar as it corresponds to the kind of person and living the teaching of the New Testament requires of leading ones (2 Tim. 3:10; 1 Cor. 11:1; 2 Thes. 3:9b). For example, the saints should follow the faithful elders in their locality and emulate their pattern, and the elders should follow those who take the lead to faithfully minister the word that is according to the apostles’ teaching (Heb. 13:17; Phil. 3:17). However, we should not follow others in a natural way. Apparently, Brother Lee followed Brother Nee, but in reality, according to Brother Lee’s own testimony, he followed the revelation of the New Testament recovered through Brother Nee’s ministry. In the same way, we should not merely follow a person, and we should not have the concept that the leadership in the recovery today is that of an officially designated person or group of people, for there is no such thing as an official leader apart from the Lord Himself. The leadership in the recovery is the apostles’ teaching as the constitution of the church as God’s New Testament people, which is God’s speaking to unveil His eternal economy to carry out His will and fulfill the desire of His heart (Eph. 1:3, 10-11). The more a person’s living, work, and ministry correspond to the apostles’ teaching concerning God’s economy, and the more a person serves the Lord, the churches, and the saints as a slave, the more that person can represent the Lord in taking the lead among the churches (Titus 1:1).

Whether we can rightly follow a person or his ministry or involve ourselves with his work depends entirely on the degree to which he properly holds to the teaching of the apostles concerning God’s New Testament economy (Acts 2:42; Titus 1:9; 1 Tim. 1:3-4). This requires us to exercise discernment (Phil. 1:9-10a, note 9²). Today there are countless so-called “ministries” in Christianity. The value of a minister’s work before the Lord is up to His sovereign evaluation (1 Cor. 3:11-15; Matt. 7:21-23), but the fact remains that the New Testament acknowledges only one ministry (Acts 1:17, 25; 6:4; 2 Cor. 4:1). We should follow a minister and his ministry only if his ministry is according to and part of this unique New Testament ministry and presents a vision of the completed revelation of the Holy Scriptures in a balanced way without any twisting or deforming and without stressing peripheral matters but holding to God’s New Testament economy as the central line and emphasis of the apostles’ teaching. Any ministry that we follow must also minister the unsearchable riches of Christ for the carrying out of the divine economy (Eph. 3:8-11). Furthermore, it must be according to an up-to-date vision of the present truth (2 Peter 1:12), matching what the Lord is presently doing on the earth. In this we affirm that today the Lord is working to recover the reality of the Body of Christ and the one new man to consummate this age and usher in the kingdom. This is the burden of the ministry in the Lord’s recovery today. We should present ourselves to be perfected by the gifted members whom the Lord has given to His Body in order that we might participate in and carry out this same work (Eph. 4:11-12). Ultimately, what we must follow is neither the ministers nor their ministry per se but what the ministry imparts—the controlling vision of God’s New Testament economy to build up the Body of Christ. It is this vision that leads us. May we all seek the Lord prayerfully in this matter, taking these words of Brother Lee to heart:

…[Y]ou are not following a man; rather, you are standing with the Lord’s ministry. You are following a vision, a vision that matches the age, a vision that inherits all that was in the past and a vision that is all-inclusive. It is up to date, yet it builds on the past. If you remain in the book of Acts, you may have inherited everything prior to that time, but you are not up to date. Today as we stand here and ponder the revelations unveiled in the Lord’s recovery, as we read the publications that are released among us, we can see that they cover everything from the church to God’s economy to the New Jerusalem in the new heaven and new earth. This is a bountiful and all-sufficient vision. (Crucial Words of Leading in the Lord’s Recovery, Book 1: The Vision and Definite Steps for the Practice of the New Way, 49)

Share:
Series: Leadership in the Lord's Recovery

Concerning the Boundary of a Local Church

The boundary of a local church is one of the basic principles upon which the practice of the Lord’s recovery is based. From the beginnings of the Lord’s recovery in China, it has been our practice to have one church with one eldership in a city. In 1934, after observing firsthand the confusion among Christian groups in the West, Brother Nee studied this matter thoroughly and gave a series of messages on “The Assembly Life.” There he said:

I would like you to pay attention to the fact that in the New Testament, the boundary of the local church is the city in which that church is located. Hence, the maximum reach of a local church is the city; no boundary can be larger than the city. In the Bible we cannot find a church that rules over one province or county. The Bible shows us that the city is the boundary of the church. (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Vol. 22: The Assembly Life & The Prayer Ministry of the Church, 114)

The New Testament consistently identifies a church with a city (Acts 8:1; 13:1; 1 Cor. 1:2; Rev. 1:11). It also speaks of appointing elders in every church and elders in every city, showing that the scope of an eldership’s administration is the city in which the church is located (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5). This means that while the elders in a church may seek fellowship from or may express concern about actions taken by elders in other churches, they should never interfere in the administration of another church. Brother Lee expressed particular concern that the elders in larger churches not overstep the administration of smaller churches. He said, “The elders of a local church should bear the responsibility for and serve in only one locality (Acts 14:23a; Titus 1:5). They should never interfere with nearby churches that are smaller; it is dangerous to do so” (Crucial Words of Leading in the Lord’s Recovery, Book 2: Leading the Saints to Practice the New Way Ordained by the Lord, 228). Using the church in Taipei as an example, he said, “Due to this danger, the elders of the church in Taipei should stay within the boundaries of Taipei. Taipei is their sphere, their realm; they should never extend beyond their boundary” (228). Elsewhere he told us:

A small local church was told recently that they should submit to a larger nearby church. This is organization, which leads to hierarchy and insults the headship of Christ. This is a crucial matter. To think that one church should submit to another church is altogether in darkness. If we hear this kind of speaking, we should immediately rise up and declare that this is an insult to our Head, Christ. (The Healthy Word, 24-25)

The problem is even more serious if one among the elders in a cluster of churches in proximity is acknowledged as a leader of them all. This easily becomes hierarchy. One of the great degradations in the practice of the church came when the respected church father Ignatius taught that elders and bishops were two different people and that the bishops were above the elders and oversaw the churches in a region. The word for bishop in the original Greek is episkopos, which consists of epi, meaning over, and skopos meaning seer. In the Bible, both bishop and elder refer to the same person. Elder refers to a leading ones’ person; overseer refers to his function. The function of the elders is to watch over the flock of God (1 Pet. 5:1-2). Ignatius’s error is evident from Brother Lee’s careful exposition of Acts 20:

The overseers in Acts 20:28 are the elders in verse 17. This proves that overseers and elders are synonymous terms denoting the same persons. To make an overseer a bishop of a district to rule over the elders of various localities in that district is grossly erroneous. This is what Ignatius taught. His erroneous teaching gave the ground to rank and brought in hierarchy. (Life-study of Acts, 464)

The papal system with its hierarchy developed from the teaching of Ignatius, and many Protestant denominations have continued to employ hierarchical systems of administration. Brother Lee commented, “Both the hierarchy and the system are abominable in the sight of God” (464). While fellowship is needed, in order to avoid hierarchy a leading brother or co-worker with a strong disposition needs to exercise not to impose his views on others and the other brothers must not allow him to do so.

The Boundary between the Apostles and the Local Churches

It is also important to understand the boundary between the apostles and the local churches—both what it is and what it is not. The elders in a locality are appointed by the apostles under the direction of the Holy Spirit (Acts 14:23; 20:28) and are responsible for the leadership and administration of a local church. The apostles are commissioned by the Lord and bear responsibility for all the churches (2 Cor. 11:28). We should first note that not all workers are apostles. In The Elders’ Management of the Church, Brother Lee clearly stated, “The Bible shows that the elders are appointed by the apostles. The apostles are the workers. But we must know clearly that not all the workers are apostles” (138). He continued:

There is a difference between one worker and another. Some are commissioned, as the apostles were. Others may not have the apostolic commission. Therefore, there must also be a distinction in the relationship between the elders and the workers. With some workers, you can consider them as apostles and can take their leadership. Some other workers are young and are just learning to serve the Lord. They should still be under the leading of the elders. There is a further distinction of boundary here. If one is not clear about this boundary, there will also be confusion in the church. (138)

The apostles do not supplant the elders in the administration of a local church. The responsibility for the administration of a church always remains with the elders in that locality.  An apostle may stay in a locality and serve as an elder in the church there. Peter served in such a dual capacity—as an apostle in the work and as an elder in the church in Jerusalem (1 Pet. 1:1; 5:1). In such a case, the brother’s participation in the eldership is not on the basis of his being an apostle but an elder. 

Moreover, a co-worker should not consider a group of local churches as his territory.

All the churches around the globe are part of the one recovery of the Lord. There should not be any boundaries of separation among the churches. Some co-workers in the past did have the feeling that a certain area was their territory. But we need to see that it is not healthy or profitable in the Lord’s recovery for anyone to have a boundary for his work. The only boundary is the boundary of the recovery. We should not say, “That’s my church. That’s the work in my territory.” We have only one work. That work is the work of the recovery based upon the teaching of the apostles. The remedy to the problem of so-called boundaries and territories among the churches is the fellowship. We should not have the thought that others coming to our place may disturb our work. We do not need to defend our work. Our work is the Lord’s work, which is the recovery’s work. We need the adequate fellowship among all the churches in all the nations, and we need a clear vision concerning the apostles’ teaching and the apostles’ fellowship. (A Brief Presentation of the Lord’s Recovery, 42-43)

Four further points are important. First, the leading co-workers, functioning in their apostolic capacity, have both the right and responsibility to respond to problems brought to them by saints, even by those who are not elders. This is evident from Paul’s response to the reports he received from the household of Chloe (1 Cor. 1:11) and his instruction to his younger co-worker Timothy concerning receiving accusations against elders (1 Tim. 5:19). However, in doing so, the apostles address the problems without themselves assuming the leadership of the local church. Second, the latter verse also shows that apostles, not local elders, must deal with problems involving an elder. Third, when a matter becomes extralocal, adversely affecting saints in other churches, it is no longer solely the purview of the elders in the locality in which the problem originated; it must be brought into the fellowship of the apostles (Acts 15). Fourth, if a co-worker becomes involved in a situation, that co-worker should willingly receive fellowship from other co-workers. Otherwise, by definition he is no longer co-working but working independently.

Misuse of the “Boundary” of a Local Church

The “boundary” of a local church can be misused if these biblical principles are ignored. For example, to claim an absolute and unchallengeable right irrespective of the fellowship of concern of other churches or of the responsibility of the leading co-workers to respond to pleas for help is to abuse the local church “boundary.” To buttress such claims by circulating excerpts from the Word or the ministry that present only one side of the truth compounds the error. Appealing to proximity as grounds to claim greater clarity regarding a situation affecting the churches is to set up a de facto territory and also fails in light of Scripture. Paul was physically removed from the situations in Corinth, Galatia, Philippi, and Colossae, yet he had a deeper understanding of God’s economy, a broader view of God’s work, a clearer grasp of the principles of God’s government, and a better sense of the mind of the Spirit, so he was able to render great help to the churches in those places. A look at Paul’s epistles to the churches shows the vast scope of his perfecting fellowship. In Ephesians alone he ranges from an unveiling of God’s eternal economy (1:10; 3:9) to the believers’ practical daily life and church life (4:17—6:9). Any leading one—co-worker or elder—who through pride or self-confidence spurns fellowship has already left the principle of the Body and is sure to lead saints astray.

The truth always tests our purity before the Lord. The goal of the boundary of a local church is to bear a testimony of oneness, not to provide a pretext for divisiveness. Proper opening in fellowship is a great protection against hierarchy and organization. We must be faithful to uphold all the truth in a balanced way and not just use selected parts for self-vindication or to bolster views according to our own taste or agenda. These principles, as with all matters, must be applied in life by the Spirit, in a way that matches the nature of the Body of Christ as an organism, not an organization. 

Share:

The Elders Avoiding Entanglement in Right and Wrong

The elders in a local church must deal with all kinds of issues, including complicated situations involving the saints. A great temptation the elders face is becoming entangled in determinations of right and wrong in disputes between saints. The proper function of the elders is to shepherd all the saints and minister Christ as life to them (1 Pet. 5:2; 1 Tim. 4:6). When a problem occurs between saints, the elders run a great risk of losing their ground to perform this function if they become entangled in assessing who is right and who is wrong.1 Brother Lee counseled the elders to minister life to the saints to deliver them from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil:

Immediately after the creation of man, God placed man in front of two trees (Gen. 2:8-9). The first tree was the tree of life, and the second tree was the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. If we are to serve the Lord in a deeper way, we must know that both good and evil are versus life. In our contact with people, we should not help them merely to distinguish between good and evil. Rather, we should minister life to them to save them out of the realm of the knowledge of good and evil. (Elders’ Training, Book 11: The Eldership and the God-ordained Way (3), 29)

Brother Lee then illustrated by describing a case in which a dispute involving two parties comes to the elders and what the effect is of addressing such a problem in the realm of right and wrong:

In such a case the elders often measure and weigh the case to see who is right and who is wrong. This is a temptation. If the elders determine that one of the parties is wrong, they may condemn him inwardly, and in their talk with him they may not be able to avoid criticizing and judging him. This spoils the situation. The elders may then ask the other party to exercise his patience while they do their best to help the first person to have a change and be adjusted. Such a way of speaking with the two parties is in the realm of good and evil. No life is ministered to either person under the cross. Rather, the negative situation may be intensified. (30-31)

Brother Lee then reminded the elders that their responsibility is to address the saints’ real need, which is to come to the Lord to gain Him:

Regardless of who comes to us, we should wait for a chance to minister Christ to them. Whether they are right or wrong, they are short of Christ. In the elders’ contact with people, they must have the full realization that what the people need is the Lord and what can solve the people’s problem is to meet with the Lord. (31)

Brother Lee warned against making judgments in a dispute based on right and wrong. There is a real danger if the elders are drawn into taking sides in a dispute. To do so is to usurp the headship of Christ and to rob the Lord of an opportunity to address a deeper, spiritual need.

If you do this, you will have joined the battle and will be drawn into the dispute of right and wrong. If you really love the Lord and love the brothers, you will surely take their problem as your own pressing problem and will try to solve it before God. You will say to the Lord, “Lord, what shall we do? I do not know how to help these brothers. How should I help them without hurting them? How can they be perfected? How can they know themselves? And how can they have a more desperate pursuit after You?” Right away you can see that the matter is not so simple. This is more complicated than a doctor diagnosing an illness. You cannot base your judgment on right and wrong. (The Elders’ Management of the Church, 104)

It is important to realize that making judgments based on right and wrong damages the saints, including those with whom the elders side.

I would like the brothers and sisters to know that if we in the church try to take care of such disharmony, disputes, and arguments, and we make judgments based on right and wrong, we will be damaging the brothers and sisters. You will surely say that the brother who has all the reasons is right, but this judgment will damage him. (105)

The elders’ taking sides in a dispute may damage much more than just the parties directly involved; it may lead to the entire church being embroiled in the issue and being divided into factions.

Suppose a brother and his wife have a fight one day. Because both are believers, they cannot divorce each other. Nevertheless, the sister may come to the elders, recount everything, and ask if her husband was right. Normally, when we hear about arguments, we ask who initiated the argument, and if this sister is asked, she would probably say that her husband initiated everything. Some of the elders may agree with her according to the saying: “A fight between two eventually becomes a fight among three.” At first one fights against one, and then two fight against one. Not only so, if some other elders do not agree with her, they may be dragged into the argument as well, so that the argument becomes two against two. Soon, the argument will spread to other brothers and sisters, and they will all become involved in the argument. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1950-1951, vol. 1, 156-157)

In Serving according to Revelation Brother Lee explained that those who serve the Lord should avoid being drawn into the realm of right and wrong but instead should help the saints to come back to life and the light of life:

When we encounter matters that are related to right and wrong among the saints, we should not try to solve these matters by being in the realm of right and wrong. Instead of paying attention to matters according to right and wrong, we should bring the saints into the light of life in order that they would accept the dealing of life. Right and wrong always cause us to touch death. Even if problems related to right and wrong are seemingly resolved, the issue will always be death. We can touch life only by being in the light of life and by accepting the dealing of life. Life always swallows up death. If we touch life, life will swallow up any death related to right and wrong. This is a clear principle. (32)

The light of life will help the saints resolve disputes not according to right and wrong but according to the inner sense of the Lord. In this way the problem is solved and the saints gain the Lord and grow in life.

If we understand that both right and wrong are the opposite of life, we will not attempt to solve problems that are related to the realm of right and wrong. Instead, we will bring people to the Lord so that they may see whether the Lord within them approves of their dispute. Then it will be easy to lead them to accept the dealings of life in the light of life. When the light of life shines on the saints and when they are dealt with in life, they drop their arguments, their problems are solved, they gain life, and they grow in life. (32)

Brother Lee then gave an extended example of how he helped a sister who came to him with a complaint against her husband (32-34). He said that although he sympathized with her, the Lord would not allow him to take her side in the dispute. Rather, he asked her whether she had taken the issue to the Lord in prayer and what His feeling was. Brother Lee then led her to pray. In her prayer she admitted to the Lord that she felt wrong before Him. She touched Him in a fresh way and death was swallowed up by life. Her husband was then “moved to go to the Lord in prayer, to confess his sins, to meet Him, to touch life, and to admit his wrongdoing to his wife” (34). In this way the problem between them was resolved by life and they were filled with the Lord. Brother Lee concluded, “When a person meets God, he can recognize right and wrong, transcend right and wrong, conquer right and wrong, and experience life swallowing up right and wrong. The Lord does not want to solve problems in the realm of right and wrong. He wants to swallow up right and wrong with His transcending life” (34).

The elders need to see that to entangle the church in disputes over right and wrong is to bring the church into death, resulting in strife and ultimately division. Unchecked, such death and its byproducts will spread to other local churches as well. In the Lord’s earthly ministry, He never answered questions according to right and wrong; He always turned questions to the tree of life. May we learn of Him. Only life and the light of life can produce an inward change and preserve us in oneness in fellowship with the Lord and with one another (John 1:4; 8:12; 17:11; 1 John 1:7).

Further reading: Watchman Nee, Two Principles of Living


1 This does not override the responsibility of leading ones to refer cases involving accusations of abuse or other criminal behavior to the appropriate secular authorities (see “Handling Allegations of Abuse”).

Share:

Serious Errors Made Concerning the Fellowship among the Co-workers

Recently, a former co-worker accused the North American co-workers of drifting toward organization and hierarchy by allegedly giving serious consideration to centralizing ownership of the local churches’ meeting halls. This is a gross misrepresentation of what actually happened in a North American co-workers’ fellowship. Moreover, in spreading his false account, this brother violated three important biblical principles:

  1. The contents of fellowship among the leading ones, whether among the elders or among the co-workers, should not be disclosed beyond that fellowship;
  2. At the conclusion of such a fellowship, whatever the outcome, all the participants should speak the same thing in order to maintain the one accord among the churches; and
  3. The leading ones should take care not to cause others to overstep what God has measured to them.

A Gross Misrepresentation

The former co-worker’s story is factually in error. The North American co-workers asked the Defense and Confirmation Project (DCP) to look at ways to provide the churches in the United States with greater legal protection. During a meeting in which DCP was to give a presentation regarding issues and recommendations, a brother asked a question concerning ownership of church meeting halls in another country. Contrary to this former co-worker’s account, this was not part of DCP’s presentation. A brother serving in that country responded that the law did not allow the local churches to own their own properties but required all properties to be held by a single legal entity. There was never a proposal that the churches in the U. S. adopt this practice. Neither was there criticism of those in that country who had done so due to legal necessity. The former co-worker’s claim that the co-workers ever considered taking over ownership of all the church meeting halls in the U. S. is a fabrication. There was never such a proposal, and the subject of centralizing meeting hall ownership was not even discussed.

The Pattern of Acts 15

However, even if there had been such a proposal and such a discussion had taken place, this former co-worker would still have been wrong to spread rumors to generate antipathy toward the co-workers. This is clear from an examination of Acts 15, which is the only chapter in the Bible that records a gathering of apostles and elders. In that chapter the apostles and elders met to consider a problem that threatened the truth of the gospel and the one accord among the churches. Verse 5 presents the issue at hand: “But certain men from the sect of the Pharisees who had believed rose up from among them, saying, It is necessary to circumcise them and to charge them to keep the law of Moses.” Verse 6 says, “And the apostles and the elders were gathered together to see about this matter.” Concerning the next verse Brother Lee commented, “We should note the phrase when much discussion had taken place (v. 7). Even though the word much indicates that considerable discussion had taken place, the content of the discussion was not recorded. Only the facts that Paul, Barnabas, and Peter spoke were recorded” (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1985, vol. 2, 425). The outcome of that meeting, as reflected in the decision pronounced by James, was not entirely consistent with God’s New Testament economy (vv. 13, 19-20). Nevertheless, Acts says that “it then seemed good to the apostles and the elders with the whole church” to send men to the Gentile churches with Paul and Barnabas (v. 22). Moreover, the apostles and elder brothers wrote to the believers in the Gentile churches, testifying that the leading ones had “become of one accord” (v. 25) and relaying the decision that “seemed good to the Holy Spirit and to us” (v. 28). The result was that the saints there “rejoiced at the encouragement” (v. 31).

Acts 15 contains many principles to follow in meetings of the co-workers and the elders. There should be much and thorough fellowship with freedom in the Spirit. If and when the sense of the Spirit’s feeling is clear, a decision can be articulated by a senior brother. Whatever the outcome of the meetings, all the brothers should be one and speak the same thing, not criticizing any decision or lack thereof or other meeting participants. All this implies maintaining a principle of confidentiality regarding the elders’ and co-workers’ meetings. Brother Lee observed, “The fellowship in the elders’ meetings must be carried out with a proper confidentiality. No administration, whether of a government or a corporation, allows people to release the details of its deliberations to others. If an employee in a corporation releases news about the decision made by the management, he will probably be fired” (CWWL, 1989, vol. 2, 340).

For a brother to speak to others about what was said in a co-workers’ or elders’ meeting, even if it is accurate (and it was not accurate in this case), is to spread gossip, to undermine the saints’ confidence in the leadership in the churches and in the recovery as a whole, and to sow discord. Brother Lee commented:

Regardless of what you hear and see, especially concerning the matters discussed in the meetings of the elders and co-workers, you should not spread them to others. This is not because we have anything dark to hide, but it is for the benefit of others. Any matter related to the administration of the church should remain only in the fellowship and should not be carelessly spread outside before it is decided. If we carelessly spread information, this shows that our learning is short. If we all would understand this limitation and hold on to it, then there would be no gossiping, no scandals, and no problems in the church. (Being Apt to Teach and Holding the Mystery of the Faith, 23)

Sadly, this brother’s manifest intent is to scandalize the co-workers in the saints’ eyes. He has often claimed that others have overstepped boundaries, yet he has neglected Brother Lee’s fellowship concerning the boundary of place: “In the elders’ meetings, anything related to the church and to the Lord’s testimony can be discussed. But when the setting is changed and the place changed, the same things cannot be discussed. This is the consideration of place” (The Elders’ Management of the Church, 142).

Moreover, of the decision made in Acts 15 Brother Lee observed, “Once they made a decision concerning the problem of circumcision, no further opinion was expressed” (CWWL, 1957, vol. 2, 250). This again should be a pattern to us. Expressing a contrary opinion about the outcome of a leading ones’ fellowship fosters dissent and tears down God’s work (251). In the present case the brother admitted that he said nothing in the meeting, yet he has written copiously to others attacking the co-workers with his false account of what happened. Speaking of the elders’ meetings Brother Nee said, “If someone does not speak in the meeting of the overseers, yet goes out and speaks to others, he is a person with a double tongue. Such a person cannot be in our midst” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, vol. 51, 19). Though some of these principles were stated in the context of the eldership, they apply to the co-workers’ fellowship as well.

Inviting Overstepping

Spreading one’s dissenting opinions or criticisms invites the recipients to overstep their own measure. God has given a measure to every member of the Body of Christ (Rom. 12:3; Eph. 4:7). When each member functions within its measure, there is a beautiful expression of the Body of Christ (v. 16). In 2 Corinthians 10:13 Paul spoke of the “God of measure.” In this verse measure refers to the scope of one’s function in the Lord’s service. To go beyond that measure brings disorder into the Body. This is what this dissenting former co-worker has incited others to do.

God has measured the leadership in the work of the Lord’s recovery to a group of co-workers. They are in His hand and subject to His discipline. However, for a worker to spread criticisms among others is not only for him to overstep his measure but also to invite others to join him in that overstepping.

According to Ephesians 4:16, the usefulness, the function, of every member is according to its measure and can neither be too much nor too little. When the function expressed in some brothers exceeds their measure, it is abnormal. We must speak the truth in the Lord. In some local churches some brothers have stepped over their measure. They should leave certain things, which are outside their limit, for the other brothers, because God has not measured that much to them. (The Church as the Body of Christ, 182-183)

During the turmoil in the late 1980s, a dissenting co-worker spread rumors concerning a certain matter to a leading brother from another place. That brother asked Brother Lee about those rumors. Brother Lee asked him simply, “Has this been measured to you?” The brother testified that this simple word made him clear.

Conclusion

Normally, the contents of a co-workers’ fellowship should not be disclosed. Those who violate this principle often give biased representations and draw others who lack direct knowledge into their dissenting opinions and into overstepping their measure. We correct this false account here in the hope that some who may have been stumbled by this former co-worker’s railings may be rescued from participating in his dissent. His conduct in this matter strongly validates the removal of him from participation in the work and in the lead in the church where he was.

Share:

Receiving All Believers but Not Different Teachings

Concerning the practice of the church, certain basic principles need to be understood and kept in balance. Fundamentally, the church as the unique Body of Christ is one universally and includes every believer irrespective of time and space. Practically, this one universal Body of Christ is manifested in time and space in various cities as local churches. These local churches include every believer in that city at that time and also maintain a fellowship with all the other local churches, thus expressing the one Body of Christ in a practical way.

To maintain this oneness, two crucial matters are needed. On the one hand, a local church must receive all those whom Christ has received (Rom. 15:7). On the other hand, a local church should not receive any teaching other than the apostles’ teaching in the New Testament (1 Tim. 1:3-4). Practically, this means that the local churches should not receive a ministry that teaches things that are different from the apostles’ teaching, including teaching the New Testament revelation selectively. The reason, as this article will show, is that receiving different teachings inevitably damages the oneness of the Body of Christ and leads to division. These two principles—receiving all believers and refusing different teachings—must both be upheld to preserve the local churches in the proper oneness.

Receiving All Believers

In the book of Romans, Paul charged us to receive the believers as God in Christ has received them (Rom. 14:1, 3; 15:7). Our brother Witness Lee spoke on this matter many times (several passages from his ministry have been compiled in the book Fellowship Concerning Keeping the Oneness with Fellow Believers). In his Life-study of Romans he said, “We must receive the saints according to God’s receiving of them. Whomever God has received, we are compelled to receive. We have no choice.” He added, “Our heavenly Father has brought forth many children, many Christians, and He has received them all. Therefore, we also must receive them, not according to our tastes or preferences, but according to God’s receiving” (Witness Lee, Life-study of Romans, 331). Later in the same series he said:

In the church life we must be general, able to receive all genuine believers. However, it is not easy to learn this lesson, because we all want others to be the same as we are. Let us not make demands of others or require that they change their way for our sake. Rather, let us have unity in variety and variety without conformity. Even though there may be such variety, we still are one in Christ. (622)

If a person professes belief in Christ and in His saving work, we must receive him, even if we disagree on matters that lie outside the common faith, as long as that person is not practicing immorality or idolatry, not causing division, and not teaching heresy concerning Christ’s person (1 Cor. 5:11; Titus 3:10; 2 John 7-11).

Not Receiving Different Teachings

Some, however, abuse this receiving of other believers to demand that we receive different ministries with different teachings. Here it is important to embrace all of the apostles’ teaching, not just those parts that may fit our temperament or may advance the agenda of those who aggressively promote their own ministry and teaching. The same author who charged the believers, “Therefore, receive one another, as Christ also received you to the glory of God” (Rom. 15:7), exhorted his younger co-worker Timothy to “charge certain ones not to teach different things,” that is, things other than God’s economy (1 Tim. 1:3-4). Moreover, one chapter after charging the believers to receive one another, Paul exhorted the believers in Rome “to mark those who make divisions and causes of stumbling contrary to the teaching which you have learned, and turn away from them” (Rom. 16:17).

We must see that the Lord’s recovery among us today issues from the recovery of the fullness of the apostles’ teaching in the New Testament. This teaching produces local churches as expressions of the one universal Body of Christ. It also brings the believers back to the normal experience of Christ as their life and to the functioning of all the members in harmony for the building up of the Body of Christ (Eph. 4:16). In God’s economy, all the crucial items speak forth God’s oneness in both His person and His work. There is one Bible, one God, one Christ, one Spirit, one eternal life, one salvation, one living, one testimony, one Body, and one New Jerusalem (see The Ten Great Critical “Ones” for the Building Up of the Body of Christ). These are crucial constituents of the one New Testament ministry. This ministry cooperates with Christ in His heavenly ministry to produce and build up local churches as practical expressions of the Body of Christ. In these local churches the believers experience and enjoy the all-inclusive Christ as the embodiment of the Triune God and function together in harmony for the building up of the Body.

As 1 Timothy 1:3-4 shows, what different teachings produce differs from what the teaching of the unique New Testament ministry of God’s economy produces. The New Testament ministry produces faith (Rom. 10:17), which links the believers to God in Christ to receive all His riches (Gal. 3:2, 14) and to one another for the accomplishment of God’s purpose, the building up of the Body of Christ. Different teachings produce questionings: “Who is right? Who is wrong?” These questionings beget contentions (2 Tim. 2:23). Eventually, a person who teaches different things becomes “blinded with pride, understanding nothing, but is diseased with questionings and contentions of words, out of which come envy, strife, slanders, evil suspicions” (1 Tim. 6:3-4).

Furthermore, teaching produces fellowship. The apostles’ teaching brings the believers into the apostles’ fellowship, which is the unique fellowship of God’s Son (Acts 2:42; 1 John 1:3; 1 Cor. 1:9). Any private teaching brings believers into a private fellowship:

Fellowship comes from the teaching. There should be only one unique teaching—the teaching of the apostles. Furthermore, there should be one unique fellowship that is produced by the apostles’ teaching. What we teach will produce a kind of fellowship. If we teach wrongly and differently from the apostles’ teaching, our teaching will produce a sectarian, divisive fellowship. (The God-ordained Way to Practice the New Testament Economy, 153)

It was for such reasons that Brother Lee warned us, “We all must realize that even a small amount of teaching in a different way destroys the recovery” (Elders’ Training, Book 3: The Way to Carry Out the Vision, 43).

In these matters the story of the believers in Ephesus is instructive. Paul’s visits to Ephesus are recorded in Acts 18:19-21 and in chapter 19. On his second visit Paul remained in Ephesus for three years (Acts 20:31). During a stopover in Miletus on his way to Jerusalem, Paul called for the Ephesian elders to come to him, at which time he warned them that “from among you yourselves men will rise up, speaking perverted things to draw away the disciples after them” (v. 30). The last phrase in this sentence shows that the impure motive of those who teach differently is to gain a personal following. It was after this that Paul charged Timothy to remain in Ephesus to charge certain ones not to teach differently (1 Tim. 1:3-4). Nevertheless, later Paul wrote that “all who are in Asia turned away from me” (2 Tim. 1:15). The last mention of Ephesus is in the book of Revelation, where the Lord Himself says, “But I have one thing against you, that you have left your first love. Remember therefore where you have fallen from and repent and do the first works; but if not, I am coming to you and will remove your lampstand out of its place, unless you repent” (Rev. 2:4-5).

The progression here should be a sobering word to us, especially because we have observed the same thing in our own history. The New Testament ministry is a betrothing ministry (2 Cor. 11:2), causing us to love the Lord and to care for His heart’s desire above all. Whenever someone promotes a different teaching, a teaching other than the apostles’ teaching for the building up of the Body of Christ in local churches in one common harmonious fellowship, the result is the same—questionings, contentions, and ultimately division. The same is true when someone uses selected portions of the Bible or of the ministry to advance his own private views. May the Lord preserve us in His recovery.

Share:

Defense & Confirmation Project (DCP)

The Defense & Confirmation Project (DCP) was established to “defend and confirm the New Testament ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee and the practice of the local churches.” This mission statement is based on Paul’s words in Philippians 1. In verse 7 he commended the Philippians, saying that “in the defense and confirmation of the gospel you are all fellow partakers with me of grace.” In verse 16 he said of himself, “I am set for the defense of the gospel.” Concerning the defense and confirmation of the gospel, Brother Lee said, “The defense of the gospel is related, on the negative side, to the perverting and distorting heresies… The confirmation of the gospel is related, on the positive side, to all the revelations of God’s mysteries concerning Christ and the church as unveiled in Paul’s Epistles” (Life-study of Philippians, 26, 27).

Paul’s gospel encompassed not only initial salvation but God’s full salvation—judicial and organic—and even all of God’s New Testament economy concerning Christ and the church. In his ministry he struggled to preserve the truth of the gospel amidst both opposition from those outside and turmoils caused by some within the local churches (Gal. 2:5; Acts 20:29-30). His faithfulness to the truth of the gospel brought him much criticism, opposition, and suffering (1 Cor. 4:13; 16:9; 2 Cor. 6:8), as Brother Lee explained:

He did not simply preach that people should believe in Jesus as their Savior so that they might go to heaven. The preaching of such a limited gospel does not entail suffering. In preaching the gospel according to God’s economy, Paul renounced religion, law, culture, ordinances, customs, habits, and every kind of ism. The gospel Paul preached slaughtered everything that was apart from God’s economy. It slaughtered religion, politics, and culture. In a sense, Paul’s gospel slaughters even us. Because Paul preached such a gospel, he was regarded as a troublemaker, a pestilent fellow (Acts 24:5). (Life-study of Philippians, 21-22)

When opposition to the Lord’s ministry in His recovery damaged the Lord’s move through the local churches in the late 1970s, Brother Lee called brothers together to consider how to respond. In that fellowship he said, “We must rise up to meet the challenge to the Lord’s present recovery.” He outlined four ways to meet outside opposition. He said that the majority of the effort should go into the way of writing to make the truth and facts clear (Acts 25:11, note 1). He proposed practicing the Christian way of going to meet with opposing ones (Matt. 18:15-17; 1 Cor. 6:1) and dialoguing with those believers who were open to receive a proper understanding of the teaching and practice of the Lord’s recovery (Acts 17:1-5; 21:36-22:1; 22:21-23:11). Finally, he said that only 5% of the effort should go into the way of appealing to the court system as our “Caesar” in response to defamation, and then only if all other avenues of redress were exhausted (Matt. 18:17b; Acts 16:35-39; 19:37-41; 21:39-40; 22:24-29; 23:27; 25:6-12).

DCP was established based on these guiding principles. The Internet provided a fresh means of circulating falsehoods. As causes of stumbling, these needed responses. However, by late 2001 it had become evident, due to the intransigence of the authors and publisher of a defamatory book, that the DCP office would need to focus on research and perhaps litigation support related to that book. That work, however, was not DCP’s primary mission.

Since that time DCP has undertaken many projects, including:

Today, DCP’s work is primarily in English and Chinese, although it has collaborated with brothers in Ethiopia, Germany, Poland, France, Spain, Russia, India, Myanmar, Vietnam, the Philippines, Korea, and many places in Central and South America. DCP’s work includes defending and confirming the New Testament truths via print, video, and the Internet; interacting with scholars and the media; and responding to requests for fellowship from churches and workers related to the defense of the truth.

DCP is incorporated as a 501(c)(3) entity and is not a part of LSM. It operates under the oversight of the co-workers, and whatever it produces for publication is sent to one or more editors in the editorial section of Living Stream Ministry (LSM) for review. In this way DCP adheres to the co-workers’ fellowship in Publication Work in the Lord’s Recovery.

In support of its role in building relationships with others and responding to criticism, DCP researches both print and electronic media concerning relevant:

  • biblical topics;
  • history and current events;
  • legal issues;
  • writings about the ministry of Watchman Nee, Witness Lee, and the present co-workers in the recovery; and
  • writings of and about the local churches.

This research can include basic background information concerning the writer to understand their frame of reference. Such research is critical to provide accurate information or to respond appropriately.
As Christians, we are called to “fight the good fight of the faith” (1 Tim. 6:12). However, it is not only a matter of what we contend for but of how we contend. Our fighting can be carried out only by using weapons of light and of righteousness (Rom. 13:12; 6:13; 2 Cor. 6:7). Misrepresentations or twisting others’ words are by nature works of darkness and unrighteousness. In contrast, DCP endeavors to demonstrate that the ministry in the Lord’s recovery cuts straight the word of the truth (2 Tim. 2:15).

Sadly, some have circulated wild and false rumors regarding DCP. To set the record straight, DCP has never initiated a lawsuit against anyone, is not the “legal arm” of anything, and has never engaged in any kind of clandestine surveillance of the saints. A few critics have found fault with DCP buying up and destroying copies of libelous books. The Mindbenders was withdrawn by the author and publisher with a retraction and apology. The God-Men was ruled to be libelous by a California court. To remove such books from circulation is a service not only to the Lord’s recovery but to the Christian public and the general public (Titus 1:11a).

DCP has been criticized because it maintains files in the DCP office. By far the largest category of files in the office are related to the three litigations that the local churches have been involved with. These constitute a valuable historical record. DCP also has files related to various controversies and to subjects of interest, including Bible teachings, news items, Christian and secular history, and people in fields of interest (theology, apologetics, church history, sociology, psychology, etc.). None of this is nefarious. Fashioning appropriate responses is dependent on accurate records concerning historical events and what has been said and by whom. This is the sole purpose of the files DCP maintains.

Nehemiah 4:18 says that those who rebuilt the walls of Jerusalem “each had his sword strapped to his side” in case of attack by those who opposed their work (cf. Eph. 6:17). If we read the New Testament carefully, we will realize that on the one hand, the function of the ministry is to supply Christ to the saints for their growth unto the building up of the Body of Christ (Eph. 4:16). On the other hand, the apostles fought to guard against the perverting of the truth by those who added to or subtracted from their teaching concerning God’s New Testament economy (1 Tim. 1:18; 6:12; 2 Tim. 4:7; Rev. 22:18-19). Both of these aspects are prominent in the Epistles of Paul, Peter, and John. They are also evident in the ministry of Brother Nee, Brother Lee, and the co-workers in the Lord’s recovery today.

In a message given in 1981 Brother Lee likened the Lord’s recovery to a nation requiring national defense and public security. In that message he said, “If we study human history, we will realize that the rise and fall of a nation depends on its national defense. If the national defense fails, the nation will perish” (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1981, Volume 2, 218). He pointed out that such a defense of a nation does not exist for its own sake but is needed to allow economic development through industry, commerce, farming, and education. Similarly, the work of defense and confirmation exists not for itself but to preserve an environment in which the local churches can grow and develop. DCP’s charge is to both fight directly and to equip the saints to affirm and defend the full scope of the New Testament revelation concerning God’s economy as it has been brought to us through the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee. Thus, DCP does not carry on the work of defense and confirmation by itself; this work is the responsibility of every church, including every elder and every saint.

Share:

Assailing the Ground of Oneness (7): The Identifying Characteristics of a Genuine Local Church and the Forbidden Grounds of Division According to the Scriptures

The New Testament presents the church as universally one in its existence and locally one in its manifestation (Eph. 1:22-23; Acts 13:1). Yet Christians today are divided among a plethora of denominations and local sects. Underlying these divisions are innumerable grounds advanced to justify their existence and separation from other Christians. Understandably, this has led to much confusion regarding the scriptural basis for identifying a genuine church. This article seeks to set forth six tests of a genuine local church and seven forbidden factors of division based upon the testimony of the Scriptures.

Six tests of a genuine local church

  1. Having no particular name. Christian sects are referred to as “denominations” because they have been denominated by taking a particular name. To take a particular name for a group of Christians is to constitute that group a sect, a denomination. This name separates that group of Christians from Christians in general. Taking another name apart from the Lord’s name is a serious matter. As Christians, we have believed into the Lord’s name (John 3:16, footnote 2), been baptized into the Lord’s name (Gal. 3:27), and are called to meet together in the Lord’s name (Matt. 18:20, footnote 2). In Revelation 3:8 the Lord praised the church in Philadelphia because the church did not deny His name. We have been purchased by the Lord and are betrothed to Him as His bride (2 Cor. 11:2). To take a name apart from the Lord’s name is to deny our position before the Lord.
  2. Having no particular fellowship. As regenerated believers, we have been called into the fellowship of the Son of God (1 Cor. 1:9). This fellowship is the common participation in Christ of all regenerated believers and includes the fellowship of the apostles (Acts 2:42; 1 John 1:3). Any fellowship of believers that is special and particular, not the inclusive, common fellowship of the apostles and of the Son of God, constitutes a division.
  3. Having no particular teaching. A particular teaching is a teaching that is insisted upon as a basis for fellowship among believers. Stressing a particular teaching, such as baptism by immersion, tongue-speaking, Sabbath-keeping, and the significance of the bread and cup at the Lord’s table, produces a particular fellowship and results in divisions.
  4. Having universal fellowship, not isolated fellowship. Every local church must participate in the universal fellowship of the Body of Christ with every other genuine local church. If a Christian group takes the position that they receive all Christians but does not have fellowship with all the other genuine local churches, that group is a local sect, not a local church. Their fellowship is limited, isolated, and not the universal fellowship of the Body of Christ.
  5. Having no separate administration. A Christian group that passes the preceding four tests may still insist on having an eldership that is separate from the eldership of the unique local church in that city. The unique pattern of the Scriptures is that there was one administration, one eldership, for one local church and one city (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5). Even though thousands of believers met together in the church in Jerusalem, still there was only one eldership, one administration for that church (Acts 21:18, 20).
  6. Having no hidden connections with other organizations. Some Christians meet in congregations that are affiliated with mission boards. Other Christian groups are part of a federation of churches. There is no basis in the Scriptures for any supralocal or extralocal organization to which local churches belong or are accountable.

From the above points it is clear that not all so-called “churches” are genuine local churches according to the New Testament. While all Christians are part of the church spiritually, not all Christians meet as the church practically. The ground of the church is not a matter of numbers or of condition but altogether a matter of standing. While a group of believers may be poor in their condition (consider the church in Corinth), it may be altogether proper according to its standing (“the church of God in Corinth,” 1 Cor. 1:2). The condition of a church is relative and may change from time to time; however, the ground of the church is absolute and does not fluctuate. Hence, the determination of the genuineness of a local church should never depend on its apparent condition but only on its standing.

Seven forbidden grounds of division

    1. Spiritual leaders. In writing to the church in Corinth, the apostle Paul strongly addressed the tendency of believers to designate themselves as followers of particular spiritual leaders in order to differentiate themselves from others: “Now I mean this, that each of you says, I am of Paul, and I of Apollos, and I of Cephas, and I of Christ” (1 Cor. 1:12). While much benefit may be derived from the spiritual leaders among the churches, the Scriptures provide no basis to divide the church according to these leaders.
    2. Instruments of salvation. It is common for a believer to ascribe his spiritual origin to those through whom he has come to know salvation. Unguarded, this appreciation may engender a sense of belonging to the one through whom salvation was received and may lead to sectarianism. On account of this, Paul corrected the Corinthians who said, “I am of Paul,” “I am of Apollos,” etc.
    3. Non-sectarianism. Some in Corinth said “I am of Christ” to differentiate themselves from others whom they considered as sectarian for saying “I am of Paul” or “I am of Cephas.” Actually, those who said “I am of Christ” also were condemned by Paul as being sectarian. It is not wrong for believers to declare that they belong only to Christ; neither is it wrong to repudiate the sectarian standings of others. So long as our saying that “I am of Christ” refers merely to our belonging to Christ, it is acceptable. But if it implies that others are sectarian and we are not, we err. Concerning this Watchman Nee observed:

When you say, “I am of Christ,” do you mean to say others are not? It is perfectly legitimate for you to say, “I am of Christ,” if your remark merely implies to whom you belong; but if it implies, “I am not sectarian; I stand quite differently from you sectarians,” then it is making a difference between you and other Christians. The very thought of distinguishing between the children of God has its springs in the carnal nature of man, and is sectarian. If we look on other believers as sectarian and consider ourselves to be non-sectarian, we are immediately differentiating between God’s people and thereby manifesting a divisive spirit even in the very act of condemning division. (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], Vol. 51: Church Affairs, 85; italics in original)

  1. Doctrinal differences. According to the pattern of the New Testament, Local churches are differentiated only according to their respective localities and not according to any emphasis on any doctrine outside the common faith (Jude 3). All genuine local churches are produced by and follow the apostles’ teaching, which is the same in every church (Acts 2:42; 1 Cor. 4:17).
  2. Racial differences. Historically, race has been a most pernicious stumbling block to unbelievers and believers alike. However, in the church race has no place. All distinctions according to the natural man have been done away with in Christ. “For also in one Spirit we were all baptized into one body, whether Jews or Greeks, whether slaves or free, and were all given to drink one Spirit” (1 Cor. 12:13).
  3. National differences. Just as there are no racial distinctions in the Body of Christ, neither are there national distinctions, for in the church of God there are neither Jews nor Greeks (v. 13; Gal. 3:27-28; Col. 3:10).
  4. Social distinctions. The social distinctions that exist in fallen human society have no place in the church. Paul’s writing is clear: in the church as the new man “there cannot be…slave, free man…” (Col. 3:11).

From the above points we have seen the positive bases upon which the church is manifested as local churches, and we have seen the negative bases upon which the church should not be divided. The Scriptures present no basis for establishing churches except according to the principle of the one Body being expressed as one local church in a city. As Watchman Nee observed:

To leave a sect is justifiable, but to leave a church—whether on account of unspirituality, wrong doctrine, or bad organization—is utterly unjustifiable. If you leave the local church and form a separate assembly, you may have greater spirituality, purer teaching, and better government; but you have no church; you only have a sect” (CWWN, Vol. 51: Church Affairs, 96; italics in original).

Share:

“Stealing” Meeting Halls?

Some dear saints have been influenced by malicious claims that Living Stream Ministry (LSM), the Defense and Confirmation Project (DCP), or the co-workers “stole” meeting halls by suing churches. Neither LSM, nor DCP, nor the co-workers have initiated any legal action against any local church, much less laid claim to any asset of any local church. Furthermore, no meeting halls were “stolen” either by LSM, the co-workers, or DCP. In stark contrast to these accusations, LSM has contributed funds to many local churches for them to acquire properties.

Non-profit corporations, including churches, are governed by particular federal and state laws which mandate making corporate documents and financials available and recognizing the rights of their members according to the corporations’ governing documents. On occasion, when these requirements were violated by some who improperly asserted authority, local saints have appealed to the courts to protect the members’ rights as set forth in the churches’ bylaws. These appeals prevented the “stealing” of meeting halls by improper persons in the churches in their respective localities.

Proper and Improper Exercise of Authority

In general, elders are appointed from among the brothers raised up locally (Titus 1:5). Though qualified co-workers are the visible channel of the elders’ appointment, it is the Holy Spirit who places men as overseers among God’s flock (Acts 14:23; 20:28). The ones who appoint elders recognize those men whom the Holy Spirit has prepared to oversee the flock as manifested by their comparative growth in life, their being equipped with the truth, and the shepherding care they render to the saints, all of which have already given them a measure of approvedness with the saints (1 Thes. 5:12; 1 Tim. 5:17; Heb. 13:7). In no case should elders be appointed based on their loyalty to a particular worker.

The Lord commits a local church to the elders for their oversight and shepherding care. This does not mean that the churches belong to the elders. The New Testament speaks of “the church of God” (1 Cor. 1:2; 10:32), “the church of Christ” (Rom. 16:16), and “the churches of the saints” (1 Cor. 14:33). No church is ever referred to as the church of any worker or as the church of the elders. The function of workers is to serve the churches (1 Cor. 3:4-9; 2 Cor. 1:24; 11:28). The primary functions of the elders are to shepherd the saints (Acts 20:28; 1 Pet. 5:2) and to be patterns to them (Heb. 13:7; 1 Pet. 5:3); they are also responsible to manage the church’s business affairs for the Lord’s interest, including the benefit of the saints (Acts 11:29-30; cf. 1 Tim. 3:3, footnote 5).

Among certain churches in the Great Lakes area, some brothers who were placed in positions of leadership, primarily through the divisive work of Titus Chu, came to view the church as their own private domain in which to exercise authority. A look at three examples—Mansfield and Columbus, Ohio; and Toronto, Canada—debunks the myths of lawsuits being initiated extra-locally to “steal” meeting halls.

Mansfield

The church in Mansfield, Ohio, was the earliest local church in the Great Lakes area. It began meeting in 1966, and it created a nonprofit corporation to manage its business affairs in 1972. When Titus Chu sent a worker to appoint four new “elders” in Mansfield, the church had already been meeting for forty years. None of the new “elders” were from Mansfield or had any standing among the saints there, some of whom were among the church’s original members. Yet they demanded obedience to their presumed authority, and within two months of their arrival they locked the meeting hall, barring 70% of the church from the meetings. They sought to wrest control of the church properties from the saints. The excluded members asked for a business meeting of the church in Mansfield’s corporation, but the “elders” ignored their request. When the “elders” would not hold a business meeting in accordance with the church bylaws, the members then appealed to the court so that they could exercise their right to vote. At the court’s direction, a business meeting was held on December 1, 2006, and a board of directors was lawfully elected. Having failed in their attempt to take control of the church and its property, the “elders” left of their own accord. See also www.afaithfulword.org/reports/OpenLetterFromMansfield.pdf.

Columbus

The church in Columbus, Ohio, was founded in 1977. In 1982 it acquired property for a meeting hall, which it developed by 1985. Later the church acquired a house near the campus of Ohio State University. When one of the original elders migrated to the Czech Republic in 2000, Titus Chu appointed three new elders. These new elders followed Titus’s work to progressively isolate the church from the fellowship of all the churches. In 2005 these elders cancelled the semiannual video training that had been a source of supply to the saints since the church’s inception. A group of saints asked the elders for and received permission to listen to audiotapes of the training in one of their own homes. The following summer, on July 30, 2006, the three elders cancelled the Lord’s table and publicly accused those who listened to the audiotapes of the semiannual training of being divisive. Twenty-three saints signed a letter expressing concern and asking the elders for a time of fellowship. Without granting such a time, the elders again used a Lord’s Day meeting on August 27 to publicly excoriate and excommunicate all twenty-three signers, barring them from entering the meeting hall. In response, the signers did not sue the church but rather asked the court to intervene to uphold their rights as members, to protect the saints against financial and other abuses, and to hold the elders accountable for irregularities. They asked for copies of the church’s financial records. The judge ruled in favor of the saints’ filing, but the elders still refused to comply. Eventually, in a negotiated settlement, the three men appointed by Titus Chu chose to take the campus house, agreed to not call themselves the church in Columbus, and ceded the meeting hall to those who chose to continue to stand as the church in Columbus. Subsequently, the three separated themselves from Titus Chu’s work and then split from one another. See also www.afaithfulword.org/reports/Standing for the church in Columbus.pdf.

Toronto

The church in Toronto was raised up through the ministry of Witness Lee beginning from 1969. After Brother Lee’s passing, however, it became manifest that elders loyal to Titus Chu were taking a different way. They severed fellowship with local churches that did not follow Titus’s ministry. They abandoned the way of life and truth and, with the excuse that young people needed such attractions, introduced worldly elements into the meetings, including rock bands and other forms of entertainment. They implemented oppressive measures to assert their authority and to disparage and intimidate those who did not agree with them, including setting up a camera in one of the church’s meeting halls to monitor what the saints were speaking. When seventy-seven church members wrote to the elders to express concern over the direction the elders were taking, they were publicly branded as “LSM-aligned,” and it was made clear that they were no longer welcome. Those loyal to Titus Chu improperly instituted new by-laws to take over the church, its properties, and its assets. Realizing that the group was no longer a genuine local church but had become a divisive sect, two hundred members left. The saints were relieved to be out from under oppression and after consideration decided not to pursue legal recourse so as not to be entangled in protracted court proceedings. In doing so, they relinquished their legitimate claim to the three meeting halls even though they had contributed much to their acquisition and maintenance. As with Mansfield and Columbus, that decision was made locally. See also www.afaithfulword.org/reports/#Toronto.

Conclusion

There are two striking points in all these cases. First, all the decisions concerning whether to seek relief from the courts were local decisions. Contrary to rumors, no legal action was initiated by LSM, DCP, or the co-workers. Being unfamiliar with legal proceedings, those who decided to go to court sought advice from both the co-workers and DCP. Nonetheless, all the decisions governing the pursuit of redress were local. Second, all the actions were taken to protect the churches from those who exercised improper “authority” to unilaterally redirect the churches and repurpose their assets. The facts do not support the accusation that LSM, DCP, or the co-workers “stole” any meeting hall.

Share:

Quenching the Flaming Darts of the Enemy

If we want to be those who are practically part of God’s corporate warrior in Ephesians 6, we must learn how to quench the flaming darts of the enemy. Verse 16 speaks of “having taken up the shield of faith, with which you will be able to quench all the flaming darts of the evil one.” These flaming darts take the form of thoughts injected into our mind that are not according to Christ (Col. 2:8; 2 Cor. 10:5). One passage in Witness Lee’s ministry identifies many categories of flaming darts:

The flaming darts are the attacks from Satan as well as his intimidation, condemnation, and accusations—his lies, delusions, temptations, tests, provocations, divisions, doubts, questionings, suggestions, instigations, stimulations, snares, attacks, criticisms, judgments, despising, mockery, jealousy, and slandering. Satan’s attacks include not only accusation and condemnation toward our conscience and intimidation toward our mind but also innumerable flaming darts coming into our being, some through our ears and some through our eyes. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1953, Volume 2, 534)

Such darts at times come directly from Satan and the evil spirits that follow him, but they also come through the agency of men who are full of their own thoughts and opinions. These thoughts and opinions find expression in their words. James 3:8 says, “But the tongue no one among men is able to tame; it is a restless evil, full of deadly poison.” Brother Lee pointed out that Darby translated the last clause in this verse as “full of death-bringing poison.” Brother Lee added:

Why can the tongue not be tamed and bridled? It is because the mind has too many thoughts. When the mind is full of thoughts, the tongue exercises to express something. The thoughts are like electricity, and the tongue is like the blades of a fan. When the electricity is flowing, the blades turn. The tongue is full of death-bringing poison because the tongue passes on the thoughts like poison darts. (Practical Lessons on the Experience of Life, 153)

Elsewhere he related the flaming darts specifically to doubts:

The shield of faith quenches all the flaming darts of the evil one (v. 16). Most of these darts are doubts. We should give up all our doubts, not only about God but even about the believers, the brothers and sisters. The enemy constantly sends darts to make us doubt others. If we accept the darts of doubting, we will have problems with the brothers. (Basic Principles for the Practice of the Church Life, 76)

Many times Satan may inject critical thoughts, even slanders, concerning the ones who take the lead in the Lord’s ministry and work. Brother Lee pointed this out, saying, “Of course, we also realized that Satan’s fiery darts are always directed at the leading ones, and the leading ones will always be the target of Satan’s attacks” (Bearing Remaining Fruit, volume 1, 126). Ultimately, Satan’s target is to undermine the building up of the church (Matt. 16:18). Brother Lee noted, “The building is the target for all the flaming darts of the enemy” (The Vision, Practice, and Building Up of the Church as the Body of Christ, 107).

Taking Up the Shield of Faith

The shield against the flaming darts, according to Ephesians 6:16, is faith. Faith is of our spirit, while doubts are the product of an unrenewed mind (Rom. 4:20; 2 Cor. 4:13). Note that Ephesians 6:16 says, “Having taken up the shield of faith,” meaning that the shield of faith is already in place as our protection when the flaming darts come. Watchman Nee’s fellowship about this is very enlightening:

We have to remember that faith is a shield (Eph. 6:16). It is not a pair of pliers. Many people use faith as if it were a pair of pliers; they try to pull out the darts that have already been lodged into the body. But faith does not function like pliers. Faith is a shield. It is something placed between ourselves and Satan. When darts come, they hit the shield and bounce back. We do not put a shield behind us. If the shield is at our backs, it will be difficult to protect us from the darts. (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Volume 41: Conferences, Messages, and Fellowship (1), 131)

How, then, do we take up the shield of faith? There are at least two aspects to taking up the shield of faith, and we must have both. One is related to long-term constitution. The other is related to our daily practice. 

Taking up the shield of faith is the fourth item of our taking up the full armor of God listed in Ephesians 6. The first three are girding our loins with truth, putting on the breastplate of righteousness, and shodding our feet with the firm foundation of the gospel of peace (vv. 14-15). Brother Lee pointed out that “the shield of faith is listed as the fourth item because a genuine exercise of faith must be founded on truth, righteousness, and peace” (The Collected Works of Witness Lee, 1953, Volume 2, 533). Thus, as Brother Lee explained, “Faith comes after truth, righteousness, and peace. If we have truth in our living, righteousness as our covering, and peace as our standing, we shall spontaneously have faith. Faith is a safeguard against the fiery darts of the enemy” (Truth Lessons, Level 3, Volume 4, 140).

To have our loins girded with truth is not merely to know the objective truths in the Bible but to know God in Christ as reality in our living. The breastplate of righteousness is for the covering of our conscience. Having our feet shod with the gospel of peace gives us a firm foundation to stand. Christ made peace through the cross (Rom. 5:1; Col. 1:20). Now He Himself is our peace for us to be one with God and with the saints (Eph. 2:14-15). Applying this peace through the cross is a firm foundation to stand against Satan’s attacks. Faith is the issue of having our loins girded with truth, having put on the breastplate of righteousness, and having our feet shod with the firm foundation of the gospel of peace. Thus, Brother Lee said, “We can exercise faith only when God becomes the reality of our human life, when our walk and conduct are righteous, and when our self has been broken by the cross so that we have no problem with God or men. This is to have the shield of faith to quench all the flaming darts of the evil one” (CWWL, 1953, Volume 2, 533).

Taking up the shield of faith is also a matter of our daily practice. Brother Nee said, “Every morning you have to lift up this faith before God. Then you will withstand temptations without even being conscious of it” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Volume 41: Conferences, Messages, and Fellowship (1), 131). In particular we need to spend time with the Lord in the Word of God when we first rise up. We need to enter into the Word to touch the reality of God in Christ as the Spirit, applying the blood of Christ to have Christ as the covering of our conscience, and to enjoy Christ as our peace with God and with our fellow members of the Body. Brother Lee told the saints, “As we are waking up in the morning, often Satan will make proposals to us. For this reason, we need to get into the Word first thing in the morning. If we are not in the Word, we shall have no covering against the Devil’s proposals” (Life-study of Ephesians, 545).

In 1978, after learning about an undermining work being carried out by an ambitious worker, Brother Lee traveled widely to minister to the saints. Many of his messages are printed in Life Messages. A point of great emphasis in his speaking was the need for every believer to have a time alone with the Lord first thing in the morning. He knew that having a personal, intimate, affectionate, and spiritual time with the Lord would strengthen the saints’ sense of life and therefore their discernment of healthy speaking versus unhealthy speaking (1 Tim. 6:3; 2 Tim. 1:13; Titus 1:9; 2:1).

Of course, we need to reject words that spread death as they come to us, but taking care of being built up in truth, righteousness, and peace and having a fresh daily, personal contact with the Lord will make us persons of faith. Such faith will be a shield with which we can quench the flaming darts of God’s enemy, whether they come to us directly or through other persons.

Share:

Properly Representing the Lord in the Exercise of Discipline

From time to time those who bear responsibility in the administration of a church must exercise a measure of discipline toward unruly members. The exercise of discipline takes as its goals restoring the erring members and protecting both the Lord’s testimony and the members of His Body. As with anything done in the Lord’s service,  the elders must first deal with the Lord so that their person is right and then exercise to be one with Him in the way that they handle matters (2 Cor. 2:10). When Paul wrote to Timothy regarding the qualifications of elders, he wrote concerning their person (1 Tim. 3:1-7). Similarly, in The Elders’ Management of the Church, after discussing what an elder has to know concerning God’s plan, His government, and His authority both in Himself and in the church, the first thing Brother Lee touched was the person of an elder. He said, “Whoever tries to consider the management of the church from the standpoint of methods is wrong. The matter must begin from the person of the elders. It is useless to change the method; the only way is to change the person” (26).

Concerning the Person of One Who Represents the Lord’s Authority

Any exercise of discipline towards saints demands much of the leading ones, both in purity and in the restraint of their own flesh (Gal. 6:1). Brother Lee likened any kind of rebuking or exposing to performing surgery. He said:

At such times, the one who does the rebuking must be sure that he himself is very clean. He is like a surgeon who must cleanse himself of all germs before performing surgery. If you have not been purified, you are not qualified to operate on someone by rebuking or exposing him, for the germs in you will cause the other to be contaminated. (Life-study of Ephesians, 428-429)

One particular germ that elders must deal with is temper. The elders’ primary responsibility is to shepherd all the saints without preference by ministering life to them. Once an elder loses his temper, he loses his ground to shepherd the saints and take the church on in life. Brother Lee told us:

The elders bear the responsibility in the church. They must deal with many chaotic things, which can easily provoke them to anger. Every situation is an opportunity for the elders to lose their temper. No one has as many opportunities to lose his temper as the elders. But the elders must not lose their temper. Once an elder loses his temper, his position, weightiness, function, and value are finished. (Serving According to Revelation, 35; see also page 65-66)

Just as a father must love his children even when he is disciplining them (Eph. 6:4; Col. 3:21), the elders, who are charged to care for the Lord’s children, must love those to whom they are administering discipline. Any kind of display of temper, such as railing against saints, whether at them or to others, disqualifies a brother from the eldership.

The New Testament presents Paul as a pattern to all the believers, both in his living and as a servant of the Lord (1 Cor. 4:16; 11:1; Phil. 3:17). He had a tender and intimate care for the saints as a nursing mother and an exhorting father (2 Thes. 3:7, 9). He poured himself out for the saints, giving himself to them night and day (2 Cor. 12:15a; Acts 20:18-20, 31). Because he allowed the cross to deal with him, Paul became a person who could supply the believers with the resurrection life (2 Cor. 4:10-12). Only such persons—pure, with their temper dealt with by the cross, and full of tender care to minister life in resurrection—will be able to properly administer discipline.

Some brothers who dispositionally like to “lord it over” others may point to Paul’s strong rebuke of the Corinthians and his charge to them to deal with a publicly known case of immorality (1 Pet. 5:3; 1 Cor. 5:13). Such brothers need to consider Paul’s words in his Second Epistle to the Corinthians. There he said of his First Epistle, “For out of much affliction and anguish of heart I wrote to you through many tears, not that you would be made sorrowful but that you would know the love which I have more abundantly toward you” (2:4). Brother Nee said of this verse:

All those who do not shed tears when they see their brothers falling and failing are not worthy to do the Lord’s work, and they are not qualified to rebuke or exhort others. If you want to rebuke a brother, or if you want to tell him about something that he has done wrong, you must first feel the pain and the sharpness of the words before you are qualified to rebuke. It is easy to point out others’ shortcomings, but it is difficult to say it with tears. However, only those who have tears are qualified to speak. (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Volume 19: Notes on Scriptural Messages (3), 496-497)

Paul’s heart for all the saints, even the weak, sinning ones, is further evidenced in 2 Corinthians 11:29: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who is stumbled, and I myself do not burn?” Brother Lee commented, “This is to burn in sorrow and indignation over the cause of the stumbling of all the fallen ones. This shows the pattern of Paul as a good shepherd, taking care of God’s flock” (The Vital Groups, 61). Sadly, too many may think that they are strong but others are weak and may condemn and despise members who stumble.  Paul did not consider himself as strong and others as weak. Rather, he said that he would boast in the things of his weakness that the power of Christ might tabernacle over him (v. 30; 12:5, 9). Brother Lee described Paul’s deep sense of identification with the weak ones and burning at their stumbling as an expression of the consciousness of the Body (The Church as the Body of Christ, 196). Those who belittle other saints do not know themselves and are not qualified to touch the Lord’s administration. 

Being Proper in the Administration of Discipline

Once their person has been dealt with by the Lord, the elders still need to learn to handle matters related to disciplining sinning ones in a way that properly represents the Lord and cares for His interest. In chapters 6 and 7 of Elders’ Training Book 4: Other Crucial Matters Concerning the Practice of the Lord’s Recovery (ET 4), Brother Lee spoke at length about discipline that could lead to a saint losing the fellowship of the church. All the leading ones should study the principles our brother presented in these chapters. These principles include not acting in haste; exercising love toward the one being disciplined; not acting without assurance and clarity; not needing to make a public announcement; not overpunishing; considering the feeling of and effect on other churches; laboring much in life; and acting by wisdom, with patience, and in love. He spoke at length concerning the care that elders must exercise to not damage the reputation of families or individuals and to not expose the church to the risk of legal action.

Those who bear responsibility in the church should represent God according to what He is in His divine attributes. The Old Testament shows Him to be a God who is longsuffering (Exo. 34:6) and full of love (Jer. 31:3), mercy (Psa. 78:38), compassion (Neh. 9:31; Zech. 1:16), and lovingkindness (Lam. 3:22; Micah 7:18) toward His people, even though they may be unfaithful to Him, turning away from Him to idols and all kinds of degradation. Still, His heart was to restore them. The discipline He exercises toward those who are His is an expression of His love for them (Heb. 12:6). The elders should be the same. Their hope is to restore the sinning ones (Matt. 18:15). Even if the disciplined ones reject their correction, the elders should still pray for them (vv. 18-20).

The elders have no freedom to act according to their own will and disposition. Rather, they must desperately seek the Lord to know His mind and be one with Him. As Brother Lee explained, the elders must balance care for the Lord’s testimony with care for the saints: “For God’s holiness, God’s righteousness, and even the church’s testimony, we must deal with the sinful member, yet our dealing should be by wisdom, with patience, and in love” (ET 4, 89). He added:

The principle is “with wisdom in love.” This must be the atmosphere in the church. We love not only the good ones but also the sinful ones. This, however, does not mean that we are light or loose. We are very strict, yet we carry out such dealings with patience, with much wisdom, and in love. We must receive the saints properly in our locality so that all the local churches can go along with us.  (ET 4, 89)

Conclusion

The elders bear a tremendous responsibility in the church. They must be “patterns to the saints in their person, their conduct, and their handling of church affairs (1 Pet. 5:3; Heb. 13:7). They must exercise to be pure, to be dealt with by the Lord, and to minister life to the saints through tender, shepherding care, bearing the saints, even the sinning ones, in love. They must protect the Lord’s testimony yet carry out any discipline toward the saints with patience, with much wisdom, and in love. In this way they can be factors to maintain the churches in peace and oneness under the Lord’s blessing.

Share:

Authority and Fellowship

God desires to establish His kingdom on the earth through a group of people who stand against all forms of rebellion and come absolutely under His authority. Establishing God’s authority over the earth is a great matter in the Bible, but fallen men have miscast divine authority according to natural human concepts and have even falsely claimed authority as God’s representatives. The Greek word—exousia (ἐξουσίᾳ)—that is translated “authority” is a compound word. Ex means “out of” or “out from,” while ousia means “being.” God’s authority issues out of His very being. If you meet God, you meet authority. If you have never met God, you have never met authority. Moreover, if a person exercises “authority” in God’s name but we do not meet God in that exercise of “authority,” either that “authority” is man’s presumption or we ourselves have some kind of insulation toward God.

Revelation 22:1 makes the relationship between authority and fellowship clear. Speaking of the New Jerusalem it says, “And he showed me a river of water of life, bright as crystal, proceeding out of the throne of God and of the Lamb in the middle of its street.” The relationship between the throne of God and the river of water of life is reciprocal and wonderful. The river issues from the throne and brings the throne wherever it goes. When we come under God’s ruling, we immediately sense the flowing of the Spirit within, which is the Spirit’s fellowship (2 Cor. 13:14). Moreover, when we enter into genuine fellowship with the Lord, two things happen: we touch the flow of the divine life and we are brought under the Lord’s Headship. As Brother Lee explained:

According to the picture in Revelation, the river of water of life flows out of the throne. This, in turn, signifies that the flow of life, the fellowship of life, conveys the authority of the throne. The authority of the throne is present wherever the river flows. Authority and fellowship, the two main components of the New Jerusalem, are coordinated. The authority of the throne flows to every part of the city through the fellowship of life; the entire city is in fellowship and under authority. (The Priesthood and God’s Building, 29)

In the next chapter he added, “On the one hand, wherever there is the throne, there is the flow of life, the fellowship of life. On the other hand, the fellowship of life ushers in the authority of the throne; that is, wherever the river of water of life flows, there is the authority of the throne” (The Priesthood and God’s Building, 42).

Fellowship has both a vertical aspect with God and a horizontal aspect with our fellow members of the Body of Christ. These two aspects are interwoven. Our fellowship with God in Christ is the basis of our fellowship with our fellow believers, and genuine fellowship with others brings us into the fellowship of the Spirit, which is the flow of the river of water of life (1 John 1:3). Horizontal fellowship is characterized by mutuality with honoring of and respect for one another. In such fellowship we meet God, and thus we meet authority. The Lord’s authority comes to us as fellowship both directly in our personal fellowship with the Lord and through our fellow believers. When the Spirit flows out of someone to us, that flowing has the element of the Lord’s heading up in it. Though we may not talk about any issue of concern, we may be left with a clear sense of the Lord’s feeling. This happens because any fellowship in the divine life imparts God, and where God is, there is authority. We may feel rebuked by the Lord within, yet at the same time we feel refreshed by the Spirit and brought back to a proper relationship to Him as our Lord. Any “fellowship” that does not bring us to meet God and come under His authority is not the real fellowship spoken of in the Bible, and any exercise of authority that does not bring us into fellowship with God in Christ as the Spirit is not the genuine authority.

This picture has great implications for the service of the elders and how they represent and express the Lord’s authority. Brother Lee explained:

The eldership, that is, the representation of the headship, must be exercised through the flow of life. Although the throne is the throne of authority, the throne of headship, out of the throne flows the river of water of life. When you look at the throne, you see authority and headship. But when you look at the river, you see the water of life and the tree of life. This indicates that proper eldership is not the exercise of authority over others; it is the flowing of life into them. We are reigning, but we do not reign by authority; we reign through the flowing of the inner life. (Life-study of Revelation, 760-761)

Thus, those who exercise authority in the Lord’s name must themselves be under His authority and carry out their eldership by flowing out the divine life. 

The issue of the throne and the river, of the divine authority and fellowship, is marvelous. God as light shines in Christ as the lamp from the throne, the river flows in the midst of a golden street, and the tree of life grows in the river. The light with the lamp indicates that God rules by shining, and the golden street shows that the Christian walk under God’s ruling in the flow of the divine life is governed by God’s divine nature. When we have fellowship with the Lord, we come under His shining. Furthermore, when we abide in the Lord’s fellowship under His ruling through His inward shining, we are able to walk according to the divine nature. It is as we walk in this divine nature in the fellowship of the Holy Spirit that Christ as the tree of life grows and supplies us.

The flow of God as life in man brings in light and the way. Revelation 21 mentions light and the street (vv. 23-24, 21). This street follows the flow of life, and the light is God in the Lamb. God is light to man, and He is also man’s way. (The Priesthood and God’s Building, 87)

This river of life flows in the midst of the golden street, and along this flowing river there is the tree of life, which is a vine growing along the river as our rich life supply. The throne is here, waiting for us to submit to the headship and authority of the redeeming God. As soon as we submit to this headship, the life-giving Spirit immediately flows within us, and we find ourselves on the golden street. As we walk along the golden street, we find that the inward flowing of the life-giving Spirit is marvelous, refreshing, satisfying, and supplying. It would take a great many words to adequately describe this flow within us. Along this flow of the living water there are the riches of the tree of life that grows by the flow of the river. This means that where the flow of the river is, there is the tree of life to supply us. In my experience I have a throne, the flowing of the water of life, and Christ as the tree of life growing within me in a very practical way. This is not a doctrinal understanding; it is absolutely a matter of experience in life. (Life-study of Revelation, 750)

The throne and the river should guide us in our practice of fellowship and help us to discern what is genuine spiritual authority. Some may claim a measure of spiritual authority, yet their way is not in the fellowship of the divine life and does not impart life. In extreme cases their assertions of authority may grieve the Holy Spirit with corrupt words in bitterness, anger, wrath, clamor, evil speaking, and malice rather than “that which is good for building up, according to the need, that it may give grace to those who hear” (Eph. 4:29-31). Such exercise of authority does not bring God to people or bring people to God. It is, therefore, not genuine spiritual authority, because God is the unique authority, and if He is absent, authority is absent. Those who vociferously argue for their own authority do not know God, do not flow out God, and therefore have no real authority from God.

We should deal with anything that hinders our fellowship with the Lord and with our fellow members in the Body. The Lord’s table displays our vertical fellowship with God through Christ and our common participation in Christ and His salvation with our fellow members in the Body. Concerning taking the elements at the Lord’s table, 1 Corinthians 11:28 and 29 say, “But let a man prove himself, and in this way let him eat of the bread and drink of the cup. For he who eats and drinks, eats and drinks judgment to himself if he does not discern the body.” To discern the body is both to discern the Lord’s physical body that He gave for us and His mystical Body, including all those who have been called into the fellowship of God’s Son (1:9). In our coming to the Lord’s table, the Lord may shine upon us. If we have offended others, we need to seek reconciliation (Rom. 12:18; Matt. 5:23-24). Moreover, if we harbor any offense in our hearts, even if we have been wronged by others and they have not apologized to us, this negates the effectiveness of the rule of Christ in us and hinders our fellowship with God and with others (Matt. 6:14-15; Col. 3:13-15). Dealing with such matters thoroughly before the Lord restores us to His fellowship and to His inward ruling. Dear saints, may we all treasure the throne and the river that we may be those who live in the fellowship of the divine life under the inward ruling of God so that He has a way to establish His kingdom in us and ultimately through us.

Share:

Obsession and Subjectivity

Obsession

In the 1930s Brother Watchman Nee gave a word concerning “Obsession and God’s Light” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee [CWWN], Vol. 36: Central Messages, 257-271). His speaking should help us discern dissenting speakings directed at the Lord’s recovery in general and at the leadership in His recovery in particular. Brother Nee began by contrasting lying with obsession. He said:

If a man does something wrong, yet stubbornly says with his mouth that it is right, this is lying. But if a man does something wrong, and not only says with his mouth but even believes in his heart that it is right, this is obsession. Lying is being stubborn outside and being shriveled inside. In this case, the more confident one is outwardly, the more timid he is inwardly. But obsession is being stubborn both outwardly and inwardly. It is being confident both outwardly and inwardly to the extent that even the conscience seems to justify the act. (258-259)

He then described the symptom of obsession:

The symptom of obsession is thinking and believing that a wrong thing is right to the point that one cannot say that it is wrong. This is being obsessed. There are those who imagine that something is happening with others when nothing actually is happening. The imagination goes so far that they become convinced of a certain matter, and they even come up with proofs and evidences to support their imagination. This also is obsession. (259)

He listed a number of manifestations of obsession. One that is particularly pertinent to the situation of some dissenting ones today relates to speculations:

Some Christians are obsessed with speculations. Because of the lack of light, they often take speculation as fact. First they speculate that certain people would do certain things, go to certain places, and say certain words. Later, they believe that the person has indeed done these things, been to those places, and said those words. They can become so obsessed that they consider that something is there when it is actually not there. It may clearly be a case of wrongly blaming a person, but they believe that they have the facts. This is obsession. It is obsession to think that a person is a certain way when he really is not, or to believe that a certain person has done certain things when he really has not. Being obsessed is taking speculations as reality. (264)

A person may be very convincing precisely because he himself is convinced with absolute certainty of the rightness of his speculations.

Brother Nee’s words should help us discern the situation among us today. Some have propagated rumors without factual basis. Based upon personal, subjective interpretations of events, some have put forth much speculation concerning certain matters and have characterized others as being a certain way and as having done certain things without proof. When the lack of factual basis has been pointed out, those who spread such rumors have become defensive and self-vindicating, refusing to accept any correction. This is obsession. Some have fostered speculation by promulgating rhetorical, accusatory questions designed to arouse suspicions (1 Tim. 6:4). These speculations are a contagion of questionings and compound the errors made and the resultant damages. Such obsession can occur with leading ones as well as with other saints, some of whom, under contemporary social influences, may insist on the unchallengeable validity of their own opinions as “my truth.”

Subjectivity

In a fellowship with responsible brothers in Hong Kong in 1950, Brother Nee spoke concerning subjectivity, which is closely related to obsession:

In the meetings a brother may stand up to correct something. His correction may not be accurate, but he may consider himself to be perfectly right. If, in the course of their fellowship, all the brothers feel that something was wrong with this one’s correction, he should put a question mark on what he thinks is right. Such fellowship will deliver us out of subjectivity and enable us to touch the thought of the Holy Spirit more. (CWWN, Vol. 62: Mature Leadings in the Lord’s Recovery (2), 344)

Brother Nee spoke of unwillingness to receive correction from others as a sign of subjectivity:

Subjectivity means a reluctance to accept or to be corrected. It means to have one’s own opinion from the very beginning and to always insist on this opinion. A subjective person arrives at his own judgment before he hears anything from the Lord, before the facts are unfolded, and before others present their opinions. He insists on his judgment even after hearing something from the Lord, after the facts are unfolded, and after others have presented their side of the matter. This is the meaning of being subjective. The root cause of subjectivity is a self that has never been broken. When a man’s self is not broken, he has a stubborn view of things, and these opinions are hard to break and correct. (CWWN, Vol. 52: The Character of the Lord’s Worker, 109)

He described the opinions of a subjective person as being an impregnable fortress:

We have previously said that a great problem with God’s workers is that they cannot listen to others. The chief reason behind not being able to listen to others is subjectivity. When a person is subjective, he is filled up with all sorts of things. His opinions become an impregnable fortress, and his ideas are unchangeable. (110)

Brother Nee went further to describe a subjective man as one who insists on his point of view:

A subjective man is not necessarily a faithful man. A faithful man speaks because he has to speak. He does not speak because he likes to speak or because he has a lust for speaking. A faithful man speaks because he does not want others to fall into error. He does not speak out of a lust for speaking. If a faithful man finds that his words are rejected, he does not feel dejected; he can turn away. But a subjective man is different. He has a lust to speak, and if he does not speak, he feels unhappy. He has a habit of opening his mouth every time he sees something. Do you see the difference? A subjective man speaks because he likes to speak; he likes to impose his will upon others. He likes to dominate others with his ideas and have others listen to his words. A subjective person finds it difficult to accept the rejection of his will. Brothers and sisters, a subjective man is totally different from a faithful man. We should be faithful. Many times, it is wrong if we do not open our mouth. But we must differentiate between faithfulness and subjectivity. A subjective person likes to meddle with others’ affairs. He likes others to listen to his words. He likes to control others in everything. He gives orders to this person and directions to that person. He considers his methods the first and the best, and his ways the most perfect. He wants everybody to take his way. (122)

The Lord’s way in His Body is that we all should be subject to the correction of the Body.

All leadings should pass the test of Body fellowship. Every leading of the Body comes to us through other members. Human subjectivity can become a great obstacle. As soon as a man becomes subjective, he will not be able to receive leadings from other members. We have to learn to submit to the church and to go along with others’ opinions. Thinking that we are always right is extreme arrogance. The supply of the Body and the leading of the Body often are one and the same thing. (CWWN, Vol. 60: Miscellaneous Records of the Kuling Training (2), 263-264)

When we encounter brothers or sisters who are absolutely certain of their rightness, we should realize that such persons may simply be obsessed with their own opinions and want to impose them on others. We should learn to discern what is mere speculation and subjective opinion. Moreover, we should sense whether a speaking is according to the tree of life or according to the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, that is, according to arguments concerning right and wrong. Some words minister life; others impart death. We should receive only words that spring from a desire to diligently keep the oneness of the Spirit for the building up of the Body (Eph. 4:2, 16).

Share:

Magnifying Christ in the Midst of Turmoil

The book of Philippians shows us the great need that believers have in times of turmoil. The church in Philippi was a very good church that participated with the apostle Paul in the furtherance of the gospel (Phil. 1:5-7; 4:14-19). However, it had two problems—Judaizers who sought to bring the believers back under the bondage of the law (Phil. 3:2-4) and internal dissension (1:27; 2:1-4; 4:2-3). Of this book Brother Nee said, “Philippians does not talk about such profound doctrines as those contained in Ephesians and Colossians; rather, it emphasizes one thing: freedom from disputes” (CWWN, Volume 8: The Present Testimony (1), 165). Paul’s antidote to these problems was the normal experience of Christ that produces people who live and magnify Him in every circumstance.

In chapter 1 Paul put himself forward as an example of one who did not strive against others but who lived and magnified Christ by the bountiful supply of the Spirit for the furtherance of the gospel (1:18-21). In chapter 2 he charged the Philippians to work out their own salvation by cooperating with the inner operating God to let the mind of Christ be in them so that they could live a crucified life according to His pattern and become luminaries holding forth the word of life (2:12-13, 5-8, 15-16). In chapter 3 he testified of counting all things loss on account of the excellency of the knowledge of Christ; of seeking to know Him, the power of His resurrection, and the fellowship of His sufferings; and of pursuing to gain Christ to the uttermost (3:8, 10, 12, 14). In chapter 4 he spoke of being able to do all things in Christ who empowered him (4:13).

We need to read the Bible carefully to get Paul’s meaning in Philippians 4. In verses 5 through 9 Paul listed some excellent characteristics that should be seen in the believers’ living. Verse 5 says, “Let your forbearance be known to all men. The Lord is near.” The word forbearance means to be easily satisfied in our dealings with others, even with less than our due; it also means a sweet reasonableness. Brother Lee described it as “an all-inclusive virtue” (Life-study of Philippians, 494). Verse 8 says, “Finally, brothers, what things are true, what things are dignified, what things are righteous, what things are pure, what things are lovely, what things are well spoken of, if there is any virtue and if any praise, take account of these things.” In verse 9 Paul exhorted the Philippians, saying, “The things which you have also learned and received and heard and seen in me, practice these things; and the God of peace will be with you.” The virtues in verses 5 and 8 that Paul exhorted the Philippians to practice are the things they learned and received and heard from him as one who lived Christ. They are also the “all things” spoken of in verse 13, where Paul said, “I am able to do all things in Him who empowers me.” Brother Lee explained what it means in context to do all things in Christ:

In this verse to do all things does not refer to healing the sick, performing miracles, or speaking in tongues. Paul does not say that he was able to do all things in this way. Paul says that he was able to do all things to be true, honorable, righteous, pure, lovely, well spoken of, full of virtues, and worthy of praise. Paul was able to do all these things in Christ who empowered him. (The Secret of Experiencing Christ, 83)

On one hand, these virtues are the expression of a life that lives Christ.

In God’s economy Christ lives in us as our life and lives Himself out of us. He no longer lives directly on earth but lives through us. This means that His resurrected life is expressed and magnified in our human life. The first six items in verse 8 imply every human virtue. To speak of expressing or magnifying Christ is to speak in general terms. Verse 8 defines the specific aspects in which we need to express and magnify Christ. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1980, vol. 2, 411)

Paul surely manifested these virtues in his living and magnifying Christ. On the other hand, the virtues described in Philippians 4:5-9 should guide our pursuit of Christ. Brother Lee explained, “The way for us to pursue Christ that we may gain Him is to live a life that is true, dignified, righteous, pure, lovely, and well spoken of with Christ as the content. We need to live a life that is full of Christ expressed through our human virtues, which are containers to be filled with Christ as the reality” (414). Whenever we touch something or consider to do or say something, we should consider whether it is true, dignified, righteous, pure, lovely, and well spoken of. Thus, these virtues become measures for our living.

When we live Christ, who is the embodiment of God with all the attributes of God, He fills up all our empty virtues. God’s attributes then become our virtues. Thus, living Christ makes us very human. We should not only be spiritual and heavenly but also be true, dignified, righteous, pure, lovely, and well spoken of. These human virtues with the divine attributes are the detailed expression of the Christ we live and magnify. If we are not lovely and dignified, we are not expressing Christ. If we do not live a dignified life, we are not living Christ. (The Experience & Growth in Life, 89)

Considering the virtues Paul listed in verse 8 should not only guide us in our own speaking and conduct but also help us to discern these things in others. Are the words and conduct of those who oppose or dissent true, dignified, righteous, pure, lovely, and well spoken of? We should not be deceived by someone’s seemingly persuasive arguments or emotional appeals.  Brother Lee said of the dissenting ones in Philippi, “We may speak of spiritual things, but our person may not be true, dignified, righteous, pure, and lovely” (The Experience & Growth in Life, 94)

Paul testified that Christ empowered him to live out such virtues in any circumstance, presenting himself as a pattern of living and magnifying Christ in the midst of turmoil (1 Cor. 4:16). He said, “I know also how to be abased, and I know how to abound; in everything and in all things I have learned the secret both to be filled and to hunger, both to abound and to lack.” The apostle Paul is surely a pattern to saints who feel that they have been mistreated. In the midst of his manifold sufferings (2 Cor. 11:23-27; Phil. 1:17), he still magnified Christ by manifesting the divine attributes in his human virtues (1:19-20). Concerning Philippians 4:8 Brother Lee commented:

When Paul was abased and when he was abounding, in his human living, others could see the virtues listed in verse 8. He was true, dignified, righteous, pure, lovely, and well spoken of. These six aspects are various characteristics of Paul’s living that were a genuine expression of Christ. (CWWL, 1980, vol. 2, 413)

In chapter 4 Paul applies the revelations concerning the experience of Christ in chapters 1 through 3 to the believers’ practical daily living, particularly to relationships in the church. Euodias and Syntyche were two sisters who had been helpful to Paul, but there was friction between them (v. 2). Paul’s words concerning forbearance in verse 5, the virtues mentioned in verse 8, and being empowered in Christ to live out the virtues of His life in verse 13 speak directly to that situation. As Brother Lee explained, based on Paul’s words in Philippians, “The Christ-experiencing-and-enjoying life is a life in the furtherance of the gospel, a gospel-preaching life, not individualistic but corporate. Hence, there is ‘the fellowship unto the gospel.’ The more fellowship we have in the furtherance of the gospel, the more Christ we experience and enjoy” (Life-study of Philippians, 13). Paul intervened because he realized that the discord between Euodias and Syntyche, which some might see as a purely local matter, was hindering the advance of the gospel. Discord damages the believers’ fellowship unto the gospel and frustrates their experience of Christ, their growth in life, and the furtherance of the gospel (1 Cor. 1:9-10; 3:3; Phil. 1:27).

The secret to being those who experience Christ and through whom the gospel can advance is to be in one accord. As Brother Lee pointed out, “The landmark that divides the Gospels and the Acts was not the baptism in the Holy Spirit. The landmark was the one accord of the one hundred twenty” (Elders’ Training, Book 7: One Accord for the Lord’s Move, 19). This one accord brought in the baptism of the Spirit, which initiated the Lord’s move through His Body. Of this one accord Brother Lee said, “The one accord is the ‘master key to all the rooms,’ the master key to every blessing in the New Testament. This is why Paul told Euodias and Syntyche that they needed this one accord (Phil. 4:2)” (19-20). The secret of maintaining the one accord is the virtues listed in 4:5-9 as the expression of the life of Christ. Thus, Brother Lee summed up chapter 4 of Philippians, saying: 

The book of Philippians ends with a life not dissenting with others, full of forbearance, without anxiety, and full of human virtues. Philippians ends with a person who is so true, dignified, righteous, pure, lovely, and well spoken of. Such a person is full of human virtues with the divine attributes as their contents to express Christ in a human way. We also should be such persons. The secret of such a life is Christ, the One who empowers us. (The Experience & Growth in Life, 90)

May we seek to be those who live out the virtues of Christ for His magnification in every circumstance, even in the midst of turmoils. To bear such a testimony is to live His overcoming life for His glory.

Share:

A Balanced View of the Elders’ Authority

Every truth in the Bible has two sides that must be held in balance. This fact reflects the natural law in God’s creation, as Brother Witness Lee explained:

According to the natural law in God’s creation, there is the law of balance. Nothing can exist without having two sides. For example, the earth exists because of two forces: centrifugal force thrusts the earth away, and centripetal force holds it back. This is the balance of power. All the truths in the Bible also have two sides. In order to hold a biblical truth properly, we must hold both sides of it. (Young People’s Training, 74-75)

Therefore, it is crucial that those who minister the Word be those who are “cutting straight the word of the truth” (2 Tim. 2:15). To take any truth in the Bible in an unbalanced fashion leads to extremism and error, issuing in spiritual ruin.

After the Lord fasted for forty days and nights before initiating His earthly ministry, Satan came to tempt Him. When the Lord answered his first temptation by quoting Deuteronomy, Satan tempted Him with a passage from Scripture. In response “Jesus said to him, Again, it is written, You shall not test the Lord your God” (Matt. 4:7). Brother Lee pointed out that in interpreting the Bible we should pay attention to the principle of “Again, it is written”:

All those who love and fear the Lord want to walk according to the Bible. The devil cannot stop us from following the Bible or walking according to the Bible. He can only use other ways, one of which is to cause us to follow the Bible in an isolated way. In this way we are driven to the extreme and forget the words that say “again it is written.”

This word “again” is too big a word. We should put a circle around it. This shows us that when we follow the Bible, we should not do so in an isolated way. We should consider both sides and even all sides. No single portion of the Bible can represent the whole truth, in the same way that no one face of a house can represent the whole house completely. (The Collected Works of Witness Lee [CWWL], 1959, vol. 3, 393)

We need to exercise particular care to have a balanced understanding of the Bible’s teaching on authority. On the one hand, the Lord Jesus has all authority in heaven and on earth (Matt. 28:18). On the other hand, in His Body He raises up men to work together with Him among the churches, and He places men as overseers in the local churches to shepherd His flock (Acts 20:28; 1 Pet. 5:2). Though He does not cede any of His authority to them, they do express and represent His authority in the church universally and in the local churches respectively. This is what is meant by the term delegated authority. This does not mean that anyone has authority in himself. If any brother appropriates the Lord’s authority to himself personally, he is essentially making the error of Diotrephes (3 John 9). In general, proper authority is carried out through ministry, although occasionally it is exercised administratively.

In the practice of the local church life for the building up of the Body of Christ, we must maintain a proper balance. On the one hand, the Body of Christ is expressed practically in many local churches, each with its own administration before the Lord. On the other hand, no local church can be absolutely autonomous or independent from the others, and the elders in the church are particularly responsible before the Lord to care for the fellowship of the Body and the sense of the Body as a whole. Furthermore, although the elders represent and express the Lord’s authority in a local church, their exercise of authority is not without bounds.

In a sense, a local church may be considered as a family. In a proper family, the parents express and represent the Lord’s authority. This enables the children to grow properly. However, the exercise of discipline should be carried out in love with a desire for all the children’s benefit. Furthermore, the parents’ exercise of authority is not without limit. If the parents become abusive or the children’s needs are neglected, it is necessary and right for the appropriate authorities to step in. The decision to do so is always a difficult one and should be the exception rather than the rule.

Elders are appointed by the apostles in collaboration with the Holy Spirit to express and represent the Lord’s authority in a local church (Acts 14:23; 20:28; Titus 1:5), but this authority must be exercised in love toward all the saints. The elders should avoid taking sides in personal disputes. Rather, they must maintain their standing as shepherds of the entire flock in order to minister Christ as life to all the members (1 Pet. 5:3). If a brother asserts that the elders in a local church have unbounded, absolute authority in matters pertaining to the church in their locality, even using selected excerpts from the ministry to buttress his claim, we must be clear that balanced and fair readings of both the Bible and the ministry of Brother Nee and Brother Lee contradict this claim.

In a family the parents must exercise a measure of discipline. It is the same in the church. However, the elders should exercise discipline as little as possible. Furthermore, there is provision in the apostles’ teaching, particularly in two portions of the Word, if an elder fails in exercising authority properly. The first portion is in 1 Corinthians. When disorder engulfed the church in Corinth, those of the household of Chloe informed the apostle Paul (1 Cor. 1:11). They realized that they did not have the measure or standing to address the situation, but that Paul did. First Corinthians is Paul’s response to this and other reports (5:1) that he received. In his Epistle Paul gave several charges to the Corinthian believers, including charging the brothers in responsibility to discipline a sinning member (5:13b). Later, he told them, “And the rest I will set in order when I come” (11:34). This shows that the apostles still had the right and responsibility to intervene in a situation of disorder.

The second portion is 1 Timothy 5:19. There Paul told his younger co-worker Timothy, “Against an elder do not receive an accusation, except based upon two or three witnesses.” Implicit in this charge is an indication that the apostles who appoint elders also have the right and responsibility to deal with disorderly elders, including the removal of an elder if necessary. In neither of these cases is there any indication that the apostles should take over the administration of the local church. Rather, they address the problems that trouble and stumble the saints in the church but leave the administration of the church in the hands of the elders.

Knowing that intervention may temporarily disturb a situation further, the co-workers who function as apostles take such actions infrequently and only after extensive efforts to help the offending ones to be adjusted in their treatment of saints and handling of affairs. Nevertheless, intervention is sometimes necessary, as Paul indicates in his Epistles and Watchman Nee and Witness Lee pointed out throughout their ministry. In Brother Nee’s first extensive talks on the practice of the church life, he said of 1 Timothy 5:19, “The apostles and those whom they have specifically assigned should be responsible for handling such accusations.” He added, “Since they are responsible for appointing elders, they are also responsible for dealing with elders” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Vol. 22: The Assembly Life & The Prayer Ministry of the Church, 30). In his later ministry he said, “The authority for the appointment of the elders is with the apostles, and the authority for the removal of the elders is also with the apostles. A local church cannot expel an elder; rather, the apostles need to bear the responsibility of removing elders. This is the reason why the letter of accusation by two or three was sent to Timothy” (The Collected Works of Watchman Nee, Vol. 51: Church Affairs, 143).

Brother Lee spoke of these matters over twenty times during the course of his ministry, particularly when faced with problems in the Far East in 1965 and in the United States and elsewhere in the late 1980s. In 1965 he said:

When a local church acts in a proper manner, there is no need for the apostles to intervene, but this is not to say that the apostles cannot intervene. Although a local church is under the leading of the elders, if the elders or the church do not act according to proper principles under the leading of the apostles, the apostles still have the right to intervene. (CWWL, 1965, Vol. 4, 186)

In 1988 he said:

To whom should an accusation against an elder be made? The answer is clearly that it should be made to the apostles. This is another strong proof that after an apostle has appointed elders, the elders are still under the apostle’s authority and management. After they have appointed men as elders, the apostles still have the authority to deal with the elders, even to judge, condemn, and reprove the elders. This is the clear word of the Bible. (CWWL, 1988, Vol. 3, 281)

These matters are not part of the central line of the Bible. Hence, they are not focal points in the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee. However, knowing the truth in a balanced way will help us navigate troubles that come upon the churches from time to time.

Share:

Should We Not Warn One Another?

The apostle Paul told Timothy, “For the time will come when they will not tolerate the healthy teaching; but according to their own lusts they will heap up to themselves teachers, having itching ears, and they will turn away their ear from the truth and will be turned aside to myths” (2 Tim. 4:3-4). In today’s age of uncertainty, we see Paul’s words fulfilled. Many Christian teachers avoid the warnings that occur throughout the New Testament, and many believers have ears only for words of comfort and affirmation. Those who seek such affirmation find it uncomfortable to hear the sober words of warning in the Bible. Discomfort aside, the many warnings in the New Testament embody healthy words that should alert all believers to consider their life and work before the Lord in the light of His coming judgment of His people (2 Cor. 5:10). If we are to be faithful to the Lord, we should heed these warnings for ourselves and warn others out of a proper heart and motive.

The Lord Jesus spoke two parables to His disciples in Matthew 25 warning them concerning what kind of life His saved ones should live and their need to be faithful in their service to Him. The first, the parable of the ten virgins—five prudent and five foolish—addresses the need of watchfulness for our living before the Lord (vv. 1-13). As prudent followers of Jesus, while we await His return, we should be watchful concerning our living to the extent that we gain a supply of the oil (the Spirit, v. 3; cf. Isa. 61:1) sufficient not only for our lamp (our regenerated spirit, Matt. 25:3; cf. Prov. 20:27) but also for our vessel (our soul, Matt. 25:4). The state of the five foolish virgins who missed the wedding feast is a warning to us of the real danger that if we live an unwatchful Christian life, we will miss something precious—the reward of the wedding feast in the kingdom (v. 10) (See Life-study of Matthew, Message 64).

The second is the parable of the talents (Matt. 25:14-30). In it “a man,” signifying Christ, distributed his wealth to “his own slaves,” signifying the believers, as he was about to leave on a journey, and he settled accounts with them upon his return. Those slaves who were faithful and had gained a profit by their labor were generously rewarded, but the unfaithful slave who returned only what he had been given was rebuked and severely punished. This parable warns us that, as slaves of our Lord who are gifted by Him for His work, we will be judged at His return to determine our faithfulness and whether our labor merits reward or warrants loss. The punishing of the unfaithful slaves is a warning that our Christian work may not be acceptable to the Lord and may result in the loss of our participation in the ruling aspect of the coming kingdom. (See Life-study of Matthew, Message 65)

Warnings in Paul’s Epistles

Paul warned the New Testament believers about the same matters covered by the Lord in the two parables in Matthew 25, saying that they should take heed both to their living before the Lord and their service to Him, as the following examples from 1 Corinthians, Hebrews, and Colossians show.

In 1 Corinthians Paul used the example of the children of Israel wandering in the wilderness as a warning to the troubled church in Corinth (10:1-13). The children of Israel had a good beginning to their journey. All “passed through the sea,” “were baptized…in the cloud and in the sea” (in the Spirit and in water), “ate the same spiritual food,” and “drank the same spiritual drink” (vv. 1-4). Despite such a good beginning, “with most of them God was not well pleased, for they were strewn along in the wilderness” (v. 5). All but the two overcomers, Joshua and Caleb, perished without reaching the good land. Paul then says, “Now these things occurred as examples to us…” (v. 6); this is a warning to us, the current sojourners on the way, to live an overcoming Christian life. Brother Lee wrote:

This book [First Corinthians] takes the history of the children of Israel in the Old Testament as a type of the New Testament believers…They [the Corinthians] are warned here (v. 11) not to repeat the history of the children of Israel in doing evil against God, as illustrated in vv. 6-11…This should be a solemn warning to all New Testament believers. It was especially applicable to the Corinthians, who were in danger of repeating the failure of the children of Israel in the wilderness.  (Holy Bible Recovery Version [RcV], 1 Corinthians 10:6, Footnote 1)

Paul also warned the Corinthian believers to consider how they labored in building the church (3:10-17). He laid Christ as the foundation of the church in Corinth and warned the Corinthian believers saying, “But let each man take heed how he builds upon it [the foundation]” (vv. 10-11). To take heed means to be warned. Paul’s warning had the coming judgment seat of Christ in view, when all believers’ works will be judged (2 Cor. 5:10, Rom. 14:10). Whether believers are rewarded or suffer loss will depend upon what kind of material they build with, either precious—gold, silver, and precious stones, signifying the Triune God experienced in His salvation—or worthless— wood, grass, and stubble, signifying what man is in his natural life (1 Cor. 3:12-15).

“Gold, silver, and precious stones signify the various experiences of Christ in the virtues and attributes of the Triune God. It is with these that the apostles and all spiritual believers build the church on the unique foundation of Christ.” (RcV, 1 Cor. 3:12, Footnote 2)

All the precious materials can withstand the fire of the coming judgment (v. 13). Wood, grass, and stubble cannot.

Wood, grass, and stubble signify the knowledge, realization, and attainments that come from the believers’ natural background…and the natural way of living (which is mainly in the soul and is the natural life)” (RcV, 1 Cor. 3:12, Footnote 3)

We must take heed as to how we build the church because Christ’s second coming will manifest what kind of work we have done (v. 13). Concerning this Paul warns, “If anyone’s work which he has built upon the foundation remains, he will receive a reward; if anyone’s work is consumed, he will suffer loss, but he himself will be saved, yet so as through fire” (vv. 14-15).

The book of Hebrews has five major warnings. The first warns us to give heed to what is spoken about the Son (Heb. 2:1-4). The second tells us not to come short of the promised rest (3:7-4:13). The third admonishes us to be brought on to maturity (5:11-6:20). The fourth exhorts us to come forward to Christ and not shrink back (10:19-39) and warns us not to forsake our assembling together (v. 25). The fifth calls us to run the race and not fall away from grace (12:1-29). All contain sober words such as “let us fear therefore…” (4:1), “‘The Lord will judge His people.’ It is a fearful thing to fall into the hands of the living God” (10:30-31), and “For our God is also a consuming fire” (12:29).

Concerning the warnings in Colossians Brother Lee wrote,

In the short book of Colossians, Paul gives a number of warnings. In 2:4 he says, “This I say that no one may delude you with persuasive speech.” In 2:8 he says, “Beware that no one carries you off as spoil through his philosophy and empty deceit.” In 2:16 Paul warns the Colossian believers to let no one judge them in eating, drinking, or in respect of feasts, new moons, or of Sabbaths. In verse 18 Paul says, “Let no one purposely defraud you of your prize.” Paul realized that many things were there to be utilized to lead the believers astray from Christ and the church life. The same is true today. (Life-study of Colossians, 431)

We reject superstitious warnings of impending doom and unprincipled attempts to frighten with tales of presumed temporal woe. At the same time, we must heed the sober New Testament warnings that produce a healthy fear in light of the coming judgment seat of Christ. Having been warned, we should also warn others. If we do not warn one another to live soberly before the Lord, we are not faithful to the Lord’s Word and do a disservice to Him and to those around us. Today, rather than succumb to a “gospel” of numbing words of self-contentment and self-affirmation, we should rise up to faithfully herald the New Testament warnings, not out of fearmongering but out of love. Like Paul, we must be faithful to make known the mystery of Christ, “whom we announce, admonishing every man and teaching every man in all wisdom, that we may present every man full-grown in Christ” (Col 1:28). Such admonishing, or warning, will motivate us and others to live an overcoming Christian life in opposition to the current of today’s world. If we heed these warnings, they will become in us an incentive to cultivate a living and service that please the Lord and to cooperate with Him for the building up of the church in this age, for the bringing in of the Kingdom with its reward in the next age, and for the fulfillment of God’s purpose in eternity.

Share:

Assailing the Ground of Oneness (5): God’s Choice versus Doing What Is Right in Our Own Eyes

The story of Cain and Abel, the first two sons of Adam and Eve, establishes an important principle that the worship of God should not be according to man’s thought but according to God’s revelation (Gen. 4:3-8). Abel offered a lamb according to God’s revelation, but Cain offered the fruit of the work of his own hands. Since that time men have time and again supplanted God’s ordained way of worship with their own thoughts and intentions. In Deuteronomy 12 God extended this principle to the place in which He desired to receive worship. He charged Israel to bring their offerings to Jerusalem and not to follow the nations in establishing worship centers according to their own convenience and preference. Today the New Testament pattern stands in stark contrast to the common practice of going to the “church of your choice.” However, according to the Bible, God has exercised His own choice in establishing the place where He has put His name. And it is uniquely the place of God’s choice that manifests and preserves the oneness of the Body of Christ.

Doing What Is Right in One’s Own Eyes Versus Returning to the Unique Place of God’s Choice

Both the Old and New Testaments bear witness that God has placed His name in the unique place of His choice. In Deuteronomy 12 Jehovah established a statute regarding the worship of the children of Israel when they entered the promised land: “But to the place which Jehovah your God will choose out of all your tribes to put His name, to His habitation, shall you seek, and there shall you go” (v. 5). As Witness Lee said, “God’s name denotes His person. For His name to be in a particular place means that His person dwells in that place. This indicates that the unique place of God’s choice was God’s dwelling place, God’s habitation” (The Genuine Ground of Oneness, 42). Jehovah followed this statute with a warning, “Be careful that you do not offer up your burnt offerings in every place that you see; but in the place which Jehovah will choose in one of your tribes, there you shall offer up your burnt offerings, and there you shall do all that I am commanding you” (v. 13-14). Repeatedly, in Deuteronomy 12—16 God speaks of the unique place of His choice, indicating its importance.

Before designating a unique place where He would put His name, God commanded the children of Israel to remove all the places of worship set up by the Canaanites. Jehovah declared, “You shall completely destroy all the places where the nations whom you will dispossess have served their gods, on the high mountains and on the hills and under every flourishing tree” (12:2). This verse speaks of the religious practice of establishing centers of worship according to the worshipper’s own concept, preference, and choice, a matter of each man doing what was “right in his own eyes” (v. 8). Establishing centers of worship according to one’s own preference and choice violates God’s clear and direct command and damages God’s testimony on the earth. Jehovah’s condemnation of man exercising his own choice in the worship of God is clear: “You shall not do so to Jehovah your God” (v. 4).

Against this backdrop Jehovah revealed His own choice in establishing the unique place, Jerusalem, where He would cause His name to dwell (v. 5). It was to Jerusalem that all the tribes were required to bring their offerings to worship God. No other worship center was allowed by God, whether for the sake of convenience or preference. God’s choice to establish Jerusalem as the unique place to put His name was the preserving factor of the children of Israel’s oneness; however, Jeroboam’s choice to establish worship center’s at Dan and Bethel resulted in the division of the children of Israel and ultimately led to their captivity (1 Kings 12:26-33).

According to the New Testament, the place where God has put His name has two aspects—our human spirit (John 4:20-21, 23; Eph. 2:22) and the church (1 Tim. 3:15). We may be more familiar with the former, but the latter is equally critical. In the church age God has not left the place of the worship of God up to man’s preference but still exercises His own choice in where to place His name. In 1 Corinthians the apostle Paul writes, “To the church of God which is in Corinth…” (1:2a). This wonderful verse indicates that the church not only belongs to God but also has God as its source and content. It is in the church of God that He has chosen to put His name, that is, to put His person. While the church, being of God, is universal according to its nature, it is also practical, having a local expression—“the church of God which is in Corinth.” According to the pattern of the New Testament, the preservation of the oneness of God’s people today is practiced on the ground of locality (Acts 14:23; Titus 1:5; Rev. 1:11). Just as with Jerusalem, the church in a locality standing on the ground of oneness expresses the oneness of the Body of Christ in a particular place. Thus, to be in the spirit and standing on the proper ground preserves us in the oneness of the Body of Christ as a whole.

Our Lust in Exercising Our Choice Needing to Be Subdued

God has established the unique place for His worship, and any other place chosen by man is condemned by God. However, within man there is a lust, a desire to pursue one’s own gratification in exercising self-choice. To take God’s choice and to set aside our choice and preference is to fear God and to recognize His supreme right to establish the manner in which He is to be worshipped (Deut. 14:23). To exercise our choice and put aside God’s choice is to give ground to our lust. Concerning this Witness Lee said, “The choice of the place of worship is altogether the Lord’s; it is not a matter of our preference. If we act according to our preference, we indulge our lust, for we satisfy our own desire regarding the place of worship” (The Genuine Ground of Oneness, 45-46). To exercise one’s own choice contrary to God’s expressed choice is rebellion and indulges our lust.

Accepting the limitation of the Lord’s choice terminates our self-choice. If we have a clear view of the ground of the church, we cannot go to a different place when offenses or disagreements arise between us and our fellow believers. When such problems arise, we are forced to deal with the differences to be one with our brothers and sisters in the Lord (Matt. 18:15-17; Phil. 4:2; 2:2-3; Col. 3:13). According to the spiritual principle in Psalm 133, any problem that existed between Israelites had to be resolved as they went up to the feasts in Jerusalem in order to gather together in oneness and enjoy the blessing of life with God’s people corporately (v. 3). To deal with such problems, we must let the peace of Christ arbitrate in the church life (Col. 3:15).

Furthermore, by accepting God’s choice, we will enjoy Christ as our top portion and be kept from abusing God’s grace. God required that the offerings be made in the place of His choice (Deut. 12:17, 18). The children of Israel were free to enjoy the fruit of the harvest and of their livestock at any place and at any time during the year. However, the top portion of the livestock and the harvest was to be saved and enjoyed only when the children of Israel gathered together at the place of God’s choice, Jerusalem. Today, Christ is the reality of all the offerings that constitute the worship of God. If we forsake our gathering together with fellow believers on the ground of oneness, we will miss the top portion of the enjoyment of Christ and abuse the grace given to us by God. We have no right to enjoy the top portion of the grace of God according to our preference and choice. If today we do not come to the meetings of the church, we have no right, no access, to the top portion of the enjoyment of Christ as God’s grace to us. Concerning this Witness Lee said,

There is a divine regulation that prohibits us from abusing God’s grace. According to this regulation, we must go to the house of God, the church, to enjoy the top portion of Christ. We are required to go to the place God has chosen; we are not allowed to act according to our own choice or preference. By accepting God’s choice, we are subdued and are kept from abusing His grace. (The Genuine Ground of Oneness, 50)

The act of establishing alternate centers for the worship of God is an abuse of the grace of God.

Attempting to Create “Unity” through Activity

Recognizing that the Bible condemns division among believers, some Christians attempt to create “unity” through activities, movements, and campaigns, including those that address particular issues. However, once the activities and meetings are concluded, all return to their respective denominations and sects. Such efforts to create Christian unity imply a recognition that Christians are divided. The methods employed are man-made attempts to “shake hands” over the denominational fences (see Further Talks on the Church Life, 95-102) and ultimately betray an unwillingness to destroy the divisions, the “high places,” themselves. Attempting “unity” through activity is merely a means of numbing the Christian conscience’s recognition that division in the Body of Christ is wrong. These attempts at creating unity fail to address the underlying reason for division in the Body of Christ—refusing to accept God’s unique choice and instead maintaining the “high places” of man’s preference and choice. Ultimately, such efforts cannot succeed at realizing the oneness of the Body of Christ in practicality because the ground of the denominations and sects stand in opposition to God’s choice, the genuine ground of oneness.

Despite ecumenical movements, inter-denominational campaigns, and unity activities, only the ground of oneness preserves the oneness among believers. Once the campaigns and activities are over, the participants return to their respective denominations and resume their sectarian fellowship. Addressing this failure in Christianity, Brother Lee said, “Apart from the local ground, any kind of ‘oneness’ that is based on the same opinion is actually a division. When we are united with a group of people based on a certain opinion, we are automatically divided from other believers. Only on the local ground can there be oneness without division” (Lessons for New Believers, 220-221). The Scriptural corrective to the present divided situation among Christians is to forsake doing what is right in one’s own eyes and to return to the unique place of God’s choice, the genuine ground of oneness. In so doing we will be kept from abusing God’s grace and will be subdued in our lust for our preference and choice.

Share:

Assailing the Ground of Oneness (6): The Ground of the Church Being for the Building Up of the Body of Christ

Matthew 18:20 contains a wonderful promise: “For where two or three are gathered into My name, there am I in their midst.” However, some have misused this verse to discount the need for local churches established and built up on the proper ground. They claim that the gathering of two or three in the Lord’s name is the unique qualification to be a genuine church. This errant understanding has excused division, opened the door to the proliferation of independent “churches” and free groups, and frustrated the building up of the Body of Christ. In contrast to this misinterpretation, we need to see what Matthew 18 actually says and that the ground of the church is the basis for the building up of the Body of Christ according to the New Testament.

A basic problem among Christians is emphasizing only the universal aspect of the church while neglecting its local aspect. Seeing only that believers are fellow members of the Body of Christ, some argue that any gathering of believers in the Lord’s name is sufficiently qualified to constitute itself a “church.” However, 1 Corinthians 10:32 mentions the unique church of God, while 11:16 speaks of the many churches of God, which are the manifestations of the church of God locality by locality, indicating that apart from local churches the unique church of God could not have a practical expression on the earth. Witness Lee captured this thought when he stated, “Without local churches, the church only becomes a kind of term; it becomes something in the heavens, something in the future, something for us to look forward to, but not so real and practical today on this earth” (The Practical Expression of the Church, 25). In neglecting the New Testament revelation concerning the local aspect of the church, the practical basis to build up the church as the expression of the Body of Christ is forfeited.

A Deficient View of the Church

The claim that two or three gathering in the Lord’s name in Matthew 18 are a “church” is belied by the fact that the two or three mentioned by the Lord there were not the church themselves, but only part of the church. In verse 16 an offense that could not be resolved between two parties caused the offended party to bring with him “one or two more, that by the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may be established.” When the problem could not be resolved by the two or three, the Lord directed them to “tell it to the church” (v. 17). Thus, the two or three in Matthew 18 are not the church but must instead go to the church, despite their being gathered into the Lord’s name.

Matthew 18 outlines the steps to deal with an offense before taking it to the church. Misapplying the twos and threes in Matthew 18 to accommodate one’s preference in forming a “church” has opened the door to the proliferation of division and confusion among believers. The New Testament revelation concerning the church’s ground of locality is a God-ordained restriction and limitation to the believers. If we are willing to submit to this restriction, we will not be able to “escape” by joining another group of Christians when we encounter problems with others. As Brother Lee explained:

If I am in a certain city, regardless of how I feel about those who are meeting there as the unique local church and regardless of how they treat me, I have no choice. I have to learn the lesson of the cross. I must learn the lesson of brokenness and self-denial. I have no ground, no right, and no standing to start another church in that locality as long as a unique one is there already. I must be restricted and limited. This is the real lesson. (The Practical Expression of the Church, 29)

We should gladly accept the ground of locality as a limitation and restriction because it keeps us in the oneness of the Body of Christ. It requires us to reject our natural thoughts, opinions, preferences, and offenses to preserve this oneness. Thus, this limitation aids our knowing of the cross and, through the cross, the resurrection life of Christ.

The Ground of the Church Being the Practical Provision to Know the Cross to Keep the Oneness

Underlying all the divisions among the members of the Body of Christ is the self with its opinions and preferences. The self always seeks to avoid the cross. In Matthew 16 the Lord responded to Peter’s word forbidding Him from going to the cross, by showing him his own need to deny the self and take up his cross (vv. 21-24). To deny the self with its natural thoughts, concepts, opinions, preferences, and choices requires us to take up the cross. Unwillingness to deny the self and bear the cross when differences arise prevents believers from being reconciled to God and to one another (2 Cor. 5:20; Matt. 5:24) and results in a self-centered and individualistic Christian pursuit.

The local church in Corinth suffered from such a self-centered “spirituality” by caring for gifts over the building of the Body, appreciating the knowledge that puffs up over the love that builds up, and preferring one servant of the Lord over another (1 Cor. 14:4; 8:1; 1:12). As a result, they lacked the genuine growth in life. Hence, Paul called them infants, fleshly, fleshy, and divisive (3:1, 3; 1:10; 11:18-19; 12:25). Paul’s prescription for the problems in this local church was not to countenance divisiveness but to stress the need for an experiential knowledge of the crucified Christ, the mingled spirit, being blended together, loving one another, and speaking Christ to one another for the building up of the church locally and the Body universally (1:18; 2:2; 6:17; 12:24; 13:2-14:1; 16:14; 14:3, 5). Such a prescription preserves the testimony of the oneness of the church and allows for the building up of the members as one Body. As we deny the self by applying the cross through the power of the indwelling Spirit, we take Christ as our life in resurrection to practically build up the Body of Christ in oneness (Eph. 4:1-6; Rom. 8:13; 1 Cor. 15:45; 2 Tim. 4:22; Gal. 5:16-25).

The Building Up of the Body of Christ Carried Out in Local Churches through the Functioning of the Members

In speaking of the building up of the Body of Christ, Paul addresses both the universal and local aspects of the church in Ephesians 2. In verse 21 he speaks of “all the building being fitted together” and “growing into a holy temple in the Lord.” In saying “all the building,” Paul referred to the building of the church in its universal aspect. He then addressed the believers in the local church in Ephesus, declaring, “You also are being built together into a dwelling place of God in spirit” (v. 22, emphasis added). The dwelling place in verse 22 corresponds to the temple in verse 21, indicating that the building of the temple, the universal aspect of the church, takes place among the local churches under the vision of the universal oneness of the Body of Christ.

The building up of the Body of Christ is carried out through the harmonious functioning of its members. According to Ephesians 4:16, the Body is not built up by Christ as the Head directly; rather, the Body is built up directly by the functioning of all the members. Our functioning as members for the Body’s building up requires that we put off the individualistic old man and put on the corporate new man (Eph. 4:22, 24; Col. 3:9-10a). Like a garment, the former manner of life of the old man must be put off and the new man must be put on through the renewing of the mind (v. 10b; Eph. 4:23). “If we have never learned how to put off,” spoke Witness Lee, “we may be very active in the church, yet we are not functioning” (The Practical Expression of the Church, 126). By putting off the old man with its individualism and self-centeredness, the functioning that is out from the Head is released for the “growth of the Body unto the building up of itself in love” (Eph. 4:15, 16).

We should have the same love toward every member of the Body. The apostle charged the members of the local church in Philippi to “think the same thing, having the same love” (Phil. 2:2). Those who use Matthew 18 as an excuse to form a division fail to exercise the same love toward all the believers and instead exercise a preferential love. In Ephesians 4 Paul reminded the believers in the local church in Ephesus that they needed to bear “one another in love” and that their function was for the Body, being “unto the building up of [the Body] in love” (vv. 2-3, 16). Today believers also need to have the same love for all their fellow members in the locality where the Lord has placed them and function to minister Christ for the growth and building up of the Body.

When problems arise among believers, the response is all too often the beginning of another fellowship based on a misinterpretation of the “twos and threes” in Matthew 18. According to the New Testament, it is in the context of a local church that problems among believers are resolved. In returning to the ground of the church and applying the cross by the Spirit, the believers are supplied to function as members to build up the Body in love. In this way the functioning of the members locally builds up the Body of Christ universally.

Share:

Being Safeguarded by the Discernment in the Body

Those who bear responsibility in the ministry, the work, and the churches in the Lord’s recovery have a biblically mandated responsibility to protect the flock (Acts 20:28-31; 1 Pet. 5:2; Titus 1:9). In performing that duty they may advise the saints not to read writings in print or on the Internet that attack the local churches and the ministry of Watchman Nee and Witness Lee. A few have miscast this fellowship as an attempt to hide the “truth” regarding the history of the recovery or to deprive others of the freedom to read whatever they like. However, this advice is not an exercise of control but the issue of a loving concern based on a discerning of the nature of these writings and their effect on those who read them. Such advice is based on important biblical principles to which we should give heed.

The Lord’s recovery is His move to recover the truth and practice that is fully and completely according to the New Testament. As such, it stands in opposition to unscriptural practices such as denominationalism and the clergy-laity system found in Christianity and which have greatly frustrated God’s economy. It also affirms vital scriptural truths and experiences that have been largely neglected or abandoned by the majority of today’s Bible teachers. This stand results in external criticism and attack. The recovery has also been attacked by those who sought to cause division from within the local churches. From time to time turmoils have taken place that were caused by a few brothers rising up to speak perverted things in order to draw some away after them (Acts 20:30).

The ultimate goal of the writings from these external and internal sources is to overthrow the Lord’s recovery. Consequently, these writings are full of criticism, dissension, questionings, rumors, accusations, innuendos, and the misrepresentation of facts and historical events. By design they sow seeds of doubt, suspicion, and even malice toward the ministry and the leadership in the recovery, causing the saints to question the revelation and enjoyment they have received through the ministry and the church life, even the things that first caused them to take the way of the recovery. Unlike the ministry, which nourishes its readers with the opening of the Bible and the appreciation and exaltation of Christ, these negative writings leave readers confused, unsettled, and deadened. In doing so, they betray their real source, which is the serpent, Satan (Eph. 4:14, footnote 5).

Satan’s work targets the mind, which, apart from the Spirit’s transforming work, is fallen, corrupted, and susceptible to the enemy’s attack (Gen. 6:5; Col. 1:21; Eph. 4:17; see 6:16-17 and footnotes 163 and 171). Whereas the Lord desires that our mind would be renewed and brought under the dominion of our regenerated spirit (4:23; Rom. 8:6), Satan wants the believers to disregard their spirit entirely and trust, rely, and wholly live according to the unrenewed mind (Eph. 4:17). This principle is illustrated from the very beginning of the Bible:

In Genesis 3:1b [Satan] asked the woman, “Did God really say, You shall not eat of any tree of the garden?” This was a question put into Eve’s mind, and this question stirred up her doubting mind. This is a strong point that we have to stress. Satan would always approach people by touching their doubting mind. Here Satan questioned something concerning God, and this questioning, no doubt, aroused the mind of Eve. Satan did this to keep Eve from using her spirit. When God comes to us, He always touches our spirit. When Satan comes to us, he always comes to our mind. Our spirit is the “room” that God comes to touch, and our mind is the “room” that Satan comes to touch. Satan will always come to touch the human mind. (Basic Lessons on Life, 35)

Satan’s aim is to cause the saints’ thoughts to be corrupted from the simplicity and the purity toward Christ (2 Cor. 11:1-3), and he will use any means at his disposal to cut the saints off from enjoying Christ as life. Countless saints can testify of how the ministry stirs up their spirit, causing them to love and pursue the Lord more and be refreshed and enlivened. The negative writings are a morass of fleshly opinions, baseless accusations, endless contentions of words, and questionings (1 Tim. 6:4; 2 Tim. 2:14). Reading these writings dulls our love for the Lord and deadens our spirit so that we lose the enjoyment of the Lord and become entrenched in doubts and evil suspicions toward those whom the Lord has given to minister to and perfect us (Eph. 4:11-12; 2 Tim. 3:14).

Because the negative writings conceal within them the poisonous and deadening element of Satan, the accuser of the brothers (Rev. 12:10), the saints are advised not to read them. It is not a matter of hiding what some falsely allege is the “real” history of the Lord’s recovery, but of protecting the saints from something that is certain to damage and deaden them, thus hampering or halting their spiritual progress before the Lord. Many of the writings parrot the reckless accusations or unsupportable rumors that have already been responded to in detail by those who, by the Lord’s sovereign arrangement and in the principle of the Body, have the function to examine, investigate, and properly respond to the claims made. These responses have been available in print publications and on the Internet for many years on such websites as contendingforthefaith.org, afaithfulword.org, and afaithfulwitness.org. Some of the claims are also addressed on this site in the History section.

Some may still be tempted to read the negative writings on the Internet despite the brothers’ loving warnings. Even a little exploration can stir up unhealthy curiosity. That curiosity is a snare from the enemy. The way to progress in the Lord is to always focus on the positive things related to the pursuit of the growth in life and the building up of the Body. Much of what circulates on the Internet is mere opinion and rumor that may feed your curiosity but will not help you grow in the Lord. Delving into accounts of turmoils, mistakes, and controversies requires great discernment. As the Bible illustrates, even if such things occur among God’s people, they should be for our instruction (1 Cor. 10:11). The ministry in the Lord’s recovery consistently presents both the facts and the lessons to be learned from our history. Saints who find themselves troubled by opinions and rumors can seek help from the published ministry and from those who have the maturity in life and knowledge of the facts necessary to render help. Idle curiosity, however, should always be denied (1 Tim. 6:20).

Some may argue that they need to be informed and draw their own conclusions about the matters involved. This also is a subtle ploy from the enemy. While such an individualistic view may be valued in modern culture, as members of the Body of Christ, we exist according to a very different principle. The New Testament clearly shows that, as members of the Body, we are organically joined, and that, as in a physical body, each member has its own function in the Lord (Rom. 12:4-5; 1 Cor. 12:27, 17-18). The Lord, as the Head of the Body, has given some mature members a particular portion to care for the other members for the growth and building up of the church as His Body (12:27-28; Eph. 4:11-12; Heb. 13:17). Among these, some have the measure and function from the Lord to discern and identify things that are detrimental to the Body (2 Cor. 10:13; 1 Cor. 12:10), not in self-confidence but in the Lord and in fellowship with one another (Phil. 3:3; 2 Cor. 3:5).

In the physical realm, once the tongue has tasted that a substance is rancid, there is no need for other members of the body to contact that same thing to form their own opinions. Rather, all the other members with their various functions benefit from the function of the tongue as the tasting organ and are thereby preserved and safeguarded. It is a great blessing and preservation for the saints to receive the ministry of the more mature members, to accept the discernment of the Body, and to reject the temptation to independently seek to discern the nature of negative writings. Behind this temptation is the implicit assumption that one has the spiritual discernment, wisdom, capacity, knowledge of the facts, and freedom in the spirit to accurately judge the matters involved. To assume self-sufficiency is to disregard the Lord’s placing of the members in His Body with their respective functions, violate the Body’s organic principle, lose the Body’s covering, and expose oneself to Satan’s attack. May the saints in the recovery look to the Lord that He would cause us all to grow in our discernment and consciousness of the Body for the protection, growth, and perfecting of each member unto the building up of the Body of Christ.

Share:

A Harmonious Coordination between Generations to Advance God’s Move

Because the Lord is continually advancing to carry out His economy, His people must advance with Him. Individuals are finite in terms of their lifespan and what experiences they can acquire of the Lord during their life. The lessons learned through precious experiences of Christ, the cross, and the Body of Christ accumulated in one’s lifetime must be passed on to others. As a father passes his experiences and lessons learned on to his children in the hope that they will surpass him, the older generation in the church life can impart what they have learned and experienced into the younger generation so that they can advance beyond the older generation. This is a definite principle shown in the Bible (Psa. 78:1-7; Deut. 4:9-10; 2 Tim. 2:1-2).

If the younger ones do not receive from the older ones, the experiences gained and lessons learned will need to be repeated, and the advance of God’s move in His economy in and through His people will be seriously frustrated. Realizing this, Satan, the enemy of God and of God’s people, sows distrust and enmity between the older ones and the younger ones with the goal of causing a generational rift in the church. We should discern and reject this insidious tactic, realizing that the advance of God’s people requires a beautiful and harmonious coordination between the older saints and the younger saints.

The Old Testament provides an excellent example of this. Inheriting the promised land of Canaan required God’s people to be formed into an army. It was not a simple thing for the children of Israel to become a fighting force capable of defeating the Canaanites, who were stronger and more numerous (Deut. 7:1). From the time they left Egypt in Exodus 12 to their entry into Canaan in Joshua 1, the Bible records numerous experiences, positive and negative, that the children of Israel had to pass through before they were finally ready to enter the land and possess it. By that time more than 40 years had passed, and almost the entire older generation had passed away as a result of their failures in murmuring against Jehovah (Num. 14:28-31). However, a second, younger generation had been prepared:

With the exception of Joshua and Caleb, those who were qualified and ready to take possession of the land were younger ones. They were of the second generation. The older ones, those of the first generation, had passed through many things and had learned many lessons. However, they were not qualified to enter into the land. The lessons learned by the first generation surely became part of the heritage passed on to the second generation. Their children certainly inherited from their parents all the lessons they learned during the forty years in the wilderness. By their birth the younger ones were put into a position to inherit the tradition of their family and all that their parents had experienced.

The second generation did not pass through as much as the first generation did, but they received the benefit of what the first generation experienced. I believe that the older generation told the younger generation about all they experienced, enjoyed, and suffered. This speaking was part of the raising up, or the building up, of the second generation. What the first generation experienced was not experienced in vain, for it was passed on to the second generation. What the older ones experienced actually was not effective for them, but it was very effective in building up the younger ones. Therefore, God was able to prepare from the second generation more than six hundred thousand men with a rich inheritance and strong background who were qualified to be formed into an army to fight with Him and for Him. (Life-Study of Numbers, 368-369)

Because the second generation learned the lessons from the trials and failures of their parents, they did not need to repeat those painful experiences. They also benefited from the leadership of Joshua and Caleb, the remnant of the older generation, who had the experience and wisdom necessary to lead them into battle (Deut. 34:9; Josh. 14:6-11). This harmonious coordination between the older and younger generations afforded God the way to make a great advance in His economy by enabling His people to inherit the good land.

To be formed into an army, the children of Israel needed to be numbered “by their families, by their father’s households” (Num. 2:1 with footnote). From this, Witness Lee extrapolates a critical principle: “Who we are and what we will be depend on our family. It matters a great deal through whom we were saved and received the Lord Jesus, for the Christian life with its activities depends on the source of life and the channel of life” (Life-Study of Numbers, 276). This principle is clearly demonstrated in the New Testament. For example, Paul and John both referred to the saints under their care as their children (Gal. 4:19; 1 Cor. 4:14-15; 1 Thes. 2:11; 1 John 2:1; 3 John 4). Paul’s relationship with Onesimus and Timothy was that of a father and his children (Philem. 10; 1 Tim. 1:2). As Paul’s spiritual child, Timothy received much perfecting and spiritual nourishment from Paul and was very useful in carrying out the work of God’s New Testament economy by closely following the apostle’s teaching and pattern (2 Tim. 3:10-11).

Today the Lord desires to raise up an army to fight as one man to fully enter into and possess Christ, the reality of the good land, so that the building up of the Body of Christ may be consummated. This requires that we overcome the present tide of the world, which is characterized by contentious divisions instigated by Satan according to race, ethnicity, economic and social status, education, politics, gender, and even age. It is common for older generations to look down upon and despise younger generations and for younger generations to disregard and mock older generations. As saints in the Lord’s recovery, we must reject such attitudes if we are to be formed into an army, which requires a harmonious coordination among all ages.

In the decades since the recovery came to the United States, the saints in the recovery have experienced many breakthroughs but have also suffered setbacks, endured painful turmoils, and weathered intense outside opposition. Those who passed through these things gained precious lessons and valuable experiences of the Lord, often at great cost. These are now in the Body as part of the spiritual heritage of the younger generation for their learning, protection, encouragement, admonition, and training. Just as the more experienced saints must pass on what they have learned, the younger saints must be willing to receive from them, acknowledging those who, as channels of life, are their spiritual fathers and mothers (1 Cor. 4:15; 2 Tim. 3:14; Heb. 13:7). This equips them to be numbered and formed into an army to fight for God’s interest on the earth.

The enemy does not want this transmission to occur, and he ever seeks to damage the coordination and even sever the relationship between the younger generation and the older generation by sowing seeds of suspicion and animosity. He is the source of the false accusation which contends that the older generation is hiding a “real history” of purported evils. In the 1980s Brother Lee addressed similar accusations by saying, “All problems can and should be solved through proper and adequate fellowship by praying together sincerely and thoroughly. Any question and any problem can be solved by fellowship” (The Intrinsic View of the Body of Christ, 98). Genuine concerns that may arise in those who hear such accusations can be addressed in proper fellowship. Those who are mature among us are ready and willing to pour out the riches of Christ they have gained through their experiences, including the failures and lessons they have learned from many years in the church life, into the younger saints for their growth and perfecting. If the younger saints receive help from the older saints, recognize the older saints’ portion in the Lord, and realize that from among the older saints the Lord has prepared “Joshuas” and “Calebs” to take the lead as seasoned warriors, they will be able to learn warfare to advance the recovery, fighting back the enemy to gain deeper, higher, and richer experiences of Christ for the building up of the Body.

Paul’s Epistles show that he was the target of evil accusations (2 Cor. 6:8; 2 Cor. 12:15-17). If Timothy had allowed those accusations to damage his relationship with Paul, thereby forfeiting the blessings he might otherwise have received from his spiritual father, not only he but the entire Body of Christ would have suffered a great loss (1 Cor. 4:17; 2 Tim. 2:2). Similarly, what a great tragedy it would be for the spiritual supply to the younger saints to be cut off. The experiences already in the Body are for the young saints’ supply and perfecting so that, rather than repeating history, they can afford the Lord a way to advance among His people. May the Lord preserve a beautiful and harmonious coordination between the older and the younger saints so that the spiritual wealth of the older generation might be fully imparted into the younger generation for the formation of an army to defeat the enemy and gain Christ to the uttermost.

Share: